Garmin | Cirrus Perspective SR20 | Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR20 Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T

Garmin Cirrus Perspective SR20 Pilot’s Guide for the Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
™
Cirrus Perspective by Garmin
®
www.garmin.com
Garmin AT, Inc.
2345 Turner Road SE
Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
p:503.391.3411
f:503.364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Bulls Copse Road
Houndsdown Business Park
Southampton, SO40 9RB, U.K.
p:44/0870.8501241
f:44/0870.8501251
Garmin Corporation
No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road
Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
p:886/02.2642.9199
f:886/02.2642.9099
Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Garmin International, Inc.
1200 East 151st Street
Olathe, KS 66062, U.S.A.
p:913.397.8200
f:913.397.8282
190-00820-09
Revision B
Cirrus SR20/SR22/SR22T
Integrated Avionics System
Pilot’s Guide
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL & CNS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Copyright © 2008-2014 Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. All rights reserved.
This manual reflects the operation of System Software 0764.20 or later for the Cirrus Perspective by Garmin Integrated Avionics System.
Some differences in operation may be observed when comparing the information in this manual to earlier or later software versions.
Always refer to the FAA approved Airplane Flight Manual for a description of systems, limitations and procedures. For a complete list of
Garmin manuals with corresponding part numbers and system software versions, refer to www.garmin.com.
Garmin International, Inc., 1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062, U.S.A.
Tel: 913/397.8200Fax: 913/397.8282
Garmin AT, Inc., 2345 Turner Road SE, Salem, OR 97302, U.S.A.
Tel: 503/391.3411Fax: 503/364.2138
Garmin (Europe) Ltd., Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park, Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Tel: +44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Fax: +44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Garmin Corporation, No. 68, Jangshu 2nd Road, Shijr, Taipei County, Taiwan
Tel: 886/02.2642.9199Fax: 886/02.2642.9099
For after-hours emergency, aircraft on ground (AOG) technical support for Garmin panel mount and integrated avionics systems, please
contact Garmin’s AOG Hotline at 913.397.0836.
Website Address: www.garmin.com
Except as expressly provided herein, no part of this manual may be reproduced, copied, transmitted, disseminated, downloaded or
stored in any storage medium, for any purpose without the express written permission of Garmin. Garmin hereby grants permission
to download a single copy of this manual and of any revision to this manual onto a hard drive or other electronic storage medium to
be viewed for personal use, provided that such electronic or printed copy of this manual or revision must contain the complete text of
this copyright notice and provided further that any unauthorized commercial distribution of this manual or any revision hereto is strictly
prohibited.
Garmin® is a registered trademark of Garmin Ltd. or its subsidiaries. FliteCharts®, SafeTaxi®, and Garmin ESP™ are trademarks of Garmin
Ltd. or its subsidiaries. These trademarks may not be used without the express permission of Garmin.
Perspective™ is a trademark of Cirrus Design Corporation; Bendix/King® and Honeywell® are registered trademarks of Honeywell
International, Inc.; NavData® is a registered trademark of Jeppesen, Inc.; Sirius, XM, and all related marks and logos are trademarks of
Sirius XM Radio, Inc. and its subsidiaries; Skywatch® and Stormscope® are registered trademarks of L-3 Communications; Wi-Fi® is a
registered trademark of the Wi-Fi Alliance.
AOPA Membership Publications, Inc. and its related organizations (hereinafter collectively “AOPA”) expressly disclaim all warranties,
with respect to the AOPA information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties
of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AOPA does not warrant or make any
representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Under no circumstances including negligence, shall AOPA be liable for
any incidental, special or consequential damages that result from the use or inability to use the software or related documentation, even
if AOPA or an AOPA authorized representative has been advised of the possibility of such damages. User agrees not to sue AOPA and, to
the maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AOPA from any causes of action, claims or losses related to any actual
or alleged inaccuracies in the information. Some jurisdictions do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for
incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations or exclusions may not apply to you.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AC-U-KWIK and its related organizations (hereafter collectively “AC-U-KWIK Organizations”) expressly disclaim all warranties with
respect to the AC-U-KWIK information included in this data, express or implied, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. The information is provided “as is” and AC-U-KWIK Organizations do not warrant or
make any representations regarding its accuracy, reliability, or otherwise. Licensee agrees not to sue AC-U-KWIK Organizations and, to the
maximum extent allowed by law, to release and hold harmless AC-U-KWIK Organizations from any cause of action, claims or losses related
to any actual or alleged inaccuracies in the information arising out of Garmin’s use of the information in the datasets. Some jurisdictions
do not allow the limitation or exclusion of implied warranties or liability for incidental or consequential damages so the above limitations
or exclusions may not apply to licensee.
January 2014
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Printed in the U.S.A.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
Blank Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
LIMITED WARRANTY
LIMITED WARRANTY
Within the warranty period, Garmin will, at its sole discretion, repair or replace any components that fail in normal use. Such repairs or
replacement will be made at no charge to the customer for parts and/or labor incidental to the direct repair of said product. Garmin may,
at its discretion with prior approval, reimburse an authorized Garmin Service Center for associated labor costs incurred for removal and
replacement of the panel mount product installed in an aircraft. The customer shall be responsible for any transportation or other cost. This
warranty does not apply to: (i) cosmetic damage, such as scratches, nicks and dents; (ii) consumable parts, such as batteries, unless product
damage has occurred due to a defect in materials or workmanship; (iii) damage caused by accident, abuse, misuse, water, flood, fire, or
other acts of nature or external causes; (iv) damage caused by service performed by anyone who is not an authorized service provider
of Garmin; or (v) damage to a product that has been modified or altered without the written permission of Garmin. In addition, Garmin
reserves the right to refuse warranty claims against products or services that are obtained and/or used in contravention of the laws of any
country.
THE WARRANTIES AND REMEDIES CONTAINED HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, WHETHER EXPRESS,
IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING ANY LIABILITY ARISING UNDER ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A
PARTICULAR PURPOSE, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE. THIS WARRANTY GIVES YOU SPECIFIC LEGAL RIGHTS, WHICH MAY VARY FROM
STATE TO STATE.
IN NO EVENT SHALL GARMIN BE LIABLE FOR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, WHETHER
RESULTING FROM THE USE, MISUSE, OR INABILITY TO USE THIS PRODUCT OR FROM DEFECTS IN THE PRODUCT. Some states do not
allow the exclusion of incidental or consequential damages, so the above limitations may not apply in every case.
Garmin retains the exclusive right to repair or replace (with a new or newly-overhauled replacement product) the product or offer a full
refund of the purchase price at its sole discretion. SUCH REMEDY SHALL BE YOUR SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDY FOR ANY BREACH OF
WARRANTY.
To obtain warranty service, contact your local Garmin Authorized Service Center. For assistance in locating the nearest Service Center, call
Garmin Customer Service at one of the numbers listed below.
Products sold through online auctions are not eligible for warranty coverage or rebates or other special offers from Garmin. Online auction
confirmations are not accepted for warranty verification. To obtain warranty service, an original or copy of the sales receipt from the original
retailer is required. Garmin will not replace missing components from any package purchased through an online auction.
Garmin International Inc.
1200 East 151st Street, Olathe, Kansas 66062
Telephone:
(913)397-8200
Telephone Toll Free:
(888)606-5482
Facsimile:
(913)397-8282
Facsimile Toll Free:
(800)801-4670
E-mail: orders@garmin.com
avionics@garmin.com
warranty@garmin.com
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Garmin (Europe) Ltd.
Liberty House, Hounsdown Business Park
Southampton, Hampshire SO40 9LR U.K.
Telephone:
+44 (0) 23 8052 4000
Facsimile:
+44 (0) 23 8052 4004
Aviation Support +44 (0) 87 0850 1243
E-mail: avionics.europe@garmin.com
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
I
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: Navigation and terrain separation must NOT be predicated upon the use of the terrain avoidance
feature. The terrain avoidance feature is NOT intended to be used as a primary reference for terrain avoidance
and does not relieve the pilot from the responsibility of being aware of surroundings during flight. The
terrain avoidance feature is only to be used as an aid for terrain avoidance. Terrain data is obtained from
third party sources. Garmin is not able to independently verify the accuracy of the terrain data.
WARNING: The displayed minimum safe altitudes (MSAs) are only advisory in nature and should not be
relied upon as the sole source of obstacle and terrain avoidance information. Always refer to current
aeronautical charts for appropriate minimum clearance altitudes.
WARNING: The altitude calculated by the system's GPS receivers is geometric height above Mean Sea Level
and could vary significantly from the altitude displayed by pressure altimeters, such as the GDC 74 Air Data
Computer, or other altimeters in aircraft. GPS altitude should never be used for vertical navigation. Always
use pressure altitude displayed by the PFD or other pressure altimeters in aircraft.
WARNING: Do not use outdated database information. Databases used in the system must be updated
regularly in order to ensure that the information remains current. Pilots using any outdated database do so
entirely at their own risk.
WARNING: Do not use basemap (land and water data) information for primary navigation. Basemap data
is intended only to supplement other approved navigation data sources and should be considered as an aid
to enhance situational awareness.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for hazardous
weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate or
incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
II
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
WARNING: For safety reasons, system operational procedures must be learned on the ground.
WARNING: The Garmin system, as installed in this aircraft, has a very high degree of functional integrity.
However, the pilot must recognize that providing monitoring and/or self-test capability for all conceivable
system failures is not practical.
WARNING: The United States government operates the Global Positioning System and is solely responsible
for its accuracy and maintenance. The GPS system is subject to changes which could affect the accuracy
and performance of all GPS equipment. Portions of the Garmin system use GPS as a precision electronic
NAVigation AID (NAVAID). Therefore, as with all NAVAIDs, information presented by the system can be
misused or misinterpreted and, therefore, become unsafe.
WARNING: To reduce the risk of unsafe operation, carefully review and understand all aspects of the system,
Pilot’s Guide documentation and the Pilot's Operating Handbook (POH). Thoroughly practice basic operation
prior to actual use. During flight operations, carefully compare indications from the system to all available
navigation sources, including the information from other NAVAIDs, visual sightings, charts, etc. For safety
purposes, always resolve any discrepancies before continuing navigation.
WARNING: Lamp(s) inside this product may contain mercury (HG) and must be recycled or disposed of
according to local, state, or federal laws. For more information, refer to our website at www.garmin.com/
aboutGarmin/environment/disposal.jsp.
WARNING: Because of variation in the earth’s magnetic field, operating the system within the following
areas could result in loss of reliable attitude and heading indications. North of 72° North latitude at all
longitudes; South of 70° South latitude at all longitudes; North of 65° North latitude between longitude
75° W and 120° W. (Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 70° W and 128° W.
(Northern Canada); North of 70° North latitude between longitude 85° E and 114° E. (Northern Russia);
South of 55° South latitude between longitude 120° E and 165° E. (Region south of Australia and New
Zealand)
WARNING: Do not use GPS to navigate to any active waypoint identified as a ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ by a
system message. ‘NON WGS84 WPT’ waypoints are derived from an unknown map reference datum that
may be incompatible with the map reference datum used by GPS (known as WGS84) and may be positioned
in error as displayed.
CAUTION: The PFD and MFD displays use a lens coated with a special anti-reflective coating that is very
sensitive to skin oils, waxes, and abrasive cleaners. CLEANERS CONTAINING AMMONIA WILL HARM THE
ANTI-REFLECTIVE COATING. It is very important to clean the lens using a clean, lint-free cloth and an
eyeglass lens cleaner that is specified as safe for anti-reflective coatings.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
III
WARNINGS, CAUTIONS, AND NOTES
CAUTION: The system does not contain any user-serviceable parts. Repairs should only be made by an
authorized Garmin service center. Unauthorized repairs or modifications could void both the warranty and
the pilot’s authority to operate this device under FAA/FCC regulations.
NOTE: When using the lightning detection system, there are several atmospheric phenomena in addition to
nearby thunderstorms that can cause isolated discharge points in the strike display mode. However, clusters
of two or more discharge points in the strike display mode do indicate thunderstorm activity if these points
reappear after the screen has been cleared.
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
NOTE: All visual depictions contained within this document, including screen images of the panel and displays,
are subject to change and may not reflect the most current system and aviation databases. Depictions of
equipment may differ slightly from the actual equipment.
NOTE: This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two
conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any
interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
NOTE: Interference from GPS repeaters operating inside nearby hangars can cause an intermittent loss of
attitude and heading displays while the aircraft is on the ground. Moving the aircraft more than 100 yards
away from the source of the interference should alleviate the condition.
NOTE: Use of polarized eyewear may cause the flight displays to appear dim or blank.
NOTE: This product, its packaging, and its components contain chemicals known to the State of California
to cause cancer, birth defects, or reproductive harm. This notice is being provided in accordance with
California’s Proposition 65. If you have any questions or would like additional information, please refer to
our web site at www.garmin.com/prop65.
IV
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
REVISION INFORMATION
Record of Releases
Part Number
190-00820-00
Revision
A
B
Date
04/11/08
05/02/08
190-00820-01
C
D
A
05/12/08
06/04/08
09/29/08
Page Range
ALL
408 through
421
v
184 and I-1
i – I-6
190-00820-02
A
11/17/08
i – I-6
190-00820-03
A
6/30/09
i – I-6
190-00820-04
A
2/28/10
i – I-6
190-00820-05
A
5/3/10
i – I-6
190-00820-06
A
11/15/10
i-I-6
190-00820-07
A
10/7/11
i-I-6
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Description
Initial release
Made clerical changes
Made clerical changes
Made update to optional equipment and made clerical changes
Added Enhanced Vision System
Added changes in page navigation
Added new procedures for creating user waypoints
Added importing and exporting flight plans
Updated Warning, Caution and Advisory Alerts
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
Added Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI)
Added the SR20
Added other GDU 9.12 parameters
Added AOPA Airport Directory
Added dual navigation database capability
Added database synchronization
Added other GDU 10.00 parameters
Added the SR22T
Updated Warning and Caution Alerts
Added other GDU 11.00 parameters
Added GTX 33 w/ES transponder option
Added GTS 800 traffic option
Added other GDU 11.01 parameters
Added Profile View
Updated Active Flight Plan modification procedures to include the
Quick Select Box and Insertion Point Indicator
Updated XM Weather product status display
Added Electronic Stability and Protection
Added Underspeed Protection
Added Selected Altitude Intercept Arc
Added Hypoxia Recognition System
Added other GDU 11.11 parameters
Added GMA 350 Audio Panel
Added Iridium Satellite Telephone
Added GFDS Worldwide Weather
Added WX LGND, LEGEND, and METAR Softkeys
Added other GDU 12.01 parameters
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
V
REVISION INFORMATION
VI
190-00820-08
A
12/16/2011
i-I-6
Added Pilot Profile Import/Export
Added XM mute capability to XM Info and XM Radio pages
Replace BRG field with ETE field on PFD
Added other GDU 12.10 parameters
190-00820-09
A
01/14/2013
i-I-6
190-00820-09
B
01/29/2013
i-I-6
Added GDL 59
Added integrated fuel gauges
Added fuel imbalance aircraft alerts
Added AC-U-KWIK airport directory
Added other GDU 12.11 parameters
Updated Advisory Alerts table
Made clerical changes
190-00820-10
A
01/24/2014
i-I-6
Added independent display of Flight Path Marker
Added Ground Speed display to PFD
Added user-defined holding patterns
Added support for LP approaches
Added stall CAS message
Added spin recognition CAS message
Added Connext position reporting feature
Removed CO RST Softkey
Added other GDU 14.01 parameters
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
1.6
1.7
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Line Replaceable Units (LRU).................................. 2
System Controls....................................................... 8
PFD/MFD Controls......................................................... 8
PFD/MFD Control Unit.................................................. 10
GMA 350 Audio Panel Controls..................................... 13
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls..................................... 15
Softkey Function.......................................................... 17
Secure Digital Cards.............................................. 26
System Power-up.................................................... 27
System Operation................................................... 28
Display Operation........................................................ 28
System Annunciations.................................................. 30
System Status.............................................................. 31
AHRS Operation.......................................................... 32
GPS Receiver Operation............................................... 33
Accessing System Functionality........................... 38
Menus........................................................................ 38
Page Groups............................................................... 39
System Settings........................................................... 43
Timers........................................................................ 52
GPS Position............................................................... 54
Display Backlighting.............................................. 55
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 Flight Instruments.................................................. 60
Airspeed Indicator....................................................... 60
Attitude Indicator........................................................ 62
Altimeter.................................................................... 63
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)........................................ 65
Vertical Deviation........................................................ 66
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)............................... 67
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)................................... 74
2.2 Supplemental Flight Data..................................... 81
Temperature Display.................................................... 81
Wind Data.................................................................. 83
Vertical Navigation (VNV) Indications............................ 84
2.3 PFD Annunciations and Alerting Functions......... 85
Marker Beacon Annunciations...................................... 85
Traffic Annunciation..................................................... 85
Terrain Annunciations.................................................. 86
Altitude Alerting.......................................................... 87
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Low Altitude Annunciation........................................... 87
Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting....... 88
2.4 Abnormal Operations............................................ 89
Abnormal GPS Conditions............................................ 89
Heading Failure Modes................................................ 90
Unusual Attitudes........................................................ 90
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
EIS Display............................................................... 94
Engine Page............................................................ 97
Fuel Calculations....................................................... 101
Ice Protection Systems............................................... 103
Leaning Assist Mode............................................ 106
EIS Display in Reversionary Mode...................... 107
System Display.......................................................... 108
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Overview............................................................... 111
MFD/PFD Controls and Frequency Display.................... 112
GMA 350 Audio Panel Controls................................... 114
GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls................................... 116
Control Unit.............................................................. 118
COM Operation..................................................... 120
COM Transceiver Selection and Activation.................... 120
COM Transceiver Manual Tuning................................. 121
Quick-tuning and Activating 121.500 MHz................... 122
Auto-tuning the COM Frequency................................. 123
Frequency Spacing..................................................... 127
Automatic Squelch..................................................... 128
Volume..................................................................... 128
NAV Operation...................................................... 129
NAV Radio Selection and Activation............................ 129
NAV Receiver Manual Tuning...................................... 130
Auto-tuning a NAV Frequency from the MFD................ 132
Auto-tuning NAV Frequencies on Approach Activation.. 135
Marker Beacon Receiver............................................. 135
DME Tuning.............................................................. 136
GTX 32/GTX 33 Transponder............................... 138
Transponder Controls................................................. 138
Transponder Mode Selection....................................... 139
Entering a Transponder Code...................................... 141
IDENT Function......................................................... 143
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
VII
TABLE OF CONTENTS
4.5 Additional Audio Panel Functions...................... 144
Power-Up.................................................................. 144
Mono/Stereo Headsets............................................... 144
Speaker.................................................................... 144
Passenger Address Mode (PA Mode)............................ 144
Clearance Recorder and Player.................................... 145
Intercom System (ICS) with the GMA 350.................... 145
Split COM Mode with the GMA 350............................ 150
3D Audio (GMA 350 Only).......................................... 151
Intercom with the GMA 347....................................... 153
Split COM with the GMA 347..................................... 154
Entertainment Inputs with the GMA 350..................... 155
Entertainment Inputs with the GMA 347..................... 156
4.6 Audio Panel Preflight Procedure........................ 157
GMA 350 Preflight..................................................... 157
GMA 347 Preflight..................................................... 158
4.7 Abnormal Operation............................................ 159
Audio Panel Fail-safe Operation.................................. 159
Stuck Microphone...................................................... 159
COM Tuning Failure.................................................... 159
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.1 Introduction ......................................................... 161
Navigation Status Box................................................ 162
5.2 Using Map Displays.............................................. 164
Map Orientation........................................................ 164
Map Range............................................................... 166
Map Panning............................................................. 169
Measuring Bearing and Distance................................. 173
Topography............................................................... 174
Map Symbols............................................................ 177
Airways.................................................................... 183
Track Vector.............................................................. 185
Wind Vector.............................................................. 186
Nav Range Ring........................................................ 187
Fuel Range Ring........................................................ 188
Field of View (SVS)..................................................... 189
Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.................................... 190
Destination Airport Information.................................. 191
5.3 Waypoints.............................................................. 192
Airports.................................................................... 193
Intersections............................................................. 200
NDBs........................................................................ 202
VIII
VORs........................................................................ 204
User Waypoints......................................................... 206
5.4 Airspaces............................................................... 212
5.5 Direct-to-Navigation ........................................... 216
5.6 Flight Planning...................................................... 221
Flight Plan Creation................................................... 222
Adding Waypoints to an Existing Flight Plan................. 227
Adding Airways to a Flight Plan.................................. 229
Adding Procedures to a Stored Flight Plan................... 232
Flight Plan Storage.................................................... 239
Flight Plan Editing..................................................... 241
Along Track Offsets.................................................... 244
Parallel Track............................................................. 246
Activating a Flight Plan Leg........................................ 249
Inverting a Flight Plan................................................ 250
Flight Plan Views....................................................... 251
Closest Point of FPL................................................... 253
User-Defined Holding Patterns.................................... 253
5.7 Vertical Navigation.............................................. 258
Altitude Constraints................................................... 260
5.8 Procedures............................................................ 264
Departures................................................................ 264
Arrivals .................................................................... 267
Approaches .............................................................. 269
5.9 Trip Planning......................................................... 278
Trip Planning............................................................. 278
5.10 RAIM Prediction................................................... 282
5.11 Navigating a Flight Plan...................................... 285
5.12 Abnormal Operation............................................ 313
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SiriusXM Weather................................................. 316
Activating Services..................................................... 316
Using SiriusXM Weather Products............................... 317
6.2 Garmin Connext Weather.................................... 351
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 351
Registering the system for Garmin Connext Weather..... 352
Connext Weather Data Requests................................. 361
Garmin Connext Weather Products.............................. 365
Abnormal Operations................................................. 378
6.3 Lightning Detection System................................ 380
Setting Up Lightning Detection on the Navigation Map.380
Selecting the Stormscope Page................................... 384
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6.4 Terrain Proximity.................................................. 385
Displaying Terrain Proximity Data................................ 385
Terrain Proximity Page................................................ 388
6.5 Terrain-SVS............................................................ 390
Displaying Terrain-SVS Data........................................ 391
Terrain-SVS Page....................................................... 393
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 395
System Status............................................................ 398
6.6 TAWS-B.................................................................. 399
Displaying TAWS-B Data............................................. 400
TAWS-B Page............................................................ 403
TAWS-B Alerts........................................................... 405
System Status............................................................ 411
6.7 Profile View Terrain.............................................. 413
Profile View Display................................................... 414
6.8 Garmin GTS 800 Traffic........................................ 417
Theory of operation................................................... 417
TAS Alerts................................................................. 421
System Test............................................................... 422
Operation................................................................. 423
System Status........................................................... 430
6.9 Avidyne TAS610 Traffic.............................................. 431
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 431
Displaying Traffic Information..................................... 432
Altitude Display......................................................... 434
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 434
TAS Alerts................................................................. 436
System Status............................................................ 437
6.10 L-3 Skywatch Traffic............................................. 438
TAS Symbology.......................................................... 438
Operation................................................................. 439
Displaying Traffic Information..................................... 439
Altitude Display......................................................... 442
Traffic Map Page Display Range.................................. 442
TAS Alerts................................................................. 444
System Status............................................................ 444
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.1 Garmin AFCS......................................................... 447
AFCS Controls........................................................... 448
Flight Director Operation............................................ 450
Vertical Modes.......................................................... 453
Lateral Modes........................................................... 468
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Autopilot and Yaw Damper Operation......................... 475
Example Flight Plan................................................... 478
AFCS Annunciations and Alerts................................... 490
Overspeed Protection................................................. 491
Underspeed Protection............................................... 491
7.2 S-TEC Fifty Five X Autopilot (Optional)............. 494
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
8.7
8.8
8.9
8.10
8.11
8.12
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)...................... 496
SVT Operation........................................................... 497
SVT Features............................................................. 499
Field of View............................................................. 508
Enhanced Vision System (EVS)............................ 510
Image Quality and Interpretation................................ 510
EVS Softkeys............................................................. 510
SafeTaxi................................................................. 513
SafeTaxi Cycle Number and Revision........................... 516
ChartView.............................................................. 519
ChartView Softkeys.................................................... 520
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 521
Chart Options............................................................ 529
Day/Night View......................................................... 535
ChartView Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 537
FliteCharts............................................................. 540
FliteCharts Softkeys................................................... 541
Terminal Procedures Charts........................................ 542
Chart Options............................................................ 549
Day/Night View......................................................... 552
FliteCharts Cycle Number and Expiration Date.............. 554
Airport Directory.................................................. 557
Airport Directory Database Cycle Number and Revision.558
SiriusXM Satellite Radio Entertainment............ 560
Activating SiriusXM Satellite Radio Services................. 560
Using SiriusXM Radio................................................. 562
Satellite Telephone & SMS Messaging Service.565
Registering the Iridium Satellite System....................... 565
Telephone Communication......................................... 566
Text Messaging (SMS)................................................ 572
WI-FI Connections................................................ 584
Scheduler............................................................... 589
Electronic Checklists............................................ 591
Flight Data Logging............................................. 594
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
IX
TABLE OF CONTENTS
8.13 Hypoxia Recognition w/ Auto Descent Mode... 596
Determining Pilot Alertness........................................ 596
Automatic Descent Mode........................................... 597
8.14 Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™)........ 598
Roll Engagement....................................................... 599
Pitch Engagement..................................................... 600
High Airspeed Protection............................................ 601
8.15 Position Reporting............................................... 602
8.16 Abnormal Operation............................................ 605
SVT Troubleshooting.................................................. 605
Reversionary Mode.................................................... 605
Unusual Attitudes...................................................... 606
APPENDICES
Annunciations and Alerts.............................................. 609
Alert Level Definitions................................................ 611
Aircraft Alerts............................................................ 612
Perspective™ Voice Alerts............................................ 615
GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System Voice Alerts................ 616
System Annunciations................................................ 616
System Message Advisories........................................ 619
Garmin AFCS Alerts.................................................... 630
Garmin AFCS Condition/Stall Alert............................... 631
Terrain-SVS Alerts...................................................... 632
TAWS-B System Status Annunciations.......................... 634
Flight Plan Import/Export Messages............................ 634
Pilot Profile Import/Export Messages........................... 635
Database Management................................................. 637
Jeppesen Databases................................................... 637
Garmin Databases..................................................... 641
Garmin Avionics Glossary............................................. 649
Frequently Asked Questions......................................... 657
Map Symbols.................................................................. 661
INDEX
Index .................................................................................I-1
X
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 1 SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver (optional)
• GDU 1040A Primary Flight Display (optional)
• GRC 10 Remote Control (option with GDL 69A)
• GDU 1040A Multi Function Display (optional)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit
• GRT 10 SiriusXM Radio Remote Transceiver (option
with GDL 69A)
• GDC 74A Air Data Computer (ADC)
• GCU 478 PFD/MFD Control Unit
• GEA 71 Engine/Airframe Unit
• GTP 59 Outside Air Temperature (OAT) Probe
• GRS 77 Attitude and Heading Reference System
(AHRS)
• GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit (if the Garmin
Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is installed)
• GMU 44 Magnetometer
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (if the Garmin AFCS is
installed)
• GMA 347/350 Audio Panel with Integrated Marker
Beacon Receiver
• GSA 81 AFCS Pitch and Roll Servos (if the Garmin
AFCS is installed)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter (if the Garmin AFCS is
installed)
• GTX 33 Mode S Transponder with 1090 MHz
Extended Squitter (1090ES)
• GSM 85/86 Servo Gearboxes (if the Garmin AFCS is
installed)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTX 32 Transponder
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1240A Multi Function Display (MFD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDL 59 Data Link (optional)
EIS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cirrus Perspective™ Integrated Avionics by Garmin presents flight instrumentation, position, navigation,
communication, and identification information to the pilot through large-format displays. The system consists of
the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• GDL 69/69A Satellite Data Link Receiver (optional)
AFCS
A top-level system block diagram is shown in Figure 1-1 (it does not include the GSM 85, GTA 82, GRC 10,
or GRT 10).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The optional Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides the flight director (FD), autopilot
(AP), yaw damper (YD - optional), and manual electric trim (MET) functions. Refer to the AFCS section for more
information.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
1
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.1 LINE REPLACEABLE UNITS (LRU)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30 (1) – This unit is configured as a PFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024
x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the left/pilot side is designated as the PFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20 (MFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GDU 1240A-20/1040A-20 (1) – This unit is configured as a MFD that features a 12 or 10.4-inch LCD with 1024
x 768 resolution. The unit installed on the right/copilot side is designated as MFD. This unit communicates
with the GDU 1240A-30/1040A-30 (PFD), and with the on-side GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit through a
High-Speed Data Bus (HSDB) connection.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GIA 63W (2) – The Integrated Avionics Units (IAU) function as the main communication hub, linking all
LRUs with the PFD. Each GIA 63W contains a GPS Satellite-Based Augmentation System (SBAS) receiver,
VHF COM/NAV/GS receivers, a flight director (FD; if the Garmin AFCS is installed) and system integration
microprocessors. Each GIA 63W is paired with the on-side display via an HSDB connection. The GIA 63Ws
are not paired and do not communicate with each other directly.
2
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GDC 74A (1 or 2) – The Air Data Computer (ADC) processes data from the pitot/static system and outside air
temperature (OAT) sensor. This unit provides pressure altitude, airspeed, vertical speed and OAT information
to the system, and it communicates with the primary GIA 63W, GDU 1240A and GRS 77, using an ARINC 429
digital interface (it also interfaces directly with the primary GTP 59).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GEA 71 (1) – Receives and processes signals from the engine and airframe sensors. This unit communicates
with both GIA 63Ws using an RS-485 digital interface.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GRS 77 (1 or 2) – The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) provides aircraft attitude and heading
information via ARINC 429 to both GDUs and the primary GIA 63W. The GRS 77 contains advanced sensors
(including accelerometers and rate sensors) and interfaces with the primary GMU 44 to obtain magnetic field
information, with the GDC 74A to obtain air data, and with both GIA 63Ws to obtain GPS information. AHRS
modes of operation are discussed later in this document.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GMU 44 (1 or 2) – The Magnetometer measures local magnetic field and sends the data to the GRS 77 for
processing to determine aircraft magnetic heading. This unit receives power directly from the GRS 77 and
communicates with the GRS 77, using an RS-485 digital interface.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
3
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
• GMA 350 or GMA 347 (1) – The Audio Panel integrates NAV/COM audio, intercom, telephone, and marker
beacon controls (refer to the Audio Panel & CNS Section). This unit communicates with both GIA 63Ws, using
an RS-232 digital interface.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 350
GMA 347
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• GTX 32 (1) or GTX 33 (1) or GTX 33 with Extended Squitter (1) – The GTX 32 solid-state transponder
provides Modes A and C capability. The GTX 33 solid-state transponder provides Modes A, C, and S capability.
The GTX 33 may also be additionally be equipped with 1090 MHz Extended Squitter (1090ES) transmit
capability. The PFD provides transponder controls. The transponder communicates with the primary GIA
63W through an RS-232 digital interface.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• GTS 800 (1) – The optional GTS 800 provides real-time traffic information to the MFD (and, indirectly, to the
inset map of the PFD). The GTS 800 communicates with the MFD with an HSDB connection. The GTS 800
also has an analog audio connection to the Audio Panel.
INDEX
APPENDICES
• GDL 69/69A (1) – The optional Data Link Satellite Radio Receiver provides weather information to the
MFD (and, indirectly, to the inset map of the PFD) as well as digital audio entertainment. The GDL 69/69A
communicates with the MFD via an HSDB connection. A subscription to the SiriusXM Satellite Radio and/or
SiriusXM Weather service is required to enable the GDL 69/69A capability.
4
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• GDL 59 (1) – The GDL 59 is a Wi-Fi data link transceiver. Operation is performed on the MFD. The GDL
59 is connected to the GDL 69 (if installed) or to the MFD using HSDB. The GDL 59 also includes analog
connections to the audio panel.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
• GSR 56 (1) – The Iridium Transceiver provides telephone voice communication by means of pilot and copilot
headsets. The unit can also send and receive data over the Iridium satellite network. The GSR 56 is connected
to the optional GDL 59 with an RS-232 digital interface and analog audio connections. Otherwise, the GSR 56
is connected the #1 GIA 63W with an RS-232 digital interface, with analog connections to the audio panel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• GCU 478 (1) – Provides the Flight Management System (FMS) controls for the PFD and MFD through an
RS-232 digital interface.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
• GMC 705 (1) – Provides the controls for the Garmin AFCS through an RS-232 digital interface allowing
communication with the PFD and MFD.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• GTP 59 (1 or 2) – The Temperature Probe provides Outside Air Temperature (OAT) data to the primary GDC
74A.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
5
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• GSA 80 (1), GSA 81 (2), and GSM 85A/86 (3) – The GSA 80 servo is used for the automatic control of yaw,
while the GSA 81 servos are used for the automatic control of pitch and roll. These units interface with each
GIA 63W. The GSM 85A/86 servo gearbox is responsible for transferring the output torque of the GSA 80/81
servo actuator to the mechanical flight-control surface linkage.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GTA 82 (1) – The Pitch Trim Adapter takes input from the trim switches, GIA 63W and GSA 81 to control the
DC motor to drive the aircraft trim system.
6
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMC 705
GCU 478
(PFD)
GSR 56 (optional)
w/GDL 59
GDL 59
(optional)
GDU 1240A
GDU 1040A
(MFD)
GTS 800
(optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350 or
GMA 347
(optional)
GDL 69/69A
(optional)
EIS
GDU 1240A
GDU 1040A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GMU 44 #2
(optional)
GMU 44 #1
GRS 77 #1
GRS 77 #2
(optional)
GIA 63W #2
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
GDC 74A #1
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
GTP 59 #1
GSA 82
(Pitch Trim)
GSA 81
GDC 74A #2
(optional)
GTP 59 #2
(optional)
VHF COM
VHF NAV/LOC
GPS/WAAS
G/S
AFCS Mode Logic
Flight Director
Servo Management
AFCS
(Pitch & Roll)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GIA 63W #1
GSA 80
GSR 56 (optional)
w/o GDL 59
(Yaw)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GEA 71 #1
GTX 32/33/
33 w/ ES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-1 Perspective™ System (Example LRU Configuration)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
7
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.2 SYSTEM CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Audio Panel (GMA 347) and AFCS controls (GMC 705) are described in the Audio Panel & CNS
and AFCS sections respectively.
The system controls are located on the PFD and MFD bezels, PFD/MFD Control Unit, AFCS Control Unit and
audio panel. The controls for the PFD and MFD are discussed within the following pages of this section.
EIS
PFD/MFD CONTROLS
PFD
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
13
MFD
16
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
15
6
11
7
10
8
APPENDICES
14
12
9
13
INDEX
Figure 1-2 PFD & MFD Controls
8
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD and MFD bezel (see Figure 1-2).
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down.
6
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
7
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. These procedures can then be loaded into the active flight plan.
If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
8
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
9
Dual FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob. Press the FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor
ON and OFF. When the cursor is ON, data may be entered in the applicable window by turning the small
and large knobs. The large knob moves the cursor on the page, while the small knob selects individual
characters for the highlighted cursor location.
10
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus.
11
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan.
12
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
13
Bezel Keys – Used to select the appropriate softkey to access additional functionality.
14
Dual NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
between NAV1 and NAV2.
kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow
15
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to toggle the Morse code identifier audio ON
and OFF. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
16
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active NAV frequencies.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
5
APPENDICES
BARO Knob – Sets the altimeter barometric pressure. Press to enter standard pressure (29.92).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4
AFCS
Dual COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small
knob for kHz). Press to switch the light blue tuning arrow
between COM1 and COM2.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency
field as a percentage. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch ON and OFF.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Toggles the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold this
key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5 MHz) automatically into the active frequency
field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
9
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
PFD/MFD CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The additional controls for the PFD and MFD are located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478). The
following list provides an overview of the controls located on the PFD/MFD Control Unit:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
21
EIS
12
13
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
20
14
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
19
18
17
16
15
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-3 PFD/MFD Control Unit (GCU 478)
10
1
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes page menus. Pressing and holding this key
displays the Navigation Map Page automatically.
2
FPL Key – Displays the active Flight Plan Page for creating and editing the active flight plan, or for
accessing stored flight plans.
3
Direct-to Key ( ) – Allows the user to enter a destination waypoint and establish a direct course to the
selected destination (the destination is either specified by the identifier, chosen from the active route, or
taken from the map pointer position).
4
MENU Key – Displays a context-sensitive list of options. This list allows the user to access additional
features or make setting changes that relate to particular pages.
5
PROC Key – Gives access to IFR departure procedures (DPs), arrival procedures (STARs) and approach
procedures (IAPs) for a flight plan. If a flight plan is used, available procedures for the departure and/or
arrival airport are automatically suggested. Theses procedures can then be loaded into the active flight
plan. If a flight plan is not used, both the desired airport and the desired procedure may be selected.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
7
FMS/XPDR/COM/NAV Key – Acts as the FMS Knob for the MFD. Sets the transponder code when in
XPDR mode. Acts as the COM Knob when in COM tuning mode. Acts as the NAV Knob when in NAV
tuning mode.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
12
Joystick – Changes the map range when rotated. Activates the map pointer when pressed. Moves the
Quick Select Box or cursor on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD when joystick is moved left, right,
up, or down.
13
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers between active and standby COM or NAV tuning frequencies.
Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode. Press and hold 2 seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.5
MHz) automatically into the active frequency field.
14
Alphanumeric Keys – Allow the user to enter data quickly, without having to select individual characters
with the FMS Knob. When the Quick Select Box is shown on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD,
alphanumeric keys can be used to enter data into the Quick Select Box area.
15
Plus (+) Minus (-) Key – Toggles a (+) or (-) character.
16
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
17
BKSP Key – Moves the cursor back one character space.
18
SPC Key – Adds a space character.
19
ALT SEL Knob – Sets the selected altitude in the Selected Altitude Box. Pressing this knob synchronizes
the selected altitude to the current altitude. In addition to providing the standard altitude alerter function,
selected altitude provides an altitude setting for the Altitude Capture/Hold mode of the AFCS. The Selected
Altitude Range Arc (when enabled), which appears on navigation maps during climbs or descents, is also
based on the selected altitude setting.
20
CRS Knob – Sets the selected course on the HSI when the VOR1, VOR2, or OBS/SUSP mode is selected.
Pressing this knob centers the CDI on the currently selected VOR. The selected course provides course
reference to the flight director when operating in Navigation and Approach modes.
21
HDG Knob – Sets the selected heading on the HSI. Pressing this knob synchronizes the heading bug to
the current heading. When operating in Heading Select mode, this knob provides the heading reference
to the flight director.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NAV Key – Selects/deselects NAV tuning mode.
AFCS
11
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
XPDR Key – Selects/deselects XPDR mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM Key – Selects/deselects COM tuning mode.
EIS
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FMS Key – Selects/deselects FMS mode.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GARMIN AFCS CONTROLS
2
3
4
12
11
10
5
6
7
9
8
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
Figure 1-4 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If a key is selected, its respective annunciator is illuminated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Garmin AFCS is mainly controlled through the GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit. The AFCS Control Unit
consists of the following controls:
1
HDG Key – Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode.
2
NAV Key – Selects/deselects Navigation Mode.
3
AP Key – Engages/disengages the autopilot.
4
LVL Key – Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the autopilot
engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes.
5
NOSE UP/DN Wheel – Controls the active mode reference for the Pitch, Vertical Speed, and Indicated
Airspeed modes.
6
IAS Key – Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode.
7
ALT Key – Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode.
8
VNV Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Navigation mode.
9
VS Key – Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode.
10
YD Key (optional) – Engages/disengages the yaw damper.
11
FD Key – Activates/deactivates the flight director in the default pitch and roll modes. If the autopilot is
engaged, the FD Key is disabled.
12
APR Key – Selects/deselects Approach Mode.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
NOTE: The LVL Key will not engage the autopilot when Automatic Descent Mode (ADM) is active.
12
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL AFCS CONTROLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AP DISC (Autopilot Disconnect) Switch, GA (Go Around) Button, and MET (Manual Electric Trim) Switch
are additional AFCS controls and are located in the cockpit, separately from the AFCS Control Unit. These are
discussed in detail in the AFCS section.
GMA 350 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
EIS
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
20
21
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
11
Figure 1-5 GMA 350 Controls
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
5
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
6
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel
Jack. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not connected
to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable
muting during reception.
MUS1 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS1 muting
during reception.
8
MUS2 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS2 muting
during reception.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
7
190-00820-10 Rev. A
APPENDICES
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal
is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
13
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
12
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be added by
pressing the COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
EIS
13
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be added by
pressing the COM1 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
14
PLAY – Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing begins playing
the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter plays the previous block of
memory.
15
AUX – When selected, audio from the AUX inputs can be heard.
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D Audio on/off for all headset
positions.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between
crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting
during reception.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during
PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source
(indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active press
to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor,
twice to activate Blue-Select mode).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
14
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GMA 347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
1
2
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
7
8
10
9
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3
EIS
11
12
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-6 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
3
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
7
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
APPENDICES
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Enables Music Mute feature.
Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2
AFCS
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
15
12
PILOT Volume – Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
13
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
14
SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
15
HI SENS Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
16
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
22
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
16
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SOFTKEY FUNCTION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The softkeys are located along the bottoms of the displays. The softkeys shown depend on the softkey level
or page being displayed. The bezel keys below the softkeys can be used to select the appropriate softkey. When
a softkey is selected, its color changes to black text on gray background and remains this way until it is turned
off, at which time it reverts to white text on black background. When a softkey function is disabled, the softkey
label is subdued (dimmed).
Softkeys revert to the previous level after 45 seconds of inactivity.
Softkey
On
Softkey Names
(Displayed)
EIS
Bezel-Mounted
Softkeys (Press)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-7 Softkeys (Second-Level PFD Configuration)
In the following descriptions, top level softkeys are denoted with bullets.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD SOFTKEYS
The PFD softkeys provide control over flight management functions, including GPS, NAV, terrain, traffic,
and weather data (optional). Each softkey sublevel has a BACK Softkey which can be selected to return to
the previous level. The ALERTS Softkey is visible at all softkey levels (label changes if messages are issued).
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional)
INSET
AFCS
Press the CDI Softkey to cycle through
navigation sources:
- GPS
- NAV1 (VOR/LOC)
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
Figure 1-8 Top Level PFD Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
INSET
(optional)
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND TRAFFIC
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
or:
DL LTNG
or:
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
(optional)
METAR
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
INDEX
DCLTR-1
TOPO
PRECIP
APPENDICES
(optional) (optional)
DCLTR-3
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
17
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays Inset Map in PFD lower left corner
Removes Inset Map
Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and SUA data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except active flight plan
Displays weather product age and icon on the Inset Map for enabled weather
WX LGND
products (data link services optional)
TRAFFIC (2) Displays/removes traffic information on Inset Map
TRFC-1: Displays traffic on Inset Map.
TRFC-2: Removes everything except traffic.
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Inset Map
TOPO
Displays/removes terrain information on Inset Map
TERRAIN
Displays/removes on-board lightning detection information on Inset Map (optional)
STRMSCP
(optional)
Displays/removes
the SiriusXM
Weather
NEXRAD
radar coverage
information
NEXRAD
INSET
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDRweather
IDENTand
TMR/REF
NRST
ALERTS
on
Inset
Map
(optional)
or
Press the
CDI Softkey
to cycle through
Displays/removes Garmin Connext
radar
precipitation
and radar coverage information on
PRECIP
navigation sources:
Inset Map (optional)
- GPS
- NAV1
(VOR/LOC)
Displays/removes SiriusXM Weather
Lightning
weather product on Inset Map (optional)
XM LTNG
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• INSET
OFF
DCLTR (3)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- NAV2 (VOR/LOC)
or
Displays/removes Garmin Connext Lightning weather product on Inset Map (optional)
Displays/removes METAR weather information on Inset Map (optional)
DL LTNG
METAR
AFCS
INSET
(optional) (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
(optional)
APPENDICES
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
PRECIP
or:
DL LTNG
or:
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
(optional)
METAR
BACK
ALERTS
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
DCLTR-3
INDEX
Figure 1-9 INSET Softkeys
SENSOR
18
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
OFF
DCLTR
WX LGND TRAFFIC
DCLTR-1
TRFC-1
DCLTR-2
TRFC-2
TOPO
TERRAIN STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
METAR
BACK
ALERTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Press the OFF or BACK Softkey
to return to the top-level softkeys.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displays second-level softkeys for ADC and AHRS sensors
Selects ADC1
Selects ADC2 (optional)
• SENSOR
ADC1
ADC2
DCLTR-3
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selects AHRS1
Selects AHRS2 (optional)
AHRS1
AHRS2
SENSOR
EIS
ADC1
ADC2
AHRS1
AHRS2
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
Figure 1-10 SENSOR Softkeys
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
FPM
DFLTS
WIND
OPTN1
OPTN2
OFF
DME
BRG
Displays second-level softkeys for additional PFD configuration
Displays the softkeys for enabling or disabling Synthetic Vision features (optional)
Displays rectangular boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the
active flight plan
Enables synthetic terrain depiction with Flight Path Marker (FPM)
Displays compass horizon heading along the Zero-Pitch line
Displays position markers for airports within approximately 15 nm of the current aircraft
position. Airport identifiers are displayed when the airport is within approximately
9nm.
Enables FPM when synthetic terrain is disabled and horizon heading is enabled
Resets PFD to default settings, including changing units to standard
Displays softkeys to select and configure wind data
Displays wind direction arrow with true numeric direction and speed
Displays headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
Removes wind information from display
Displays/removes DME Information Window (optional)
Displays the Bearing Information Window and cycles through:
NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
Off: Removes window
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SYN TERR
HRZN HDG
APTSIGNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• PFD
SYN VIS
PATHWAY
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
19
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Displays the Bearing 1 Information Window and cycles through:
(included with NAV1: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
second bearing GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
Off: Removes Bearing 1 window
pointer option)
Displays softkeys to select the HSI format
HSI FMT
Displays HSI as a 360° compass rose
360 HSI
Displays HSI as a 140° viewable arc (Bearing Information window(s) unavailable)
ARC HSI
Displays the Bearing 2 Information Window and cycles through:
BRG2
NAV2: Waypoint frequency/identifier and DME information
(optional)
GPS: Waypoint identifier and GPS distance information
Off: Removes Bearing 2 window
Displays softkeys for changing the Altimeter barometric setting and altitude displays to
ALT UNIT
metric units
Displays the current and Selected altitudes in meters in addition to feet, when selected
METERS
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in inches of mercury (in Hg)
IN
Displays the Altimeter barometric setting in hectopascals (hPa)
HPA
Sets barometric pressure to 29.92 in Hg (1013 hPa if metric display is selected)
STD BARO
Selects OBS Mode on the CDI when navigating by GPS (only available with active leg)
• OBS
Cycles CDI through GPS, NAV1 (VOR/LOC), and NAV2 (VOR/LOC) navigation
• CDI
sources
Displays/removes the DME Radio Tuning Window (optional)
• DME
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
BRG1
20
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PFD
SYN VIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(optional)
(optional)
DFLTS
WIND
BRG
DME
ALT UNIT STD BARO
HSI FMT
Press the BRG1 Softkey
to display/remove
the Bearing 1 Information
window and cycle
through bearing sources:
- NAV1
- NAV2
- GPS
- ADF (optional)
Press the STD BARO or BACK
Softkey to return to the top-level
softkeys.
PATHWAY SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
FPM
ARC HSI
METERS
IN
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
BACK
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALERTS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
360 HSI
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
OFF
OPTN2
ALERTS
EIS
OPTN1
BACK
Figure 1-11 First PFD Softkey Level
(optional)
(optional)
DFLTS
BRG1
DME
STBY
Press the BRG1 Softkey
to display/remove
the Bearing 1 Information
window and cycle
through bearing sources:
- NAV1
- GPS
(optional)GND
ON - ADFALT
HSI FMT
BRG2
ALT UNIT STD BARO
Press theXPDR
BRG2 Softkey
to display/remove
the Bearing 2 Information
window and cycle
through bearing sources:
- NAV2
- GPS
(optional)
VFR - ADF
CODE
IDENT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIND
AFCS
SYN VIS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
0
Displays transponder mode selection softkeys:
Selects
standby
mode
(Transponder
does
toIDENT
any interrogations)
1
2
3
4
5
6 not reply
7
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
Selects Mode A (Transponder replies to interrogations)
Selects Mode C – altitude reporting mode (Transponder replies
to identification and altitude
Press the IDENT or BACK
interrogations)
Softkey to return to the top-
INDEX
• XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
APPENDICES
Figure 1-12 First PFD Softkey Level with Second Bearing Pointer Option
level softkeys.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
21
Press the BRGsoftkeys
Press the STD BARO or BACK
to display/remove
Softkey to return to the top-level
the Bearing Information
softkeys.
window and cycle through
bearing sources:
- NAV1/NAV2
Mode (Transponder
does not allow Mode A and Mode C
- GPS
- ADF
(optional)
acquisition
squitter
and replies to discretely addressed Mode S
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
GND
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
VFR
CODE
0—7
BKSP
• IDENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TMR/REF
• NRST
• ALERTS
Manually selects Ground
replies, but does permit
interrogations)
BACK
ALERTS
OFF
OPTN1
OPTN2
Automatically enters the VFR code (1200 in U.S.A. only)
Displays transponder code selection softkeys 0-7
360 HSI ARC HSI
BACK
ALERTS
Use numbers to enter code
Removes numbers entered, one at a time
METERS
IN
HPA
BACK
ALERTS
Activates the Special Position Identification (SPI) pulse for 18 seconds, identifying the
transponder return on the ATC screen
Displays/removes Timer/References Window
Displays/removes Nearest Airports Window
Displays/removes Alerts Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
XPDR
STBY
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
CODE
IDENT
BACK
ALERTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
AFCS
Press the IDENT or BACK
Softkey to return to the toplevel softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-13 XPDR Softkeys
22
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MFD SOFTKEYS
DCLTR SHW CHRT CHKLIST
ENGINE
MFD
softkeys vary MAP
depending on the page selected. EIS and Navigation
Map Page (default MFD page)
softkeys are described here.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
DCLTR-1
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance
with the approved flight manual
DCLTR-2
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
DCLTR-3
Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to return to the
Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more information)
ENGINE
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (TKS FIKI is optional. See Operational Note above)
ANTI-ICE
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
LEFT
(Optional)
Selects auto tank mode
AUTO
FUEL
CO RST
ASSIST
ENGINE
DCLTR
Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
RIGHT
Removes
bars
DCLTR
Press the ENGINE
Softkey
to and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
return to the top-level softkeys.
Identifies temperature peaks
ASSIST
UNDO
ENTER
TABS
FULL
Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
FUEL
Resets fuel totalizer to full (usable fuel)
FULL
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
TABS
Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
UNDO
Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
ENTER
• ENGINE
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ENGINE
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its secondlevel softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
(Optional)
ENGINE
ANTI-ICE
FUEL
ASSIST
DCLTR
AFCS
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
AUTO
RIGHT
FULL
TABS
BACK
UNDO
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LEFT
ENTER
APPENDICES
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Figure 1-14 MFD Softkeys (EIS)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
23
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• MAP
TRAFFIC
PROFILE
TOPO
EIS
TERRAIN
AIRWAYS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
STRMSCP
NEXRAD
or
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PRECIP
XM LTNG
Enables second-level Navigation Map Page softkeys
Displays/removes traffic information on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes profile view on Navigation Map Page
Displays/removes topographical data (e.g., coastlines, terrain, rivers, lakes) on Navigation
Map Page
Displays/removes terrain information on Navigation Map Page
Selects the desired display of Airways; cycles through:
AIRWY ON: All Airways displayed
AIRWY LO: Low Altitude (Victor) Airways displayed
AIRWY HI: High Altitude Airways (Jet Routes) displayed
AIRWAYS: Airways are not displayed
Displays/removes on-board lightning detection system information on the Navigation Map
(optional)
Displays/removes SiriusXM Weather NEXRAD and radar coverage information on
Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes Garmin Connext radar precipitation and radar coverage information on
Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes SiriusXM Lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
or
Displays/removes Garmin Connext Lightning information on Navigation Map (optional)
Displays/removes METAR weather information on Navigation Map Page (optional)
Displays/removes weather product legend on Navigation Map Page. Softkey available when
one or more weather products are enabled for display (optional)
Returns to top-level softkeys
BACK
• DCLTR (3) Selects desired amount of map detail; cycles through declutter levels:
DCLTR (No Declutter): All map features visible
DCLTR-1: Removes land data
DCLTR-2: Removes land and special use airspace (SUA) data
DCLTR-3: Removes everything except the active flight plan information
• SHW CHRT Displays optional Flite Charts or Chart View charts (optional)
Displays the Checklist Page (optional)
• CHKLIST
Selects the highlighted checklist item
DONE
Returns to the top-level softkeys
EXIT
EMERGCY Immediately accesses the emergency procedures
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
DL LTNG
METAR
LEGEND
24
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
(optional)
MAP
DCLTR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ENGINE
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
DCLTR-1
DCLTR-2
(optional) (optional)
PRECIP
TOPO
or:
or:
TERRAIN AIRWAYS STRMSCP NEXRAD XM LTNG
DCLTR-3
(optional) (optional)
METAR
LEGEND
EIS
(optional)
TRAFFIC PROFILE
DL LTNG
BACK
Press the BACK softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
AIRWY ON
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AIRWY LO
AIRWY HI
ENGINE
DONE
EXIT
EMERGCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The DONE Softkey label changes to UNDO
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 1-15 MFD Softkeys (Navigation Map and Checklist)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
25
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.3 SECURE DIGITAL CARDS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for instructions on updating the aviation databases.
NOTE: Ensure that the system is powered off before inserting the SD card.
EIS
The PFD and MFD data card slots use Secure Digital (SD) cards and are located on the top right portion of
the display bezels. Each display bezel is equipped with two SD card slots. The system uses SD cards to store
databases (such as terrain or charts), in addition to loading software updates, and to allow for the import or export
of data including flight plans, pilot profiles, and flight data logs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Install an SD card:
Insert the SD card in the SD card slot, pushing the card in until the spring latch engages. The front of the card
should remain flush with the face of the display bezel.
Remove an SD card:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Gently press on the SD card to release the spring latch and eject the card.
MFD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD
APPENDICES
SD Card Slots
INDEX
Figure 1-16 Display Bezel SD Card Slots
26
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.4 SYSTEM POWER-UP
NOTE: Refer to the Appendices for AHRS initialization bank angle limitations.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: See the Appendices for additional information regarding system-specific annunciations and alerts.
NOTE: See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for specific procedures concerning avionics power
application and emergency power supply operation.
EIS
The Perspective™ system is integrated with the aircraft electrical system and receives power directly from
electrical busses. The PFD, MFD and supporting sub-systems include both power-on and continuous built-in
test features that exercise the processor, system memory, external inputs and outputs to provide safe operation.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During system initialization, test annunciations appear, as shown in Figure 1-17. All system annunciations
should disappear typically within one minute of power-up. Upon power-up, key annunciator lights also become
momentarily illuminated on the audio panels, the control units and the display bezels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
On the PFD, the AHRS initializes and displays ‘AHRS ALIGN: Keep Wings Level’. The AHRS should display
valid attitude and heading fields typically within one minute of power-up. The AHRS can align itself both while
taxiing and during level flight.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the MFD powers up (Figure 1-18), the MFD Power-up Page shows the following information:
• Airport Terrain database name and version
• System version
• Copyright
• Obstacle database name and expiration date
• Land database name and version
• Navigation database name and expiration date
• Safe Taxi database and expiration date
• Airport Directory name and expiration date
• Terrain database name and version
• FliteCharts/ChartView name and expiration date
AFCS
Current database information includes the valid operating dates, cycle number and database type. When this
information has been reviewed for currency (to ensure that no databases have expired), the pilot is prompted to
continue. Pressing the ENT Key acknowledges this information and the Navigation Map Page is displayed upon
pressing the key a second time. When the system has acquired a sufficient number of satellites to determine a
position, the aircraft’s current position is shown on the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-17 PFD Initialization
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Figure 1-18 MFD Power-up Page
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
27
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The displays are connected together via a single Ethernet bus, thus allowing for high-speed communication.
As shown in Figure 1-1, each IAU is connected to the PFD. This section discusses the normal and reversionary
modes of operation as well as the various AHRS modes of the system.
DISPLAY OPERATION
NOTE: In normal operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD, or from any display
EIS
operating in reversionary mode.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In normal operating mode, the PFD presents graphical flight instrumentation (attitude, heading, airspeed,
altitude, vertical speed), replacing the traditional flight instrument cluster (see the Flight Instruments Section
for more information). The MFD normally displays a full-color moving map with navigation information (see
the Flight Management Section), while the left portion of the MFD is dedicated to the Engine Indication System
(EIS; see the EIS Section). The PFD offers control for COM frequency selection and the MFD offers control
for NAV frequency selection. The PFD/MFD Control Unit offers control for both COM and NAV frequency
selection.
INDEX
Figure 1-19 Normal Operation
28
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the event of a display failure, the system automatically switches to reversionary (backup) mode. In
Reversionary Mode, all essential flight information from the PFD is combined with the EIS and presented on
the display operating in Reversionary Mode. EIS operation while in Reversionary Mode is discussed in the EIS
Section. As when the PFD is operating normally, windows for flight planning, nearest airports, and procedures
are available. The Inset Map is moved to the right side of the display.
EIS
If a display fails, the appropriate IAU-display Ethernet interface is cut off. Thus, the IAU can no longer
communicate with the remaining display (refer to Figure 1-1), and the NAV and COM functions provided to
the failed display by the IAU are flagged as invalid on the remaining display. The system reverts to backup
paths for the AHRS, ADC, Engine/Airframe Unit, and Transponder, as required. The change to backup paths is
completely automated for all LRUs and no pilot action is required.
If the system fails to detect a display problem, Reversionary Mode may be manually activated by pressing the
red DISPLAY BACKUP Button. Pressing this button again deactivates Reversionary Mode.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DISPLAY BACKUP Button
Manually Activates/Deactivates
Reversionary Mode on Both Displays
NAV1 and COM1 (provided by the
failed PFD) Flagged Invalid
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-20 Reversionary Mode (Failed PFD)
APPENDICES
NOTE: The system alerts the pilot when backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Refer to the Appendices for
further information regarding system-specific alerts.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
29
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM ANNUNCIATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When an LRU or an LRU function fails, a large red ‘X’ is typically displayed over the instrument experiencing
failed data (Figure 1-21 displays all possible flags and responsible LRUs). The system alerts the pilot when
backup paths are utilized by the LRUs. Upon power-up, certain instruments remain invalid as equipment
begins to initialize. All instruments should be operational within one minute of power-up. If any instrument
remains flagged, the system should be serviced by a Garmin-authorized repair facility.
EIS
NOTE: For a detailed description of all annunciations and alerts, refer to Appendix A. Refer to the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH) for additional information regarding pilot responses to these annunciations.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
Navigation Database
Mismatch in PFD
and MFD
GRS 77 AHRS
or GMU 44
Magnetometer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GEA 71 Engine
Airframe Unit
OR GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Unit
GIA 63W
Integrated
Avionics Units
AFCS
GDC 74A
Air Data
Computer
GTX 32/33/33 ES Transponder
OR GIA 63W
Integrated Avionics Units
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 1-21 System Failure Annunciations
30
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The System Status Page displays the status and software version numbers for all detected system LRUs.
Pertinent information on all system databases is also displayed. Active LRUs are indicated by green check marks
and failed LRUs are indicated by red “X”s. Failed LRUs should be noted and a Cirrus service center or Garmin
dealer informed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-22 Example AUX - System Status Page
The LRU and ARFRM softkeys on the System Status Page select the applicable list (LRU INFO or AIRFRAME
window) through which the FMS Knob can be used to scroll information within the selected window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the MFD1 DB Softkey (label background changes to grey indicting the softkey is selected) places
the cursor in the DATABASE window. Use the FMS Knob to scroll through database information for the MFD.
Pressing the softkey again will change the softkey label to PFD1 DB. PFD 1 database information is now
displayed in the DATABASE window.
APPENDICES
The STBY DB Softkey, when available on the System Status Page, makes the standby navigation database
become the active navigation database on the next power cycle. Refer to the Database Management section in
the Appendices for more information.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The ANN TEST Softkey, when enabled, causes the system to issue a continuous double chime audio alert.
In addition, the annunciator lights on the GMC 705 and GCU 478 controllers illuminate. To silence the audio
alert and extinguish the annunciator lights, press the ANN TEST Softkey again.
31
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AHRS OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
The Attitude and Heading Reference System (AHRS) performs attitude, heading, and vertical acceleration
calculations for the system, using GPS, magnetometer, and air data in addition to information from its internal
sensors. Attitude and heading information are updated on the PFD while the AHRS receives appropriate
combinations of information from the external sensor inputs.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Aggressive maneuvering in reversionary mode can degrade AHRS accuracy.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loss of GPS, magnetometer, or air data inputs is communicated to the pilot by message advisory alerts (refer
to Appendix A for specific AHRS alert information). Any failure of the internal AHRS inertial sensors results
in loss of attitude and heading information (indicated by red ‘X’ indications over the corresponding flight
instruments).
APPENDICES
Figure 1-23 AHRS Operation
Two GPS inputs are provided to the AHRS. If GPS information from one of the inputs fails, the AHRS uses
the remaining GPS input and an alert message is issued to inform the pilot. If both GPS inputs fail, the AHRS
can continue to provide attitude and heading information to the PFD as long as magnetometer and airspeed
data are available and valid.
INDEX
If the magnetometer input fails, the AHRS continues to output valid attitude information. If GPS-based track
information is available while magnetometer input has failed, the HSI displays the ground track instead of
heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’ annunciation and track readout appear on the
32
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate
the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X over
the heading readout box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.
EIS
HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)
Heading and Track Unavailable
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-24 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI
Failure of the air data input has no effect on the AHRS output while AHRS is receiving valid GPS information.
Invalid/unavailable airspeed data in addition to GPS failure results in loss of all attitude and heading information.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The AHRS (GRS 77) corrects for shifts and variations in the Earth’s magnetic field by applying the Magnetic
Field Variation Database. The Magnetic Field Variation Database is derived from the International Geomagnetic
Reference Field (IGRF). The IGRF is a mathematical model that describes the Earth’s main magnetic field and
its annual rate of change. The database is updated approximately every five years. See the Appendices for
information on updating the Magnetic Field Variation Database. The system will prompt the pilot on startup
when an update is available. Failure to update this database could lead to erroneous heading information being
displayed to the pilot.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS RECEIVER OPERATION
AFCS
Each GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Unit (IAU) contains a GPS receiver. Information collected by the specified
receiver (GPS1 for the #1 IAU or GPS2 for the #2 IAU) may be viewed on the AUX - GPS Status Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Internal system checking is performed to ensure both GPS receivers are providing accurate data to the PFD.
In some circumstances, both GPS receivers may be providing accurate data, but one receiver may be providing
a better GPS solution than the other receiver. In this case the GPS receiver producing the better solution
is automatically coupled to the PFD. “BOTH ON GPS 1” or “BOTH ON GPS 2” are then displayed in the
Reversionary Sensor Window (see Appendix A) indicating which GPS receiver is being used. Both GPS receivers
are still functioning properly, but one receiver is performing better than the other at that particular time.
APPENDICES
These GPS sensor annunciations are most often seen after system power-up when one GPS receiver has
acquired satellites before the other, or one of the GPS receivers has not yet acquired an SBAS (Satellite Based
Augmentation System) signal. While the aircraft is on the ground, the SBAS signal may be blocked by
obstructions causing one GPS receiver to have difficulty acquiring a good signal. Also, while airborne, turning
the aircraft may result in one of the GPS receivers temporarily losing the SBAS signal.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
If the sensor annunciation persists, check for a system failure message in the Messages Window on the PFD.
If no failure message exists, check the GPS Status Page and compare the information for GPS1 and GPS2.
Discrepancies may indicate a problem.
33
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing GPS receiver status information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX - GPS Status Page.
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the Auxiliary Page Group (see Section 1.6 for information on
navigating MFD page groups).
3) To change the selected GPS receiver:
Press the desired GPS Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Use the FMS Knob to highlight the receiver which is not selected and press the ENT Key.
Satellite Signal
Information
GPS Receiver
Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Satellite Constellation
Diagram
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RAIM
Availability
Prediction
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Bars
INDEX
Figure 1-25 GPS Status Page
34
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The GPS Status Page provides the following information:
• Satellite constellation diagram
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Satellites currently in view are shown at their respective positions on a sky view diagram. The sky view is
always in a north-up orientation, with the outer circle representing the horizon, the inner circle representing
45° above the horizon, and the center point showing the position directly overhead.
Each satellite is represented by an oval containing the Pseudo-random noise (PRN) number (i.e., satellite
identification number). Satellites whose signals are currently being used are represented by solid ovals.
• Satellite signal information status
EIS
The accuracy of the aircraft’s GPS fix is calculated using Estimated Position Uncertainty (EPU), Dilution
of Precision (DOP), and horizontal and vertical figures of merit (HFOM and VFOM). EPU is the radius of a
circle centered on an estimated horizontal position in which actual position has 95% probability of laying.
EPU is a statistical error indication and not an actual error measurement.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DOP measures satellite geometry quality (i.e., number of satellites received and where they are relative to
each other) on a range from 0.0 to 9.9, with lower numbers denoting better accuracy. HFOM and VFOM,
measures of horizontal and vertical position uncertainty, are the current 95% confidence horizontal and
vertical accuracy values reported by the GPS receiver.
The current calculated GPS position, time, altitude, ground speed, and track for the aircraft are displayed
below the satellite signal accuracy measurements.
• GPS receiver status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GPS solution type (ACQUIRING, 2D NAV, 2D DIFF NAV, 3D NAV, 3D DIFF NAV) for the active
GPS receiver (GPS1 or GPS2) is shown in the upper right of the GPS Status Page. When the receiver is
in the process of acquiring enough satellite signals for navigation, the receiver uses satellite orbital data
(collected continuously from the satellites) and last known position to determine the satellites that should be
in view. ACQUIRING is indicated as the solution until a sufficient number of satellites have been acquired
for computing a solution.
AFCS
When the receiver is in the process of acquiring a 3D differential GPS solution, 3D NAV is indicated as the
solution until the 3D differential fix has finished acquisition. SBAS (Satellite-Based Augmentation System)
indicates INACTIVE. When acquisition is complete, the solution status indicates 3D DIFF NAV and SBAS
indicates ACTIVE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) Prediction (RAIM Softkey is pressed)
APPENDICES
In most cases performing a RAIM prediction is not necessary. However, in some cases, the selected approach
may be outside the SBAS coverage area and it may be necessary to perform a RAIM prediction for the intended
approach.
Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring (RAIM) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to
calculate a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nautical miles for oceanic and enroute, 1.0
nm for terminal, and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of
flight, RAIM is available nearly 100% of the time.
INDEX
The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a specified date and time. RAIM
computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival date and time.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
35
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not available. The
system automatically monitors RAIM and warns with an alert message when it is not available. If RAIM is not
predicted to be available for the final approach course, the approach does not become active, as indicated by
the messages “Approach is not active” and “RAIM not available from FAF to MAP”. If RAIM is not available
when crossing the FAF, the missed approach procedure must be flown.
Predicting RAIM availability
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Enter the desired waypoint:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired waypoint by identifier, facility, or city name and press the ENT Key. Refer
to Section 1.6 for instructions on entering alphanumeric data into the system.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
a) Use the large FMS Knob to scroll to the Most Recent Waypoints List.
b) Use the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint in the list and press the ENT Key. The system
automatically fills in the identifier, facility, and city fields with the information for the selected waypoint.
c) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
8) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
AFCS
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
Predicting RAIM availability at present position
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) If necessary, press the RAIM Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob. The ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the MENU Key.
5) With ‘Set WPT to Present Position’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knob to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
36
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) With the cursor highlighting ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’, press the ENT Key. Once RAIM availability is computed, one
of the following is displayed:
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’—RAIM has not been computed for the current waypoint, time, and date combination
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’—RAIM calculation in progress
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be available for the specified waypoint, time, and date
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’—RAIM is predicted to be unavailable for the specified waypoint, time, and date
EIS
• SBAS Selection (SBAS Softkey is pressed) (WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS capable systems only)
In certain situations, such as when the aircraft is outside or on the fringe of the WAAS, EGNOS, or MSAS
coverage area, it may be desirable to disable the reception of the applicable SBAS signal (although it is not
recommended). When disabled, the SBAS field in the GPS Status box indicates DISABLED. There may be a
small delay for the GPS Status box to be updated upon WAAS, EGNOS, and MSAS enabling/disabling.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabling WAAS, EGNOS or MSAS
1) Select the GPS Status Page.
2) If necessary, press the SBAS Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired SBAS system.
4) Press the ENT Key to uncheck the box.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 1-25 Enable/Disable SBAS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
• GPS Satellite Signal Strengths
The GPS Status Page can be helpful in troubleshooting weak (or missing) signal levels due to poor satellite
coverage or installation problems. As the GPS receiver locks onto satellites, a signal strength bar is displayed
for each satellite in view, with the appropriate satellite PRN number (01-32 or 120-138 for WAAS) below each
bar. The progress of satellite acquisition is shown in three stages, as indicated by signal bar appearance:
INDEX
- No bar—Receiver is looking for the indicated satellite
- Hollow bar—Receiver has found the satellite and is collecting data
- Light blue bar—Receiver has collected the necessary data and the satellite signal can be used
- Green bar—Satellite is being used for the GPS solution
- Checkered bar—Receiver has excluded the satellite (Fault Detection and Exclusion)
- “D” indication—Denotes the satellite is being used as part of the differential computations
Each satellite has a 30-second data transmission that must be collected (signal strength bar is hollow) before
the satellite may be used for navigation (signal strength bar becomes solid).
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
37
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
1.6 ACCESSING SYSTEM FUNCTIONALITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENUS
The system has a dedicated MENU Key that when pressed displays a context-sensitive list of options. This
options list allows the user to access additional features or make settings changes which specifically relate to
the currently displayed window/page. There is no all-encompassing menu. Some menus provide access to
additional submenus that are used to view, edit, select, and review options. Menus display ‘No Options’ when
there are no additional features or settings for the window/page selected.
EIS
Navigating a menu:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through a list of available options (a scroll bar always appears to the right of the
window/box when the option list is longer than the window/box).
3) Press the ENT Key to select the desired option.
4) Press the CLR Key or FMS Knob to remove the menu and cancel the operation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Options for FPL Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Options for Nearest
Intersections Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-26 Page Menu Examples
38
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE GROUPS
NOTE: Refer to other supporting sections in this Pilot’s Guide for details on specific pages.
EIS
Page Group
MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information on the MFD is presented on pages which are grouped according to function. The page group and
active page title are displayed in the upper center of the screen, below the Navigation Status Box. In the bottom
right corner of the screen, the page group tabs are displayed along the bottom. The titles of pages available in
the group are displayed in a list above the page groups. The current page group and current page within the
group are shown in cyan. For some of these pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information, XM, Procedure
Loading), the active title of the page changes while the page name in the list remains the same.
Active Page Title
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pages in
Current
Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Page Groups
Figure 1-27 Page Title and Page Groups
AFCS
The main page groups are navigated using the FMS Knob; specific pages within each group can vary depending
on the configuration of optional equipment.
Selecting a page using the FMS Knob:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to display the list of page groups; continue turning the large FMS Knob until the
desired page group is selected
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired page within a specific page group.
APPENDICES
There are also several pages (Airport/Procedures/Weather Information and XM pages) which are selected first
from within a main page group with the FMS Knob, then with the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the page
(or from the page menu). In this case, the page remains set to the selected page until a different page softkey is
selected, even if a different page group is selected.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
39
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Map Pages (MAP)
Navigation Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map
Stormscope (optional)
Weather Data Link (services
optional)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain Proximity/Terrain-SVS
(optional)/ TAWS-B (optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-28 Map Pages
Waypoint Pages (WPT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport/Procedures/Weather Information Pages
- Airport Information
(INFO-1 Softkey)
- Airport Directory
(INFO-2 Softkey)
AFCS
- Departure Information
(DP Softkey)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Approach Information
(APR Softkey)
APPENDICES
- Arrival Information
(STAR Softkey)
Intersection Information
- Weather Information (optional)
(WX Softkey)
Airport/Procedures/
Weather Information
Pages
NDB Information
VOR Information
Figure 1-29 Waypoint Pages
INDEX
User Waypoint Information
40
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Auxiliary Pages
(AUX)
Trip Planning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Utility
GPS Status
Satellite Phone
Pages
System Setup
Page(s)
EIS
SiriusXM P ages
(optional)
- XM Radio
(RADIO Softkey)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- XM Information
(INFO Softkey)
Satellite Phone
Pages (optional)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SiriusXM
Satellite
Pages
- Telephone
(TEL Softkey)
- Text Messaging
(SMS Softkey)
- Wi-Fi Setup
(WI-FI Softkey)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Data Link Pages
(optional)
Figure 1-30 Auxiliary Pages
AFCS
Connext Page
(optional)
System Status
Video (optional)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
41
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Nearest Pages (NRST)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Nearest Airports
Nearest Intersections
Nearest NDB
Nearest VOR
EIS
Nearest User Waypoints
Nearest Frequencies
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest Airspaces
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 1-31 Nearest Pages
In addition to the main page groups accessed exclusively using the FMS Knobs, the Flight Plan Pages can also
be accessed using the FPL Key on the PFD/MFD Control Unit. Main pages within this group are then selected
by pressing the FMS Key and turning the FMS Knobs. In some instances, softkeys may be used to access the
Procedure Pages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
Active Flight Plan
- Wide View, Narrow View
(VIEW Softkey)
AFCS
Flight Plan Catalog
or
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored Flight Plan (NEW Softkey)
APPENDICES
Narrow and
Wide View
Figure 1-32 Flight Plan Pages
INDEX
The Procedure pages may be accessed at any time on the PFD/MFD Control Unit by pressing the PROC Key.
A menu is initialized, and when a departure, approach, or arrival is selected, the appropriate Procedure Loading
Page is opened. Turning the FMS Knob does not scroll through the Procedure pages.
42
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Procedure Pages
(PROC)
Departure Loading
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Arrival Loading
Approach Loading
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 1-33 Procedure Pages
SYSTEM SETTINGS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
System settings are managed from the System Setup Page. The following settings can be changed:
• Time Format and Offset
• Display Units
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• Airspace alerts (see Flight Management Section)
• Audio Alert Voice
• Criteria for displaying nearest airports
(see Flight Management Section)
• Electronic Stability & Protection enable/disable
(see Additional Features Section)
AFCS
• Page Navigation Settings
• COM channel spacing
(see Audio Panel and CNS Section)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Baro Transition alert (see Flight Instruments
Section)
• CDI scaling for GPS navigation source
(see Flight Instruments Section)
• MFD Navigation Data Bar Fields
(see Flight Management Section)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Restoring system setup defaults:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the DFLTS Softkey.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Highlight ‘Restore Defaults’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
43
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-34 AUX - System Setup Page
DATE/TIME
AFCS
The system obtains the current Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) date and time directly from the GPS
satellite signals (shown on the AUX - GPS Status Page, Figure 1-24). System time (displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD) can be displayed in three formats: local 12-hr, local 24-hr, or UTC. Local time is set
by adding/subtracting an offset (hours:minutes) to/from UTC.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PFD
INDEX
Figure 1-35 System Time (Local 24-hr Format)
44
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring the system time:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page using the FMS Knob.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Time Format’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired format and press the ENT Key to confirm selection. The ‘Time
Offset’ field is highlighted.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time offset (±HH:MM) and press the ENT Key to confirm selection.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-36 Date/Time Settings
(AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
DISPLAY UNITS
AFCS
Units in which various quantities are displayed on the system screens are listed on the System Setup 1 Page.
The Navigation Angle reference can be set from here (refer to the Flight Instruments Section).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-37 Display Unit Settings
(AUX - System Setup 1 Page)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
45
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Category
Settings
Affected Quantities
Navigation Angle Magnetic (North) Heading
True (North)
Course
Bearing
Track
Desired Track
Wind direction (Trip Planning Page)
Distance and
Metric
Crosstrack error (HSI)
Speed
Nautical
Bearing distances (information windows)
DME distance (information window)
Flight plan distances
Map ranges
DIS, GS, TAS, XTK fields (Navigation Status Box)
All distances on MFD
Altitude buffer distance (System Setup)
All speeds on MFD
Altitude and
Vertical Speed
Feet
Meters
All altitudes on MFD
All elevations on MFD
Temperature
Celsius
Fahrenheit
Gallons
Liters
Pounds
Kilograms
HDDD°MM.MM’
HDDD°MM’SS.S”
All temperatures on PFD
Total Air Temperature (Trip Planning Page)
Fuel parameters (Trip Planning Page)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Fuel and
Fuel Flow
Weight
Position
Exceptions
Airspeed Indicator
True Airspeed (PFD)
Ground Speed (PFD)
Wind speed vector
Map range (Traffic Page, Terrain
Proximity/TAWS-B Page)
CDI scaling (System Setup)
Fuel range calculation (EIS)
Altimeter
Vertical Speed Indicator
VNV altitudes (Active Flight Plan)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
Engine Indication System (EIS)
N/A
N/A
All positions
N/A
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 1-1 Display Units Settings (AUX - System Setup Page)
46
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PILOT PROFILES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
System settings may be saved under a pilot profile. When the system is powered on, the last selected
pilot profile is shown on the MFD Power-up Page (Figure 1-18). The system can store up to 25 profiles; the
currently active profile, the number of profiles used, and the number of profiles available are shown at the top
of the System Setup Page in the box labeled ‘Pilot Profile’. From here, pilot profiles may be created, selected,
renamed, or deleted. Pilot profiles may also be exported from the system to an SD card, or imported from an
SD card into the system.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-38 Pilot Profiles
(AUX - System Setup Page)
AFCS
Creating a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CREATE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key. A ‘Create Profile’ window is displayed.
5) Use the FMS Knob to enter a profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key. Pilot profile names
cannot begin with a blank as the first letter.
APPENDICES
6) In the next field, use the small FMS Knob to select the desired settings upon which to base the new profile.
Profiles can be created based on Garmin factory defaults, default profile settings (initially based on Garmin
factory defaults unless edited by the pilot), or current system settings.
7) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
8) With ‘CREATE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to create the profile
Or:
Use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CREATE and ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to activate the new profile.
9) To cancel the process, select ‘CANCEL’ with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
47
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Selecting an active profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the active profile field in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the pilot profile list and highlight the desired profile.
5) Press the ENT Key. The system loads and displays the system settings for the selected profile.
Renaming a profile:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘RENAME’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Rename Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to rename.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter a new profile name up to 16 characters long and press the ENT Key.
8) With ‘RENAME’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
9) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting a profile:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘DELETE’ in the Pilot Profile Box.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) In the ‘Delete Profile’ window, turn the FMS Knob to select the profile to delete.
6) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) With ‘DELETE’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
8) To cancel the process, use the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
If an SD card is inserted into the top slot of the MFD, pilot profiles may imported from the SD card into the
system, or exported from the system to the SD card.
Because system settings may vary from one airframe to another, always verify system settings from an
imported profile are consistent with the desired settings.
Importing a profile from an SD card:
INDEX
1) Insert an SD card containing the pilot profile(s) into the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) Select the IMPORT Softkey.
48
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Import Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) The system displays the Pilot Profile Importing window with ‘IMPORT’ highlighted. To change the selected
profile to be imported from the SD card (shown as ‘SELECT FILE’), turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the
profile file name, then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight a profile from the list, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) If desired, the profile name to be used after profile has been imported can be changed by turning the FMS
Knob to highlight the ‘PROFILE NAME’ field, then use the large and small FMS Knobs to enter the name, and
press the ENT Key. Imported profile names cannot begin with a blank space or be named ‘DEFAULT’, ‘GARMIN
DEFAULTS’ or ‘DEFAULT SETTINGS’.
6) With ‘IMPORT’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) If the imported profile name is the same as an existing profile on the system, the system displays an ‘Overwrite
existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace profile on the system with the profile
imported from the SD card, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to the
Pilot Profile Importing window.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) If successful, the system displays ‘Pilot profile import succeeded.’ in the IMPORT RESULTS window below. With
‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT or CLR Keys or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
The imported profile becomes the active profile.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Pilot Profiles Available for Import from
SD Card (‘STEVE’S PROFILE’ Selected)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Profile Importing and Import
Results Window
Import Successful
Figure 1-39 Pilot Profile Import (AUX - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
49
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Exporting a profile to an SD card:
1) Insert the SD card for storing the Pilot Profile into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
3) If necessary, activate the desired pilot profile to export. Only the currently active Pilot Profile can be exported.
4) Select the EXPORT Softkey. The system displays the Pilot Profile Exporting window.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
b) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Export Pilot Profile’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) To export the pilot profile using the current supplied name, press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’ highlighted. To
change the profile file name turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘SELECT FILE’ field, then enter the new
name with the large and small FMS Knobs, then press the ENT Key. Then press the ENT Key with ‘EXPORT’
highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) If the profile name to be exported is the same as an existing profile file name on the SD card, the system displays
an ‘Overwrite existing file? OK or CANCEL’ prompt. Press the ENT Key to replace the profile on the SD card
with the profile to be exported, or turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key to return to
the Pilot Profile Exporting window without exporting the profile.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) If successful, the EXPORT RESULTS window displays ‘Pilot profile export succeeded.’ With ‘OK’ highlighted,
press the ENT or CLR Keys, or press the FMS Knob to return to the AUX - System Setup Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pilot Profile Exporting Window, Enter a
Name to Use for Exported Profile
Export Successful
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 1-40 Pilot Profile Export on the AUX - System Setup Page
50
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PAGE NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The large FMS Knob displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates through the tabs. The small FMS Knob
navigates through the pages within a specific group. The number of clicks it takes to display the Page Group
Tabs and change to the next tab can be controlled from the Page Navigation box on the AUX - System Setup
Page.
OFF – Displays the Page Group Tabs with one click of the large FMS Knob.
ON – Displays the Page Group Tabs and navigates to the next tab with one click of the large FMS Knob.
EIS
The pilot can select, from the AUX - System Setup Page, the amount of time the Page Group Tabs are
displayed (in the lower right corner of the MFD). The timeout can range from two to ten seconds.
Selecting page navigation settings:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Change On 1st Click’ field in the Page Navigation Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘OFF’ or ‘ON’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘Timeout Seconds’ field in the Page navigation Box.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired number of seconds
7) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 1-41 Page Navigation Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
51
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
TIMERS
The system timers available include:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Stopwatch-like generic timers (available from the PFD Timer/References Window and on the MFD AUX Utility Page)
• Total-time-in-flight timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
• Time since departure (MFD AUX - Utility Page)
EIS
The generic timer can be set to count up or down from a specified time (HH:MM:SS). When the countdown
on the timer reaches zero the digits begin to count up from zero. If the timer is reset before reaching zero
on a countdown, the digits are reset to the initial value. If the timer is counting up when reset, the digits are
zeroed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the generic timer (PFD):
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the timer field (hh/mm/ss).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
4) With the UP/DN field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction.
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) With ‘START?’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to ‘STOP?’.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
8) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
9) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
PFD
Figure 1-42 Generic Timer (Timer/References Window)
INDEX
The flight timer can be set to count up from zero starting at system power-up or from the time that the aircraft
lifts off; the timer can also be reset to zero at any time.
Setting the generic timer (MFD AUX - Utility Page):
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
52
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the timer counting direction (UP/DN) and press the ENT Key.
4) If a specific starting time is desired:
a) Use the large FMS Knob to highlight the HH:MM:SS field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time and press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘START?’ and press the ENT Key to start the timer. The field changes to
‘STOP?’.
6) To stop the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘STOP?’ highlighted. The field changes to ‘RESET?’.
EIS
7) To reset the timer, press the ENT Key with ‘RESET?’ highlighted. The field changes back to ‘START?’ and the
digits are reset.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 1-43 Timers
(AUX - Utility Page)
Setting the flight timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the flight timer.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the flight timer:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) With ‘Reset Flight Timer’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
The system records the time at which departure occurs, depending on whether the pilot prefers the time to
be recorded from system power-up or from aircraft lift off. The displayed departure time can also be reset to
display the current time at the point of reset. The format in which the time is displayed is controlled from the
System Setup Page.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
53
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Setting the departure timer starting criterion:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the field next to the departure time.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the starting criterion (PWR-ON or IN-AIR) and press the ENT Key.
Resetting the departure time:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - Utility Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Reset Departure Time’ and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS POSITION
The Timer/References Window on the PFD shows the current GPS position at the bottom of the window
using the selected display format (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PFD
AFCS
GPS Position
Figure 1-42 GPS Position (Timer/References Window)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing the GPS Position in the Timer/References Window:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘POSITION’ field appears.
APPENDICES
3) To remove the Timer/References Window, press the TMR/REF Softkey or press the CLR Key.
Changing the GPS Position display format:
1) On the MFD, turn the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup 1 Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘POSITION’ field in the Display Units Window.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired selection (HHDDºMM.MM’ or HDDDºMM’SS.S”) and press the
ENT Key.
54
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1.7 DISPLAY BACKLIGHTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The dimming bus is the primary source for backlighting adjustments of the PFD and MFD displays, bezel, Audio
Panel keys, AFCS Control Unit keys, and PFD/MFD Control Unit keys. The automatic backlighting adjustment
for the AFCS Control Unit annunciators and PFD/MFD Control Unit annunciators uses photocell technology to
automatically adjust for ambient lighting conditions. Photocell calibration curves are pre-configured to optimize
display appearance through a broad range of cockpit lighting conditions. Manual backlighting adjustment can
be accomplished using the existing instrument panel dimming bus or the following procedures. In normal
operating mode, backlighting can only be adjusted from the PFD. In Reversionary Mode, it can be adjusted from
the remaining display.
EIS
Adjusting display backlighting:
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’ next to ‘MFD DSPL’ and repeat steps 2-4.
6) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
Adjusting key backlighting:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD MENU Key to display the PFD Setup Menu. ‘AUTO’ is now highlighted next to ‘PFD DSPL’.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘PFD DSPL’.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘PFD KEY’.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘AUTO’.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MANUAL’.
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key. The intensity value is now highlighted.
7) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired backlighting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
8) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘MFD DSPL’.
9) Turn the small FMS Knob in the direction of the green arrowhead to display ‘MFD KEY’ and repeat steps 4-7.
10) To remove the menu, press the CLR or MENU Key.
PFD
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 1-44 PFD Setup Menu
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
55
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM OVERVIEW
Blank Page
56
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 2 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: If the airspeed, attitude, altitude, or heading indications become unusable, refer to the backup
instruments.
NOTE: The Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) provides additional readouts and bugs on selected flight
instruments. Refer to the AFCS Section for details on these bugs and readouts, as they appear on the display
during certain AFCS flight director modes.
EIS
The Primary Flight Display (PFD) features a large horizon, airspeed, attitude, altitude, vertical speed, and
course deviation information. In addition to the flight instruments, navigation, communication, terrain, traffic,
and weather information are also presented on the PFD and explained in other sections of this Pilot’s Guide.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The following flight instruments and supplemental flight data are displayed on the PFD:
• Airspeed Indicator, showing
– Selected Altitude
– Indicated Airspeed
– True Airspeed
• Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
– Turn Rate Indicator
– Reference bugs
• Vertical Navigation indications
– Airspeed awareness ranges
• Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
– Bearing pointers and
information windows
• Attitude Indicator with slip/skid
indication
• DME Tuning Window
– DME Information Window
• Wind data
– Navigation source
• Altimeter, showing
• System time
– Course Deviation Indicator
(CDI)
– Barometric setting
• Inset Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Ground Speed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Horizontal Situation Indicator,
showing
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
AFCS
The PFD also displays various alerts and annunciations.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
57
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
23
22
21
20
19
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18
17
2
EIS
16
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
14
5
13
6
12
7
11
10
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9
1
Percent Power Box
13
Turn Rate Indicator
2
Airspeed Indicator
14
Barometric Altimeter Setting
3
True Airspeed
15
Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI)
4
Ground Speed
16
Selected Altitude Bug
5
Current Heading
17
Altimeter
6
Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
18
Selected Altitude
7
Course Deviation Indicator (CDI)
19
COM Frequency Box
8
Outside Air Temperature (OAT)
20
Navigation Status Box
9
Softkeys
21
AFCS Status Box
10
System Time
22
Slip/Skid Indicator
11
Transponder Status Box
23
Attitude Indicator
12
Selected Heading Bug
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-1 Primary Flight Display (Default)
58
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
EIS
11
2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
10
3
9
4
7
1
Traffic Annunciation
8
Barometric Minimums Box
2
Selected Heading
9
Flight Plan Window
3
Wind Data
10
Annunciation Window
4
Inset Map
11
Current Vertical Speed
5
DME Information Window
12
Glidepath Indicator
6
Bearing 1 Information Window
13
Terrain Annunciation
7
Selected Course
14
AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6
5
8
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-2 Primary Flight Display (Additional Information)
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
59
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
2.1 FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AIRSPEED INDICATOR
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for speed criteria and Vspeed values.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Airspeed Indicator displays airspeed on a moving tape rolling number gauge. The numeric labels and
major tick marks on the moving tape are shown at intervals of 10 knots. The minor tick marks on the moving
tape are shown at intervals of five knots. Speed indication starts at 20 knots, with 56 knots of airspeed viewable
at any time. The indicated airspeed is displayed inside the black pointer. The pointer remains black until
reaching the never-exceed speed (VNE), at which point it turns red. The true airspeed is displayed in knots
below the Airspeed Indicator. The Ground Speed appears in knots to the left of the true airspeed.
Operating Ranges
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Trend
Vector
Low Speed Range
Red and White
Barber Pole at VNE
Vspeed
References
Indicated
Airspeed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Speed
Ranges
AFCS
Ground
Speed
True
Airspeed
Figure 2-3 Airspeed Indicator Ranges
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Color coded stripes appear on the Airspeed Indicator to show the operating ranges. The low speed range
stripe is red. Normal operating range is green, caution range is yellow, and the never exceed speed (VNE) begins
with a red and white barber pole. The flap operating range is indicated by a white stripe.
APPENDICES
A red low speed awareness band extends up to the low speed awareness velocity, VLSA.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
INDEX
limitations. This option is only available in SR22 models.
60
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airspeed Trend Vector is a vertical magenta line that appears to the right of the color-coded speed range
strip when airspeed is either accelerating or decelerating. One end of the magenta line is anchored to the
tip of the airspeed pointer while the other end moves continuously up or down corresponding to the rate of
acceleration or deceleration. For any constant rate of acceleration or deceleration, the moving end of the line
shows approximately what the indicated airspeed value will be in six seconds. If the trend vector crosses VNE,
the indicated airspeed number changes to yellow. The trend vector is absent if the speed remains constant or if
any data needed to calculate airspeed is not available due to a system failure.
EIS
Vspeeds (Glide, VR, VX, and VY) bugs can be turned on/off from the Timer/References Window. VR is categorized
as a takeoff Vspeed. When active (on), the Vspeeds are displayed at their respective locations to the right of the
airspeed scale. All Vspeed bug changes are restored to their default values when power is cycled.
NOTE: VX and VY can only be modified on the SR22.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing Vspeeds and turning Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ON/OFF field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to ON or counterclockwise to OFF.
4) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or the TMR/REF Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 2-4 Timer/References Window and Menus
Vspeed bugs can be turned on or off all at once or by category (takeoff).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turning all Vspeed bugs on/off:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
2) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
3) To activate all Vspeed bugs, press the ENT Key with All References On highlighted.
4) To remove all Vspeed bugs, turn the FMS Knob to highlight All References Off and press the ENT Key.
Restoring all Vspeed defaults:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight Restore Defaults and press the ENT Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
61
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
ATTITUDE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Attitude information is displayed over a virtual blue sky and brown ground with a white horizon line. The
Attitude Indicator displays the pitch, roll, and slip/skid information.
9
8
1
7
EIS
2
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
1
Roll Pointer
2
Roll Scale
3
Horizon Line
4
Aircraft Symbol
5
Land Representation
6
Pitch Scale
7
Slip/Skid Indicator
8
Sky Representation
9
Roll Scale Zero
Figure 2-5 Attitude Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The horizon line is part of the pitch scale. Above and below the horizon line, major pitch marks and numeric
labels are shown for every 10˚, up to 80˚. Minor pitch marks are shown for intervening 5˚ increments, up to
25˚ below and 45˚ above the horizon line. Between 20˚ below to 20˚ above the horizon line, minor pitch marks
occur every 2.5˚. When the optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system is activated, the pitch scale
is reduced to 10˚ up and 7.5˚ down; refer to the Additional Features section for more information about SVT.
AFCS
The inverted white triangle indicates zero on the roll scale. Major tick marks at 30˚ and 60˚ and minor tick
marks at 10˚, 20˚, and 45˚ are shown to the left and right of the zero. When the optional Electronic Stability
and Protection (ESP) system is available, double ticks marks also appear on the roll scale; refer to the Additional
Features section for more information about ESP indications. Angle of bank is shown by the position of the
pointer on the roll scale.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Slip/Skid Indicator is the bar beneath the roll pointer. The indicator moves with the roll pointer and
moves laterally away from the pointer to indicate lateral acceleration. Slip/skid is indicated by the location of
the bar relative to the pointer.
INDEX
Figure 2-6 Slip/Skid Indication
62
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTIMETER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altimeter displays 600 feet of barometric altitude values at a time on a moving tape rolling number gauge.
Numeric labels and major tick marks are shown at intervals of 100 feet. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 20
feet. The indicated altitude is displayed inside the black pointer.
The Selected Altitude is displayed above the Altimeter in the box indicated by a selection bug symbol. A bug
corresponding to this altitude is shown on the tape. If the Selected Altitude exceeds the range shown on the
tape, the bug appears at the upper or lower edge of the tape. When the metric value is selected it is displayed
in a separate box above the Selected Altitude.
EIS
When a Selected Altitude is set, a light blue Selected Altitude Intercept Arc (if enabled) is displayed on the
navigation maps when the aircraft is climbing or descending. This arc appears at the estimated position the
aircraft will intercept the Selected Altitude; refer to the Flight Management Section for additional information
about the Selected Altitude Intercept Arc.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Setting the Selected Altitude:
T urn the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude in 100-ft increments (up to the aircraft’s service ceiling.
When meters are displayed, Selected Altitude is adjusted in 50 meter increments.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If set, the Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height (MDA/DH) value is also available for the Selected Altitude.
If desired, press the ALT SEL Knob to synchronize the selected altitude to the displayed altitude to the nearest
10 ft.
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Indicated
Altitude
Indicated
Altitude
(Meters)
AFCS
Altitude
Trend
Vector
Selected
Altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
Bug
Selected
Altitude
(Meters)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Barometric
Setting Box
(Hectopascals)
Barometric
Setting
Figure 2-7 Altimeter Settings, In Hg and Metric
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
63
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Altitudes can also be displayed in meters (Figure 2-7). Note that the altitude tape does not change scale.
Displaying altitude in meters:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the METERS Softkey to turn on metric altitude readouts.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
EIS
A magenta Altitude Trend Vector extends up or down the left of the altitude tape, the end resting at the
approximate altitude to be reached in six seconds at the current vertical speed. The trend vector is not shown
if altitude remains constant or if data needed for calculation is not available due to a system failure.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The barometric pressure setting is displayed below the Altimeter in inches of mercury (in Hg) or hectopascals
(hPa) when metric units are selected. Adjusting the altimeter barometric pressure setting creates discontinuities
in VNV vertical navigation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
aircraft to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV Target
Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selecting the altimeter barometric pressure setting:
Turn the BARO Knob to select the desired setting.
Selecting standard barometric pressure:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the BARO Knob to select standard pressure; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
Or:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
AFCS
2) Press the STD BARO Softkey; STD BARO is displayed in the Barometric Setting box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-8 Standard Barometric Altimeter Setting
Changing altimeter barometric pressure setting units:
1) Press the PFD Softkey to display the second-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ALT UNIT Softkey.
3) Press the IN Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in inches of mercury (in Hg).
Or, press the HPA Softkey to display the barometric pressure setting in hectopascals (hPa).
INDEX
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top-level softkeys.
64
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
A Baro Transition Alert is provided to alert the pilot to change the barometric pressure setting when crossing
the transition altitude (in either direction). This is displayed by the barometric pressure setting flashing light blue
when crossing the transition altitude. The flashing stops when the barometric pressure setting is changed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Setting the Baro Transition Alert:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ON or OFF in the Baro Transition Alert box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to turn the alert OFF or ON and press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) With the altitude field highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to set desired altitude and press the ENT Key.
6) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 2-9 Baro Transition Alert
(AUX - System Setup Page)
APPENDICES
VERTICAL SPEED INDICATOR (VSI)
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The Vertical Speed Indicator (VSI) displays the aircraft vertical speed with numeric labels and tick marks at
1000 and 2000 fpm in each direction on the non-moving tape. Minor tick marks are at intervals of 500 fpm.
The current vertical speed is displayed in the pointer, which also points to that speed on the non-moving tape.
Digits appear in the pointer when the climb or descent rate is greater than 100 fpm. If the rate of ascent/descent
exceeds 2000 fpm, the pointer appears at the corresponding edge of the tape and the rate appears inside the
pointer.
65
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A magenta chevron bug is displayed as the Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI; Figure 2-10) for reaching
a VNV Target Altitude once the “TOD [Top of Descent] within 1 minute” alert has been generated. See the
Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer to Section 2.2, Supplemental
Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFD.
VERTICAL DEVIATION
EIS
The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI; Figure 2-10) uses a magenta chevron to indicate the baro-VNV vertical
deviation when Vertical Navigation (VNV) is being used; the VDI appears in conjunction with the “TOD within
1 minute” alert. Full-scale deflection (two dots) is 1000 feet. The VDI is removed from the display if vertical
deviation becomes invalid. See the Flight Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features, and refer
to Section 2.2, Supplemental Flight Data, for more information about VNV indications on the PFDs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Glideslope Indicator (Figure 2-11) appears to the left of the Altimeter whenever an ILS frequency is tuned
in the active NAV field and the aircraft heading and selected course are within 107°. A green diamond acts as
the Glideslope Indicator, like a glideslope needle on a conventional indicator. If a localizer frequency is tuned
and there is no glideslope, “NO GS” is displayed in place of the diamond.
NOTE: The Glidepath Indicator appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
active waypoint. Depending on procedure design, pilot action, and/or ATC clearance, the aircraft may be
centered on or above the glidepath when the Glidepath Indicator appears.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Glidepath Indicator is a vertical deviation scale for RNAV GPS approaches supporting SBAS vertical
guidance (LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LPV, and LP+V service levels). The Glidepath Indicator, a magenta diamond
(Figure 2-12) appears on the display as soon as the Final Approach Fix (FAF) becomes the active waypoint, and
FMS is the selected navigation source. Full-scale deflection (two dots), is angular with upper and lower limits.
The upper limit is +/-150 meters and lower limits depend on approach service level.
•
LNAV/VNAV is +/- 45 meters.
•
LPV/LP+V is +/- 15 meters.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If the approach service level downgrades past the final approach fix (FAF), “NO GP” is displayed in place of
the diamond.
66
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Marker
Beacon
Annunciation
Required
Vertical Glideslope
Speed
Indicator
Indicator
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VNV Target
Altitude
Glidepath
Indicator
Figure 2-11 Glideslope Indicator
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 2-10 Vertical Speed and
Deviation Indicators (VSI and VDI)
EIS
Vertical
Speed
Pointer
Figure 2-12 Glidepath Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HORIZONTAL SITUATION INDICATOR (HSI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI) displays a rotating compass card in a heading-up orientation. Letters
indicate the cardinal points and numeric labels occur every 30˚. Major tick marks are at 10˚ intervals and minor
tick marks at 5˚ intervals. A digital reading of the current heading appears on top of the HSI, and the current
track is represented on the HSI by a magenta diamond bug. The HSI also presents turn rate, course deviation,
bearing, and navigation source information and is available in two formats (360˚ compass rose and 140˚ arc).
Changing the HSI display format:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
AFCS
2) Press the HSI FRMT Softkey.
3) Press the 360 HSI or ARC HSI Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The 360˚ HSI contains a Course Deviation Indicator (CDI), with a Course Pointer, To/From Indicator, and a
sliding deviation bar and scale. The course pointer is a single line arrow (GPS, VOR1, and LOC1) or a double
line arrow (VOR2 and LOC2) which points in the direction of the set course. The To/From arrow rotates with
the course pointer and is displayed when the active NAVAID is received.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
67
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
14
13
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
11
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
10
4
9
5
8
6
7
2
Turn Rate/Heading
Trend Vector
Current Track Indicator
3
Course Deviation Indicator
4
Navigation Source
5
To/From Indicator
6
Course Pointer
7
Rotating Compass Rose
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3
8
Lateral Deviation Scale
9
Aircraft Symbol
10
Flight Phase
11
Selected Heading Bug
12
Lubber Line
13
Current Heading
14
Turn Rate Indicator
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-13 Horizontal Situation Indicator (HSI)
68
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Course
Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Arc HSI is a 140˚ expanded section of the compass rose. The Arc HSI contains a Course Pointer,
To/From Indicator, a sliding deviation indicator (the To/From and deviation indicators are combined), and a
deviation scale. Upon station passage, the To/From Indicator flips and points to the tail of the aircraft, just like
a conventional To/From flag. Depending on the navigation source, the CDI on the Arc HSI can appear in two
different ways: an arrowhead (GPS, VOR, OBS) or a diamond (LOC).
Flight Phase
Annunciation
EIS
Navigation
Source
Lateral
Deviation
Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Course Deviation
and To/From
Indicator
Figure 2-14 ARC HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Selected Heading is shown to the upper left of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted The light blue
bug on the compass rose corresponds to the Selected Heading. While the HSI is displayed as an arc, if the
Selected Heading Bug is adjusted off the shown portion of the compass rose, the digital reading is displayed.
Adjusting the Selected Heading:
Turn the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the HDG Knob to synchronize the bug to the current heading.
The Selected Course is shown to the upper right of the HSI for 3 seconds after being adjusted. While the
HSI is displayed as an arc, the Selected Course is displayed whenever the Course Pointer is not within the 140˚
currently shown.
AFCS
Adjusting the Selected Course:
Turn the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course.
Current Track
Indicator
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the CRS Knob to re-center the CDI and return the course pointer to the bearing of the active waypoint or
navigation station (see OBS Mode for adjusting a GPS course).
Current
Heading
Selected
Heading
APPENDICES
Selected
Course
Heading Bug
INDEX
Figure 2-15 Heading and Course Indications (Magnetic)
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
69
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation angles (track, heading, course, bearing) are corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag
Var) or referenced to true north (T), set on the AUX - System Setup Page. When an approach referenced to
true north has been loaded into the flight plan, the system generates a message to change the navigation angle
setting to True at the appropriate time.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the navigation angle setting:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-16 Heading and Course Indications (True)
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Nav Angle in the Display Units box.
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
• TRUE - References angles to true north (T)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• MAGNETIC - Angles corrected to the computed magnetic variation (Mag Var)
INDEX
Figure 2-17 Navigation Angle Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
70
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TURN RATE INDICATOR
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Turn Rate Indicator is located directly above the rotating compass card. Tick marks to the left and right
of the lubber line denote half-standard and standard turn rates. A magenta Turn Rate Trend Vector shows the
current turn rate. The end of the trend vector gives the heading predicted in 6 seconds, based on the present
turn rate. A standard-rate turn is shown on the indicator by the trend vector stopping at the standard turn
rate tick mark, corresponding to a predicted heading of 18˚ from the current heading. At rates greater than 4
deg/sec, an arrowhead appears at the end of the magenta trend vector and the prediction is no longer valid.
Half-standard
Turn Rate
EIS
Standard
Turn Rate
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Arrow Shown
for Turn Rate
> 4 deg/sec
Figure 2-18 Turn Rate Indicator and Trend Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
BEARING POINTERS AND INFORMATION WINDOWS
NOTE: When the Arc HSI is displayed, the Bearing Information windows and pointers are disabled.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Two bearing pointers (the second of which is an optional feature) and associated information can be
displayed on the HSI for the NAV, GPS, and ADF sources. The bearing pointers are light blue and are singleline (BRG1) or double-line (BRG2). A pointer symbol is shown in the information window to indicate the
navigation source. The bearing pointers never override the CDI and are visually separated from the CDI by a
white ring. Bearing pointers may be selected but not necessarily visible due to data unavailability.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
71
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Tuning Mode
Bearing 1
Pointer
Frequency
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance
Bearing 2
Pointer
DME Information Window
No
Waypoint
Selected
Station
Identifier
EIS
Distance to
Bearing Source
Pointer
Bearing
Icon
Source
Bearing 2 Information Window
(Optional)
Figure 2-19 HSI with Bearing and DME Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Bearing
Pointer
Source
Icon
Bearing 1 Information Window
72
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a bearing pointer is displayed, the associated information window is also displayed. The Bearing
Information Windows are displayed at the lower sides of the HSI and give the following information:
• Station/waypoint identifier (NAV, GPS)
• Pointer icon (BRG = single line)
• GPS-derived great circle distance to bearing
source
• Frequency (NAV, ADF)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Bearing source (NAV, GPS)
EIS
If the NAV radio is the bearing source and is tuned to an ILS frequency (refer to the Audio Panel and CNS
Section for information on tuning the radios), the bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and the frequency
is replaced with “ILS”. When NAV1 or NAV2 is the selected bearing source, the frequency is replaced by the
station identifier when the station is within range. If GPS is the bearing source, the active waypoint identifier
is displayed in lieu of a frequency.
The bearing pointer is removed from the HSI and “NO DATA” is displayed in the information window if:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The NAV radio is not receiving the tuned VOR station
• GPS is the bearing source and an active waypoint is not selected
Selecting bearing display and changing sources:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the BRG Softkey to display the bearing pointer and information window with NAV1 source.
3) Press the BRG Softkey again to change the bearing source to NAV2.
4) Press the BRG Softkey a third time to change the bearing source to GPS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the BRG Softkey a fourth time to change the bearing source to ADF (ADF Radio installation is optional).
6) To remove the bearing pointer and information window, press the BRG Softkey again.
DME INFORMATION WINDOW
AFCS
The DME Information Window is displayed above the BRG1 Information Window on the 360˚ HSI and in
a box above and along side the Arc HSI. It shows the DME label, tuning mode (NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD),
frequency, and distance. When a signal is invalid, the distance is replaced by –.– – NM Refer to the Audio
Panel and CNS Section for information on tuning the DMEs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying the DME Information Window:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Information Window.
APPENDICES
3) To remove the DME Information Window, press the DME Softkey again.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
73
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
COURSE DEVIATION INDICATOR (CDI)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) moves left or right from the course pointer along a lateral deviation
scale to display aircraft position relative to the course. If the course deviation data is not valid, the CDI is not
displayed.
360˚ HSI
Arc HSI
Flight
Phase
EIS
Navigation
Source
Crosstrack
Error
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
CDI
Navigation
Source
CDI Scale
Flight
Phase
CDI
Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-20 Course Deviation Indicator
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The CDI can display two sources of navigation: GPS or NAV (VOR, localizer). Color indicates the current
navigation source: magenta (for GPS) or green (for VOR and LOC); the Selected Course readout also follows
these color indications. When coupled to GPS, the full scale limits for the CDI are defined by a GPS-derived
distance. When coupled to a VOR or localizer (LOC), the CDI has the same angular limits as a mechanical CDI.
If the CDI exceeds the maximum deviation on the scale (two dots) while coupled to GPS, the crosstrack error
(XTK) is displayed below the white aircraft symbol.
INDEX
Figure 2-21 Navigation Sources
74
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Changing navigation sources:
1) Press the CDI Softkey to change from GPS to VOR1 or LOC1. The NAV1 standby frequency in the upper left
corner of the MFD is light blue.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the CDI Softkey again to change from VOR1 or LOC1 to VOR2 or LOC2. The NAV2 standby frequency in
the upper left corner of the MFD is light blue.
3) Press the CDI Softkey a third time to return to GPS.
NAV1 Selected for Tuning
NAV2 Selected for Tuning
EIS
LOC1
Selected
VOR2
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the CDI
Softkey Cycles through
Navigation Sources
Figure 2-22 Selecting a Navigation Source
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The system automatically switches from GPS to LOC navigation source and changes the CDI scaling
accordingly when all of the following occur:
• A localizer or ILS approach has been loaded into the active flight plan
• The Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active leg, the FAF is less than 15 nm away, and the aircraft is moving
toward the FAF
• A valid localizer frequency has been tuned
AFCS
• The GPS CDI deviation is less than 1.2 times full-scale deflection
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
GPS steering guidance is still provided after the CDI automatically switches to LOC until LOC capture, up
to the Final Approach Fix (FAF) for an ILS approach, or until GPS information becomes invalid. Activating a
Vector-to-Final (see the Flight Management Section) also causes the CDI to switch to LOC navigation source;
GPS steering guidance is not provided after this switch.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
75
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
GPS CDI SCALING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When GPS is the selected navigation source, the flight plan legs are sequenced automatically and
annunciations appear on the HSI for the flight phase. Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in
magenta, but when cautionary conditions exist the color changes to yellow. If the current leg in the flight plan
is a heading leg, ‘HDG LEG’ is annunciated in magenta beneath the aircraft symbol.
EIS
The current GPS CDI scale setting is displayed as ‘System CDI’ on the AUX - System Setup Page and the fullscale deflection setting may also be changed (2.0 nm, 1.0 nm, 0.3 nm, or Auto) from this page. If the selected
scaling is smaller than the automatic setting for enroute and terminal phases, the CDI is scaled accordingly and
the selected setting is be displayed rather than the flight phase annunciation. Receiver Autonomous Integrity
Monitoring (RAIM) protection limits follow the selected CDI scale and corresponding flight phases.
Changing the selected GPS CDI setting:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Selected in the GPS CDI box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired setting and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
APPENDICES
Figure 2-23 GPS CDI Settings
(AUX - System Setup Page)
INDEX
When set to ‘Auto’ (default), the GPS CDI scale automatically adjusts to the desired limits based upon the
current phase of flight (Figure 2-24, Table 2-1).
76
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Enroute
(Oceanic if >200 nm
from nearest airport)
Terminal
Approach
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
Terminal
Refer to accompanying
approach CDI scaling figures
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CDI Full-scale Deflection
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Missed
Approach
EIS
Figure 2-24 Automatic CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Once a departure procedure is activated, the CDI is scaled for departure (0.3 nm).
• The system switches from departure to terminal CDI scaling (1.0 nm) under the following conditions:
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not aligned with the departure runway
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the departure procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the departure procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
• At 30 nm from the departure airport the enroute phase of flight is automatically entered and CDI scaling
changes to 2.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- When navigating with an active departure procedure, the flight phase and CDI scale does not change
until the aircraft arrives at the last departure waypoint (if more than 30 nm from the departure airport) or
the leg after the last departure waypoint has been activated or a direct-to waypoint is activated.
• If after completing the departure procedure the nearest airport is more than 200 nm away from the aircraft
and the approach procedure has not yet commenced, the CDI is scaled for oceanic flight (2.0 nm).
AFCS
• Within 31 nm of the destination airport (terminal area), the CDI scale gradually ramps down from 2.0 nm
to 1.0 nm over a distance of 1.0 nm, except under the following conditions:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Upon reaching the first waypoint of an arrival route that is more than 31 nm from the destination airport,
the flight phase changes to terminal and the CDI scale begins to transition down from 2.0 nm to 1.0 nm
over a distance of 1.0 nm.
APPENDICES
• During approach, the CDI scale ramps down even further (see Figures 2-25 and 2-26). This transition
normally occurs within 2.0 nm of the Final Approach Fix (FAF). The CDI switches to approach scaling
automatically once the approach procedure is active or if Vectors-To-Final (VTF) are selected.
- If the active waypoint is the FAF, the ground track and the bearing to the FAF must be within 45° of the
final approach segment course.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
- If the active waypoint is part of the missed approach procedure, the active leg and the preceding missed
approach legs must be aligned with the final approach segment course and the aircraft must not have
passed the turn initiation point.
77
2 nm
FAF
EIS
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2 nm
FAF
Landing
Threshold
CDI scale varies if VTF is activated
Figure 2-25 Typical LNAV and LNAV+V Approach Service Level
CDI Scaling
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
angle based
on database
information
course width
angle set
by system
CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
CDI scale is set to the smaller of 0.3 nm
or an angle set by the system
350 ft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CDI Full-scale Deflection
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Figure 2-26 Typical LNAV/VNAV, LPV, LP, and LP+V
Approach Service Level CDI Scaling
• When a missed approach is activated, the CDI scale changes to 0.3 nm.
• The system automatically switches back to terminal mode under the following conditions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not aligned with the final approach path
- The next leg in the missed approach procedure is not a CA, CD, CF, CI, CR, DF, FA, FC, FD, FM, IF, or TF leg
- After any leg in the missed approach procedure that is not a CA or FA leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Phase
Departure
Terminal
Enroute
Oceanic
Approach
LNAV
LNAV+V
Approach
LNAV/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
Missed Approach
Annunciation*
DPRT
TERM
ENR
OCN
LNAV
LNAV+V
L/VNAV
LPV
LP
LP+V
MAPR
Automatic CDI Full-scale Deflection
0.3 nm
1.0 nm
2.0 nm
2.0 nm
1.0 nm decreasing to 350 feet depending on
variables (see Figure 2-25)
1.0 nm decreasing to a specified course width, then
0.3 nm, depending on variables (see Figure 2-26)
0.3 nm
APPENDICES
* Flight phase annunciations are normally shown in magenta, but when cautionary
conditions exist the color changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 2-1 Automatic GPS CDI Scaling
78
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OBS MODE
NOTE: VNV is inhibited while automatic waypoint sequencing has been suspended.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode suspends the automatic sequencing of waypoints in a GPS
flight plan (GPS must be the selected navigation source), but retains the current “active-to” waypoint as the
navigation reference even after passing the waypoint. ‘OBS’ is annunciated to the lower right of the aircraft
symbol when OBS Mode is selected.
EIS
While OBS Mode is enabled, a course line is drawn through the “active-to” waypoint on the moving map.
If desired, the course to/from the waypoint can now be adjusted. When OBS Mode is disabled, the GPS flight
plan returns to normal operation with automatic sequencing of waypoints, following the course set in OBS
Mode. The flight path on the moving map retains the modified course line.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GPS
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Extended
Course
Line
OBS Mode
Enabled
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Again
Disables OBS Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the OBS
Softkey Enables
OBS Mode
Figure 2-27 Omni-bearing Selector (OBS) Mode
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
79
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling OBS Mode while navigating a GPS flight plan:
1) Press the OBS Softkey to select OBS Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn a CRS Knob to select the desired course to/from the waypoint. Press a CRS Knob to synchronize the
Selected Course with the bearing to the next waypoint.
3) Press the OBS Softkey again to return to automatic waypoint sequencing.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
As the aircraft crosses the missed approach point (MAP), automatic approach waypoint sequencing is
suspended. SUSP appears on the HSI at the lower right of the aircraft symbol. The OBS Softkey label
changes to indicate the suspension is active as shown in Figure 2-28. Pressing the SUSP Softkey, deactivates
the suspension and resumes automatic sequencing of approach waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SUSP
Softkey
SUSP
Annunciation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-28 Suspending Automatic Waypoint Sequencing
80
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.2 SUPPLEMENTAL FLIGHT DATA
NOTE: Pressing the DFLTS Softkey (a second-level PFD softkey) turns off metric Altimeter display, the Inset
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map, and wind data display.
In addition to the flight instruments, the PFD also displays various supplemental information, including
temperatures, wind data, and Vertical Navigation (VNV) indications.
TEMPERATURE DISPLAY
EIS
The Outside Air Temperature (OAT) is displayed in degrees Celsius (°C) by default in the lower left of the PFD
under normal display conditions, or below the true airspeed in reversionary mode. It may also be displayed in
degrees Fahrenheit from the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Normal Display
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Reversionary Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 2-29 Outside Air Temperature
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
81
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
Changing temperature display units:
1) Select the AUX - System Setup Page on the MFD using the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the TEMP field in the Display Units box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight either CELSIUS or FAHRENHEIT and press the ENT Key to confirm the
selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5) To cancel the selection, press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-30 Temperature Selection
(AUX - System Setup Page)
82
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
WIND DATA
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wind direction and speed in knots can be displayed relative to the aircraft in a window to the upper left of
the HSI. When the window is selected for display, but wind information is invalid or unavailable, the window
displays NO WIND DATA. Wind data can be displayed in two different ways.
Option 1
EIS
Option 2
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
No Data
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-31 Wind Data
Displaying wind data:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the WIND Softkey to display wind data.
3) Press one of the OPTN softkeys to change how wind data is displayed:
• OPTN 1: Wind direction arrow with numeric True direction and speed
AFCS
• OPTN 2: Headwind/tailwind and crosswind arrows with numeric speed components
4) To remove the window, press the OFF Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
83
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
VERTICAL NAVIGATION (VNV) INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When a VNV flight plan has been activated, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude, RVSI, VDI) appear on the
PFD in conjunction with the “TOD within 1 minute” message and “Vertical track” voice alert. See the Flight
Management and AFCS sections for details on VNV features. VNV indications are removed from the PFD
according to the criteria listed in Table 2-2.
Top of Descent Message
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
Figure 2-32 Vertical Navigation Indications (PFD)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
VNV Indication Removed
Criteria
Required Vertical
Vertical
VNV Target
Speed (RVSI)
Deviation (VDI)
Altitude*
Aircraft > 1 min before the next TOD due to flight plan change
X
X
X
VNV cancelled (CNCL VNV Softkey pressed on MFD)
X
X
X
Distance to active waypoint cannot be computed due to
unsupported flight plan leg type (see Flight Management
X
X
X
Section)
Aircraft > 250 feet below active VNV Target Altitude
X
X
X
Current crosstrack or track angle error has exceeded limit
X
X
X
Active altitude-constrained waypoint can not be reached within
X
X
maximum allowed flight path angle and vertical speed
* If the flight director has been engaged to fly a VNV flight plan, the VNV Target Altitude being held remains displayed
while on level flight plan legs.
INDEX
Table 2-2 VNV Indication Removal Criteria
84
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.3 PFD ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTING FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following annunciations and alerting functions are displayed on the PFD. Refer to Appendix A for more
information on alerts and annunciations.
MARKER BEACON ANNUNCIATIONS
Marker Beacon Annunciations are displayed on the PFD to the left of the Selected Altitude. Outer marker
reception is indicated in blue, middle in amber, and inner in white. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS Section
for more information on Marker Beacon Annunciations.
Middle Marker
EIS
Outer Marker
Inner Marker
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altimeter
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-33 Marker Beacon Annunciations
TRAFFIC ANNUNCIATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Perspective™ system displays traffic symbolically on the Inset Map (PFD), the Navigation Map Page
(MFD), and various other MFD page maps. Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for more details about the
optional Traffic Advisory Systems (TAS). When a Traffic Advisory (TA) is detected, the following automatically
occurs:
• The PFD Inset Map is enabled, displaying traffic
AFCS
• A flashing black-on-yellow TRAFFIC annunciation (Figure 2-34) appears to the top left of the Attitude
Indicator for 5 seconds and remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• An aural traffic alert may be generated. Refer to the applicable traffic advisory system (TAS) documentation
for alerts generated by TAS equipment.
If additional TAs appear, new aural and visual alerts are generated.
APPENDICES
Traffic
Symbol
Figure 2-34 Traffic Annunciation
INDEX
Figure 2-35 Inset Map with Traffic Displayed
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
85
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
TERRAIN ANNUNCIATIONS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS) or Terrain-SVT annunciations appear on the PFD to the
upper left of the Altimeter (also where the marker beacon annunciations appear). Refer to the Hazard Avoidance
Section and Appendix for information on terrain alerts and annunciations.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 2-36 TAWS Annunciation on the PFD
86
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ALTITUDE ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Altitude Alerting function provides the pilot with visual and aural alerts when approaching the Selected
Altitude. Whenever the Selected Altitude is changed, the Altitude Alerter is reset. The Altitude Alerter is
independent of the Garmin AFCS. The following occur when approaching the Selected Altitude:
• Upon passing through 1000 feet of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter)
changes to black text on a light blue background and flashes for 5 seconds.
• When the aircraft passes within 200 ft of the Selected Altitude, the Selected Altitude changes to light blue text
on a black background and flashes for 5 seconds and a single chime is heard.
Within 200 ft
Deviation of ±200 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Within 1000 ft
EIS
• After reaching the Selected Altitude, if the pilot flies outside the deviation band (±200 feet of the Selected
Altitude), the Selected Altitude changes to yellow text on a black background, flashes for 5 seconds, and the
word “Altitude” is heard.
Figure 2-37 Altitude Alerting Visual Annunciations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LOW ALTITUDE ANNUNCIATION
NOTE: The Low Altitude Annunciation is available only for aircraft with GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
when SBAS is available. This annunciation is not shown for systems with TAWS or Terrain-SVS, unless terrain
alerting is inhibited..
AFCS
When the Final Approach Fix (FAF) is the active waypoint in a GPS SBAS approach using vertical guidance,
a Low Altitude Annunciation may appear if the current aircraft altitude is at least 164 feet below the prescribed
altitude at the FAF. A black-on-yellow ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation appears to the top right of the Altimeter,
flashing for several seconds then remaining displayed until the condition is resolved.
Low Altitude
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altimeter
Figure 2-38 Low Altitude on GPS SBAS Approach
with TAWS Inhibited
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
87
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
MINIMUM DESCENT ALTITUDE/DECISION HEIGHT ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
For altitude awareness, a Minimum Descent Altitude (MDA) or Decision Height (DH), based on barometric
altitude or temperature compensated altitude can be set. When active, the altitude setting is displayed to the
lower left of the altimeter and with a bug at the corresponding altitude along the altimeter (once the altitude is
within the visible range of the tape). The following visual annunciations alert the pilot when approaching the
MDA or DH:
EIS
• When the aircraft altitude descends to within 2500 feet of the MDA/DH setting, a box labeled ‘BARO MIN’
or ‘COMP MIN’ (based on the selected altitude source) appears with the altitude in cyan text (or magenta
for TEMP COMP). The bug appears in cyan (or magenta for TEMP COMP) on the altitude tape at the
corresponding altitude once in range.
• When the aircraft passes through 100 feet of the MDA or DH, the bug and text become white.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Once the aircraft reaches the MDA/DH, the bug and text become yellow
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Within 2500 feet
Within 100 feet
Altitude Reached
MDA/DH
Bug
MDA/DH
Setting
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-39 Minimum Descent Altitude/Decision Height Alerting Visual Annunciations
Setting the barometric minimum descent altitude and bug:
1) Press the TMR/REF Softkey.
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Minimums field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired altitude source: barometric (BARO) or temperature compensated
(TEMP COMP). OFF is selected by default. Press the ENT Key or turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the next
field.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to enter the desired altitude (from zero to 16,000 feet).
APPENDICES
5) To remove the window, press the CLR Key or press the TMR/REF Softkey.
INDEX
Figure 2-40 BARO and TEMP COMP MDA/DH
88
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2.4 ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
ABNORMAL GPS CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations listed in Table 2-3 can appear on the HSI when abnormal GPS conditions occur; see the
figure for examples. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on Dead Reckoning Mode.
Annunciation
LOI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DR
Description
Loss of Integrity Monitoring–GPS integrity is insufficient for the current
phase of flight
Integrity OK–GPS integrity has been restored to within normal limits
(annunciation displayed for 5 seconds)
Dead Reckoning–System is using projected position rather than GPS position
to compute navigation data and sequence active flight plan waypoints
EIS
INTEG OK
Location
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Lower left of
aircraft symbol
Upper right of
aircraft symbol
Table 2-3 Abnormal GPS Conditions Annunciated on HSI
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 2-41 Example HSI Annunciations
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed in yellow on the display to denote degraded navigation source information. This data includes the
following:
AFCS
• Navigation Status Box fields except Active Leg, TAS, and DTK
• Course Deviation Indicator (removed after 20 minutes)
• GPS Bearing Pointer
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Wind data and pointers in the Wind Data Box on the PFD
• Track Indicator
• All Bearing Pointer Distances
APPENDICES
• Active Flight Plan distances, bearings, and ETE values
Also, while the Perspective™ system is in DR Mode, the autopilot will not couple to GPS, and terrain alerting (if
installed) is disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and waypoints)
is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
89
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
HEADING FAILURE MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system is unable to determine the aircraft heading, but GPS-based track information is available, the
HSI displays the ground track instead of heading using HSI Track Mode. In this mode, a magenta ‘TRK’
annunciation and track readout appear on the HSI. In addition, a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X
appear above the ‘TRK’ annunciation to indicate the HSI is displaying track instead of heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If both the heading and track are unavailable, the HSI displays a yellow ‘HDG’ annunciation with a red X over
the heading readout box. The system also removes directional numbers and letters from the HSI.
HSI Track Mode (Heading Unavailable, Track Available)
Heading and Track Unavailable
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 2-42 Heading Failure Displays on the HSI
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When the aircraft enters an unusual pitch attitude, red extreme pitch warning chevrons pointing toward the
horizon are displayed on the Attitude Indicator, starting at 50˚ above and 30˚ below the horizon line.
Nose Low
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Nose High
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 2-43 Pitch Attitude Warnings
90
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Selected Course Box
– Procedures
• AFCS Annunciations
• Transponder Status Box
– DME Tuning
• Flight director Command Bars
• System Time
• Inset Map
• PFD Setup Menu
• Minimum Descent Altitude/
Decision Height readout
• True Airspeed
• Windows displayed in the lower
right corner of the PFD:
• Vertical Deviation, Glideslope,
and Glidepath Indicators
• Ground Speed
• Altimeter Barometric Setting
• DME Information Window
– Nearest Airports
• Selected Altitude
• Wind data
– Flight Plan
• VNV Target Altitude
• Selected Heading Box
– Alerts
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
– Timer/References
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Outside Air Temperature
EIS
• Traffic Annunciations
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If pitch exceeds +30˚/-20˚ or bank exceeds 65˚, some information displayed on the PFD is removed. The
Altimeter and Airspeed, Attitude, Vertical Speed, and Horizontal Situation indicators remain on the display
and the Bearing Information, Alerts, and Annunciation windows can be displayed during such situations. The
following information is removed from the PFD (and corresponding softkeys are disabled) when the aircraft
experiences unusual attitudes:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
91
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT INSTRUMENTS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
92
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 3 ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Engine Indication System (EIS) displays critical engine, electrical, fuel, optional ice protection, and other
system parameters on the left side of the Multi Function Display (MFD) during normal operations (Figure 3-1).
EIS information can be fully expanded to an entire page (EIS - Engine Page) using the ENGINE Softkey. In
Reversionary Mode, the display-combines Primary Flight Display (PFD) symbology with the EIS.
EIS Display
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-1 MFD (SR20)
AFCS
Green bands on the instruments indicate normal ranges of operation; yellow and red bands indicate caution
and warning, respectively. White or uncolored bands indicate areas outside of normal operation. When unsafe
operating conditions occur, the corresponding readouts, pointers and labels change color corresponding to the
level of the condition; warnings also flash (except fuel at destination). If sensory data to an instrument becomes
invalid or unavailable, a red 'X' is displayed across the instrument. However the numeric readouts in the Fuel
Calculation Box, TKS FIKI Anti Ice Box (optional), and the density altitude in the Air Data Box are replaced with
dashes instead of red 'X's when the data is invalid or out of range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
93
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.1 EIS DISPLAY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may differ from
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
actual aircraft configurations.
1
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Displays engine power as a percentage
2
Tachometer (RPM)
Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Fuel Quantity Indicator
(GAL)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks.
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
&
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5
8
Gallons Used Indicator
(Gal Used)
Oil Temperature Indicator
(Oil ºF)
Oil Pressure Indicator
(Oil PSI)
Ammeter (Batt1 A)
9
Voltmeter (ESS Bus V)
Displays the essential bus voltage in volts
10
Cylinder Head Temperature
Indicator (CHT ºF)
Exhaust Gas Temperature
Indicator (EGT ºF)
Displays the head temperature of the hottest cylinder (CHT; cylinder
number is shown below bar)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature (cylinder number is shown below
bar) (naturally aspirated models only)
Exhaust Gas Temperature/
Turbine Inlet Temperature
Indicator (EGT/TIT ºF)
Displays the exhaust gas temperature and turbine inlet temperature
(cylinder number or turbine inlet side is shown below bar) (Turbo
models only, shown in Figure 3-3)
Left and Right Turbine Inlet
Temperature
Displays the temperature at the left (L) and right (R) turbine inlet (Turbo
models only, shown in Figure 3-3).
6
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7
11
APPENDICES
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (Turbo models only – displays a light
blue target fuel flow indicator to the right of the fuel flow indicator strip,
shown in Figure 3-3)
Displays the fuel used in gallons
Displays pressure of oil supplied to the engine in pounds per square inch
(psi)
Displays the battery 1 load in amperes
INDEX
12
Displays engine oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit
94
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
EIS
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5
6
7
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
9
10
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
APPENDICES
Figure 3-2 EIS Display (SR20)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
95
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
1
1
1
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
Target
Fuel
Flow
5
5
5
6
6
6
7
7
7
8
8
8
9
9
9
10
10
10
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Target
Fuel
Flow
12
11
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
11
APPENDICES
SR22
(Naturally Aspirated)
12
11
SR22T
SR22TN
INDEX
Figure 3-3 EIS Display (SR22)
96
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE
(Optional)
ENGINE
ASSIST
DCLTR
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
FUEL
CO RST
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.2 ENGINE
PAGESoftkey to
Press the ENGINE
return to the top-level softkeys.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TABS
FULL
Pressing the ENGINE
Softkey
accesses the EIS - Engine Page, which displays allUNDO
engine,ENTER
fuel, fuel calculation,
electrical, air data, and optional ice protection information. Pressing the optional ANTI-ICE Softkey accesses the
second-level softkeys. Pressing the FUEL Softkey accesses the second-level
softkeys.
Press
the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
EIS
ENGINE
The ANTI-ICE Softkey and its secondlevel softkeys are only available with the
TKS FIKI system installed.
ANTI-ICE
FUEL
ASSIST
DCLTR
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Optional)
ENGINE
Press the ENGINE Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
(Optional) (Optional) (Optional)
AUTO
RIGHT
FULL
TABS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LEFT
BACK
UNDO
ENTER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the UNDO or ENTER Softkey to
return to the second-level softkeys.
Figure 3-4 Engine Page Softkeys
Level 2
Level 3
Description
AFCS
Level 1
ENGINE
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displays full Engine Page and second-level engine softkeys; press again to
return to the Engine Strip and top-level softkeys (see the EIS Section for more
information)
Displays Anti-Ice softkeys (optional -TKS FIKI only; See Operational Note above)
ANTI-ICE
LEFT
Selects manual mode and opens the left tank valve and closes the right tank valve
AUTO Selects auto tank selection mode
RIGHT Selects manual mode and opens the right tank valve and closes the left tank valve
DCLTR
Removes bars and temperature readouts from the Engine Temperature Box
ASSIST
Identifies temperature peaks
FUEL
FULL Accesses the Initial Usable Fuel Page
TABS
Resets fuel totalizer to tabs (usable fuel)
UNDO Resets to the initial usable fuel amount shown on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
ENTER Saves the usable fuel amount as displayed on the Initial Usable Fuel Page
97
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Percent Power Indicator Displays engine power as a percentage
(% Pwr)
2
Tachometer (RPM x100) Displays propeller speed in revolutions per minute
3
Engine Manifold
Pressure Indicator
(Man “Hg)
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine power
4
Fuel Flow Indicator
(FFlow GPH)
Oil Temperature and
Pressure Indicators
(Oil °F PSI)
Displays fuel flow in gallons per hour (SR22T models only – displays a light blue
target fuel flow indicator shown on top of the fuel flow gauge)
Displays oil temperature in degrees Fahrenheit (°F) and pressure in pounds
per square inch (psi)
6
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential and
main bus voltage
7
Fuel Calculation Group Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles per
(Fuel Calculation)
gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer
8
Fuel Quantity Indicator
Displays fuel quantities, in gallons, for the left (L) and right (R) fuel tanks.
9
Air Data
Displays density altitude, outside air temperature (OAT) in °F and °C, and
international standard atmosphere (ISA) temperature deviation
10
Oxygen Pressure
Indicator
Displays oxygen pressure in tank in pounds per square inch (optional)
AFCS
11
Anti-Ice Fluid Quantity TKS NH – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the single tank
(optional – See Operational Note below).
Indicator (TKS NH
and TKS FIKI)
TKS FIKI – Displays the quantity of anti-ice fluid remaining in the left (L) and
right (R) tanks in gallons (optional – See Operational Note below).
12
Engine Temperature
Group (Engine
Temperature)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for engine operating limitations.
APPENDICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5
Displays head (CHT) and exhaust gas temperatures (EGT) of all cylinders in °F (all
models) and turbine inlet temperatures (turbo models only)
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
INDEX
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
98
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Depictions of equipment may differ from the installed equipment. Examples shown may not represent
all possible aircraft configurations.
2
3
4
5
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
EIS
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
9
1
2
3
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-5 Engine Page (SR20)
5
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6
12
APPENDICES
7
8
11
9
INDEX
Figure 3-6 Engine Page (SR22) with TKS NH Anti-Ice Option
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
99
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
5
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
12
7
11
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8
9
10
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-7 Engine Page (SR22T) with TKS FIKI and Oxygen
2
3
Target Fuel
Flow Indicator
4
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
6
12
APPENDICES
7
11
8
9
10
INDEX
Figure 3-8 Engine Page (SR22TN) with Oxygen
100
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FUEL CALCULATIONS
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated from the last time
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
the fuel was reset.
Fuel used (Used), time remaining (Time Rem), range (in nautical miles, Range), and economy (Econ) are
calculated based on the displayed fuel remaining (Rem) and the fuel flow totalizer. The calculated range is
based upon ground speed, distance, economy and fuel remaining. See the Flight Management Section for
information regarding the map feature related to the EIS Fuel Calculations.
EIS
Adjusting the fuel totalizer quantity:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FUEL Softkey to access the Initial Usable Fuel Page.
3) Turn the FMS Knob (small knob adjusts in 1 gallon increments and large knob in 10 gallon increments) to
increase or decrease the initial usable fuel displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Calculated
Fuel Used
Fuel
Remaining
Calculated
Time
Remaining
Calculated
Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Calculated
Economy
Figure 3-9 Fuel Calculations Group
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Change in
Fuel Level
APPENDICES
Computed
Fuel Remaining
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Figure 3-10 Full Fuel (SR20)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
101
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-11 Fuel to TABS (SR22)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
INDEX
Figure 3-12 Full Fuel (SR22)
Initial Usable Fuel Page
102
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective™ System interfaces with either of two optional ice protection systems, TKS No-Hazard (NH)
or TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) anti-ice systems. Refer to the applicable Pilot’s Operating Handbook
(POH) for a detailed system description of the installed ice protection system.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
The TKS NH system displays a single quantity gauge on the full Engine Page to indicate the amount of antiice fluid available.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 3-13 TKS NH System Fluid Quantity Gauge
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TKS FLIGHT INTO KNOWN ICING (FIKI) ANTI-ICE SYSTEM
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The FIKI system offers five pilot-selectable (external to the Perspective™ System) modes of operation and
a more sophisticated quantity indicator located on the full Engine Page. To accommodate the additional
modes, the TKS FIKI system employs several additional sensors. The Perspective™ System receives inputs
from these sensors and provides indications as to the status of the TKS FIKI system.
Auto Tank Selection Mode
AFCS
In the default tank selection mode (AUTO), Perspective™ assures that the fluid levels of the two tanks are
kept relatively even by periodically closing the tank with the lowest level. The system uses the anti-ice fluid
tank quantities to control the tank shut-off valves. When the system is on and operating in AUTO mode,
the shut-off valves close under the following conditions:
• The fluid quantity is empty (indicated from the fluid level sensor and level switch)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• The left and right tank level imbalance is greater than 0.25 gallons (low tank will be closed until level
balance is within 0.15 gallons)
• The fluid quantity is unreliable (a miscompare between the level sensor and level switch or an out of
range level sensor value)
APPENDICES
While operating in AUTO mode a white box is displayed around the ‘L’ and ‘R’, located on top of each
fluid quantity indicator, when both tanks are open. During normal operation, the white box will highlight
the left or right tanks as the fluid levels change (Figure 3-14).
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
103
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
Figure 3-14 AUTO Tank Mode (Normal)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If a fluid level comparison fault is detected (the fluid level sender disagrees with the fluid level switch for
a particular tank) the corresponding fluid quantity indicator is grayed out (Figure 3-15) and that quantity
is not used in the endurance and range calculations. When the fluid level sender is out of range, the fluid
quantity indicator is marked with a red ‘X’ (Figure 3-16).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-15 Fluid Level Unreliable
Figure 3-16 Fluid Level Out Of Range
Manual tank Mode
AFCS
Manual tank mode allows the pilot to control either tank’s shut-off valve. Manual may be selected by
pressing the ANTI-ICE Softkey to access the second-level softkeys LEFT, AUTO, and RIGHT. A light
blue box is displayed around the selected tank, gallons remaining in the selected tank, and pump operating
mode.
• LEFT Softkey – opens left tank valve and closes right tank valve
• AUTO Softkey – returns to AUTO tank mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• RIGHT Softkey – opens right tank valve and closes left tank valve
INDEX
APPENDICES
While operating in manual tank mode, only the selected/open tank’s quantity is used for the range and
endurance calculations.
Figure 3-17 Manual Tank Mode (Left tank selected)
104
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PuMP oPerating ModeS
The Ice Protection systems consists of various pump operating modes listed below.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on SR22 models.
Operating Mode
OFF
NORM
Comments
No modes selected
Provides 50% flow rate for light/moderate icing 
EIS
Provides 100% flow rate for moderate icing 
Provides 200% flow rate for severe icing or to
expedite the removal of previous ice buildup 
This mode is used in the event of a timer box failure
or when BKUP mode is selected. Pump #2 provides
100% flow rate, bypassing the timer box 
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
HIGH
MAX
(momentary)
PUMP BKUP
System Operation
System Off
Both pumps operate on a timed, repeating cycle
– 30 seconds ON and 90 seconds OFF
A single pump (#1) operates continuously
Both pumps operate continuously for 120
seconds
A single pump (#2) operates continuously
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
 Refer to the POH for pilot recommended actions
Table 3-1 FIKI System Operating Modes
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 3-20 Max Operating Mode
Figure 3-21 Pump Backup Mode
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-19 High Operating Mode
AFCS
Figure 3-18 Normal Operating Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
105
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
3.3 LEANING ASSIST MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The pilot should follow the engine manufacturer’s recommended leaning procedures in the Pilot’s
Operating Handbook (POH).
A leaning assist function is available on the Engine Page to assist in the leaning process.
Accessing Leaning Assist Mode:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey to display the Engine Page.
EIS
2) Press the ASSIST Softkey to identify peaks.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the ASSIST Softkey is pressed, the system initially highlights the number and places a light blue box
around the EGT readout of the cylinder with the hottest EGT. The ∆ Peak temperature is the difference between
the peak temperature and the present temperature for the peaked cylinder. When the first peak is detected, “1st”
is annunciated below that cylinder’s EGT bar and the temperature is enclosed in a light blue box.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system continues to detect peak EGTs for each cylinder lean of peak as the fuel flow is decreased, and the
peak of each cylinder’s EGT is indicated by a light blue marker on the graph. Once all cylinders are lean of peak,
the last cylinder to peak is denoted by the “Last” annunciation below its bar on the graph.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Light Blue Box
Represents Peak
AFCS
Temperature
Deviation
from Peak
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 3-22 Leaning Assist Mode
106
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3.4 EIS DISPLAY IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In reversionary mode, the display combines PFD symbology with the EIS Display (refer to the System Overview
for information about display Reversionary Mode).
In reversionary mode, the EIS is separated into two displays: Engine (identical to the normal EIS Display on the
MFD) and System. For a description of the EIS Display, refer to Section 3.1. The System Display shows various
system parameters and fuel calculations.
EIS
EIS Display
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INSET
SENSOR
PFD
OBS
CDI
DME
XPDR
IDENT
TMR/REF
NRST
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(optional)
ENGINE
ALERTS
Figure 3-23 Reversionary Mode (SR22)
AFCS
ENGINE
SYSTEM
BACK
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ENGINE
ALERTS
Press the BACK Softkey to
return to the top-level softkeys.
APPENDICES
Figure 3-24 EIS Softkeys (Reversionary Mode)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
107
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM DISPLAY
NOTE: Fuel calculations do not use the aircraft fuel quantity indicators and are calculated anytime the initial
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
usable fuel is changed.
NOTE: Refer to the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for limitations.
The EIS System Display shows the engine, fuel calculations, electrical, and various system parameters. Fuel
calculations are based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow totalizer.
EIS
Accessing the EIS System Display:
1) Press the ENGINE Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the SYSTEM Softkey.
3) To return to the default Engine Display, press the ENGINE or BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1
2
3
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4
5
Engine Manifold Pressure
Indicator (Man “Hg)
Fuel Calculation Group
(Fuel Calc)
Electrical Group
(Electrical)
Miscellaneous (Misc)
Displays engine power as a percentage
Shows propeller speed in revolutions per minute
Displays manifold pressure in inches of Mercury to indicate engine
power
Displays calculated fuel at destination, fuel used, fuel remaining, time
remaining, range (in nautical miles) and economy (in nautical miles
per gallon) based on the displayed fuel remaining and the fuel flow
totalizer
Displays the alternator and battery current in amperes and the essential
and main bus voltage
Displays engine hours and anti-ice gallons (optional) and oxygen
pressure (optional)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6
Percent Power Indicator
(% Pwr)
Tachometer (RPM)
108
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
EIS
1
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SR20
SR22 Models with optional
Anti-Ice and Oxygen
APPENDICES
Figure 3-25 System Display
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
109
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ENGINE INDICATION SYSTEM
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
110
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 4 AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4.1 OVERVIEW
The Communication/Navigation/Surveillance (CNS) system includes the Audio Panel, communication radios,
navigation radios, and Mode A/C or Mode S transponder. The System Overview Section provides a block diagram
description of the Audio Panels and CNS system interconnection.
CNS operation in the avionics system is performed by the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
• Multifunction Display (MFD)
• Mode A/C or Mode S Transponder
• Integrated Avionics Unit (2)
• Control Unit
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Audio Panel
EIS
• Primary Flight Display (PFD)
The MFD/PFD controls are used to tune the communication transceivers and navigation radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Audio Panel provides the traditional audio selector functions of microphone and receiver audio selection.
The Audio Panel includes an intercom system (ICS) between the pilot, copilot, and passengers, a marker beacon
system, and a COM clearance recorder. Ambient noise from the aircraft radios is reduced by a feature called
Master Avionics Squelch (MASQ). When no audio is detected, MASQ processing further reduces the amount of
background noise from the radios.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Mode S or Mode A/C transponder is controlled with softkeys and the FMS Knob located on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD) and also the Control Unit. The Transponder Data Box is located to the left of the System
Time Box. The data box displays the active four-digit code, mode, and a reply status (Figures 4-1 and 4-2).
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
111
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
MFD/PFD CONTROLS AND FREQUENCY DISPLAY
2
3
4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6
7
8
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-1 PFD Controls, COM Frequency Tuning Boxes, Transponder Code, and DME Tuning Window
112
1
COM Frequency Box – Displays COM standby and active frequency fields and volume. The selected COM
transceiver frequency is displayed in green.
2
COM Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the COM transceiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz). Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between COM1 and
COM2.
3
COM Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active COM frequencies. Press and hold
this key for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the active
frequency field.
4
COM VOL/SQ Knob – Controls COM audio volume level. Press to turn the COM automatic squelch on
and off. Volume level is shown in the COM frequency field as a percentage.
5
DME Tuning Window – Displays DME frequency pairing mode. Display by pressing the DME Softkey.
6
ENT Key – Validates or confirms DME pairing mode and Auto-tune selection.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
10
11
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9
12
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-2 MFD Controls and NAV Frequency Tuning Boxes
9
NAV VOL/ID Knob – Controls NAV audio volume level. Press to turn the Morse code identifier audio on
and off. Volume level is shown in the NAV frequency field as a percentage.
10
NAV Frequency Transfer Key – Transfers the standby and active NAV frequencies.
11
NAV Knob – Tunes the standby frequencies for the NAV receiver (large knob for MHz; small knob for kHz).
Press to move the tuning box (light blue box) and Frequency Transfer Arrow between NAV1 and NAV2.
12
NAV Frequency Box – Displays NAV standby and active frequency fields, volume, and station ID. The
frequency of the NAV radio selected for navigation is displayed in green.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Transponder Data Box – Indicates the selected transponder code, operating mode, reply, and ident status
for the applicable transponder.
APPENDICES
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FMS Knob – Flight Management System Knob, used to enter transponder codes, select DME modes, and
Auto-tune entries when DME Tuning Window or NRST Window is present. Press the FMS Knob to turn
the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The small knob selects
individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
AFCS
7
113
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 350 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
10
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11
20
21
GMA 350 Controls
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When a key is selected, a triangular annunciator above the key is illuminated.
1
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Deactivates automatically and marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal
is received. Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
2
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
3
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard. Press and hold to enable/disable
monitored COM muting during primary COM reception.
4
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
5
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
6
– Selects and deselects audio from a telephone or entertainment device connected to the Front Panel
Jack. Audio from a telephone connected to the rear of the audio panel is used if a device is not connected
INDEX
APPENDICES
to the Front Panel Jack. Press and hold to enable/disable
114
muting during reception.
7
MUS1 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS1 muting
during reception.
8
MUS2 – Selects and deselects music entertainment audio. Press and hold to enable/disable MUS2 muting
during reception.
9
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, squelch is controlled manually.
10
Volume Indicator – Indicates volume/squelch setting relative to full scale.
11
Front Panel Jack – Used for an entertainment or telephone input.
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
16
PILOT – Controls the pilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle 3D Audio on/off for all headset
positions.
17
COPLT – Controls the copilot intercom system. Press and hold to toggle copilot configuration between
crew and passenger.
18
PASS – Controls the passenger intercom system. Press and hold to enable/disable passenger muting
during reception.
19
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM, NAV, AUX, and MKR receiver audio can be heard
on the speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during
PA.
20
Cursor (CRSR) Control Knob – Turn to move the cursor (flashing white or blue annunciator) to the
desired source.
21
Volume (VOL) Control Knob – Turn the smaller knob to control volume or squelch of the selected source
(indicated by the flashing white or blue annunciator). When the volume control cursor is not active press
to switch to Blue-Select mode. If the volume control cursor is active, press twice (once to cancel the cursor,
twice to activate Blue-Select mode).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AUX – When selected, audio from the ADF and DME (if equipped) can be heard.
AFCS
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PLAY – Press once to play the latest recorded memory block. Press while audio is playing begins playing
the previously recorded memory block. Each subsequent press thereafter plays the previous block of
memory.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MIC2 – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be added by
pressing the COM1 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
EIS
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MIC1 – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when this key
is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be added by
pressing the COM2 Key. Selection of a second MIC button initiates Split-COM mode. When in Split-COM
mode, the pilot is using COM1, the copilot is using the COM2.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
115
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 347 AUDIO PANEL CONTROLS
2
3
4
5
6
16
17
18
19
7
8
10
9
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
12
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11
13
14
15
20
21
22
23
24
25
Figure 4-3 GMA 347 Audio Panel Controls
Marker Beacon Annunciators – Each annunciator lights independently when flying over the associated
marker beacon station.
2
MKR/MUTE – Selects marker beacon receiver audio. Mutes the currently received marker beacon receiver
audio. Unmutes automatically when new marker beacon audio is received. Enables Music Mute feature.
Also, stops play of recorded COM audio.
3
COM1 – When selected, audio from the #1 COM receiver can be heard.
4
COM2 – When selected, audio from the #2 COM receiver can be heard.
5
COM3 – Reserved for optional COM radio.
6
NAV1 – When selected, audio from the #1 NAV receiver can be heard.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7
NAV2 – When selected, audio from the #2 NAV receiver can be heard.
8
DME – Turns optional DME audio on or off.
9
ADF – Turns optional ADF receiver audio on or off.
10
PLAY – Press once to play the last recorded COM audio. Press again while audio is playing and the
previous block of recorded audio will be played. Each subsequent press plays each previously recorded
block. Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play.
11
PILOT Squelch – Turn to adjust Pilot’s squelch. The Pilots volume knob must be pressed to allow manual
squelch adjustment.
INDEX
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1
APPENDICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: When a key is selected, an annunciator in the key is illuminated.
116
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
16
COM1 MIC – Selects the #1 transmitter for transmitting. COM1 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #1 COM receiver to be heard. COM2 receive can be
added by pressing the COM2 Key.
17
COM2 MIC – Selects the #2 transmitter for transmitting. COM2 receive is simultaneously selected when
this key is pressed allowing received audio from the #2 COM receiver to be heard. COM1 receive can be
added by pressing the COM1 Key.
18
COM3 MIC – Reserved for optional COM radio.
19
COM 1/2 – Split COM operation key. When selected, the pilot uses the COM 1 transceiver and the copilot
uses COM 2.
20
SPKR – Selects and deselects the cabin speaker. COM and NAV receiver audio can be heard on the
speaker. Press and hold for 2 seconds for Passenger Address (PA). The SPKR key flashes during PA.
21
TEL – Selects and deselects telephone audio.
22
COPLT – Selects and deselects the copilot intercom isolation.
23
PILOT – Selects and deselects the pilot intercom isolation.
24
COPILOT/PASS Volume – Turn to adjust Copilot/Passenger intercom volume or squelch. Pulling the right
volume knob controls passenger volume, pushing in controls Copilot volume.
25
COPILOT/PASS Squelch – Copilot and passenger share the squelch knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HI SENS Annunciator – Indicates marker beacon receiver sensitivity, high sensitivity when illuminated,
low sensitivity when extinguished.
AFCS
15
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SENS – Press to increase marker beacon receiver sensitivity as indicated by illumination of the HI SENS
annunciator. Press again to return to low sensitivity and extinguish the HI SENS annunciator.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
14
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MAN SQ – Manual Squelch annunciator. When lit, pilot and copilot squelch knobs control manual
squelch.
EIS
13
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PILOT Volume – Turn the left (Pilot) volume knob to control pilot’s intercom volume and the ON and OFF
function. (Full CCW detent is OFF) Press to switch between manual and automatic squelch control as
indicated by illumination of the MAN SQ annunciator.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
12
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
117
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
CONTROL UNIT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Control Unit is a pedestal-mounted interface allowing data entry, COM and NAV tuning, and transponder
control. Many procedures can be performed using the Control Unit rather than the MFD/PFD display bezel
controls. Annunciators above the FMS, XPDR, NAV, and COM keys are illuminated when their respective
control modes are selected.
EIS
COM and NAV radio tuning can be accomplished from the control unit. The appropriate frequency box on
the selected display is outlined by a light blue selection box, which flashes for a few seconds to indicate control
unit activity. Selection of a different display control or radio tuning mode results in cancelation of the previous
radio tuning mode.
2
3
4
6
5
7
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1
9
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
10
12
11
Figure 4-4 Control Unit
APPENDICES
Tuning Selection
Box
INDEX
Figure 4-5 Frequency Tuning with the Control Unit
118
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
COM Key – Selects COM radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The COM tuning box is outlined with
a light blue selection line when the COM frequency is active on the control unit (Figure 4‑5).
5
FMS Key – Places Control Unit in Flight Management System (FMS) Mode. FMS Knob is used to enter
transponder codes, select DME modes, and Auto-tune entries when NRST Window is present. Press the
FMS Knob to turn the selection cursor on and off. The large knob moves the cursor in the window. The
small knob selects individual characters for the highlighted cursor location.
6
XPDR Key – Places Control Unit in Transponder Mode. Transponder code entry can be performed with
either the number keypad or FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob.
7
NAV Key – Selects NAV radio tuning mode on the Control Unit. The NAV tuning box is outlined with a
light blue selection line when the NAV frequency is active on the control unit.
8
CLR Key – Erases information, cancels entries, or removes menus.
9
Frequency Transfer Key (EMERG) – Transfers the standby and active COM or NAV frequencies. Press
and hold for two seconds to tune the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) automatically into the COM
active frequency field.
10
Alphanumeric Keys – Allows data entry (rather than using the FMS Knob to select characters/
numbers).
11
Decimal Key – Enters a decimal point.
12
BKSP Key – Moves cursor back one character space and removes last character entered.
AFCS
4
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob – NAV/COM Tuning Modes: Acts as the NAV or COM Knob. XPDR Mode:
Acts as the XPDR Softkey. FMS Control Modes: Acts as the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ENT Key – Validates or confirms a menu selection or data entry.
EIS
2
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MENU Key – Displays a list of options for accessing additional features or making setting changes.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
119
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.2 COM OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM TRANSCEIVER SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
NOTE: When turning on the avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequencies used and the active
COM transceiver state prior to shutdown.
EIS
The COM Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the PFD; the two active frequencies are on
the left side and the two standby frequencies are on the right. The COM transceiver is selected for transmitting
by pressing the COM MIC Keys on the Audio Panel. During reception of audio from the COM radio selected
for transmission, audio from the other COM radio is muted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
An active COM frequency displayed in green indicates that the COM transceiver is selected on the Audio
Panel (COM1 MIC or COM2 MIC Key). Both active COM frequencies appearing in white indicate that no COM
radio is selected for transmitting (SPKR Key is selected and flashing on the Audio Panel).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Frequencies in the standby field are displayed in light blue and white. The standby frequency in the tuning
field is light blue. The other standby frequency is white.
Active
Fields
Standby
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Tuning Field
GMA 350
GMA 347
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
COM2 Radio is Selected
on the Audio Panel
Figure 4-6 Selecting a COM Radio for Transmit
INDEX
APPENDICES
COM3 (GMA 347 only) is reserved for an optional COM radio.
120
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRANSMIT/RECEIVE INDICATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During COM transmission, a white TX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow. On the Audio Panel, when the active COM is transmitting, the active transceiver COM MIC
Key Annunciator flashes approximately once per second.
During COM signal reception, a white RX appears by the active COM frequency replacing the Frequency
Transfer Arrow.
Receive Indicator
EIS
Transmit Indicator
GMA 350
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 347
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Annunciator
Flashes During
Transmission
Figure 4-7 COM Radio Transmit and Receive Indications
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COM TRANSCEIVER MANUAL TUNING
The COM frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the right side of the MFD and PFD.
Manually tuning a COM frequency:
AFCS
1) Turn the COM Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for MHz; small knob for
kHz).
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Adjust the volume level with the COM VOL/SQ Knob.
4) Press the COM VOL/SQ Knob to turn automatic squelch on and off.
Press the Frequency Transfer
Key to Transfer COM
Frequencies Between Active
and Standby Frequency Boxes
APPENDICES
Turn the VOL/SQ Knob to adjust
volume. Press the Knob to Turn
Automatic Squelch On or Off
Turn the COM Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Box
INDEX
Figure 4-8 COM Frequency Tuning
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
121
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Manual frequency tuning from the Control Unit
1) Press the COM Key to select the COM frequency box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the COM Tuning Box (large knob for
MHz; small knob for kHz).
3) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the active field.
EIS
First, Press the COM Key to
Place the Tuning Selection Box
on the COM frequencies and
Activate COM tuning from the
FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Second, Turn the COM/NAV Knob
to Enter a Frequency into the
COM Standby Frequency Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Third, Press the Frequency
Transfer Key to Move the
Frequency to the Active Field.
Figure 4-9 Frequency Tuning from the Control Unit
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press the small COM Knob to transfer the light blue frequency tuning field and Frequency Transfer Arrow
between the upper and lower radio frequency fields.
AFCS
Press the COM Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One COM Radio to the Other
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-10 Switching COM Tuning Fields
QUICK-TUNING AND ACTIVATING 121.500 MHZ
INDEX
APPENDICES
Pressing and holding the COM Frequency Transfer Key for two seconds automatically loads the emergency
COM frequency (121.500 MHz) in the active field of the COM radio selected for tuning (the one with the
transfer arrow). In the example shown, pressing the Audio Panel MIC2 Key (COM2 MIC Key on optional
GMA 347) activates the transceiver.
Press for Two Seconds
to Load 121.500 MHz
Figure 4-11 Quickly Tuning 121.500 MHz
122
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING THE COM FREQUENCY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can be automatically tuned from the following:
• Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies Page (ARTCC, FSS,
WX)
• WPT – Airport Information Page
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces Page
• NRST – Nearest Airports Page
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE PFD
EIS
COM frequencies for the nearest airports can be automatically tuned from the Nearest Airports Window on
the PFD. When the desired frequency is entered, it becomes a standby frequency. Pressing the Frequency
Transfer Key places this frequency into the COM Active Frequency Field.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a COM frequency for a nearby airport from the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD to open the Nearest Airports Window. A list of 25 nearest airport identifiers
and COM frequencies is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the list and highlight the desired COM frequency.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the COM Standby Tuning Box.
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Press the NRST Softkey to Open
the Nearest Airports Window
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Figure 4-12 Nearest Airports Window (PFD)
123
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTO-TUNING FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the COM Frequency field from pages in the NRST or WPT
page group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-13, 4-14, and 4-15).
Auto-tuning a COM frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the COM frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired COM frequency (Figure 4-15).
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
Press the ENT Key to
Load a Highlighted
Frequency into
the COM Standby
Frequency Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Figure 4-13 Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) On the Nearest Airports, Frequencies, or Airspaces page, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor on the desired selection.
AFCS
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to load the COM frequency into the standby field of the selected COM radio.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the COM Active Frequency Field.
INDEX
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
Figure 4-14 Nearest Pages Menus
124
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
On the WPT - Airport Information Page, the cursor can be placed on the frequency field by pressing the
FMS Knob and scrolling through the list. The frequency is transferred to the COM Standby Field with the
ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Airport
Identifier and
Information
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Runway
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press ENT
Key to load
frequency into
COM Standby
Field. Cursor
then advances
to the next
frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press INFO-1
Softkey for
AIRPORT,
RUNWAYS, and
FREQUENCIES
Windows
COM Frequency Loads into
PFD Standby Frequency Field
AFCS
Figure 4-15 Airport Information Page and PFD Frequency Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
125
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
COM frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Frequencies,
and NRST – Nearest Airports Pages on the MFD in a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU
Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-16 NRST – Nearest Airspaces, NRST – Nearest Airports, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages
126
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FREQUENCY SPACING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The COM radios can tune either 25-kHz spacing (118.000 to 136.975 MHz) or 8.33-kHz spacing (118.000
to 136.990 MHz) for 760-channel or 3040-channel configuration. When 8.33-kHz channel spacing is selected,
all of the 25-kHz channel spacing frequencies are also available in the complete 3040-channel list.
COM channel spacing is set on the System Setup Page of the AUX Page Group.
25-kHz Channel
Spacing
EIS
8.33-kHz Channel
Spacing
Figure 4-17 COM Channel Spacing
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing COM frequency channel spacing:
1) Select the AUX – System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Channel Spacing Field in the COM Configuration Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired channel spacing.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the channel spacing selection.
While the COM CONFIG Window is selected, the softkeys are blank.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Select 8.33-kHz
or 25.0-kHz
COM Frequency
Channel Spacing
INDEX
Figure 4-18 AUX – System Setup Page
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
127
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
AUTOMATIC SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic Squelch quiets unwanted static noise when no audio signal is received, while still providing good
sensitivity to weak COM signals. To disable Automatic Squelch, press the VOL/SQ Knob. When Automatic
Squelch is disabled, COM audio reception is always on. Continuous static noise is heard over the headsets and
speaker, if selected. Pressing the VOL/SQ Knob again enables Automatic Squelch.
EIS
When Automatic Squelch is disabled, a white SQ appears next to the COM frequency.
Squelch
Indication
Press the COM VOL/
SQ Knob to turn off
Automatic Squelch.
Press again to restore
Automatic Squelch.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-19 Overriding Automatic Squelch
VOLUME
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COM radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/SQ Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, turning the knob counterclockwise decreases volume. When adjusting volume,
the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains for two seconds after
the change.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 4-20 COM Volume Level
COM Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
128
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.3 NAV OPERATION
NAV RADIO SELECTION AND ACTIVATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NAV Frequency Box is composed of four fields displayed on the MFD; two standby fields and two active
fields. The active frequencies are on the right side and the standby frequencies are on the left.
EIS
A NAV radio is selected for navigation by pressing the CDI Softkey located on the PFD. The active NAV
frequency selected for navigation is displayed in green. Pressing the CDI Softkey once selects NAV1 as the
navigation radio. Pressing the CDI Softkey a second time selects NAV2 as the navigation radio. Pressing the
CDI Softkey a third time activates GPS mode. Pressing the CDI Softkey again cycles back to NAV1.
While cycling through the CDI Softkey selections, the light blue NAV tuning field and the Frequency Transfer
Arrow are placed by the active NAV Frequency. The active NAV frequency color changes to green.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The three navigation modes that can be cycled through are:
• VOR1 (or LOC1) – If NAV1 is selected, a green single line arrow (shown) labeled either VOR1 or LOC1 is
displayed on the HSI and the active NAV1 frequency is displayed in green.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• VOR2 (or LOC2) – If NAV2 is selected, a green double line arrow (not shown) labeled either VOR2 or LOC2
is displayed on the HSI and the active NAV2 frequency is displayed in green.
• GPS – If GPS Mode is selected, a magenta single line arrow (not shown) appears on the HSI and neither NAV
radio is selected. Both active NAV frequencies are then displayed in white.
Active
Fields
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Standby
Fields
AFCS
Tuning Field
The NAV Radio is
Selected by Pressing
the CDI Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-21 Selecting a NAV Radio for Navigation
APPENDICES
See the Flight Instruments Section for selecting the DME and Bearing Information windows and using VOR
as the source for the bearing pointer.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
129
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NAV radios are selected for listening by pressing the corresponding keys on the Audio Panel. Pressing the
NAV1, NAV2, or AUX Key (NAV1, NAV2, DME, or ADF Key on the GMA 347) selects and deselects the navigation
radio source. Selection of the AUX Key selects and deselects the ADF and DME (if equipped). Selected audio can be
heard over the headset and the speakers (if selected).
GMA 350
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
GMA 347
Figure 4-22 Selecting a NAV Radio Receiver
NAV RECEIVER MANUAL TUNING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The NAV frequency controls and frequency boxes are on the left side of the PFDs.
Manually tuning a NAV frequency:
1) Turn the NAV Knob to tune the desired frequency in the NAV Tuning Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
3) Adjust the volume level with the NAV VOL/ID Knob.
4) Press the NAV VOL/ID Knob to turn the Morse code identifier audio on and off.
AFCS
Turn VOL/ID Knob to adjust
volume. Press Knob to Turn
Morse Code On or Off.
Press the Frequency Transfer Key to
Transfer NAV Frequencies Between
Active and Standby Frequency Fields
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Turn the NAV Knob to
Tune the Frequency in
the Tuning Field
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-23 NAV Frequency Tuning
130
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTING THE RADIO TO BE TUNED
Press the small NAV Knob to transfer the frequency tuning box and Frequency Transfer Arrow between the
upper and lower radio frequency fields.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the NAV Knob to
Switch the Tuning Field From
One NAV Radio to the Other
EIS
Figure 4-24 Switching NAV Tuning Boxes
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
VOR/LOC ID
When the Morse code Identifier audio is on for a NAV radio, a white ID appears to the left of the active
NAV frequency.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Morse Code Identifier
for the VORs is On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, in order to listen to either station identifier, press the NAV1 or NAV2 Key on the
Audio Panel. Pressing the VOL/ID Knob turns off the Morse code audio only in the radio with the NAV
Tuning Box. To turn off both NAV IDs, transfer the NAV Tuning Box between NAV1 and NAV2 by pressing
the small NAV Knob and pressing the VOL/ID Knob again to turn the Morse code off in the other radio.
Station
Identifiers
Figure 4-25 NAV Radio ID Indication
AFCS
VOLUME
NAV Radio volume level can be adjusted from 0 to 100% using the VOL/ID Knob. Turning the knob
clockwise increases volume, counterclockwise decreases volume.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When adjusting, the level is displayed in place of the standby frequencies. Volume level indication remains
for two seconds after the change.
APPENDICES
NAV Volume
Level Remains
for Two Seconds
Figure 4-26 NAV Volume Levels
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
131
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING A NAV FREQUENCY FROM THE MFD
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
• WPT – VOR Information
• NRST – Nearest Frequencies (FSS, WX)
• NRST – Nearest Airports
• NRST – Nearest Airspaces
NAV frequencies can be selected and loaded from the following MFD pages:
• WPT – Airport Information
• NRST – Nearest VOR
EIS
The MFD provides auto-tuning of NAV frequencies from waypoint and nearest pages. During enroute
navigation, the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV standby frequency field. During approach
activation the NAV frequency is entered automatically into the NAV active frequency field.
Frequencies can be automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box from pages in the NRST or WPT page
group by highlighting the frequency and pressing the ENT Key (Figures 4-27, 4-28, and 4-29).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Auto-tuning a NAV frequency from the WPT and NRST Pages:
1) From any page that the NAV frequency can be auto-tuned, activate the cursor by pressing the FMS Knob or the
appropriate softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the FMS Knob to place the cursor on the desired NAV identifier or NAV frequency.
3) On the Nearest VOR, Nearest Airspaces, and Nearest Airports pages, press the FREQ Softkey to place the cursor
on the NAV frequency (Figure 4-29).
4) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
AFCS
Turn the FMS
Knob to Scroll
Through a List
of Frequencies
Press the ENT
Key to Load
a Highlighted
Frequency into
the NAV Standby
Frequency Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-27 NAV Frequency Auto-Tuning from the MFD
Or:
1) When on the NRST pages, press the MENU Key to display the page menu.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the menu options.
3) Press the ENT Key to place the cursor in the desired window.
INDEX
4) Scroll through the frequency selections with the FMS Knob.
132
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the ENT Key to load the NAV frequency into the standby field of the selected NAV radio.
6) Press the Frequency Transfer Key to transfer the frequency to the NAV Active Frequency Field.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Nearest Airports Menu
Nearest VOR Menu
Nearest Frequencies Menu
Nearest Airspaces Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-28 Nearest Pages Menus
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
In the example shown, the VOR list is selected with the VOR Softkey or from the page menu. The FMS Knob
or ENT Key is used to scroll through the list. The cursor is placed on the frequency with the FREQ Softkey and
loaded into the NAV Tuning Box with the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the ENT
Key to Load
the Frequency
into the NAV
Standby Field.
APPENDICES
Press the VOR Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Identifier
Press the FREQ Softkey
to Place the Cursor on
the VOR Frequency
Figure 4-29 Loading the NAV Frequency from the NRST – Nearest VOR Page
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
133
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While enroute, NAV frequencies can also be auto-tuned from the NRST – Nearest Airports,
WPT – Airport Information, WPT – VOR Information, and NRST – Nearest Frequencies Pages on the MFD in
a similar manner using the appropriate softkeys or MENU Key, the FMS Knob, and the ENT Key.
INDEX
Figure 4-30 NRST – Nearest Frequencies, WPT – VOR Information, WPT – Airport Information, and
NRST – Nearest Airports Pages
134
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO-TUNING NAV FREQUENCIES ON APPROACH ACTIVATION
NOTE: The primary NAV frequency is auto-tuned upon loading a VOR or ILS/Localizer approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: When an ILS/LOC approach has been activated in GPS Mode, the system switches to NAV Mode
as the final approach course is intercepted (within 15 nm of the FAF). See the GPS Navigation Section for
details.
NAV frequencies are automatically loaded into the NAV Frequency Box on approach activation.
EIS
When loading or activating a VOR or ILS/LOC approach, the approach frequency is automatically transferred
to a NAV frequency field as follows:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, the approach frequency is transferred to the NAV1 or NAV2
active frequency fields. The frequency that was previously in the NAV1 or NAV2 active frequency fields are
transferred to standby.
• If the current CDI navigation source is GPS, and if the approach frequency is already loaded into the NAV1
or NAV2 standby frequency field, the standby frequency is transferred to active.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• If the current CDI navigation source is NAV1 or NAV2, the approach frequency is transferred to the standby
frequency fields of the selected CDI NAV radio.
MARKER BEACON RECEIVER
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The marker beacon indicators operate independently of marker beacon audio and cannot be turned
off.
The marker beacon receiver is used as part of the ILS. The marker beacon receiver is always on and detects
any marker beacon signals within the reception range of the aircraft.
Middle Marker
Indication
Inner Marker
Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Outer Marker
Indication
AFCS
The receiver detects the three marker tones – outer, middle, and inner – and provides the marker beacon
annunciations located on the Audio Panel and to the left of the Altimeter on the PFD. Operation of the two
marker beacon indications may not be synchronized.
APPENDICES
Figure 4-31 Marker Beacon Annunciations on the PFD
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
135
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 347
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GMA 350
EIS
Figure 4-32 Marker Beacon Keys and Annunciator Lights
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Audio Panel provides three different states of marker beacon operation; On, Muted, and Deselected.
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key selects and deselects marker beacon audio. The key annunciator indicates when
marker beacon audio is selected. Marker beacon audio is not heard when the annunciator is off or when the
annunciator is on with the marker beacon audio muted.
Turning Marker Beacon Audio On
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
With the MKR/MUTE annunciator off, press the MKR/MUTE Key to enable marker beacon audio.
Muting Marker Beacon Audio
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During marker beacon audio reception, press the MKR/MUTE Key to mute the audio. The MKR/MUTE
annunciator remains lit, but the current marker tone is silenced. Audio muting deactivates automatically and
marker beacon audio is heard when the next marker beacon signal is received.
Deselecting Marker Beacon Audio
To deselect marker beacon audio, press the MKR/MUTE Key twice during marker beacon reception (once to
mute, once more to deselect) or once if a marker beacon signal is not detected.
AFCS
DME TUNING
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NOTE: When another auxiliary window is turned on, the DME Tuning Window is replaced on the PFD.
NOTE: When turning on the Avionics for use, the system remembers the last frequency used for DME tuning
and the NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD state prior to shutdown.
APPENDICES
The PFD tunes the optional DME transceiver. The UHF DME frequency is tuned by pairing with a VHF NAV
frequency. DME frequency pairing is automatic and only the VHF NAV frequency is shown.
INDEX
The DME Tuning Window is located to the right of the HSI in the lower right corner of the PFD. The DME
transceiver is tuned by selecting NAV1, NAV2, or HOLD in the DME Tuning Window. Pressing the DME
Softkey switches the DME Tuning Window on and off.
136
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DME
Modes
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 4-33 DME Tuning Window
EIS
The following DME transceiver pairings can be selected:
• NAV1 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV1 frequency.
• NAV2 – Pairs the DME frequency from the selected NAV2 frequency.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• HOLD – When in the HOLD position, the DME frequency remains paired with the last selected NAV
frequency.
Selecting DME transceiver pairing:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the DME Softkey to display the DME Tuning Window.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the DME tuning mode.
3) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the CLR Key or FMS Knob while in the process of DME pairing cancels the tuning entry and reverts
back to the previously selected DME tuning state. Pressing the FMS Knob activates/deactivates the cursor in
the DME Tuning Window.
See the Flight Instruments Section for displaying the DME information window.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
137
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.4 GTX 32/GTX 33 TRANSPONDER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
The GTX 33 or GTX 33 with Extended Squitter Mode S Transponder provides Mode A, Mode C, and Mode S
interrogation and reply capabilities. Selective addressing or Mode Select (Mode S) capability includes the
following features:
The GTX 32 Transponder provides Mode A and Mode C interrogation and reply capabilities.
• Level-2 reply data link capability (used to exchange information between aircraft and ATC facilities)
• Surveillance identifier capability
EIS
• Flight ID (Flight Identification) reporting – The Mode S Transponder reports aircraft identification as either the
aircraft registration or a unique Flight ID.
• Altitude reporting
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Airborne status determination
• Transponder capability reporting
• Mode S Enhanced Surveillance (EHS) requirements
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Acquisition squitter – Acquisition squitter, or short squitter, is the transponder 24-bit identification address.
The transmission is sent periodically, regardless of the presence of interrogations. The purpose of acquisition
squitter is to enable Mode S ground stations and aircraft equipped with a Traffic Avoidance System (TAS) to
recognize the presence of Mode S-equipped aircraft for selective interrogation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Extended squitter (optional with GTX 33 w/Extended Squitter only) – Transmits the Automatic Dependent
Surveillance-Broadcast (ADS-B) position, velocity, and heading information periodically without requiring an
interrogation.
The Hazard Avoidance Section provides more details on traffic avoidance systems.
TRANSPONDER CONTROLS
AFCS
Transponder function is displayed on three levels of softkeys on the PFD: Top-level, Mode Selection, and
Code Selection. When the top-level XPDR Softkey is pressed, the Mode Selection softkeys appear: STBY, ON,
ALT, VFR, CODE, IDENT, BACK.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CODE Softkey is pressed, the number softkeys appear: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, IDENT, BKSP,
BACK. The digits 8 and 9 are not used for code entry. Pressing the numbered softkeys in sequence enters
the transponder code. If an error is made, pressing the BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the
previous digit. Pressing the BKSP Softkey again moves the cursor to the next previous digit.
APPENDICES
Pressing the BACK Softkey during code selection reverts to the Mode Selection Softkeys. Pressing the BACK
Softkey during mode selection reverts to the top-level softkeys.
The code can also be entered with the FMS Knob on the PFD or the XPDR Key and numeric keypad or
FMS/XPDR NAV/COM Knob. Code entry must be completed with either the softkeys, numeric keypad, or the
FMS Knob, but not a combination of both.
INDEX
Pressing the IDENT Softkey while in Mode or Code Selection initiates the ident function and reverts to the
top-level softkeys.
138
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
After 45 seconds of transponder control inactivity, the system reverts back to the top-level softkeys.
ON
ALT
GND
VFR
IDENT
CODE
IDENT
BACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
STBY
XPDR
ALERTS
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
IDENT
BKSP
BACK
ALERTS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
EIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the mode selection softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-34 Transponder Softkeys (PFD)
While on the ground, the pre-programmed VFR Code (1200) is displayed when the transponder powers
up. In the air, the transponder powers up in the last mode it was in when shut down.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRANSPONDER MODE SELECTION
Mode selection can be automatic (Ground and Altitude Modes) or manual (Standby, ON, and Altitude Modes).
The STBY, ON, and ALT Softkeys can be accessed by pressing the XPDR Softkey.
Selecting a transponder mode:
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
AFCS
2) Press the desired softkey to activate the transponder mode.
GROUND MODE
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Ground Mode is normally selected automatically when the aircraft is on the ground. Ground Mode can be
overridden by selecting any one of the Mode Selection Softkeys. A green GND indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In Ground Mode, the transponder does not
allow Mode A and Mode C replies, but it does permit acquisition squitter and replies to discretely addressed
Mode S interrogations.
APPENDICES
When Standby Mode has been selected on the ground, the transponder can be returned to Ground Mode
by pressing the GND Softkey.
GND
Mode
INDEX
Figure 4-35 Ground Mode
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
139
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
STANDBY MODE (MANUAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Standby Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the STBY Softkey. In Standby, the transponder does
not reply to interrogations, but new codes can be entered. When Standby is pressed, a white STBY indication
and transponder code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box. In all other modes, these fields
appear in green.
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT function is inhibited.
EIS
STBY Mode (White
Code Number and
Mode)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 4-36 Standby Mode
MANUAL ON MODE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ON Mode can be selected at any time by pressing the ON Softkey. ON Mode generates Mode A and Mode S
replies, but Mode C altitude reporting is inhibited. In ON Mode, a green ON indication and transponder
code appear in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ON Mode
(No Altitude
Reporting)
Figure 4-37 ON Mode
ALTITUDE MODE (AUTOMATIC OR MANUAL)
AFCS
Altitude Mode is automatically selected when the aircraft becomes airborne. Altitude Mode may also be
selected manually by pressing the ALT Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
If Altitude Mode is selected, a green ALT indication and transponder code appear in the mode field of the
Transponder Data Box, and all transponder replies requesting altitude information are provided with pressure
altitude information.
ALT Mode
(Mode C Altitude
Reporting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 4-38 Altitude Mode
140
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REPLY STATUS
When the transponder sends replies to interrogations, a white R indication appears momentarily in the
reply status field of the Transponder Data Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reply to
Interrogation
Figure 4-39 Reply Indication
EIS
ENTERING A TRANSPONDER CODE
Entering a transponder code with softkeys:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the XPDR Softkey to display the Transponder Mode Selection Softkeys.
2) Press the CODE Softkey to display the Transponder Code Selection Softkeys, for digit entry.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the digit softkeys to enter the code in the code field. When entering the code, the next softkey in sequence
must be pressed within 10 seconds, or the entry is cancelled and restored to the previous code. Pressing the
BKSP Softkey moves the code selection cursor to the previous digit. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been
entered, the transponder code becomes active.
Entering
a Code
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 4-40 Entering a Code with Softkeys
Entering a transponder code with the PFD FMS Knob:
AFCS
1) Press the XPDR and the CODE Softkey as in the previous procedure to enable code entry.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Turn the Small
FMS Knob to
Enter Two Code
Digits at a Time
Press the
ENT Key to
Complete
Code Entry
Turn the Large
FMS Knob
to Move the
Cursor to the
Next Code Field
Figure 4-41 Entering a Code with the FMS Knob
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
141
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Entering a transponder code with the Control Unit
1) Press the XPDR Key to select the transponder function on the FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to enter the first two code digits.
3) Turn the large FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob to move the cursor to the next code field.
4) Enter the last two code digits with the small FMS/XPDR COM/NAV Knob.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete code digit entry.
Or:
EIS
Enter a Code with the Numeric Keypad. Five seconds after the fourth digit has been entered, the transponder
code becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the CLR Key or small FMS Knob before code entry is complete cancels code entry and restores the
previous code. Waiting for 10 seconds after code entry is finished activates the code automatically.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
First, Press the XPDR Key to
Select Transponder Code
Entry from the FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV Knob
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Second, Turn the FMS/XPDR
COM/NAV Knob to Enter a
Code, Small Knob Enters Code
Digits, Large Knob Moves
Cursor to the Next Code Field.
Third, Press the ENT Key
to Complete Code Entry
AFCS
Or Enter a Code with
the Numeric Keypad
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-42 Entering a Code with the Control Unit
142
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VFR CODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VFR code can be entered either manually or by pressing the XPDR Softkey, then the VFR Softkey.
When the VFR Softkey is pressed, the pre-programmed VFR code is automatically displayed in the code field
of the Transponder Data Box. Pressing the VFR Softkey again restores the previous identification code.
The pre-programmed VFR Code is set at the factory to 1200. If a VFR code change is required, contact a
Garmin-authorized service center for configuration.
VFR Code
EIS
Figure 4-43 VFR Code
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
IDENT FUNCTION
NOTE: In Standby Mode, the IDENT Softkey is inoperative.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the IDENT Softkey sends a distinct identity indication to Air Traffic Control (ATC). The indication
distinguishes the identing transponder from all the others on the air traffic controller’s screen. The IDENT
Softkey appears on all levels of transponder softkeys. When the IDENT Softkey is pressed, a green IDNT
indication is displayed in the mode field of the Transponder Data Box for a duration of 18 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
After the IDENT Softkey is pressed while in Mode or Code Selection, the system reverts to the top-level
softkeys.
IDNT
Indication
AFCS
Press the
IDENT Softkey
to Initiate the
ID Function
Figure 4-44 IDENT Softkey and Indication
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
143
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
4.5 ADDITIONAL AUDIO PANEL FUNCTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
POWER-UP
The Audio Panel performs a self-test during power-up. During the self-test all Audio Panel annunciator lights
illuminate for approximately two seconds. Once the self-test is completed, most of the settings are restored to
those in use before the unit was last turned off.
MONO/STEREO HEADSETS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Stereo headsets are recommended for use. Using a monaural headset in a stereo jack shorts the right headset
channel output to ground. While this does not damage the Audio Panel, a person listening on a monaural
headset hears only the left channel in both ears. If a monaural headset is used at one of the passenger positions,
any other passenger using a stereo headset hears audio in the left ear only.
SPEAKER
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
All of the radios can be heard over the cabin speaker. Pressing the SPKR Key selects and deselects the cabin
speaker. Speaker audio is muted when the PTT is pressed. Certain aural alerts and warnings (autopilot, traffic,
altitude) are always heard on the speaker, even when the speaker is not selected.
The speaker volume is adjustable within a nominal range. Contact a Garmin-authorized service center for
volume adjustment.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GMA 350
GMA 347
AFCS
Figure 4-45 Speaker Key
PASSENGER ADDRESS MODE (PA MODE)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press and hold the SPKR Key for 2 seconds to initiate Passenger Address Mode (if configured). PA Mode is
annunciated by a rapid blinking of the SPKR annunciator. When in PA Mode the crew can use the PTT “Pushto-Talk” button to deliver announcements over the speaker, to the passenger headsets, or both depending on
configuration.
144
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CLEARANCE RECORDER AND PLAYER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel contains a digital clearance recorder that records up to 2.5 minutes of the selected COM
radio signal. Recorded COM audio is stored in separate memory blocks. Once 2.5 minutes of recording time
have been reached, the recorder begins recording over the stored memory blocks, starting from the oldest block.
The PLAY Key controls the play function. Pressing the PLAY Key once plays the latest recorded memory
block. Pressing the PLAY Key while audio is playing begins playing the previously recorded memory block.
Each subsequent press of the PLAY Key selects the previously recorded memory block.
EIS
Pressing the MKR/MUTE Key during play of a memory block stops play. If a COM input signal is detected
during play of a recorded memory block, play is halted.
Powering off the unit automatically clears all recorded blocks.
GMA 350
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 347
Figure 4-46 Play Key
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INTERCOM SYSTEM (ICS) WITH THE GMA 350
The GMA 350 includes a six-position intercom system (ICS), two MUSIC inputs, and one telephone/
entertainment input for the pilot, copilot and passengers. The intercom provides Pilot, Copilot, and Passenger
audio isolation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Intercom Controls
AFCS
Press the PILOT, COPLT, and/or PASS Keys to enable intercom audio for the selected position. If the
annunciators are lit, those positions will share intercom audio. If an annunciator is NOT lit that position is
isolated from the others.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
COPILOT CONFIGURED AS CREW OR PASSENGER
NOTE: When the copilot position is configured as a passenger, the COPLT Key is disabled and the copilot
headset is treated as a ‘passenger’ for intercom and entertainment audio distribution.
APPENDICES
The copilot position can be configured as crew (COPLT Key enabled) or as a passenger (COPLT Key
disabled). Pressing and holding the COPLT Key toggles the copilot position configuration between passenger
and crew. The aural message “Copilot Configured as Passenger” or “Copilot Configured as Crew” is
heard.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
145
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INTERCOM MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: In the following modes the copilot position is configured as crew.
All Intercom Mode
In ‘All Intercom’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear each other and hear the aircraft audio.
EIS
Aircraft Audio
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PILOT
COPLT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PASS
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
Pilot Isolate Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In ‘Pilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot, Copilot, and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot and
Passengers also hear each other.
AFCS
Aircraft Audio
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
PILOT
COPLT
APPENDICES
PASS
Mode Operation
INDEX
ICS Keys
146
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Passenger/Crew Isolate Mode
In ‘Passenger/Crew Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio and each other. The
Passengers hear each other.
PILOT
PASS
COPLT
EIS
ICS Keys
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Audio
Mode Operation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio and each other. The Copilot has
the option to use Split-COM mode.
Split-COM Mode
Aircraft Audio
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
COPLT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PILOT
PASS
AFCS
ICS Keys
Mode Operation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
All Isolate Mode
In ‘All Isolate’ mode the Pilot hears the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to use Split-COM
mode. The Passengers hear each other.
PILOT
190-00820-10 Rev. A
PASS
INDEX
ICS Keys
COPLT
APPENDICES
Aircraft Audio Split-COM
Mode Operation
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
147
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pilot & Copilot Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot & Copilot Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Passengers hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the
option to use Split-COM mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Aircraft Audio
EIS
PILOT
ICS Keys
PASS
Split-COM
COPLT
Mode Operation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Pilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot and Copilot hear the aircraft audio. The Passengers hear
each other.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Audio
PILOT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ICS Keys
COPLT
PASS
Mode Operation
Copilot & Passenger Isolate Mode
In ‘Copilot & Passenger Isolate’ mode the Pilot can hear the aircraft audio. The Copilot has the option to
use Split-COM mode. The Passengers hear each other.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Aircraft Audio Split-COM
PILOT
PASS
Mode Operation
INDEX
APPENDICES
ICS Keys
COPLT
148
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOL/CRSR Knob controls selection and volume or manual squelch adjustment for audio sources that
may not be adjustable anywhere else in the system. The small knob controls the volume or squelch. Turning
the large knob activates and/or moves the cursor (flashing white annunciator/or flashing blue annunciator in
Blue-Select Mode) to select the audio source to adjust. The cursor will time-out after a few seconds and the
position of the cursor will always default back to the PILOT Key. Pressing the small knob cancels the cursor.
Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
EIS
The music (MUS1/MUS2) and telephone/entertainment (
) audio are distributed using the BlueSelect Mode. The following example indicates that the pilot, copilot, and passengers will all hear the
telephone/entertainment audio.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Blue-Select Mode (Telephone/Entertainment Distribution)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Blue-Select Mode is entered by pressing the small knob when the volume control cursor (flashing
white annunciator) is not active. If the volume control cursor is active, press the small knob twice. The first
press will cancel the volume control cursor, the second will activate Blue-Select Mode.
Key will be flashing blue. Any combination of the annunciators over the
The annunciator over the
PILOT, COPLT, and PASS buttons may be blue. Select the desired button to turn the blue annunciator on
or off to distribute the telephone/entertainment audio to selected crew/passenger positions. Turn the large
knob to select MUS1 or MUS2 and select the crew positions to receive the music audio.
AFCS
will cancel Blue-Select
Selecting any key other than PILOT, COPLT, PASS, MUS1, MUS2, or
Mode. Pressing the small knob will also cancel Blue-Select Mode. After approximately ten seconds with no
input, the Blue-Select Mode will automatically cancel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Adjusting Intercom Volume
When the cursor is on PILOT, COPLT, or PASS, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the intercom volume for
the listener.
APPENDICES
Adjusting Speaker Volume
When the cursor is on SPKR, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the speaker volume of the selected
sources (COM, NAV, AUX, MKR). Alert volumes are not affected by the speaker volume control knob.
Adjusting MKR, AUX,
, and MUSIC Volume
190-00820-10 Rev. A
INDEX
When the cursor is on MKR, AUX,
volume of the selected source.
, MUS1 or MUS2, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the individual
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
149
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Adjusting Manual Squelch
When the cursor is on MAN SQ, the Volume Control Knob adjusts the ICS Squelch Threshold (the
volume level that must be exceeded to be heard over the intercom).
Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Manual Squelch Annunciator; Off for
Automatic Squelch, On for Manual Squelch
Volume or Manual Squelch
Cursor
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Volume/Squelch Control
SPLIT COM MODE WITH THE GMA 350
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM frequencies are too close together, interference may be heard
during transmission on the other radio.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate
radios. In Split COM mode, the pilot is uses COM1 and the copilot is uses COM2.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing both MIC Keys simultaneously initiates Split COM Mode (i.e., COM1/COM2). The respective
COM1/MIC1 or COM2/MIC2 annunciators are illuminated indicating Split COM operation. Split COM
operation is cancelled by pressing one of the selected MIC Keys again.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Split COM Selected
150
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3D AUDIO (GMA 350 ONLY)
3D Audio is useful when multiple audio sources are present. By using different responses in each ear, 3D
audio processing creates the illusion that each audio source is coming from a unique location or seat position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Because this feature uses different signals for left and right channels, it requires wiring for stereo intercom
and stereo headsets. If 3D audio is activated when mono headsets are in use, the listener will still hear all audio
sources; however, there is no benefit from location separation.
EIS
With a single COM selected and 3D Audio enabled, the listener hears the audio source at the 12 o’clock
position. If both COMs are selected, the listener hears COM1 at 11 o’clock and COM2 at the 1 o’clock position.
All other intercom positions are processed to sound like their relative seat location. By default, the GMA350
assumes the pilot sits in the left seat. A Garmin authorized service center can make changes to the default
configuration.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling 3D Audio
APPENDICES
Press and hold the PILOT Key to toggle 3D audio processing on and off for all headset positions. When
3D Audio is enabled, the aural message “3D audio left” is heard in the left ear followed by “3D audio right”
in the right ear. If the aural messages are not heard in only the left and then the right ear respectively, the
cause may be aircraft wiring or headset settings. Refer to the following table if a headset or aircraft wiring
problem is suspected.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
151
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Symptom(s)
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears.
“3D audio right” message 2)
not heard
Mono headset in use
1)
Stereo headset in use with
mono/stereo switch set to
mono
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right shorted together)
2)
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
3)
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in both ears. “3D
audio left” not heard
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in right ear only
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
left ear only
2)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1)
channel used for mono instead
of left or left/right swapped)
Stereo headset is on backwards 1)
Incorrect aircraft wiring (left/
right channels swapped)
2)
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
Verify correct orientation from the left/right indication
on each side of the headset or the position of the
boom mic (usually attached on left side). If the
headset is backwards left/right position information
will be swapped.
See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
audio not to function.
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in left ear only, no
audio heard in right ear.
“3D audio right” message 1)
heard in right ear only, no
audio heard in left ear
Aircraft wired for mono
intercom
1)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Set mono/stereo switch on headset to ‘stereo’
“3D audio left” message 1)
heard in both ears,
2)
followed by “3D audio
right” message heard in
both ears
3)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stereo headset in use with
2)
mono/stereo switch set to
‘mono’
Aircraft wiring has left audio 3)
wired to both left and right
channels of stereo headset jack
If after checking solutions #1 and #2 see a service
center as soon as possible to inspect/correct wiring.
This wiring fault can cause fail-safe audio not to
function.
Use a stereo headset
3)
See a service center to wire the installation for stereo
headsets.
Incorrect aircraft wiring (right 1) See a service center as soon as possible to inspect/
channel used for mono instead
correct wiring. This wiring fault can cause fail-safe
of left, or left/right swapped)
audio not to function.
3D Audio Troubleshooting
INDEX
APPENDICES
3D Audio Troubleshooting
Cause(s)
Solution(s)
Mono headset in use
1) Use a stereo headset
152
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCOM WITH THE GMA 347
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Audio Panel includes a four-position intercom system (ICS) and two stereo music inputs for the pilot,
copilot and up to two passengers. The intercom provides Pilot and Copilot isolation from the passengers and
aircraft radios.
EIS
Figure 4-48 Intercom Controls
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Pilot,
passengers
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Passengers,
music2, TEL audio
Passengers
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Passengers, music2 Pilot, copilot
INDEX
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot, TEL audio
Copilot
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot, passengers,
music2, TEL audio
APPENDICES
ON
Selected radios,
aural alerts,
pilot; passengers,
music1, TEL audio
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot,
copilot
Copilot
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
OFF
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot; Copilot, TEL audio aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1
passengers, music2
AFCS
OFF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
OFF
Pilot
Copilot
Passenger
Input to
Hears
Hears
Hears
Phone
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot,
None
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers,
music1
music1
music2
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
Selected radios,
aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, aural alerts, pilot, Pilot, copilot,
copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, copilot, passengers, passengers
music1, TEL audio music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Copilot,
Copilot,
Copilot,
Selected radios,
passengers,
passengers,
passengers
aural alerts, pilot
music1, TEL audio music2, TEL audio
Selected radios,
Copilot,
Copilot,
Pilot
aural alerts, pilot,
passengers, music1 passengers, music2
TEL audio
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PILOT KEY
COPLT KEY
TEL KEY
Annunciator Annunciator Annunciator
Table 4-1 ICS Isolation Modes & Telephone Distribution
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
153
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Pilot isolation is selected when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated. During Pilot isolation, the pilot can
hear the selected radios and aural alerts and warnings. The copilot and passengers can communicate with each
other. The copilot is isolated from aural alerts and warnings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Copilot isolation is selected when the COPLT Annunciator is illuminated. The copilot is isolated from the
selected radios, aural alerts and warnings, and everyone else. The pilot and passengers can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other.
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are illuminated, the pilot and copilot can hear the selected
radios, aural alerts, and communicate with each other. The passengers are isolated from the pilot and copilot
but can communicate with each other.
EIS
When both the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished, everyone hears the selected radios, aural
alerts, and is able to communicate with everyone else.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
INTERCOM VOLUME AND SQUELCH
Two volume controls, one for the pilot and a combined copilot/passenger control, set intercom audio level.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Each microphone input has an automatic squelch threshold. Manual squelch is available by pressing the
Pilot side VOL/SQ knob. When the MAN SQ annunciation is lit the large squelch knobs control pilot and
copilot/passenger squelch threshold. Turning either knob clockwise increases the squelch threshold level.
Turning either knob counterclockwise decreases the squelch threshold level.
When the MAN SQ annunciation is not lit, squelch is automatic and the large squelch knobs have no
function.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Manual Squelch Annunciation;
Off for Automatic Squelch, On
for Manual Squelch
AFCS
Rotating the Pilot Volume Knob
controls ON and OFF function.
(Full CCW detent is OFF)
Pressing the Pilot volume knob
switches between manual and
automatic squelch.
Pilot Volume, On/Off, and Manual Squelch
Pulling the right volume
knob controls passenger
volume, pushing in controls
Copilot volume. Copilot and
passenger share the large
squelch knob.
Copilot/Passenger Volume and Manual Squelch
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 4-49 Intercom Volume and Squelch Controls
SPLIT COM WITH THE GMA 347
APPENDICES
NOTE: Split COM performance is affected by the distance between the COM antennas and the separation
of the tuned frequencies. If the selected COM1 and COM2 frequencies are too close together, interference
may be heard during transmission on the other radio.
INDEX
During Split COM operation, both the pilot and the copilot can transmit simultaneously over separate radios.
The pilot can still monitor NAV1, NAV2, ADF, DME, and MKR Audio as selected, but the copilot is only able
to monitor COM2.
154
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the COM 1/2 Key selects Split COM operation. The COM 1/2 Annunciator is illuminated indicating
Split COM operation. COM1 and COM2 frequencies are displayed in green indicating that both transceivers
are active. Split COM operation is cancelled by pressing the COM 1/2 Key again, at which time the annunciator
is extinguished.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When Split COM operation is selected, COM1 is used by the pilot and COM2 is used by the copilot. The
COM1 MIC Annunciator flashes when the pilot’s microphone PTT is pressed. The COM2 MIC Annunciator
flashes when the copilot’s microphone PTT is pressed.
COM1 Radio is Used
by the Pilot
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM2 Radio is Used
by the Copilot
Figure 4-50 Split COM Operation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS WITH THE GMA 350
The GMA 350 provides three stereo telephone/entertainment inputs:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The telephone/entertainment (
) Key controls a telephone or entertainment device connected to the
rear of the audio panel or to the Front Panel Jack. For GSR 56 equipped aircraft, the Iridium phone audio
is connected to the rear input of the audio panel. To use the Iridium phone, ensure there is no other audio
source plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
AFCS
• The MUS1 and MUS2 Key controls the Entertainment Music audio input. External audio jacks can also be
used as an entertainment input. GDL 69 (SiriusXM Radio) audio, if equipped, is wired to the MUS1 and
MUS2 inputs. The Front Panel Jack does not disable audio connected to the MUS1 and MUS2 inputs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Front Panel Jack can be used as an entertainment input or a telephone input. Plugging a device into the
Front Panel Jack will disable any audio source connected to the rear telephone/entertainment jack (i.e. GSR
56, if so equipped). The Front Panel Jack is a 3.5-mm stereo jack that is compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3s, CD players, and cell phones. The headphone outputs of the entertainment
devices are plugged into the Front Panel Jack.
Distribution of the entertainment inputs are configured in Blue-Select Mode.
APPENDICES
TELEPHONE AND ENTERTAINMENT MUTING
Telephone and entertainment muting can be enabled or disabled by the user, however it is always muted
during alerts.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
155
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
Enabling/Disabling Muting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press and hold the MUS1, MUS2, or (
) Key for two seconds to toggle muting on and off. The
aural message “Mute Music on Reception Enabled/Disabled” or “Mute Tel and Jack on Reception
Enabled/Disabled” is heard.
ENTERTAINMENT INPUTS WITH THE GMA 347
NOTE: Music1 and Music2 audio cannot be completely turned off. Audio level for the crew and passengers
EIS
can be adjusted by a Garmin-authorized service center.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Audio Panel provides two stereo auxiliary entertainment inputs: Music1 and Music2. The pilot and
copilot hear Music1 and the passengers hear Music2. These inputs are compatible with popular portable
entertainment devices such as MP3 and CD players. Two 3.5-mm stereo phone jacks are installed in convenient
locations for audio connection. The headphone outputs of the entertainment devices are plugged into the
Music1 or Music2 jacks.
The current ICS state of isolation affects the distribution of the entertainment input (see Table 4‑1).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREW MUSIC
Crew music, either SiriusXM Radio or Music1, can be heard by the pilot and copilot when both the PILOT
and the COPLT ICS Annunciators are extinguished. Crew music can also be heard by the pilot when the
COPLT Annunciator is illuminated and by the copilot when the PILOT Annunciator is illuminated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Music Muting
AFCS
Crew music muting occurs when aircraft radio or marker beacon activity is heard. Crew music is always
soft muted when an interruption occurs from these sources. Soft muting is the gradual return of music to
its original volume level. The time required for music volume to return to normal is between one-half and
four seconds.
Music Muting Enable/Disable
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing and holding the MKR/MUTE Key for three seconds switches crew music muting on and off.
When switching, either one or two beeps are heard; one beep indicates that music muting is enabled, two
beeps indicate music muting is disabled. Crew music muting is reset (enabled) during power up.
PASSENGER MUSIC
APPENDICES
Passenger music, either SiriusXM Radio or Music2, can be heard only by the passengers and is never muted.
SIRIUSXM RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
INDEX
SiriusXM Radio audio may be heard by the pilot and passengers simultaneously (optional: requires
subscription to SiriusXM Radio Service). Refer to the Additional Features Section for more details on the
Data Link Receiver.
Connecting a stereo input to the audio jack disables the SiriusXM Radio audio from that input.
156
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.6 AUDIO PANEL PREFLIGHT PROCEDURE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pilot and/or copilot are using headsets that have a high/low switch or volume control knob,
verify that the switch is in the high position and the volume control on the headsets are at maximum volume
setting. On single‑pilot flights, verify that all other headsets are not connected to avoid excess noise in the
audio system.
NOTE: When the MAN SQ Key is pressed, the ICS squelch can be set manually by the pilot and copilot.
EIS
If manual squelch is set to full open, background noise is heard in the ICS system as well as during COM
transmissions.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
GMA 350 PREFLIGHT
After powering up the system, the following steps aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel as well as
prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a pilot
boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Manual Squelch Annunciator; Off for Automatic Squelch, Relative Volume/
Squelch Scale
On for Manual Squelch
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Volume or Manual
Squelch
Cursor
Intercom Annunciators
Figure 4-51 Audio Panel Controls
AFCS
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
1) Verify that the PILOT , COPLT and PASS annunciators are lit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV) to a suitable level.
3) Use the Blue-Select Mode to distribute the telephone/entertainment (
), MUS1, and MUS2 appropriately.
4) Use the VOL/CRSR Knobs to adjust the intercom volumes to the desired level.
APPENDICES
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
157
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
GMA 347 PREFLIGHT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
After powering up the avionics System, the following steps will aid in maximizing the use of the Audio Panel
as well as prevent pilot and copilot induced issues. These preflight procedures should be performed each time a
pilot boards the aircraft to insure awareness of all audio levels in the Audio Panel and radios.
EIS
Automatic/Manual
Squelch Annunciation
Pilot and
Copilot ICS
Isolation Keys
Copilot/Passenger Volume
and Manual Squelch
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pilot Volume and
Manual Squelch
Figure 4-52 Audio Panel Preflight Controls
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Verify that the PILOT and COPLT Annunciators are extinguished.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Setting the Audio Panel during preflight:
4) Adjust radio volume levels (COM, NAV, etc.) to a suitable level.
2) Verify that manual squelch is set to full open.
3) Turn the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob fully clockwise. This will set the headset intercom audio level to max
volume (least amount of attenuation).
5) Adjust the PILOT Knob and COPILOT Knob volume to the desired intercom level.
6) Reset squelch to automatic, or adjust to the appropriate level manually.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Once this procedure has been completed, the pilot and copilot can change settings, keeping in mind the notes
above.
158
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4.7 ABNORMAL OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Abnormal operation includes equipment failures of the avionics components and failure of associated equipment,
including switches and external devices.
AUDIO PANEL FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
If there is a failure of the Audio Panel, a fail-safe circuit connects the pilot’s headset and microphone directly
to the COM1 transceiver. Audio is not available on the speaker during fail-safe operation.
EIS
STUCK MICROPHONE
If the push-to-talk (PTT) Key becomes stuck, the COM transmitter stops transmitting after 35 seconds of
continuous operation. An alert appears on the PFD to advise the crew of a stuck microphone.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The MIC Key Annunciator on the Audio Panel flashes as long as the PTT Key remains stuck.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 4-53 Stuck Microphone Alert
COM TUNING FAILURE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In case of a COM system tuning failure, the emergency frequency (121.500 MHz) is automatically tuned in
the radio in which the tuning failure occurred. Depending on the failure mode, a red X may appear on the
frequency display.
Emergency Channel
Loaded Automatically
AFCS
Figure 4-54 COM Tuning Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective ™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
159
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUDIO PANEL AND CNS
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
160
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 5 FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5.1 INTRODUCTION
Perspective™ is an integrated flight, engine, communication, navigation and surveillance system. This section
of the Pilot’s Guide explains flight management using the system.
EIS
The most prominent part of the system are the two full color displays: a Primary Flight Display (PFD) and a
Multi Function Display (MFD). The information to successfully navigate the aircraft using the GPS sensors is
displayed on the PFD and the MFD. See examples in the Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2. Detailed descriptions of flight
management functions are discussed later in this section.
A brief description of the flight management data on the PFD and MFD follows.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation mode indicates which sensor is providing the course data (e.g., GPS, VOR) and the flight plan phase
(e.g., Departure (DPRT), Terminal (TERM), Enroute (ENR), Oceanic (OCN), RNAV Approach (LNAV, LNAV+V, L/
VNAV, LP, LP+V, or LPV), or Missed Approach (MAPR)).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Inset Map is a small version of the MFD Navigation Map and can be displayed in the lower left corner of
the PFD. When the system is in reversionary mode, the Inset Map is displayed in the lower right corner. The
Inset Map is displayed by pressing the INSET Softkey. Pressing the INSET Softkey again, then pressing the OFF
Softkey removes the Inset Map.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map displays aviation data (e.g., airports, VORs, airways, airspaces), geographic data (e.g.,
cities, lakes, highways, borders), topographic data (map shading indicating elevation), and hazard data (e.g.,
traffic, terrain, weather). The amount of displayed data can be reduced by pressing the DCLTR Softkey. The
Navigation Map can be oriented four different ways: North Up (NORTH UP), Track Up (TRK UP), Desired Track
Up (DTK UP), or Heading Up (HDG UP).
AFCS
An aircraft icon is placed on the Navigation Map at the location corresponding to the calculated present position.
The aircraft position and the flight plan legs are accurately based on GPS calculations. The basemap upon which
these are placed are from a source with less resolution, therefore the relative position of the aircraft to map features
is not exact. The leg of the active flight plan currently being flown is shown as a magenta line on the navigation
map. The other legs are shown in white.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in the
lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. To change the map
range on any map, turn the Joystick counter-clockwise to zoom in ( -, decreasing), or clockwise to zoom out (+,
increasing).
APPENDICES
The Direct-to Window, the Flight Plan Window, the Procedures Window, and the Nearest Airports Window
can be displayed in the lower right corner of the PFD. Details of these windows are discussed in detail later in
the section.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
161
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Status Box
GPS Track
(dashed line)
Navigation Mode
Inset Map
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Location of:
- Direct To Window
- Flight Plan Window
- Procedures Window
- Nearest Airports Window
Figure 5-1 GPS Navigation Information on the PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Status Box
Destination Airport Info
- Identifier
- Fuel Remaining
- Distance
- Estimated Time Enroute
- Bearing
Navigation Page Title
Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Aviation Data
- Geographic Data
- Topographic Data
- Hazard Data
Map Orientation
Flight Plan Leg
Aircraft Icon
at Present Position
AFCS
Active Flight Plan Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map Range
Figure 5-2 GPS Navigation Information on the MFD Navigation Page
APPENDICES
NAVIGATION STATUS BOX
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the PFD contains two fields displaying the following
information:
INDEX
PFD Navigation Status Box
162
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Distance (DIS) and Estimate Time Enroute (ETE)
to the next waypoint or flight plan annunciations
(e.g., ‘TOD within 1 minute’)
• Bearing (BRG)
The symbols used in the PFD status bar are:
Symbol
Direct-to
Left Procedure Turn
Right Holding Pattern
• Desired Track (DTK)
• Endurance (END)
• Enroute Safe Altitude (ESA)
• Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA)
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Fuel on Board (FOB)
• Ground Speed (GS)
• Minimum Safe Altitude (MSA)
• True Air Speed (TAS)
• Track Angle Error (TKE)
Vector to Final
• Track (TRK)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Left Holding Pattern
Right DME Arc
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Right Procedure Turn
• Distance (DIS)
EIS
Description
Active Leg
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Navigation Status Box located at the top of the
MFD contains four data fields, each displaying one of
the following items:
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Active flight plan leg (e.g., ‘D-> KICT’ or ‘KIXD ->
KCOS’) or flight plan annunciations (e.g., ‘Turn
right to 021˚ in 8 seconds’)
• Vertical Speed Required (VSR)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Crosstrack Error (XTK)
Left DME Arc
MFD Navigation Status Box
AFCS
The navigation information displayed in the four data fields can be selected on the MFD Data Bar Fields Box
on the AUX - System Setup Page. The default selections (in order left to right) are GS, DTK, TRK, and ETE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Changing a field in the MFD Navigation Status Box:
1) Select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field number in the MFD Data Bar Fields Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display and scroll through the data options list.
5) Select the desired data.
6) Press the ENT Key. Pressing the DFLTS Softkey returns all fields to the default setting.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
163
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.2 USING MAP DISPLAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map displays are used extensively in Perspective to provide situational awareness in flight. Most Perspective
maps can display the following information:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• Airports, NAVAIDs, airspaces, airways, land data • Aircraft icon (representing present position)
(highways, cities, lakes, rivers, borders, etc.) with • Nav range ring
names
• Fuel range ring
• Map Pointer information (distance and bearing to
pointer, location of pointer, name, and other pertinent • Flight plan legs
information)
• User waypoints
• Map range
• Track vector
• Wind direction and speed
• Topography scale
• Map orientation
• Topography data
• Icons for enabled map features
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Obstacle data
The information in this section applies to the following maps unless otherwise noted:
• All Map Group Pages (MAP)
• Flight Plan Pages (FPL)
• All Waypoint Group Pages (WPT)
• Direct-to Window
• AUX - Trip Planning
• PFD Inset Map
• All Nearest Group Pages (NRST)
• Procedure Loading Pages
MAP ORIENTATION
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Maps are shown in one of four different orientation options, allowing flexibility in determining aircraft
position relative to other items on the map (north up) or for determining where map items are relative to where
the aircraft is going (track up, desired track up, or heading up). The map orientation is shown in the upper
right corner of the map.
Figure 5-3 Map Orientation
INDEX
• North up (NORTH UP) aligns the top of the map display to north (default setting).
• Track up (TRK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current ground track.
• Desired track up (DTK UP) aligns the top of the map display to the desired course.
• Heading up (HDG UP) aligns the top of the map display to the current aircraft heading.
164
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: When panning or reviewing active flight plan legs in a non-North Up orientation, the map does not
show the map orientation nor the wind direction and speed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Map orientation can only be changed on the Navigation Map Page. All other displays (except the
PFD Inset Map) that show navigation data reflect the orientation selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
PFD Inset Map is always Heading Up (if heading is invalid, then track up).
Changing the Navigation Map orientation:
EIS
1) With the Navigation Map Page displayed, press the MENU Key. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Setup
Selection
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-4 Navigation Map Page Menu Window
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Map Setup Window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the large FMS Knob, or press the ENT Key once, to select the ‘ORIENTATION’ field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired orientation.
5) Press the ENT Key to select the new orientation.
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the base page.
AFCS
Map Group Selection
Orientation Field
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Auto North Up
- On/Off
- Minimum Range
APPENDICES
Figure 5-5 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
165
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
The map can be configured to switch automatically to a north up orientation when the map range reaches a
minimum range.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Enabling/disabling Auto North Up and selecting the minimum switching range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO NORTH UP’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’ using the small FMS Knob.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the range field.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option.
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
MAP RANGE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
There are 28 different map ranges available, from 500 feet to 2000 nm. The current range is indicated in
the lower right corner of the map and represents the top-to-bottom distance covered by the map. When the
map range is decreased to a point that exceeds the capability of Perspective to accurately represent the map,
a magnifying glass icon is shown to the left of the map range. To change the map range turn the Joystick
counter-clockwise to decrease the range, or clockwise to increase the range.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Range Overzoom
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-6 Map Range
166
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTO ZOOM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Auto zoom allows the system to change the map display range to the smallest range clearly showing the
active waypoint. Auto zoom can be overridden by adjusting the range with the Joystick, and remains until
the active waypoint changes, a terrain or traffic alert occurs, the aircraft takes off, or the manual override times
out (timer set on Map Setup Window). Auto zoom is suspended while the map pointer is active.
EIS
If a terrain caution or warning occurs, all navigation maps automatically adjust to the smallest map range
clearly showing the potential impact points If a new traffic advisory alert occurs, any map page capable of
displaying traffic advisory alerts automatically adjusts to the smallest map range clearly showing the traffic
advisory. When terrain or traffic alerts clear, the map returns to the previous auto zoom range based on the
active waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The auto zoom function can be turned on or off independently for the PFDs and MFD. Control of the
ranges at which the auto zoom occurs is done by setting the minimum and maximum ‘look forward’ times
(set on the Map Setup Window for the Map Group). These settings determines the minimum and maximum
distance to display based upon the aircraft’s ground speed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Waypoints that are long distances apart cause the map range to increase to a point where many details on
the map are decluttered. If this is not acceptable, lower the maximum look ahead time to a value that limits
the auto zoom to an acceptable range.
• Waypoints that are very short distances apart cause the map range to decrease to a point where situational
awareness may not be what is desired. Increase the minimum look ahead time to a value that limits the auto
zoom to a minimum range that provides acceptable situational awareness.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Flight plans that have a combination of long and short legs cause the range to increase and decrease as
waypoints sequence. To avoid this, auto zoom can be disabled or the maximum/minimum times can be
adjusted.
• The ‘time out’ time (configurable on the Map Setup Page for the Map Group) determines how long auto
zoom is overridden by a manual adjustment of the range knob. At the expiration of this time, the auto
zoom range is restored. Setting the ‘time out’ value to zero causes the manual override to never time out.
AFCS
• When the maximum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the upper limit becomes the maximum range available
(2000 nm).
• When the minimum ‘look forward’ time is set to zero, the lower limit becomes 1.5 nm.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
167
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Auto Zoom:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Off, MFD Only, PFD Only, All On
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Manual Range Override
Expiration Time
Maximum Look Forward Time
Minimum Look Forward Time
Figure 5-7 Map Setup Menu Window - Map Group, Auto Zoom
Configuring automatic zoom:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Highlight the ‘AUTO ZOOM’ field.
6) Select ‘Off’, ‘MFD Only’, ‘PFD Only’, or ‘ALL On’.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the ‘MAX LOOK FWD’ field.
Times are from zero to 999 minutes.
AFCS
8) Use the FMS Knobs to set the time. Press the ENT Key.
9) Repeat step 8 for ‘MIN LOOK FWD’ (zero to 99 minutes) and ‘TIME OUT’ (zero to 99 minutes).
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
168
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP PANNING
Map panning allows the pilot to:
• View parts of the map outside the displayed range without adjusting the map range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Highlight and select locations on the map
• Review information for a selected airport, NAVAID or user waypoint
• Designate locations for use in flight planning
• View airspace and airway information
EIS
When the panning function is selected by pressing the Joystick, the Map Pointer flashes on the map display.
A window also appears at the top of the map display showing the latitude/longitude position of the pointer,
the bearing and distance to the pointer from the aircraft’s present position, and the elevation of the land at the
position of the pointer.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Pointer Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-8 Navigation Map - Map Pointer Activated
NOTE: The map is normally centered on the aircraft’s position. If the map has been panned and there has
APPENDICES
been no pointer movement for about 60 seconds, the map reverts back to centered on the aircraft position
and the flashing pointer is removed.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
169
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the Map Pointer is placed on an object, the name of the object is highlighted (even if the name was
not originally displayed on the map). When any map feature or object is selected on the map display, pertinent
information is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Information about Point
of Interest
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Map Pointer on
POI
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-9 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Point of Interest
AFCS
When the Map Pointer crosses an airspace boundary, the boundary is highlighted and airspace information
is shown at the top of the display. The information includes the name and class of airspace, the ceiling in feet
above Mean Sea Level (MSL), and the floor in feet MSL.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Information about
Airspace
INDEX
APPENDICES
Map Pointer on
Airspace
Figure 5-10 Navigation Map - Map Pointer on Airspace
170
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Panning the map:
1) Press the Joystick to display the Map Pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to move the Map Pointer around the map.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the Joystick to remove the Map Pointer and recenter the map on the aircraft’s current position.
Reviewing information for an airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint:
1) Place the Map Pointer on a waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key to display the Waypoint Information Page for the selected waypoint.
EIS
3) Press the GO BACK Softkey, the CLR Key, or the ENT Key to exit the Waypoint Information Page and return to
the Navigation Map showing the selected waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NAVAID
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
GO BACK Softkey
Figure 5-11 Navigation Map - Information Window - NAVAID
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
171
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Viewing airspace information for a special-use or controlled airspace:
1) Place the Map Pointer on an open area within the boundaries of an airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the ENT Key to display an options menu.
3) ‘Review Airspaces’ should already be highlighted, if not select it. Press the ENT Key to display the Airspace
Information Page for the selected airspace.
EIS
4) Press the CLR or ENT Key to exit the Airspace Information Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airspace
Information
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-12 Navigation Map - Information Window - Airspace
172
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MEASURING BEARING AND DISTANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance and bearing from the aircraft’s present position to any point on the viewable navigation map may be
calculated using the ‘Measure Bearing and Distance’ selection from Navigation Map page menu. The bearing
and distance tool displays a dashed Measurement Line and a Measure Pointer to aid in graphically identifying
points with which to measure. Lat/Long, distance and elevation data for the Measure Pointer is provided in a
window at the top of the navigation map.
Measuring bearing and distance between any two points:
1) Press the MENU Key (with the Navigation Map Page displayed).
EIS
2) Highlight the ‘Measure Bearing/Distance’ field.
3) Press the ENT Key. A Measure Pointer is displayed on the map at the aircraft’s present position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Move the Joystick to place the reference pointer at the desired location. The bearing and distance are displayed
at the top of the map. Elevation at the current pointer position is also displayed. Pressing the ENT Key changes
the starting point for measuring.
Measurement
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) To exit the Measure Bearing/Distance option, press the Joystick; or select ‘Stop Measuring’ from the Page
Menu and press the ENT Key.
Pointer Lat/Long
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Measurement Line
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-13 Navigation Map - Measuring Bearing and Distance
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
173
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
TOPOGRAPHY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
All navigation maps can display various shades of topography colors representing land elevation, similar to
aviation sectional charts. Topographic data can be displayed or removed as described in the following procedures.
Topographic data can also be displayed on the selectable profile map at the bottom of the navigation map.
Navigation Map
Topographic Data
EIS
Navigation Map
Black Background
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TOPO Softkey
Not Enabled
Topographic Data
on Profile Map
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TOPO Off
TOPO Softkey
Enabled
Figure 5-14 Navigation Map - Topographic Data
TOPO On
Displaying/removing topographic data on all pages displaying navigation maps:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MAP Softkey (the INSET Softkey for the PFD Inset Map).
2) Press the TOPO Softkey.
3) Press the TOPO Softkey again to remove topographic data from the Navigation Map. When topographic data
is removed from the page, all navigation data is presented on a black background.
AFCS
Displaying/removing topographic data (TOPO DATA) using the Navigation Map Page Menu:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ field.
APPENDICES
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
174
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TOPO DATA
Range
EIS
TOPO DATA
On/Off
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-15 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO DATA Setup
The topographic data range is the maximum map range on which topographic data is displayed.
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
Selecting a topographical data range (TOPO DATA):
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘TOPO DATA’ range field. TOPO ranges are from 500 ft to 2000 nm.
6) To change the TOPO range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
7) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key.
9) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
175
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
In addition, the Navigation Map can display a topographic scale (located in the lower right hand side of the
map) showing a scale of the terrain elevation and current elevation values.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Maximum Displayed Elevation
Minimum Displayed Elevation
Aircraft Altitude (MSL)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range of
Displayed
Elevations
Ground Elevation at Map
Pointer Location (only visible
when Map Pointer is displayed)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-16 Navigation Map - TOPO SCALE
Displaying/removing the topographic scale (TOPO SCALE):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Select the ‘Map’ group and select the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘TOPO SCALE’ field.
5) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
TOPO SCALE
On/Off
Figure 5-17 Navigation Map Setup Menu - TOPO SCALE Setup
176
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP SYMBOLS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This section discusses the types of land and aviation symbols that can be displayed. Each listed type of symbol
can be turned on or off, and the maximum range to display each symbol can be set. The decluttering of the
symbols from the map using the DCLTR Softkey is also discussed.
LAND SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the land menu:
Land Symbols
Symbol
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
EIS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med), or Large
(Lrg))
Off
2000
Interstate Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
International Highway (FREEWAY)
300
800
US Highway (NATIONAL HWY)
30
80
State Highway (LOCAL HWY)
15
30
8
15
Railroads (RAILROAD)
15
30
LARGE CITY (> 200,000)
800
1500
MEDIUM CITY (> 50,000)
100
200
SMALL CITY (> 5,000)
States and Provinces (STATE/PROV)
20
800
50
1500
Rivers and Lakes (RIVER/LAKE)
200
500
USER WAYPOINT
150
300
Latitude/Longitude (LAT/LON)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
N/A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Local Road (LOCAL ROAD)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Highways and Roads
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Table 5-1 Land Symbol Information
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
177
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AVIATION SYMBOLS
The following items are configured on the aviation menu:
Aviation Symbols
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
(Text label size can be None, Small, Medium (Med),
or Large (Lrg))
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
Active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
Non-active Flight Plan Leg (ACTIVE FPL)
2000
2000
2000
200
150
50
3
Off
15
2000
500
300
100
20
100
30
Non-directional Beacon (NDB WAYPOINT)
15
30
VOR (VOR WAYPOINT)
150
300
Class B Airspace/TMA (CLASS B/TMA)
200
500
Class C Airspace/TCA (CLASS C/TCA)
200
500
Class D Airspace (CLASS D)
150
300
Restricted Area (RESTRICTED)
200
500
Military Operations Area [MOA(MILITARY)]
200
500
Other/Air Defense Interdiction Zone (OTHER/ADIZ)
200
500
Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR)
500
2000
Active Flight Plan Waypoint (ACTIVE FPL WPT)
Large Airports (LARGE APT)
Medium Airports (MEDIUM APT)
Small Airports (SMALL APT)
Taxiways (SAFETAXI)
Runway Extension (RWY EXTENSION)
Intersection (INT WAYPOINT)
APPENDICES
Symbol
See Airports, NAVAIDs
See Additional Features
N/A
INDEX
Table 5-2 Aviation Symbol Information
178
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYMBOL SETUP
All pages with maps can display land symbols (roads, lakes, borders, etc). Land symbols can be removed
totally (turned off).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Displaying/removing all land symbols:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The Page Menu is displayed and the cursor
flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Group Menu is displayed and the cursor flashes on the ‘Map’ option.
EIS
3) Highlight the ‘LAND DATA’ field.
4) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
LAND DATA
On/Off
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-18 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND DATA Setup
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The label size (TEXT) sets the size at which labels appear on the display (none, small, medium, and large).
The range (RNG) sets the maximum range at which items appear on the display.
Selecting a ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group item text size and range:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Land’ or ‘Aviation’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on the first field.
5) Select the desired land option.
INDEX
6) Select the desired text size.
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected size.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
179
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
8) Select the desired range.
9) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected range.
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
Maximum Display Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-19 Navigation Map Setup Menu - LAND GROUP Setup
Maximum Display Range
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Text Label Size
(None, Small, Med, or Lrg)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-20 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AVIATION GROUP Setup
NOTE: Since the PFD Inset Map is much smaller than the MFD navigation maps, items are removed on the
INDEX
PFD Inset Map two range levels smaller than the range selected in the Map Setup pages (e.g., a setting
of 100 nm removes the item at ranges above 100 nm on MFD navigation maps, while the PFD Inset Map
removes the same item at 50 nm).
180
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
MAP DECLUTTER
The declutter feature allows the pilot to progressively step through four levels of removing map information.
The declutter level is displayed in the DCLTR Softkey and next to the Declutter Menu Option.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Declutter Level
EIS
DCLTR Softkey
Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 5-21 Navigation Map - Declutter Level Indications
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Decluttering the map:
Press the DCLTR Softkey with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The current declutter level is shown. With
each softkey selection, another level of map information is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed.
2) Select ‘Declutter’. The current declutter level is shown.
3) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Decluttering the PFD Inset Map:
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the DCLTR Softkey. The current declutter level is shown. With each selection, another level of map
information is removed.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
181
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Table 5-3 lists the items that are decluttered at each map detail level. The ‘X’ represents map items
decluttered for each level of detail.
Item
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Data Link Radar Precipitation
Data Link Lightning
Graphical METARs
Airports
Safe Taxi
Runway Labels
TFRs
Restricted
MOA (Military)
User Waypoints
Latitude/Longitude Grid
NAVAIDs (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Intersections (does not declutter if used to define airway)
Class B Airspaces/TMA
Class C Airspaces/TCA
Class D Airspaces
Other Airspaces/ADIZ
Obstacles
Cities
Roads
Railroads
State/Province Boundaries
Declutter-1 Declutter-2 Declutter-3
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 5-3 Navigation Map Items Decluttered for each Detail Level
182
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AIRWAYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
This airways discussion is based upon the North American airway structure. The airway structure in places
other than North America vary by location, etc. and are not discussed in this book. Low Altitude Airways (or
Victor Airways) primarily serve smaller piston-engine, propeller-driven airplanes on shorter routes and at lower
altitudes. Airways are eight nautical miles wide and start 1,200 feet above ground level (AGL) and extend up
to 18,000 feet mean sea level (MSL). Low Altitude Airways are designated with a “V” before the airway number
(hence the name “Victor Airways”) since they run primarily between VORs.
EIS
High Altitude Airways (or Jet Routes) primarily serve airliners, jets, turboprops, and turbocharged piston
aircraft operating above 18,000 feet MSL. Jet Routes start at 18,000 feet MSL and extend upward to 45,000 feet
MSL (altitudes above 18,000 feet are called “flight levels” and are described as FL450 for 45,000 feet MSL). Jet
Routes are designated with a “J” before the route number.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Low Altitude Airways are drawn in gray (the same shade used for roads). High Altitude Airways are drawn
in green. When both types of airways are displayed, High Altitude Airways are drawn on top of Low Altitude
Airways.
When airways are selected for display on the map, the airway waypoints (VORs, NDBs and Intersections) are
also displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Low Altitude
Airway
(Victor Airway)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
High Altitude
Airway
(Jet Route)
APPENDICES
Figure 5-22 Airways on MFD Navigation Page
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Airways may be displayed on the map at the pilot’s discretion using either a combination of AIRWAYS Softkey
presses, or menu selections using the MENU Key from the Navigation Map Page. The Airway range can also be
programmed to only display Airways on the MFD when the map range is at or below a specific number.
183
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing airways:
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the AIRWAYS Softkey. Both High and Low Altitude Airways are displayed (AIRWAY ON).
3) Select the softkey again to display Low Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY LO).
4) Select the softkey again to display High Altitude Airways only (AIRWAY HI).
5) Select the softkey again to remove High Altitude Airways. No airways are displayed (AIRWAYS).
Or:
EIS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the ‘AIRWAYS’ field.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Off’, ‘All’, ‘LO Only’, or ‘HI Only’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
Airway Display Selection
Off, All, LO Only, HI Only
Low Altitude Airway Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
High Altitude Airway Range
Figure 5-23 Navigation Map Setup Menu - AIRWAYS Setup
The airway range is the maximum map range on which airways are displayed.
AFCS
Selecting an airway range (LOW ALT AIRWAY or HI ALT AIRWAY):
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Airways’ group, and press the ENT Key.
4) Highlight the ‘LOW ALT AIRWAY’ or ‘HI ALT AIRWAY’ range field.
5) To change the range setting, turn the small FMS Knob to display the range list.
APPENDICES
6) Select the desired range using the small FMS Knob.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
INDEX
The following range items are configurable on the airways menu:
184
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Symbol
Low Altitude Airway (LOW ALT AIRWAY)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airway Type
Default
Maximum
Range (nm) Range (nm)
200
500
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
300
High Altitude Airway (HI ALT AIRWAY)
500
Table 5-4 Airway Range Information
TRACK VECTOR
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map can display a track vector that is useful in minimizing track angle error. The track vector
is a solid cyan line segment extended to a predicted location. The track vector look-ahead time is selectable (30
sec, 60 sec (default), 2 min, 5 min, 10 min, 20 min) and determines the length of the track vector. The track
vector shows up to 90 degrees of a turn for the 30 and 60 second time settings. It is always a straight line for
the 2 min, 5 min, 10 min and 20 min settings.
Track Vector
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-24 Navigation Map -Track Vector
Displaying/removing the track vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
AFCS
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Highlight the ‘TRACK VECTOR’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’. Press the ENT Key to accept the selected option. The flashing cursor highlights the look
ahead time field. Use the FMS Knob to select the desired time. Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
185
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Wind Vector On/Off
EIS
Nav Range Ring On/Off
Track Vector
- On/Off
- Look Ahead Time
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Fuel Range
- On/Off
- Fuel Reserve Time
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-25 Navigation Map Setup Menu -TRACK VECTOR, WIND VECTOR, NAV RANGE RING, FUEL RANGE RING Setup
WIND VECTOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The map displays a wind vector arrow in the upper right-hand portion of the screen. Wind vector information
is displayed as a white arrow pointing in the direction in which the wind is moving for wind speeds greater than
or equal to 1 kt.
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
AFCS
Figure 5-26 Navigation Map - Wind Vector
NOTE: The wind vector is not displayed until the aircraft is moving. It is not displayed on the Waypoint
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Information pages.
Displaying/removing the wind vector:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘WIND VECTOR’ field.
INDEX
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
186
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAV RANGE RING
The Nav Range Ring shows the direction of travel (ground track) on a rotating compass card. The range is
determined by the map range. The range is 1/4 of the map range (e.g., 37.5 nm on a 150 nm map).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Range (radius)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nav Range Ring
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-27 Navigation Map - Nav Range Ring
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is not displayed on the Waypoint Information pages, Nearest pages, or Direct-to
Window map.
Displaying/removing the Nav Range Ring:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘NAV RANGE RING’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
APPENDICES
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
NOTE: The Nav Range Ring is referenced to either magnetic or true north, based on the selection on the AUX
- System Setup Page.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
187
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FUEL RANGE RING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display a fuel range ring which shows the remaining flight distance. A dashed green circle
indicates the selected range to reserve fuel. A solid green circle indicates the total endurance range. If only
reserve fuel remains, the range is indicated by a solid yellow circle.
Total Endurance Range
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Time to Reserve Fuel
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Range to Reserve Fuel
Figure 5-28 Navigation Map - Fuel Range Ring
Displaying/removing the fuel range ring and selecting a fuel range time:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Highlight the ‘FUEL RNG (RSV)’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
7) Highlight the fuel reserve time field. This time should be set to the amount of flight time equal to the amount
of fuel reserve desired.
8) To change the reserve fuel time, enter a time (00:00 to 23:59; hours:minutes). The default setting is 00:45
minutes.
9) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
10) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
188
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FIELD OF VIEW (SVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the boundaries of the PFD Synthetic Vision System (SVS) lateral field of view. The field
of view is shown as two dashed lines forming a V shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map. This is only
available if SVS is installed on the aircraft.
EIS
Lateral Field
of View
Boundaries
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-29 Navigation Map - Field of View
Displaying/removing the field of view:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘FIELD OF VIEW’ field.
AFCS
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
189
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SELECTED ALTITUDE INTERCEPT ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The map can display the location along the current track where the aircraft will intercept the selected altitude.
The location will be shown as a cyan arc when the aircraft is actually climbing or descending.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Range to
Altitude Arc
Figure 5-30 Navigation Map - Range to Altitude Arc
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying/removing the selected altitude intercept arc:
1) Press the MENU Key with the Navigation Map Page displayed. The cursor flashes on the ‘Map Setup’ option.
2) Press the ENT Key. The Map Setup Menu is displayed.
3) Select the ‘Map’ group.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Highlight the ‘SEL ALT ARC’ field.
6) Select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
190
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESTINATION AIRPORT INFORMATION
The destination airport for which the information is displayed is determined as follows.
• The destination airport is the last airport in the active flight plan if:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- No arrival or approach is loaded, or
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and no approach is loaded, or
- The active leg is past the MAP
• The destination airport is the airport prior to the procedure(s) in the active flight plan if:
EIS
- An arrival and/or approach is loaded and neither are active
• The destination airport is the airport associated with the approach if:
- An arrival waypoint is part of the active leg and an approach is loaded, or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- The approach is active
• The destination airport is the Direct-to waypoint if:
- The Direct-to waypoint is not in the active flight plan and is an airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If none of these conditions are met, then the destination airport is undefined and the destination information
fields are shown as dashes.
Valid Destination Airport
Estimated
Time Enroute
Bearing
to Airport
AFCS
Enroute
Distance
Fuel Remaining
at Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport
Identifier
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Invalid Destination Airport
Figure 5-31 Destination Airport Information
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
191
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.3 WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints are predetermined geographical positions (internal database) or pilot-entered positions, and are
used for all phases of flight planning and navigation.
Communication and navigation frequencies can be tuned “automatically” from various Waypoint Information
(WPT) pages, Nearest (NRST) pages, and the Nearest Airports Window (on PFD). This auto-tuning feature
simplifies frequency entry over manual tuning. Refer to the Audio Panel and CNS section for details on autotuning.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Waypoints can be selected by entering the ICAO identifier, entering the name of the facility, or by entering
the city name. See the System Overview section for detailed instructions on entering data in Perspective. As a
waypoint identifier, facility name, or location is entered, The system’s Spell’N’Find™ feature scrolls through the
database, displaying those waypoints matching the characters which have been entered to that point. A direct-to
navigation leg to the selected waypoint can be initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on any of the waypoint
pages.
Identifier Entry Field
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
City Entry Field
Facility
Entry Field
Entered Waypoint on
Map
Map Area Showing
Entered Waypoint
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Waypoint Identifier
- Type (symbol)
- Facility Name
- City
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Waypoint Location
Figure 5-32 Waypoint Information Window
INDEX
APPENDICES
If duplicate entries exist for the entered facility name or location, additional entries may be viewed by continuing
to turn the small FMS Knob during the selection process. If duplicate entries exist for an identifier, a Duplicate
Waypoints Window is displayed when the ENT Key is pressed.
192
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Identifier with
Duplicates
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Duplicate
Waypoints
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Duplicate Message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORTS
Figure 5-33 Waypoint Information Window - Duplicate Identifier
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NOTE: ‘North Up’ orientation on the Airport Information Page cannot be changed; the pilot needs to be
aware of proper orientation if the Navigation Map orientation is different from the Airport Information Page
Map.
AFCS
The Airport Information Page is the first page in WPT group and allows the pilot to view airport information,
load frequencies (COM, NAV, and lighting), review runways, and review instrument procedures that may be
involved in the flight plan. See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for more information on loading frequencies
(auto-tuning). After engine startup, the Airport Information Page defaults to the airport where the aircraft is
located. After a flight plan has been loaded, it defaults to the destination airport. On a flight plan with multiple
airports, it defaults to the airport which is the current active waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and surrounding area, the Airport Information
Page displays airport information in three boxes labeled ‘AIRPORT’, ‘RUNWAYS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’. For
airports with multiple runways, information for each runway is available. This information is viewed on the
Airport Information Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO-1 is displayed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
193
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Airport Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
- Lat/Long/Elev
- Fuel Available
- Time Zone (UTC Offset)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Airport
Runway Information
EIS
- Designation
- Length/Width/Surface
- Lighting Available
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
Airport/Runway
Diagram
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identification
- Frequency
- Availability
- Additional Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Softkeys
Figure 5-34 Airport Information Page
The following descriptions and abbreviations are used on the Airport Information Page:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Usage type: Public, Military, Private, or Heliport
• Runway surface type: Hard, Turf, Sealed, Gravel, Dirt, Soft, Unknown, or Water
• Runway lighting type: No Lights, Part Time, Full Time, Unknown, or PCL Freq (for pilot-controlled
lighting)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
• COM Availability: TX (transmit only), RX (receive only), PT (part time), i (additional information available)
194
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The directory information is viewed on the Airport Directory Page by pressing the INFO softkey until INFO2 is displayed. The following are types of airport directory information shown (if available) on the Airport
Directory Page:
• Services Available: Category,
Specific Service
• Pilot Controlled Lighting:
High/Med/Low Clicks/Second
• FBO: Type, Frequencies,
Services, Fees, Fuel, Credit
Cards, Phone/Fax Numbers
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
• Notes: Airport Notes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Transportation: Ground
Transportation Type Available
• Approach: Approach Facility
Name, Frequency, Frequency
Parameter
• Instrument Approaches:
Published Approach,
Frequency
• NAVAIDS: Type, Identifier,
Frequency, Radial, Distance
• Noise: Noise Abatement
Procedures
• Charts: Low Altitude Chart
Number
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Frequencies: Type/Frequency
• Runway: Headings, Length,
Width, Obstructions, Surface
• Obstructions: General
Airport Obstructions
• Special Operations at
Airport
EIS
• Hours: Facility Hours, Light
Hours, Tower Hours, Beacon
Hours
• Location: Sectional, Magnetic
Variation
• Traffic Pattern Altitudes
(TPA): Aircraft Class/Altitude
• Weather: Service Type,
Frequency, Phone Number
• Flight Service Station (FSS):
FSS Name, Phone Numbers
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Airport: Identifier, Site
Number, Name, City, State
• Phones: Phone/Fax Numbers
Airport Directory
Information
- ID/Facility/City
- Usage Type/Region
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Softkeys
Figure 5-35 Airport Directory Page Example
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
195
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Selecting an airport for review by identifier, facility name, or location:
1) From the Airport Information Page, press the FMS Knob.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the FMS Knobs and enter an identifier, facility name, or location.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Selecting a runway:
1) With the Airport Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box, on the runway designator.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the desired runway (if more than one) for the selected airport.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the flashing cursor, press the FMS Knob.
Viewing a destination airport:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
From the Airport Information Page press the MENU Key. Select ‘View Destination Airport’. The Destination
Airport is displayed.
The Airport Frequencies Box uses the descriptions and abbreviations listed in the following table:
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Communication Frequencies
Approach * Control
Pre-Taxi
Arrival *
CTA *
Radar
ASOS
Departure * Ramp
ATIS
Gate
Terminal *
AWOS
Ground
TMA *
Center
Helicopter
Tower
Class B *
Multicom
TRSA *
Class C *
Other
Unicom
Clearance
Navigation Frequencies
ILS
LOC
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
* May include Additional Information
Table 5-5 Airport Frequency Abbreviations
APPENDICES
A departure, arrival, or approach can be loaded using the softkeys on the Airport Information Page. See the
Procedures section for details. METARs or TAFs applicable to the selected airport can be selected for display (see
the Hazard Avoidance section for details about weather).
INDEX
Perspective provides a NRST Softkey on the PFD, which gives the pilot quick access to nearest airport
information (very useful if an immediate landing is required). The Nearest Airports Window displays a list
of up to 25 nearest airports (three entries can be displayed at one time). If there are more than three they are
displayed in a scrollable list. If there are no nearest airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200NM” is displayed.
196
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Bearing/Distance to Airport
Airport Identifier/
Type
Approach Available
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Length of Longest
Runway
COM Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
Additional Airports
(within 200 nm)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NRST Softkey
Figure 5-36 Nearest Airports Window on PFD
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Pressing the ENT Key displays the PFD Airport Information Window for the highlighted airport. Pressing the
ENT Key again returns to the Nearest Airports Window with the cursor on the next airport in the list. Continued
presses of the ENT Key sequences through the information pages for all airports in the Nearest Airports list.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Information
- ID/Type/City
- Facility
Airport Information
- Usage/Time/Elev
- Region
AFCS
Airport Information
- Lat/Long
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-37 Airport Information Window on PFD
APPENDICES
The Nearest Airports Page on the MFD is first in the group of NRST pages because of its potential use in
the event of an in-flight emergency. In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected airport and
surrounding area, the page displays nearest airport information in five boxes labeled ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’,
‘INFORMATION’, ‘RUNWAYS’, ‘FREQUENCIES’, and ‘APPROACHES’.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The selected airport is indicated by a white arrow, and a dashed white line is drawn on the navigation map
from the aircraft position to the nearest airport. Up to five nearest airports, one runway, up to three frequencies,
and up to three approaches are visible at one time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled.
197
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If there are no items for display in a boxed area, text indicating that fact is displayed. The currently selected
airport remains in the list until it is unselected.
Nearest Airports
- ID/Type
- Bearing/Distance
Airport Information
EIS
- Facility/City/Elevation
Runway Information
Nearest Airport
- Designation/Surface
- Length/Width
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
COM/NAV Freq. Info.
- Identification
- Frequency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Airport
Approaches Available
Window Selection
Softkeys
Figure 5-38 Nearest Airport Page
LD APR Softkey (only
available if an approach is
highlighted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the PFD:
1) Press the NRST Softkey to display the Nearest Airports Window. Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Highlight the airport identifier with the FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to display the Airport Information
Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) To return to the Nearest Airports Window press the ENT Key (with the cursor on ‘BACK’) or press the CLR
Key. The cursor is now on the next airport in the nearest airports list. (Repeatedly pressing the ENT Key
moves through the airport list, alternating between the Nearest Airports Window and the Airport Information
Window.)
4) Press the CLR Key or the NRST Softkey to close the PFD Nearest Airports Window.
Viewing information for a nearest airport on the MFD:
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Nearest Airports Page (it is the first page of the group, so it may already
be selected). If there are no Nearest Airports available, “NONE WITHIN 200 NM” is displayed.
INDEX
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the NRST page group.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired airport. (Pressing the ENT Key also moves to the next airport.)
3) Press the APT Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Airport Window’ and
press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘NEAREST AIRPORTS’ Box. The first airport in the nearest airports
list is highlighted.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
198
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing runway information for a specific airport:
1) With the Nearest Airports Page displayed, press the RNWY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select
Runway Window’; and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘RUNWAYS’ Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
See the Audio Panel and CNS Section for frequency selection and the Procedures section for approaches.
EIS
The Nearest Airports Box on the System Setup Page defines the minimum runway length and surface type
used when determining the 25 nearest airports to display on the MFD Nearest Airports Page. A minimum
runway length and/or surface type can be entered to prevent airports with small runways or runways that are
not appropriately surfaced from being displayed. Default settings are 0 feet (or meters) for runway length and
“HARD/SOFT” for runway surface type.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting nearest airport surface matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the runway surface field in the Nearest Airports Box.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired runway option (ANY, HARD ONLY, HARD/SOFT).
5) Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selecting nearest airport minimum runway length matching criteria:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the minimum length field in the Nearest Airport Box.
AFCS
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the minimum runway length (zero to 25,000 feet) and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Nearest Airport Criteria
- Type of Runway Surface
- Minimum Runway Length
INDEX
Figure 5-39 System Setup Page - Nearest Airport Selection Criteria
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
199
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
INTERSECTIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The VOR displayed on the Intersection Information Page is the nearest VOR, not necessarily the VOR
used to define the intersection.
The Intersection Information Page is used to view information about intersections. In addition to displaying
a map of the currently selected intersection and surrounding area, the Intersection Information Page displays
intersection information in three boxes labeled ‘INTERSECTION’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘NEAREST VOR’.
EIS
Intersection Identifier
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
Intersection
Intersection Info
- Region
- Lat/Long
Nearest VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Radial to VOR
- Distance to VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Intersection
Figure 5-40 Intersection Information Page
AFCS
Selecting an intersection:
1) With the Intersection Information Page displayed, enter an identifier in the Intersection Box.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest Intersections Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest Intersection Box.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
The Nearest Intersections Page can be used to quickly find an intersection close to the flight path. In addition
to displaying a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest intersections in
three boxes labeled ‘NEAREST INT’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘REFERENCE VOR’.
200
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The selected intersection is indicated by a white arrow. Up to eleven intersections are visible at a time. If
there are more than can be shown, the list can be scrolled. If there are no items for display, text indicating that
fact is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The list only includes waypoints that are within 200 nm.
Intersection Information
EIS
- Identifier/Symbol
- Bearing/Distance to
intersection from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
Intersection
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Intersection Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Reference VOR Info
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- VOR Frequency
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
Nearest
Intersection
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-41 Nearest Intersections Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
201
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
NDBS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The NDB Information Page is used to view information about NDBs. In addition to displaying a map of
the currently selected NDB and surrounding area, the page displays NDB information in four boxes labeled
‘NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST AIRPORT’.
NDB Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
NDB Information
- Type
- Region
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
Selected NDB
Nearest Airport Info
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-42 NDB Information Page
NOTE: Compass locator (LOM, LMM): a low power, low or medium frequency radio beacon installed in
AFCS
conjunction with the instrument landing system. When LOM is used, the locator is at the Outer Marker;
when LMM is used, the locator is at the Middle Marker.
Selecting an NDB:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the NDB Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the NDB, or the city in which it’s
located in the NDB Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) With the Nearest NDB Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest NDB Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
202
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Nearest NDB Page can be used to quickly find a NDB close to the flight path. In addition to displaying
a map of the surrounding area, the page displays information for up to 25 nearest NDBs in three boxes labeled
‘NEAREST NDB’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A white arrow before the NDB identifier indicates the selected NDB. Up to eleven NDBs are visible at a time.
If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. The list only includes waypoints that are within
200nm. If there are no NDBs in the list, text indicating that there are no nearest NDBs is displayed. If there are
no nearest NDBs in the list, the information and frequency fields are dashed.
NDB Identifier/Symbol
EIS
- Bearing/Distance to
NDB from aircraft
position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
NDB
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Nearest NDB
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NDB Information
- Facility Name/City
- Type
- Lat/Long
NDB Frequency
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-43 Nearest NDB Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
203
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
VORS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The VOR Information Page can be used to view information about VOR and ILS signals (since ILS signals
can be received on a NAV receiver), or to quickly auto-tune a VOR or ILS frequency. Localizer information
cannot be viewed on the VOR Information Page. If a VOR station is combined with a TACAN station it is
listed as a VORTAC on the VOR Information Page and if it includes only DME, it is displayed as VOR-DME.
EIS
In addition to displaying a map of the currently selected VOR and surrounding area, the VOR Information
Page displays VOR information in four boxes labeled ‘VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, ‘FREQUENCY’, and ‘NEAREST
AIRPORT’.
VOR Identifier/Type
- Facility Name
- Nearest City
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing
Selected VOR
VOR Information
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Region
- Lat/Long
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Frequency
Nearest Airport Info
Selected VOR
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Identifier/Type (symbol)
- Bearing/Distance to
Airport
AFCS
Figure 5-44 VOR Information Page
The VOR classes used in the VOR information box are: LOW ALTITUDE, HIGH ALTITUDE, and
TERMINAL.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a VOR:
1) With the VOR Information Page displayed, enter an identifier, the name of the VOR, or the city in which it’s
located in the VOR Box.
2) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the FMS Knob or press the VOR Softkey.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
204
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) With the Nearest VOR Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Select VOR Window’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest VOR Box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
The Nearest VOR Page can be used to quickly find a VOR station close to the aircraft. Also, a NAV frequency
from a selected VOR station can be loaded from the Nearest VOR Page. In addition to displaying a map of
the surrounding area, the Nearest VOR Page displays information for up to 25 nearest VOR stations in three
boxes labeled ‘NEAREST VOR’, ‘INFORMATION’, and ‘FREQUENCY’. The list only includes waypoints that
are within 200 nm.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
A white arrow before the VOR identifier indicates the selected VOR. Up to eleven VORs are visible at a
time. If there are more than can be shown, each list can be scrolled. If there are no VORs in the list, text
indicating that there are no nearest VORs is displayed. If there are no nearest VORs in the list, the information
is dashed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VOR Identifier/Symbol
Navigation Map
Showing Nearest
VOR
- Bearing/Distance to VOR
from aircraft position
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VOR Information
AFCS
- Facility Name/City
- Class/Magnetic Variation
- Lat/Long
VOR Frequency
Nearest VOR
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-45 Nearest VOR Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
205
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
USER WAYPOINTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The system can create and store up to 1,000 user-defined waypoints. User waypoints can be created from any
map page (except PFD Inset Map, AUX-Trip Planning Page, or Procedure Pages) by selecting a position on the
map using the Joystick, or from the User Waypoint Information Page by referencing a bearing/distance from
an existing waypoint, bearings from two existing waypoints, or entering a latitude/longitude. Once a waypoint
has been created, it can be renamed, deleted, or moved. Temporary user waypoints are erased upon system
power down.
User Waypoint Info
EIS
- Identifier
- Temporary/Normal
- Waypoint Type
User Wpt Comment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
Reference Wpt/Info
- Identifier/Rad/Dist or
- Identifiers/Radials or
- Region/Lat/Long
Selected User
Waypoint
User Waypoint List
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Identifier
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
# User Wpts Used
Displayed if User Wpt
was created on map
page
Softkeys
Figure 5-46 User Waypoint Information Page
AFCS
Selecting a User Waypoint:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, enter the name of the User Waypoint, or scroll to the
desired waypoint in the User Waypoint List using the large FMS Knob.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) With the Nearest User Waypoints Page displayed, press the FMS Knob.
2) Press the ENT Key or turn either FMS Knob to select an identifier in the Nearest USR Box.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
206
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Nearest User Wpt List
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
- Identifier
- Bearing/Distance from
aircraft position
Navigation Map
Showing Selected
User Waypoint
EIS
User Waypoint Info
- Comment
- Lat/Long
Reference Wpt Info
Selected User
Waypoint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Identifier
- Radial/Distance
Figure 5-47 Nearest User Waypoint Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CREATING USER WAYPOINTS
User waypoints can be created from the User Waypoint Information Page in the following ways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Creating user waypoints from the User Waypoint Information Page:
1) Press the NEW Softkey, or press the MENU Key and select ‘Create New User Waypoint’.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The current aircraft position is the default location of the new waypoint.
AFCS
4) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
APPENDICES
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
207
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
6) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Are you sure you want to create the new User Waypoint AAAAAA?’ is
displayed.
EIS
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
Figure 5-48 User Waypoint Information Page Menu
208
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating user waypoints from map pages:
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function and pan to the map location of the desired user waypoint.
2) Press the ENT Key. The User Waypoint Information Page is displayed with the captured position.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: If the pointer has highlighted a map database feature, one of three things happens upon pressing
the ENT Key: 1) information about the selected feature is displayed instead of initiating a new waypoint,
2) a menu pops up allowing a choice between ‘Review Airspaces’ or ‘Create User Waypoint’, or 3) a new
waypoint is initiated with the default name being the selected map item.
EIS
3) Enter a user waypoint name (up to six characters).
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the selected name.
5) If desired, define the type and location of the waypoint in one of the following ways:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Select “RAD/RAD” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the two reference waypoint
identifiers and radials into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select “RAD/DIS” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the reference waypoint identifier,
the radial, and the distance into the REFERENCE WAYPOINTS window using the FMS Knobs.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Select “LAT/LON” using the small FMS Knob, press the ENT Key, and enter the latitude and longitude into
the INFORMATION window using the FMS Knobs.
6) Press the ENT Key to accept the new waypoint.
7) If desired, change the storage method of the waypoint to “TEMPORARY” or “NORMAL” by moving the cursor
to “TEMPORARY” and selecting the ENT Key to check or uncheck the box.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
9) Press the GO BACK Softkey to return to the map page.
EDITING USER WAYPOINTS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Editing a user waypoint comment or location:
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Select a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List, if required, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Move the cursor to the desired field.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to make any changes.
5) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
209
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Renaming user waypoints:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Enter a new name.
1) Highlight a user waypoint in the User Waypoint List. Press the RENAME Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select ‘Rename User Waypoint’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message ‘Do you want to rename the user waypoint AAAAAA to BBBBBB?’ is displayed.
4) With ‘YES’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
EIS
Changing the location of an existing waypoint to the aircraft present position:
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Use Present Position’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice. The new waypoint’s location is saved.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A system generated comment for a user waypoint incorporates the reference waypoint identifier, bearing,
and distance. If a system generated comment has been edited, a new comment can be generated.
Resetting the comment field to the system generated comment:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Enter a waypoint name or select the waypoint in the User Waypoint List, then press the ENT Key.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Auto Comment’.
4) Press the ENT Key. The generated comment is based on the reference point used to define the waypoint.
AFCS
The default type of user waypoint (normal or temporary) can be changed using the user waypoint information
page menu. Temporary user waypoints are automatically deleted upon the next power cycle.
Changing the user waypoint storage duration default setting:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the User Waypoint Information Page displayed, press the MENU Key.
2) Move the cursor to select ‘Waypoint Setup’, and press the ENT Key.
3) Select ‘NORMAL’ or ‘TEMPORARY’ as desired, and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor and return to the User Waypoint Information Page.
210
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DELETING USER WAYPOINTS
Deleting a single user waypoint:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the DELETE Softkey or press the CLR Key. ‘Yes’ is highlighted in the confirmation window.
3) Press the ENT Key.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
EIS
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List, or enter a waypoint in the User Waypoint field.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Select ‘Delete User Waypoint’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The option to ‘Delete All User Waypoints’ is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all user waypoints:
1) Highlight a User Waypoint in the User Waypoint List.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Select ‘Delete All User Waypoints’.
4) Press the ENT Key twice to confirm the selection.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
211
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.4 AIRSPACES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can display the following types of airspaces: Class B/TMA, Class C/TCA, Class D, Restricted, MOA
(Military), Other Airspace, Air Defense Interdiction Zone (ADIZ), and Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR).
Class D Airspace
EIS
MOA (Military)
Class B Airspace
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Restricted Area
Alert Area
AFCS
Class C Airspace
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
ADIZ
APPENDICES
Warning Area
Figure 5-49 Airspaces
INDEX
The Nearest Airspaces Page, Airspace Alerts Window, and Airspace Alerts on the PFD provide additional
information about airspaces and the location of the aircraft in relationship to them.
212
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The Airspace Alerts Box allows the pilot to turn the controlled/special-use airspace message alerts on or off.
This does not affect the alerts listed on the Nearest Airspaces Page or the airspace boundaries depicted on the
Navigation Map Page. It simply turns on/off the warning provided when the aircraft is approaching or near an
airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An altitude buffer is also provided which “expands” the vertical range above or below an airspace. For example,
if the buffer is set at 500 feet, and the aircraft is more than 500 feet above/below an airspace, an alert message is
not generated, but if the aircraft is less than 500 feet above/below an airspace and projected to enter it, the pilot
is notified with an alert message. The default setting for the altitude buffer is 200 feet.
Changing the altitude buffer distance setting:
EIS
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the altitude buffer field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter an altitude buffer value and press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Turning an airspace alert on or off:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Setup Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired field in the Airspace Alerts Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to turn the airspace alert ON or counterclockwise to turn the alert OFF.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
AFCS
Airspace Alerts Box
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Airspace Altitude Buffer
- Alert On/Off
(Default Settings Shown)
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
INDEX
DFLTS Softkey
Figure 5-50 System Setup Page - Airspace Alerts
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
213
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Map ranges for the airspace boundaries are selected from the Aviation Group in the Map Setup Menu. See Table
5-2 for the default and maximum ranges for each type of airspace and the symbol used to define the airspace area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Nearest Airspaces Page can be used to quickly find airspaces close to the flight path. In addition, a selected
frequency associated with the airspace can be loaded from the Nearest Airspaces Page. In addition to displaying
a map of airspace boundaries and surrounding area, the Nearest Airspaces Page displays airspace information in
four boxes labeled ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’, ‘AIRSPACE, AGENCY’, ‘VERTICAL LIMITS’, and ‘FREQUENCIES’.
Airspace Alerts Info
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
- Name
- Proximity (Ahead, Inside,
Ahead < 2nm, Within 2nm)
- Time till Intercept (only if
Ahead or Ahead < 2nm)
Airspace 1
Airspace/Agency Info
- Airspace Type
- Controlling Agency
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspace Vertical Limits
- Ceiling
- Floor
Airspace 2
Associated Frequencies
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Type
- Availability/Info
- Frequency
Softkeys
Figure 5-51 Nearest Airspaces Page
AFCS
Airspace alerts and associated frequencies are shown in scrollable lists on the Nearest Airspaces Page. The
ALERTS and FREQ softkeys place the cursor in the respective list. The FREQ Softkey is enabled only if one or
more frequencies exist for a selected airspace.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting and viewing an airspace alert with its associated information:
1) Select the Nearest Airspaces Page.
2) Press the ALERTS Softkey; or press the FMS Knob; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Alerts Window’,
and press the ENT Key. The cursor is placed in the ‘AIRSPACE ALERTS’ Box.
APPENDICES
3) Select the desired airspace.
INDEX
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
214
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PFD ALERTS Softkey displays the message window on the PFD. The following airspace alerts are
displayed in the message window:
Comments
The aircraft is inside the airspace.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Special use airspace is ahead of aircraft. The aircraft penetrates the airspace within 10
minutes.
Special use airspace is near and ahead of the aircraft position.
Special use airspace is within 2 nm of the aircraft position.
EIS
Message
INSIDE ARSPC – Inside airspace.
ARSPC AHEAD – Airspace ahead –
less than 10 minutes.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near and
ahead.
ARSPC NEAR – Airspace near –
less than 2 nm.
Table 5-6 PFD Airspace Alert Messages
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
215
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.5 DIRECT-TO-NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Direct-to method of navigation, initiated by pressing the Direct-to Key on either the MFD or PFD, is
quicker to use than a flight plan when the desire is to navigate to a single point such as a nearby airport.
Once a direct-to is activated, the system establishes a point-to-point course line from the present position to the
selected direct-to destination. Course guidance is provided until the direct-to is replaced with a new direct-to or
flight plan, or cancelled.
EIS
A vertical navigation (VNV) direct-to creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from
the current altitude to a selected altitude at the direct-to waypoint. Vertical navigation is based on barometric
altitudes, not on GPS altitude, and is used for cruise and descent phases of flight.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Direct-to Window allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation. The Direct-to Window displays
selected direct-to waypoint data on the PFD and the MFD.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Direct-to Point Info
- Identifier/Symbol/Region
- Facility Name
- City
VNV Constraints
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Map of Selected Point
Location of Destination
- Bearing/Distance
AFCS
Desired Course
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-52 Direct-to Window - MFD
APPENDICES
- Altitude at Arrival
- Along Track Offset
INDEX
Direct-to Point Info
Activation Command
- Identifier/Symbol/City
- Facility Name
VNV Constraints
Direct-to Point Info
- Bearing/Distance
- Desired Course
Figure 5-53 Direct-to Window - PFD
216
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Any waypoint can be entered as a direct-to destination from the Direct-to Window.
Entering a waypoint identifier, facility name, or city as a direct-to destination:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan waypoint as the default
selection or a blank waypoint field if no flight plan is active).
EIS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to begin entering a waypoint identifier (turning it counter-clockwise brings
up the waypoint selection submenu - press the CLR Key to remove it), or turn the large FMS Knob to select the
facility name, or city field and turn the small FMS Knob to begin entering a facility name or city. If duplicate
entries exist for the entered facility or city name, additional entries can be viewed by turning the small FMS
Knob during the selection process.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the direct-to.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any waypoint contained in the active flight plan can be selected as a direct-to waypoint from the Direct-to
Window, the Active Flight Plan Page, or the Active Flight Plan Window.
Waypoint Submenu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- Flight Plan Waypoints
- Nearest Airports
- Recent Waypoints
- User Waypoints
- Airway Waypoints
(only available when
active leg is part of an
airway)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-54 Waypoint Submenu
Selecting an active flight plan waypoint as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) While navigating an active flight plan, press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the
active flight plan waypoint as the default selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of flight plan waypoints (the FPL list is populated
only when navigating a flight plan).
3) Select the desired waypoint.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Or:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, or the Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD.
2) Select the desired waypoint.
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
INDEX
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
217
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Any NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints can be selected as a direct-to destination in the Direct-to
Window.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed (with the active flight plan destination as the
default selection or a blank destination if no flight plan is active).
2) Turn the small FMS Knob counter-clockwise to display a list of FPL waypoints (the FPL list is populated only
when navigating a flight plan, and the AIRWAY list is available only when the active leg is part of an airway).
3) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the NRST, RECENT, USER, or AIRWAY waypoints.
EIS
4) Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select the desired waypoint.
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The Direct-to Window can be displayed from any page and allows selection and activation of direct-to navigation.
If the direct-to is initiated from any page except the WPT pages, the default waypoint is the active flight plan
waypoint (if a flight plan is active) or a blank waypoint field. Direct-to requests on any WPT page defaults to the
displayed waypoint.
Selecting any waypoint as a direct-to destination:
1) Select the page or window containing the desired waypoint type and select the desired waypoint.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected waypoint as the direct-to
destination.
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
4) Press ENT again to activate the direct-to.
Selecting a nearby airport as a direct-to destination:
AFCS
1) Press the NRST Softkey on the PFD; or turn the FMS Knob to display the Nearest Airports Page and press the
FMS Knob.
2) Select the desired airport (the nearest one is already selected).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the Direct-to Key.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
APPENDICES
Direct-to destinations may also be selected by using the pointer on the navigation map pages. If no airport,
NAVAID, or user waypoint exists at the desired location, a temporary waypoint named ‘MAPWPT’ is automatically
created at the location of the map arrow.
Selecting a waypoint as a direct-to destination using the pointer:
INDEX
1) From a navigation map page, press the Joystick to display the pointer.
2) Move the Joystick to place the pointer at the desired destination location.
3) If the pointer is placed on an existing airport, NAVAID, or user waypoint, the waypoint name is highlighted.
4) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window with the selected point entered as the direct-to
destination.
218
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
6) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Cancelling a Direct-to:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. If a flight plan is still active, the system resumes
navigating the flight plan along the closest leg.
EIS
Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- Cancel Direct-To
Navigation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-55 Direct-to Window - Cancelling Direct-to Navigation
AFCS
When navigating a direct-to, the system sets a direct great circle course to the selected destination. The course
to a destination can also be manually selected using the course field (‘COURSE’) on the Direct-to Window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selecting a manual direct-to course:
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Highlight the course field.
3) Enter the desired course.
APPENDICES
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
5) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
Reselecting the direct course from the current position:
INDEX
1) Press the Direct-to Key. The Direct-to Window is displayed with the destination field highlighted.
2) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed on ‘ACTIVATE?’.
3) Press the ENT Key again to activate the direct-to.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
219
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to with altitude constraints creates a descent path (and provides guidance to stay on the path) from the
aircraft’s current altitude to the altitude of the direct-to waypoint. The altitude is reached at the waypoint, or at the
specified distance along the flight path if an offset distance has been entered. All VNV altitudes prior to the directto destination are removed from the active flight plan upon successful activation of a direct-to destination that is
part of the active flight plan. All VNV altitudes following the direct-to waypoint are retained. See the section on
Vertical Navigation for more information regarding the use and purpose of VNV altitudes and offset distances.
Entering a VNV altitude and along-track offset for the waypoint:
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor over the ‘VNV’ altitude field.
3) Enter the desired altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The option to select MSL or AGL is now displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now flashing in the VNV offset distance field.
7) Enter the desired along-track distance before the waypoint.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate?’ field is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key to activate.
Removing a VNV altitude constraint:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the Direct-to Key to display the Direct-to Window.
2) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
3) With ‘Clear Vertical Constraints’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- Clear Vertical Navigation
Constraints
Figure 5-56 Direct-to Window - Clearing Vertical Constraints
220
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.6 FLIGHT PLANNING
Flight Plan Leg Type
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight planning on Perspective consists of building a flight plan by entering waypoints one at a time, adding
waypoints along airways, and inserting departures, airways, arrivals, or approaches as needed. Perspective allows
flight planning information to be entered from either the MFD or PFD. The flight plan is displayed on maps using
different line widths, colors, and types, based on the type of leg and the segment of the flight plan currently being
flown (departure, enroute, arrival, approach, or missed approach).
Symbol
EIS
Active Course Leg (TOPO On)
Active Course Leg (TOPO Off)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active Heading Leg or Active Roll Steering Path (TOPO On)
Active Heading Leg or Active Roll Steering Path (TOPO Off)
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO On)
Course Leg not in the current flight segment (TOPO Off)
Heading Leg or Roll Steering Path (TOPO On)
Heading Leg or Roll Steering Path (TOPO Off)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn Anticipation Arc (TOPO On/TOPO Off)
AFCS
Table 5-7 Flight Plan Leg Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Up to 99 flight plans with up to 99 waypoints each can be created and stored in memory. One flight plan can be
activated at a time and becomes the active flight plan. The active flight plan is erased when the system is turned
off and overwritten when another flight plan is activated. When storing flight plans with an approach, departure,
or arrival, the system uses the waypoint information from the current database to define the waypoints. If the
database is changed or updated, the system automatically updates the information if the procedure has not been
modified. If an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is no longer available, the procedure is deleted from the
affected stored flight plan(s), and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A) advising that
one or more stored flight plans need to be edited.
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach, departure, or arrival procedure is loaded into the active flight plan, a set of approach,
departure, or arrival waypoints is inserted into the flight plan along with a header line describing the instrument
procedure the pilot selected. The original enroute portion of the flight plan remains active (unless an instrument
procedure is activated) when the procedure is loaded.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
221
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the database is updated, the airways need to be reloaded also. Each airway segment is reloaded from
the database given the entry waypoint, the airway identifier and the exit waypoint. This reloads the sequence of
waypoints between the entry and exit waypoints (the sequence may change when the database is updated). The
update of an airway can fail during this process. If that happens, the airway waypoints are changed to regular
(non-airway) flight plan waypoints, and an alert is displayed (see Miscellaneous Messages in Appendix A).
The following could cause the airway update to fail:
• Airway identifier, entry waypoint or exit waypoint not found in the new database.
EIS
• Airway entry/exit waypoint is not an acceptable waypoint for the airway – either the waypoint is no longer on
the airway, or there is a new directional restriction that prevents it being used.
• Loading the new airway sequence would exceed the capacity of the flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT PLAN CREATION
There are three methods to create or modify a flight plan:
• Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
• Active Flight Plan Window on the PFD (create/modify the active flight plan)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Plan Catalog Page on the MFD (create/modify a stored flight plan)
Active FPL Waypoint List
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Comment
- Procedure Header
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AFCS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Vertical Navigation Profile
- Active Vertical WPT Alt/ID
- Vertical Speed Target
- Flight Path Angle
- Vertical Speed Target
- Time to Top of Descent
- Vertical Deviation
Turn Anticipation
Arc
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Non-Active,
Flight Plan Leg
Selected Waypoint Weather
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-57 Active Flight Plan Page
- Textual METAR
- Reporting Station Location
(see the Hazard Avoidance
Section for details on METARS)
222
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Active Flight Plan Comment
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight
Plan Leg
Active Flight Plan Waypoint List
- Waypoint ID
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Airway Identifier
EIS
Figure 5-58 Active Flight Plan Window on PFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Catalog Contents
- # Used
- # Empty
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan List
- Comment
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Flight Plan
Map
Selected FPL Info
- Departure Waypoint
- Destination Waypoint
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
AFCS
Softkeys
Figure 5-59 Flight Plan Catalog Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The active flight plan is listed on the active Flight Plan Page on the MFD, and in the Active Flight Plan
Window on the PFD. It is the flight plan to which Perspective is currently providing guidance, and is shown
on the navigation maps. Stored flight plans are listed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page, and are available for
activation (becomes the active flight plan).
APPENDICES
Creating an active flight plan with the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (only on MFD).
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
223
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
5) Repeat step numbers 3 and 4 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
Creating an active flight plan with the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
EIS
2) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD
Control Unit and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
3) Repeat step number 2 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Creating a stored flight plan with the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the NEW Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create New Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key to
display a blank flight plan for the first empty storage location.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key.
6) Repeat step numbers 4 and 5 to enter each additional flight plan waypoint.
AFCS
7) When all waypoints have been entered, press the FMS Knob to return to the Flight Plan Catalog Page. The new
flight plan is now in the list.
Flight plans can be imported from an SD Card or exported to an SD Card from the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Importing a Flight Plan from an SD Card
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Insert the SD card containing the flight plan in the top card slot on the MFD.
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
APPENDICES
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight an empty or existing flight plan.
6) Press the IMPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Import Flight Plan”, and press the ENT Key.
If an empty slot is selected, a list of the available flight plans on the SD card will be displayed.
INDEX
Or:
224
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If an existing flight plan is selected, an “Overwrite existing flight plan? OK or CANCEL” prompt is displayed.
Press the ENT Key to choose to overwrite the selected flight plan and see the list of available flight plans on the
SD card. If overwriting the existing flight plan is not desired, select “CANCEL” using the FMS Knob, press the
ENT Key, select another flight plan slot, and press the IMPORT Softkey again.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan for importing.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the import.
9) Press the ENT Key again to confirm the import.
EIS
NOTE: If the imported flight plan contains a waypoint with a name that duplicates the name of a waypoint
already stored on the system, the system compares the coordinates of the imported waypoint with those of
the existing waypoint. If the coordinates are different, the imported waypoint is automatically renamed by
adding characters to the end of the name.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
List of Flight Plans to Import &
Details for the Selected File
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Import/Export Softkeys
Import Successful
Figure 5-60 Flight Plan Import
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
225
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Exporting a Flight Plan to an SD Card
1) Insert the SD card into the top card slot on the MFD.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FPL Key on the Control Unit to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be exported.
6) Press the EXPORT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Export Flight Plan”.
EIS
7) If desired, change the name for the exported file by turning the large FMS Knob to the left to highlight the
name, then use the small and large FMS knobs to enter the new name, and press the ENT Key.
8) Press the ENT Key to initiate the export.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key to confirm the export.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTE: The exported flight plan will not contain any procedures or airways.
APPENDICES
Import/Export Softkeys
Stored Flight Plan to be Exported &
Exported Flight Plan Name
Export Successful
INDEX
Figure 5-61 Flight Plan Export
226
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDING WAYPOINTS TO AN EXISTING FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoints can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose the flight plan, select the
desired point of insertion, enter the waypoint, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. Flight plans
are limited to 99 waypoints (including waypoints within airways and procedures). If the number of waypoints
in the flight plan exceeds 99, the message “Flight plan is full. Remove unnecessary waypoints.” appears and the
new waypoint(s) are not added to the flight plan.
Stored Flight Plan Selected
EIS
- Memory Slot
- Comment
- Procedure Identifier
- Waypoint Identifier
- Airway Identifier
- Desired Track to Waypoint
- Distance to Waypoint
- Waypoint Altitude Constraint
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Softkeys
Figure 5-62 Stored Flight Plan Page
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Flight Plan Full Message
APPENDICES
Figure 5-63 Active Flight Plan Page - FPL Full
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
227
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding a waypoint to a stored flight plan:
1) On the Flight Plan Catalog Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the ENT Key, turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to select “EDIT” and press the
ENT Key. The Stored Flight Plan Page is displayed.
4) Select the point in the flight plan to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly in front of the
highlighted waypoint.
EIS
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The new waypoint now exists in the flight plan.
NOTE: If the identifier entered in the Waypoint Information Window has duplicates, a Duplicate Waypoint
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Window is displayed. Use the FMS Knob to select the correct waypoint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-64 Duplicate Waypoints Window
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Select the point in the flight plan before which to add the new waypoint. The new waypoint is placed directly
in front of the highlighted waypoint.
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window with a
waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway waypoints).
5) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint or select a waypoint from the submenu of waypoints
and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
228
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Adding a waypoint to the active flight plan using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Use the Joystick to position the Quick Select Box and the associated Insertion Point Indicator at the location to
insert the waypoint.
3) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the waypoint using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control
Unit and press the ENT Key. The active flight plan is modified as each waypoint is entered.
Creating and adding user waypoints to the active flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the Joystick to activate the panning function on the Active Flight Plan Page and pan to the map location
of the desired user waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the LD WPT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Load Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The user
waypoint is created with a name of USRxxx (using the next available in sequence) and is added to the end of
the active flight plan.
ADDING AIRWAYS TO A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airways can be added to the active flight plan or any stored flight plan. Choose a flight plan (add the desired
airway entry point if not already in the flight plan), select the waypoint after the desired airway entry point,
select the airway, and it is added in front of the selected waypoint. An airway can only be loaded if there is a
waypoint in the flight plan that is part of the desired airway and is not part of an arrival or approach procedure.
Perspective also anticipates the desired airway and exit point based on loaded flight plan waypoints.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airway Entry Waypoint
Selected Airway
Airways Available at TOP
AFCS
Airway Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Airway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-65 Select Airway Page - Selecting Airway
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
229
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD).
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this waypoint is not
a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob one click clockwise and press the LD AIRWY Softkey, or press the MENU Key and
select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed. The LD AIRWY Softkey or the “Load Airway” menu
item is available only when a valid airway entry waypoint has been chosen (the waypoint ahead of the cursor
position).
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
7) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Adding an airway to a flight plan using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key.
2) Use the Joystick to place the QuickSelect Box on the waypoint after the desired airway entry point. If this
waypoint is not a valid airway entry point, a valid entry point should be entered at this time.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the MENU Key and select “Load Airway”. The Select Airway Page is displayed.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway from the list, and press the ENT Key. Low altitude airways are
shown first in the list, followed by “all” altitude airways, and then high altitude airways.
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired airway exit point from the list, and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is
highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
6) Press the ENT Key. The system returns to editing the flight plan with the new airway inserted.
230
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Airway Entry Waypoint
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Airway
Selected Exit Point
Preview of
Selected Airway
Selected Airway Exit
Point
EIS
Airway Exit Points
Available
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-66 Select Airway Page - Selecting Exit Point
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Airway Header
- Airway Identifier: [airway
identifier].[exit waypoint identifier]
(e.g., V4.SLN)
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-67 Active Flight Plan Page - Airway Inserted
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
231
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
RESTRICTIONS ON ADDING AIRWAYS
Some airways have directional restrictions on all or part of the route. Airway “A2” in Europe has a directional
restriction over the whole route such that it can be flown only in the direction MTD-ABB-BNE-DEVAL.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airway “UR975” in North Africa has more complicated directional restrictions within the list of airway
waypoints AMANO, VAKOR, LIBRO, NELDA, DIRKA, GZO, KOSET, and SARKI:
• Starting from AMANO, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
• Starting from SARKI, the airway can be flown only to LIBRO.
EIS
• Between NELDA and GZO, the airway can be flown in either direction.
In the US, airways that are “one-way” for specified hours of operation are not uncommon. These airways
are always bidirectional in the system database.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system only allows correct airway sequences to be inserted. If the pilot subsequently inverts the flight
plan, the system inverts the airway waypoint sequence and removes the airway header.
ADDING PROCEDURES TO A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Perspective allows the pilot to insert pre-defined instrument procedures from the navigation database into a
flight plan. The procedures are designed to facilitate routing of traffic leaving an airport (departure), arriving at
an airport (arrival), and landing at an airport (approach). See the procedures section for more details.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Name
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Flight Plan Waypoint
List
Softkeys
APPENDICES
Load Departure Load Arrival Load Approach Activate Flight Plan -
INDEX
Figure 5-68 Stored Flight Plan Page
232
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DEPARTURE (DP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can
be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Departure Airport
EIS
Selected
Departure
Departures Available at
KMCI
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Departure Waypoint
Sequence
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-69 Departure Loading Page - Selecting the Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading a departure procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD DP Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Departure”, and press the ENT Key. The
Departure Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select a departure. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a runway served by the selected departure, if required. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition for the selected departure. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected departure procedure.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
233
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Departure Airport
Selected
Departure
Selected Runway
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Departure
Selected
Departure End
Point
Selected Transition
Departure Transition
Points Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-70 Departure Loading Page - Selecting Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Departure Header
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Departure Identifier: [departure
airport]-[departure runway].
[departure transition].
[departure end point]
(e.g., KMKC-ALL.WLDCT2.SLN)
INDEX
Figure 5-71 Stored Flight Plan Page - Departure Inserted
234
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVAL (STAR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) is loaded at the destination airport in the flight plan. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the transition waypoints,
and a runway.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected Arrival
Arrivals Available at
KCOS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Runway
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
Preview of
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-72 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Arrival
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Loading an arrival procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD STAR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Arrival”, and press the ENT Key. The Arrival
Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select an arrival. Press the ENT Key.
5) Select a transition for the selected arrival. Press the ENT Key.
6) Select a runway served by the selected arrival, if required. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to load the selected arrival procedure.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
235
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected Arrival
Selected Transition
Transitions Available
with DBRY1
Arrival Waypoint
Sequence
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Preview of
Selected Arrival
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-73 Arrival Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inserted Arrival Header
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Arrival Identifier:
[arrival airport]-[arrival transition].
[arrival].[arrival runway]
(e.g., KCOS-TBE.DBRY1.ALL)
INDEX
Figure 5-74 Stored Flight Plan Page - Arrival Inserted
236
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH (APPR)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has an approach available. Only one
approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. The route for a selected approach is defined by designating
transition waypoints.
Destination Airport
EIS
Selected
Approach
Preview of
Selected
Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Approaches Available at
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-75 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Approach
Loading an approach procedure into a stored flight plan:
1) Select a stored flight plan from the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
2) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
3) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select “Load Approach”, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Or:
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
5) Select a transition for the selected approach. Press the ENT Key.
6) Press the ENT Key to load the selected approach procedure.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
237
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Airport
Selected
Approach
Selected Transition
Transitions Available with
Selected Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Preview of
Selected
Approach
Approach Waypoint
Sequence
Load Approach?
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-76 Approach Loading Page - Selecting the Transition
Inserted Approach Header
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
- Approach Identifier: [approach
airport].[runway and approach type]
(e.g., KCOS-RNAV 35RGPS LPV)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-77 Stored Flight Plan Page - Approach Inserted
238
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN STORAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can store up to 99 flight plans, numbered 1 through 99. The active flight plan is erased when
the system is powered off or when another flight plan is activated. Details about each stored flight plan can be
viewed on the Flight Plan Catalog Page and on the Stored Flight Plan Page.
Viewing information about a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
4) The Flight Plan Information is displayed showing departure, destination, total distance, and enroute safe altitude
information for the selected Flight Plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the EDIT Softkey to open the Stored Flight Plan Page and view the waypoints in the flight plan.
6) Press the FMS Knob to exit the Stored Flight Plan Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Plan Name
(Comment)
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan
Selected Flight Plan
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Stored Flight Plan Info
AFCS
- Departure Airport
- Destination Airport
- Total Flight Plan Distance
- Enroute Safe Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stored FPL Editing
Softkeys
Figure 5-78 Stored Flight Plan Information
Storing an active flight plan from the Active Flight Plan Page or the Active Flight Plan Window:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Highlight ‘Store Flight Plan’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. The flight plan is stored in the next available position in the flight
plan list on the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
239
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
ACTIVATE A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a stored flight plan erases the active flight plan and replaces it with the flight plan being activated.
Inverting a stored flight plan reverses the waypoint order, erases the active flight plan, and replaces it with the
flight plan being activated (the stored flight plan is not changed).
Activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
EIS
3) Press the ACTIVE Softkey; or press the ENT Key twice; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Flight Plan’,
and press the ENT Key. The ‘Activate Stored Flight Plan?’ window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
COPY A FLIGHT PLAN
AFCS
Perspective allows copying a flight plan into a new flight plan memory slot, allowing editing, etc., without
affecting the original flight plan. This can be used to duplicate an existing stored flight plan for use in creating
a modified version of the original stored flight plan.
Copying a stored flight plan on the MFD:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the COPY Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Copy Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Copy
to Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to copy the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
DELETE A STORED FLIGHT PLAN
Individual or all stored flight plans can be deleted from the system memory.
INDEX
Deleting a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
240
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
3) Press the DELETE Softkey; press the CLR Key; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press
the ENT Key. The ‘Delete Flight Plan XX?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
NOTE: The option to delete all stored flight plans is not available while the aircraft is in flight.
Deleting all stored flight plans:
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
EIS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Highlight ‘Delete All’ and press the ENT Key. A ‘Delete all flight plans?’ confirmation window is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete all flight plans. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or
highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT PLAN EDITING
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The active flight plan or any stored flight plan can be edited. The edits made to the active flight plan affect
navigation as soon as they are entered.
DELETING THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Perspective allows deleting an active flight plan. Deleting the active flight plan suspends navigation by the
system.
Deleting the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Delete Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. The ‘Delete all waypoints in flight
plan?’ window is displayed.
3) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key to delete the active flight plan. To cancel the request, press the CLR
Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
DELETING FLIGHT PLAN ITEMS
Individual waypoints, entire airways, and entire procedures can be deleted from a flight plan. Some waypoints
in the final approach segment (such as the FAF or MAP) can not be deleted individually. Attempting to delete
a waypoint that is not allowed results in a window displaying ‘Invalid flight plan modification.’
APPENDICES
Deleting an individual waypoint from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint to be deleted.
INDEX
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the waypoint to be deleted (MFD only).
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
241
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Deleting an entire airway from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the airway to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the airway to be deleted (MFD only).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
Deleting an entire procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the white header of the procedure to be deleted (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
AFCS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
Deleting an individual waypoint from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
INDEX
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
242
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the waypoint to be deleted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove XXXXX?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Deleting an entire airway from a stored flight plan:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the airway to be deleted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <airway name>?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Deleting an entire procedure from a stored flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
AFCS
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the white header of the procedure to be deleted.
6) Press the CLR Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
INDEX
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
243
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu and turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Remove <procedure>’.
6) Press the ENT Key. The ‘Remove <procedure name> from flight plan?’ window is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
CHANGING FLIGHT PLAN COMMENTS (NAMES)
EIS
The comment field (or name) of each flight plan can be changed to something that is useful for identification
and sorting.
Changing the active flight plan comment:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the comment field.
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit to edit the comment.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
Changing a stored flight plan comment:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob clockwise to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
3) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the flight plan to be edited.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Press the EDIT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, select ‘Edit Flight Plan’ and press the ENT Key. The Stored
Flight Plan Page is displayed.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the comment field.
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the comment.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key to accept the changes.
8) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
ALONG TRACK OFFSETS
INDEX
A waypoint having an “along track offset” distance from an existing waypoint can be entered into a flight plan.
Along track offset waypoints lie along the path of the existing flight plan, and can be used to make the system
reach a specified altitude before or after reaching the specified flight plan waypoint. Offset distances can be
244
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
entered from 1 to 999 nm in increments of 1 nm. Entering a negative offset distance results in an along track
offset waypoint inserted before the selected waypoint, whereas entering a positive offset distance results in an
along track offset waypoint inserted after the selected waypoint. Multiple offset waypoints are allowed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A waypoint must be adjacent to its parent waypoint in the flight plan, so the system limits the along-track
distance to less than the length of the leg before or after the selected waypoint. If the selected waypoint is the
active waypoint, the distance is limited to less than the distance to go to the active waypoint. Assigning an along
track offset to a leg with indeterminate length is not permitted. An along track offset is not allowed at or after
the final approach fix of an approach.
EIS
An along track offset distance cannot be modified once entered. If the along track offset distance must be
changed, the existing along track offset waypoint must be deleted and a new one created with the new offset
distance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Along Track Offset
Waypoint and
Distance from Flight
Plan Waypoint
Along Track
Offset Waypoint
and Distance
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-79 Along Track Offset
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering an along track offset distance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the along track offset.
APPENDICES
3) Press the ATK OFST Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Create ATK Offset Waypoint’, and
press the ENT Key.
4) Enter a positive or negative offset distance in the range of +/- 1 to 999 nm (limited by leg distances).
5) Press the ENT Key to create the offset waypoint.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
245
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
PARALLEL TRACK
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Parallel Track (PTK) feature allows creation of a parallel course offset of 1 to 50 nm left or right of the
current flight plan. When Parallel Track is activated, the course line drawn on the map pages shows the parallel
course, and waypoint names have a lower case “p” placed after the identifier.
Using direct-to, loading an approach, a holding pattern, or editing and activating the flight plan automatically
cancels Parallel Track. Parallel Track is also cancelled if a course change occurs greater than 120° or the parallel
tracks overlap as a result of the course change.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Vertical navigation is unavailable while the Parallel Track feature is active.
Selecting Parallel
Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan prior to Parallel Track
Figure 5-80 Active Flight Plan Window - Selecting Parallel Track
Activating parallel track:
AFCS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with the direction field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Left’ or ‘Right’ and press the ENT Key. The ‘DISTANCE’ field is highlighted.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter a distance from 1-99 nm and press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE PARALLEL
TRACK’ is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key to activate parallel track. Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to cancel the parallel track
activation.
246
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Offset Direction
Offset Distance
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activation Prompt
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-81 Parallel Track Window
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Parallel Track Waypoints
Parallel Track
AFCS
- TIFTO-p
- TOP-p
- ...
- LAA-p
Activating Parallel Track
affects the active flight
plan from the current
position on (will not affect
an approach)
Original Track
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-82 Parallel Track Active
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
247
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the parallel track proposed by the offset direction and distance is not allowed by the system, the activation
prompt is displayed, but disabled. Parallel Track cannot be activated if a course is set using direct-to or if the
active leg is the first leg of the departure procedure. Attempting to activate parallel track with these conditions
results in the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable Invalid Route Geometry’. If an approach leg is active the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track with the message ‘Parallel Track Unavailable
Approach Leg Active’. If the offset direction and distance results in an unreasonable route geometry the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because of invalid geometry.
Subdued Prompt
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Unavailable)
Unavailable Status
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Invalid
Geometry
Approach
Active
Figure 5-83 Parallel Track Unavailable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the active leg is not a track between two fixes (TF) or a course to a fix (DF) leg, the status
indicates that the system is unable to activate the parallel track because parallel track is not available for the
active leg type.
AFCS
Offset Direction &
Distance Subdued
(Unavailable)
Cancel Prompt
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Active Status
APPENDICES
Figure 5-84 Cancelling Parallel Track
Cancelling parallel track:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
INDEX
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Parallel Track’, and press the ENT Key. The Parallel Track Window is displayed
with ‘CANCEL PARALLEL TRACK?’ highlighted.
3) Press the ENT Key.
248
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ACTIVATING A FLIGHT PLAN LEG
Perspective allows selection of a highlighted leg as the “active leg” (the flight plan leg which is currently
used for navigation guidance).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating a flight plan leg:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
EIS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the destination waypoint for the desired leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ACT LEG Softkey (MFD only); or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Activate Leg’, and press the ENT Key.
A confirmation window is displayed with ‘ACTIVATE’ highlighted.
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the flight plan leg. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press
the ENT Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor, if required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Current
Active Leg
Selected Destination
Waypoint
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Activate Leg Softkey
Figure 5-85 Active Flight Plan Page - Selecting the Leg Destination Waypoint
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
249
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
New Active
Flight Plan Leg
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Confirmation Window
Figure 5-86 Active Flight Plan Page - New Active Leg
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
INVERTING A FLIGHT PLAN
Any flight plan may be inverted (reversed) for navigation back to the original departure point.
Inverting the active flight plan:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert Flight Plan’, and press the ENT Key. An ‘Invert Active Flight Plan?’
confirmation window is displayed.
3) Select ‘OK’.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to invert and activate the active flight plan. To cancel, press the CLR Key, or highlight
‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
Inverting and activating a stored flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the FPL Key and turn the small FMS Knob to display the Flight Plan Catalog Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight plan.
3) Press the INVERT Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Invert & Activate FPL?’, and press the ENT Key.
The ‘Invert and activate stored flight plan?’ window is displayed.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the request, press the CLR Key, or highlight ‘CANCEL’ and
press the ENT Key.
250
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PLAN VIEWS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Information about flight plans can be viewed in more than one way. The active flight plan can be configured
to show cumulative distance over the length of the flight plan or the distance for each leg of the flight plan;
and the active flight plan can be viewed in a narrow or wide view. In the wide view, additional information is
displayed: Fuel Remaining (FUEL REM), Estimated Time Enroute (ETE), Estimated Time of Arrival (ETA), and
Bearing to the waypoint (BRG).
Switching between leg-to-leg waypoint distance and cumulative waypoint distance:
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
EIS
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the CUM and LEG-LEG Softkeys.
3) Press the CUM Softkey to view cumulative waypoint distance, or press the LEG-LEG Softkey to view leg-to-leg
waypoint distance.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
Active Flight Plan Leg to Leg Distance
Active Flight Plan Cumulative Distance
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
Figure 5-87 Active Flight Plan - Leg to Leg vs. Cumulative Distance
Switching between wide and narrow view:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key on the MFD to display the Active Flight Plan Page.
2) Press the VIEW Softkey to display the WIDE and NARROW Softkeys.
3) Press the WIDE Softkey to display the wide view, or press the NARROW Softkey to display the narrow view.
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the top level active flight plan softkeys.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
251
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Active Flight Plan Wide View
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Active Flight Plan Narrow View
WIDE Softkey, NARROW Softkey, LEG-LEG Softkey, CUM Softkey
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-88 Active Flight Plan - Wide vs. Narrow View
COLLAPSING AIRWAYS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Perspective allows airways on the active flight plan to be collapsed or expanded from the Active Flight Plan
Page/Window. When airways have been collapsed, it is indicated on the airway heading.
When airways are collapsed, leg-to-leg computed values such as DIS or ETE shown for the exit waypoint
reflect the total of all the legs on the airway that have been hidden in the collapsed display. The DTK value is
inhibited because it is not usable in this context.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The Active Flight Plan Page always keeps the following three waypoints visible: “From” waypoint, “To”
waypoint, and “Next” waypoint. To prevent one or more of these waypoints from being hidden in a collapsed
airway segment, the airway segment that contains either the “To” or the “Next” waypoint is automatically
expanded. When an airway is loaded, airways are automatically expanded to facilitate flight plan review.
Q3.FEPOT Airway
INDEX
APPENDICES
Collapsed View
Expanded View
Figure 5-89 Expanded/Collapsed Airways
252
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Collapsing/expanding the airways in the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Collapse Airways’ or ‘Expand Airways’, and press the ENT Key. The airways are
collapsed/expanded.
CLOSEST POINT OF FPL
‘Closest Point of FPL’ calculates the bearing and closest distance at which a flight plan passes a reference
waypoint, and creates a new user waypoint along the flight plan at the location closest to a chosen reference
waypoint.
EIS
Determining the closest point along the active flight plan to a selected waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Closest Point Of FPL’’, and press the ENT Key. A window appears with the
reference waypoint field highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Enter the identifier of the reference waypoint and press the ENT Key. The system displays the bearing (BRG) and
distance (DIS) to the closest point along the flight plan to the selected reference waypoint and creates a user
waypoint at this location. The name for the new user waypoint is derived from the identifier of the reference
waypoint.
USER-DEFINED HOLDING PATTERNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A holding pattern can be defined at any active flight plan waypoint, at the aircraft present position, or at a
direct-to waypoint.
Creating a user-defined hold at an active flight plan waypoint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the waypoint for the hold.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Waypoint’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears with
the course field highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
9) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key while ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted to insert the hold into the flight plan.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
253
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Waypoint
Selected
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Hold At
Wpt Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(RIGHT or LEFT)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Map of Hold Location
APPENDICES
Expect Further Clearance Time
Load Hold in Active Flight Plan
INDEX
Figure 5-90 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at an Active Flight Plan Waypoint
254
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a user-defined hold at the aircraft present position:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Hold At Present Position’, and press the ENT Key. The HOLD AT window appears
with the course field highlighted.
3) If desired, use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
8) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
9) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to create an Offroute Direct-to hold waypoint and activate
the hold.
Creating a user-defined hold at a direct-to waypoint:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press a Direct-to Key and set up the direct-to waypoint as desired, but select ‘HOLD?’ instead of ‘ACTIVATE?’
when finished (MFD or PFD).
2) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the entry course, and press the ENT Key.
3) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘INBOUND’ or ‘OUTBOUND’ course direction, and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘TIME’ or ‘DIST’ length mode, and press the ENT Key.
5) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the length, and press the ENT Key.
6) Use the small FMS Knob to select ‘RIGHT’ or ‘LEFT’ turn direction, and press the ENT Key.
7) Use the FMS Knobs to edit the Expect Further Clearance Time (EFC TIME), and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
8) Press the ENT Key while ‘ACTIVATE?’ is highlighted to activate the direct-to with the user-defined hold defined
at the direct-to waypoint. (If the direct-to waypoint is part of the active flight plan, the HOLD is inserted into
the active flight plan. If the direct-to waypoint is not part of the active flight plan, an off-route direct-to hold is
created.)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Exiting a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
Press the SUSP Softkey. The system will provide guidance to follow the holding pattern to the inbound course
and resume automatic waypoint sequencing.
APPENDICES
Removing a user-defined hold inserted into the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor (not required on the PFD) and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight
the HOLD waypoint.
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove Holding Pattern?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed from the active flight plan. Select ‘CANCEL’
and press the ENT Key to cancel the removal of the holding pattern.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
255
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Removing a user-defined hold at an off-route direct-to:
1) Press a Direct To Key to display the DIRECT TO Window (PFD or MFD).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU with the cursor on the ‘Cancel Direct-To NAV’ selection.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The holding pattern is removed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold At
Present
Position
Menu
Selection
Location of Hold
Hold Entry Course
Course Direction
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Leg Length
(Time in nm or Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
AFCS
(RIGHT or LEFT)
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Map of Hold Location
INDEX
Expect Further Clearance Time
Activate Hold
Figure 5-91 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at the Aircraft Present Position
256
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Waypoint
Selected
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Hold Entry Course
Location of Hold
Course Direction
(INBOUND or OUTBOUND)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Leg Length
(Time in nm or
Distance in minutes)
Turn Direction
(RIGHT or LEFT)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Leg Length Mode Button
(TIME or DIST))
Map of Hold Location
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Expect Further
Clearance Time
APPENDICES
Load Hold and
Activate Direct To
Hold At Direct To
Waypoint Selection
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Figure 5-92 Creating a User Defined Holding Pattern at a Direct To Waypoint
257
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.7 VERTICAL NAVIGATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Perspective supports vertical navigation for all lateral leg types except for CA, CI, FA, FM, HA, HM, PI,
VA, VD, VI, VR, and VM. Vertical constraints are not retained in stored flight plans.
EIS
The Perspective Vertical Navigation (VNV) feature provides vertical profile guidance during the enroute and
terminal phases of flight. Guidance based on specified altitudes at waypoints in the active flight plan or to a
direct-to waypoint is provided. It includes vertical path guidance to a descending path, which is provided as a
linear deviation from the desired path. The desired path is defined by a line joining two waypoints with specified
altitudes or as a vertical angle from a specified waypoint/altitude. The vertical waypoints are integrated into the
active flight plan. Both manual and autopilot-coupled guidance are supported.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Enabled (valid data)
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Disabled (fields dashed)
ENBL VNV Softkey
CNCL VNV Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-93 Enabling/Disabling Vertical Navigation
Enabling VNV guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the ENBL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Enable VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is enabled, and vertical guidance begins with the waypoint shown in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box
(defaults first waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude enabled for vertical navigation (e.g., HABUK)).
Disabling VNV guidance:
INDEX
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the CNCL VNV Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Cancel VNV’, and press the ENT Key. Vertical
navigation is disabled.
258
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Canceling vertical navigation results in vertical deviation (V DEV), vertical speed required (VS REQ), and time
to top of descent/bottom of descent (TIME TO TOD/BOD) going invalid. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI)
and Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) on the PFD are removed, and the V DEV, VS REQ, and TIME TO
TOD items displayed in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box are dashed. VNV remains disabled until manually
enabled. Vertical guidance in reversionary mode can only be enabled for a direct-to waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
EIS
Perspective allows a vertical navigation direct-to to any waypoint in the active flight plan with an altitude
constraint “designated” for vertical guidance. Pressing the VNV Direct-to Softkey on the Active Flight Plan Page
allows the flight plan to be flown, while vertical guidance based on the altitude constraint at the VNV direct-to
waypoint is provided. The altitude change begins immediately and is spread along the flight plan from current
position to the vertical direct-to waypoint, not just along the leg for the direct-to waypoint. A direct-to with
altitude constraint activated by pressing the Direct-to Key also provides vertical guidance, but would bypass
flight plan waypoints between the current position in the flight plan and the direct-to waypoint. A top of descent
(TOD) point is computed based on the default flight path angle; descent begins once the TOD is reached.
Current Vertical Navigation Profile
Prior to VNV Direct-to
After VNV Direct-to
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
VNV Direct-To Softkey
VNV PROF Softkey
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-94 Vertical Navigation Direct-To
Activating a vertical navigation direct-to:
APPENDICES
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor and turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint.
INDEX
NOTE: The selected waypoint must have a designated altitude constraint (cyan number) to be used. If not,
the first waypoint in the flight plan with a designated altitude constraint is selected.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
259
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
3) Select the VNV Direct-To Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘VNV Direct-To’, and press the ENT Key.
An ‘Activate vertical Direct-to to: NNNNNFT at XXXXXX?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. Vertical guidance begins to the altitude constraint for the selected waypoint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
The vertical navigation profile can be modified by directly entering a vertical speed target (VS TGT) and/or flight
path angle (FPA) in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA using the FMS Knob:
EIS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the VNV PROF Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select VNV Profile Window’, and press the ENT
Key. The cursor is now located in the CURRENT VNV PROFILE box.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Turn the FMS Knobs as needed to edit the values.
4) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying the VS TGT and FPA using the Quick Select Box:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on VS TGT or FPA.
3) Enter the values using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE CONSTRAINTS
AFCS
Perspective can use altitude constraints associated with lateral waypoints to give guidance for vertical
navigation. These altitudes are, depending on the specific instance, manually entered or retrieved from the
published altitudes in the navigation database. The navigation database only contains altitudes for procedures
that call for “Cross at” altitudes. If the procedure states “Expect to cross at,” then the altitude is not in the
database. In this case the altitude may be entered manually.
Displayed Text
Examples
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Cross AT
or ABOVE
5,000 ft
Large White Text
Large Cyan Text
Cross AT
2,300 ft
APPENDICES
Small Cyan Text
Cross AT
or BELOW
3,000 ft
Small Cyan Subdued
Text
INDEX
Altitude Constraint
Examples
Small White Text with
Altitude Restriction Bar
Figure 5-95 Waypoint Altitude Constraints
260
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Cyan Text
Cyan Subdued Text
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
Small
Text
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude has been retrieved from the
navigation database or has been entered
manually and matches a published
altitude in the navigation database.
The system cannot use this
altitude in determining vertical
speed and deviation guidance
because of an invalid constraint
condition.
EIS
Altitude has been entered manually.
Altitude is designated for use in giving
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude does not match the published
altitude in navigation database or no
published altitude exists.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Large Altitude calculated by the system
Text estimating the altitude of the aircraft as
it passes over the navigation point. This
altitude is provided as a reference and is
not designated to be used in determining
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
Altitude is not designated to be used in
determining vertical speed and deviation
guidance. Altitude has been retrieved
from the navigation database and is
provided as a reference.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
White Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 5-8 Altitude Constraint Size and Color Coding
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitudes associated with approach procedures are “auto-designated”. This means the system automatically
uses the altitudes loaded with the approach for giving vertical speed and deviation guidance. Note that these
altitudes are displayed as blue text up to, but not including, the FAF. The FAF is always a “reference only”
altitude and cannot be designated, unless the selected approach does not provide vertical guidance. In this case,
the FAF altitude can be designated.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Altitudes that have been designated for use in vertical guidance can be “un-designated” using the CLR Key.
The altitude is now displayed only as a reference. It is not used to give vertical guidance. Other displayed
altitudes may change due to re-calculations or be rendered invalid as a result of manually changing an altitude
to a non-designated altitude.
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AFCS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter editing mode.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Designating a waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude.
APPENDICES
3) Use the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit to enter the same altitude.
4) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
Designating a procedure waypoint altitude to be used for vertical guidance:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
INDEX
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude.
Or:
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
261
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude (MFD only).
3) Press the ENT Key. The altitude is now shown in blue, indicating it is usable for vertical guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude constraints are displayed and entered in feet mean sea level (MSL) values to the nearest hundred. An
altitude constraint in feet above ground level (AGL) format is supported for airports. When a database altitude
restriction is displayed, the system allows entry of a different altitude when creating a waypoint, effectively
overriding the database restriction (only before the FAF). When a database altitude restriction of type “AT or
ABOVE” or “AT or BELOW” is activated, the system uses the “AT” portion of the restriction to define the vertical
profile.
EIS
An altitude constraint is invalid if:
• Meeting the constraint requires the aircraft to climb
• Meeting the constraint requires the maximum flight path angle or maximum vertical speed to be exceeded
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The altitude constraint results in a TOD behind the aircraft present position
• The constraint is within a leg type for which altitude constraints are not supported
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The altitude constraint is added to the FAF of an approach that provides vertical guidance (i.e., ILS or GPS
SBAS approach)
• The altitude constraint is added to a waypoint past the FAF.
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the FMS Knob:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the FMS Knobs. To enter altitudes as a flight level, turn the small
FMS Knob counter-clockwise past zero or clockwise past 9 on the first character, and the system automatically
changes to show units of Flight Level. Turn the large FMS Knob clockwise to highlight the first zero and enter
the three digit flight level.
AFCS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Entering/modifiying an altitude constraint using the Quick Select Box:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
APPENDICES
3) Enter an altitude constraint value using the alphanumeric keys on the PFD/MFD Control Unit. To enter
altitudes as a flight level, enter F as the first character.
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the altitude constraint; if the selected waypoint is an airport, an additional choice
is displayed. Turn the small FMS Knob to choose ‘MSL’ or ‘AGL’, and press the ENT Key to accept the altitude.
INDEX
Altitude constraints can be modified or deleted after having been added to the flight plan. In the event
an altitude constraint is deleted and the navigation database contains an altitude restriction for the lateral
waypoint, the system displays the altitude restriction from the database provided no predicted altitude
can be provided. The system also provides a way to reinstate a published altitude constraint that has been
edited.
262
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Deleting an altitude constraint provided by the navigation database:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove VNV altitude constraint?’ confirmation window is displayed.
4) Select ‘OK’ and press the ENT Key.
EIS
Deleting an altitude constraint that has been manually entered:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REMOVE’ and press the ENT Key. The manually entered altitude is deleted (it is replaced by a system
calculated altitude, if available).
Reverting a manually entered altitude constraint back to the navigation database value:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
AFCS
3) Press the CLR Key. A ‘Remove or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘REVERT’ and press the ENT Key. The altitude is changed to the navigation database value.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
Modifying a system calculated altitude constraint:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the desired waypoint altitude constraint.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the desired waypoint altitude constraint (MFD only).
INDEX
3) Press the CLR Key. An ‘Edit or Revert to published VNV altitude of nnnnnFT?’ confirmation window is
displayed.
4) Select ‘EDIT’ and press the ENT Key.
5) Edit the value using the FMS Knobs, and press the ENT Key.
6) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
263
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.8 PROCEDURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective can access the whole range of instrument procedures available. Departures (DPs), arrivals (STARs),
and non-precision and precision approaches (APPRs) are stored within the database and can be loaded using the
Procedures (PROC) Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The selected procedure for the departure or arrival airport is added to the active flight plan. No waypoints are
required to be in the active flight plan to load procedures; however, if the departure and arrival airport are already
loaded, the procedure loading window defaults to the appropriate airport, saving some time selecting the correct
airport on the Procedure Loading Page. Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate”
is given. “Loading” adds the approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation
guidance. This allows continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps
the procedure available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds
the procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
DEPARTURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A Departure Procedure (DP) is loaded at the departure airport in the flight plan. Only one departure can be
loaded at a time in a flight plan. If a departure is loaded when another departure is already in the active flight
plan, the new departure replaces the previous departure. The route is defined by selection of a departure, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOADING A DEPARTURE INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading a departure into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT DEPARTURE’.
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The Departure Loading Page is displayed.
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select a departure from the list and press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key.
7) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
8) Press the ENT Key to load the departure procedure.
264
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Available Procedure Actions
Departure Airport
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Departure Preview
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Loaded Procedures
Departure Choices
Selected Departure
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-96 Departure Selection
Loaded Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
Figure 5-97 Departure Loading
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
265
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing available departures at an airport:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
EIS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Transition box (only if there are available transitions). The departure is previewed on the map.
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the DP Softkey. The Departure Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Departure. The departure is previewed on the map.
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available departures. Press the ENT Key to select the departure. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The departure is previewed on the map.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The departure is previewed on the map.
7) Press the INFO-1/2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
REMOVING A DEPARTURE FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When plans change while flying IFR, departures can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing a departure procedure from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Departure’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
AFCS
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the departure header in the active flight plan.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the departure header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the departure procedure.
APPENDICES
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
INDEX
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
266
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ARRIVALS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A Standard Terminal Arrival (STAR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available. Only one arrival
can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an arrival is loaded when another arrival is already in the active
flight plan, the new arrival replaces the previous arrival. The route is defined by selection of an arrival, the
transition waypoints, and a runway.
LOADING AN ARRIVAL INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
Loading an arrival into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
EIS
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT ARRIVAL’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Arrival Loading Page is displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
5) Select an arrival from the list and press the ENT Key.
6) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Select a runway (if required) and press the ENT Key. ‘LOAD?’ is highlighted.
8) Press the ENT Key to load the arrival procedure.
Available Procedure Actions
Destination Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Arrival Preview
Arrival Choices
APPENDICES
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-98 Arrival Selection
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
267
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Arrival
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Arrival
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-99 Arrival Loading
Viewing available arrivals at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), select the STAR Softkey. The Arrival Information
Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Arrival. The arrival is previewed on the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available arrivals. Press the ENT Key to select the arrival. The cursor moves
to the Transition box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Runway box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available runways. Press the ENT Key to select the runway. The cursor
moves to the Sequence box. The arrival is previewed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
7) Press the INFO-1/2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
268
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
REMOVING AN ARRIVAL FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
When plans change while flying IFR, arrivals can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Removing an arrival from the active flight plan:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Arrival’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
EIS
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the arrival header in the active flight plan.
Or:
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the arrival header.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the arrival procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal request, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT
Key.
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
APPROACHES
NOTE: If certain GPS parameters (SBAS, RAIM, etc.) are not available, some published approach procedures
for the desired airport may not be displayed in the list of available approaches.
AFCS
An Approach Procedure (APPR) can be loaded at any airport that has one available, and provides guidance
for non-precision and precision approaches to airports with published instrument approach procedures.
Only one approach can be loaded at a time in a flight plan. If an approach is loaded when another approach
is already in the active flight plan, the new approach replaces the previous approach. The route is defined by
selection of an approach and the transition waypoints.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Whenever an approach is selected, the choice to either “load” or “activate” is given. “Loading” adds the
approach to the end of the flight plan without immediately using it for navigation guidance. This allows
continued navigation via the intermediate waypoints in the original flight plan, but keeps the procedure
available on the Active Flight Plan Page for quick activation when needed. “Activating” also adds the
procedure to the end of the flight plan but immediately begins to provide guidance to the first waypoint in
the approach.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
When selecting an approach, a “GPS” designation to the right of the procedure name indicates the procedure
can be flown using the GPS receiver. Some procedures do not have this designation, meaning the GPS
receiver can be used for supplemental navigation guidance only. If the GPS receiver cannot be used for
primary guidance, the appropriate navigation receiver must be used for the selected approach (e.g., VOR or
ILS). The final course segment of ILS approaches, for example, must be flown by tuning the NAV receiver to
the proper frequency and selecting that NAV receiver on the CDI.
269
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective SBAS GPS allows for flying LNAV, LNAV+V, LNAV/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV, and RNP approach
service levels according to the published chart. The ‘+V’ designation adds advisory vertical guidance for
assistance in maintaining a constant vertical glidepath similar to an ILS glideslope on approach. This guidance
is displayed on the system PFD in the same location as the ILS glideslope using a magenta diamond. The
active approach service level is annunciated on the HSI as shown in the following table:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
HSI Annunciation
Description
LNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima
LNAV+V
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV
minima. Advisory vertical guidance is provided
L/VNAV
RNAV GPS approach using published LNAV/
(available only if VNAV minima (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS
SBAS available) unavailable)
LP
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
(available only if (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
SBAS available)
RNAV GPS approach using published LP minima
LP+V
(available only if Advisory vertical guidance is provided
SBAS available) (downgrades to LNAV if SBAS unavailable)
LPV
RNAV GPS approach using published LPV
(available only if minima
SBAS available)
Example on HSI
Approach Service Level
- LNAV, LNAV+V, L/VNAV, LP, LP+V, LPV
Table 5-9 Approach Types
LOADING AN APPROACH INTO THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
AFCS
Loading an approach into the active flight plan using the PROC Key:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed.
2) Highlight ‘SELECT APPROACH’, and press the ENT Key. The Approach Loading Page is displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the airport and approach:
a) Use the FMS Knob to select an airport and press the ENT Key.
b) Select an approach from the list and press the ENT Key.
Or:
APPENDICES
a) If necessary, push the FMS Knob to exit the approach list, and use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to
the APPROACH CHANNEL field.
b) Use the FMS Knob to enter the approach channel number, and press the ENT Key to accept the approach
channel number. The airport and approach are selected.
INDEX
4) Select a transition (if required) and press the ENT Key.
270
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Minimums
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
Or:
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
EIS
6) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure.
NOTE: When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED
Available Procedure Actions
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV
receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
Destination Airport
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Approach Preview
Approach Choices
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Loaded Procedures
Figure 5-100 Approach Selection
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
271
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Loaded Approach
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected Approach
Procedure Loading Page Selection Softkeys
LOAD or ACTIVATE? Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-101 Approach Loading
Viewing available approaches at an airport:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) From the Airport Information Page (first page in the WPT group), press the APR Softkey. The Approach
Information Page is displayed, defaulting to the airport displayed on the Airport information Page.
2) To select another airport, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor, enter an identifier/facility name/city, and
press the ENT Key.
3) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Approach. The approach is previewed on
the map.
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available approaches. Press the ENT Key to select the approach. The
cursor moves to the Transition box. The approach is previewed on the map.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to view the available transitions. Press the ENT Key to select the transition. The cursor
moves to the Minimums box. The approach is previewed on the map.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select minimums on or off. Press the ENT Key.
a) When minimums are selected on, the cursor moves to the minimum altitude field . Use the small FMS Knob to
select the altitude. Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
b) If temperature compensated minimums was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Use the small
FMS Knob to select the temperature. Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach
is previewed on the map.
Or:
INDEX
a) When minimums are selected off, the cursor moves to the Sequence box. The approach is previewed on the
map.
7) Press the INFO-1 or the INFO-2 Softkey to return to the Airport Information Page.
272
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading an approach into the active flight plan from the Nearest Airport Page:
1) Select the Nearest Airports Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob, then turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired nearest airport. The airport is
previewed on the map.
3) Press the APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Select Approach Window’, and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired approach.
5) Press the LD APR Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Load Approach’, and press the ENT Key. The
Approach Loading Page is displayed with the transitions field highlighted.
EIS
6) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight the desired transition, and press the ENT Key.
7) Minimums
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’ or ‘TEMP COMP’, and press the ENT Key. Turn
the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
b) If ‘TEMP COMP’ was selected, the cursor moves to the temperature field. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the
temperature, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
a) To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key. The ‘LOAD?’ field is highlighted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the ENT Key with ‘LOAD?’ highlighted to load the approach procedure; or turn the large FMS Knob to
highlight ‘ACTIVATE’ and press the ENT Key to load and activate the approach procedure. The system continues
navigating the current flight plan until the approach is activated. When GPS is not approved for the selected
final approach course, the message ‘NOT APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the
approach, but the HSI must to be switched to a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
ACTIVATING AN APPROACH
A previously loaded approach can be activated from the Procedures Window.
AFCS
Activating a previously loaded approach:
1) Press the PROC Key. The Procedures Window is displayed with ‘Activate Approach’ highlighted.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
In many cases, it may be easiest to “load” the full approach while still some distance away, enroute to the
destination airport. Later, if vectored to final, use the steps above to select ‘Activate Vector-To-Final’ — which
makes the inbound course to the FAF waypoint active.
APPENDICES
Activating a previously loaded approach with vectors to final:
1) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
2) Highlight ‘ACTIVATE VECTOR-TO-FINAL’ and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
273
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Loading and activating an approach using the MENU Key:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
2) Press the ENT Key. When GPS is not approved for the selected final approach course, the message ‘NOT
APPROVED FOR GPS’ is displayed. GPS provides guidance to the approach, but the HSI must to be switched to
a NAV receiver to fly the final course of the approach.
1) From the Approach Loading Page, press the MENU Key. The page menu is displayed with ‘Load & Activate
Approach’ highlighted.
REMOVING AN APPROACH FROM THE ACTIVE FLIGHT PLAN
EIS
When plans change while flying IFR, approaches can be easily removed from the Active Flight Plan.
Removing an approach from the active flight plan:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the MENU Key, and highlight ‘Remove Approach’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the FPL Key to display the Active Flight Plan Page (MFD) or the Active Flight Plan Window (PFD).
2) Press the FMS Knob, and turn to highlight the approach header in the active flight plan.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Use the Joystick to place the Quick Select Box on the approach header.
3) Press the CLR Key. A confirmation window is displayed listing the approach procedure.
4) With ‘OK’ highlighted, press the ENT Key. To cancel the removal, highlight ‘CANCEL’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob to remove the flashing cursor.
MISSED APPROACH
Activating a missed approach in the active flight plan:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the PROC Key.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE MISSED APPROACH’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The aircraft automatically sequences to the MAHP.
APPENDICES
Or:
INDEX
Press the Go-Around Button.
274
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED ALTITUDE
Temperature compensated altitudes can be computed and used for a loaded approach. A temperature
compensated altitude is displayed in slanted text.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Activating temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
EIS
4) Use the small FMS Knob to select the temperature at the <airport>. The compensated altitude is computed as
the temperature is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. ‘ACTIVATE COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Press the ENT Key. The compensated altitudes for the approach are shown in the flight plan.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Temperature
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FAF Altitude
Compensated
Altitude
Temperature
Compensation
Selected
AFCS
Figure 5-102 Temperature Compensation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
CANCEL
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
APPENDICES
ACTIVATE
COMPENSATION?
Highlighted
Figure 5-103 Activating/Cancelling Temperature Compensation
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
275
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
EIS
Compensated
Altitudes
Uncompensated
Altitudes
Figure 5-104 Temperature Compensation in the Active Flight Plan
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cancelling temperature compensated altitude:
1) From the Active Flight Plan Page, press the MENU Key. The Page Menu is displayed.
2) Turn the FMS Knob to highlight ‘Temperature Compensation’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the ENT Key. The TEMPERATURE COMPENSATION Window is displayed.
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘CANCEL COMPENSATION?’ is highlighted.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key. The temperature compensated altitude at the FAF is cancelled.
276
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COURSE TO ALTITUDE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is
not part of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along
the runway centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded.
This altitude is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for
this approach. In this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing
the MAP, a direct-to is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is
reached. After reaching 6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL).
If the aircraft altitude is above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the
published fix (MOGAL) to begin the missed approach procedure.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure.
For example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach
Hold Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the
aircraft altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg
when the missed approach procedure is activated.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Course to Altitude Leg
AFCS
Figure 5-105 Course to Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
277
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.9 TRIP PLANNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Perspective allows the pilot to view trip planning information, fuel information, and other information for
a specified flight plan or flight plan leg based on automatic data, or based on manually entered data. Weight
planning is also available, based on manually entered fuel data and the active flight plan (to estimate remaining
fuel).
TRIP PLANNING
EIS
All of the input of data needed for calculation and viewing of the statistics is done on the Trip Planning Page
located in the AUX Page Group.
Selected Flight Plan Segment
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- FPL Number/Cumulative Legs (CUM or REM) or Leg Number (NN)
- Waypoints Defining Selected Flight Plan/Flight Plan Leg
Trip Planning Page Mode
- Automatic/Manual
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Preview of Selected
Flight Plan/
Flight Plan Leg
Trip Input Data (sensor/pilot)
- Departure Time (local)
- Ground Speed
- Fuel Flow
- Fuel On Board Aircraft
- Calibrated Airspeed
- Indicated Altitude
- Barometric Pressure
- Total Air Temperature
Trip Statistics
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Desired Track Distance Est. Time Enroute Est. Time of Arrival Enroute Safe Altitude Sunrise Time (local) Sunset Time (local) -
Other Statistics
- Density Altitude
- True Airspeed (TAS)
AFCS
Fuel Statistics
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Efficiency Total Endurance Remaining Fuel Remaining Endurance Fuel Required Total Range -
Softkeys
- Automatic/Manual Page Mode
- Flight Plan/Waypoint Mode
Figure 5-106 Trip Planning Page
APPENDICES
The trip planning inputs are based on sensor inputs (automatic page mode) or on pilot inputs (manual page
mode). Some additional explanation of the sources for some of the inputs is as follows:
• Departure time (DEP TIME) - This defaults to the current time in automatic page mode. The computations
are from the aircraft present position, so the aircraft is always just departing.
• Calibrated airspeed (CALIBRATED AS) - The primary source is from the air data system, and the secondary
source of information is GPS ground speed.
INDEX
• Indicated altitude (IND ALTITUDE) - The primary source is the barometric altitude, and the secondary source
of information is GPS altitude.
278
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TRIP STATISTICS
The trip statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and the entire flight plan (CUM) selected,
the waypoints are the starting and ending waypoints of the selected flight plan.
In flight plan mode (FPL) with a stored flight plan selected (NN), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
waypoints are the endpoints of the selected leg.
EIS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and the remaining flight plan (REM)
selected, the ‘from’ waypoint is the present position of the aircraft and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the
active flight plan.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
In flight plan mode (FPL) with the active flight plan selected (00), and a specific leg (NN) selected, the
‘from’ waypoint is the current aircraft position and the ‘to’ waypoint is the endpoint of the selected leg.
In waypoint (WPTS) mode these are manually selected waypoints (if there is an active flight plan, these
default to the endpoints of the active leg).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has already
been flown.
• Desired Track (DTK) - DTK is shown as nnn° and is the desired track between the selected waypoints.
It is dashed unless only a single leg is selected.
• Distance (DIS) - The distance is shown in tenths of units up to 99.9, and in whole units up to 9999.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Estimated time enroute (ETE) - ETE is shown as hours:minutes until less than an hour, then it is shown
as minutes:seconds.
• Estimated time of arrival (ETA) - ETA is shown as hours:minutes and is the local time at the
destination.
- If in waypoint mode then the ETA is the ETE added to the departure time.
AFCS
- If a flight plan other than the active flight plan is selected it shows the ETA by adding to the departure
time all of the ETEs of the legs up to and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected,
then the ETA is calculated as if the last leg of the flight plan was selected.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
- If the active flight plan is selected the ETA reflects the current position of the aircraft and the current
leg being flown. The ETA is calculated by adding to the current time the ETEs of the current leg up to
and including the selected leg. If the entire flight plan is selected, then the ETA is calculated as if the
last leg of the flight plan was selected.
APPENDICES
• Enroute safe altitude (ESA) - The ESA is shown as nnnnnFT
• Destination sunrise and sunset times (SUNRISE, SUNSET) - These times are shown as hours:minutes
and are the local time at the destination.
FUEL STATISTICS
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The fuel statistics are calculated based on the selected starting and ending waypoints and the trip planning
inputs. Some of the calculated trip statistics are dashed when the selected leg of the active flight plan has
already been flown.
279
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
• Fuel efficiency (EFFICIENCY) - This value is calculated by dividing the current ground speed by the
current fuel flow.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
• Fuel on board upon reaching end of selected leg (REM FUEL) - This value is calculated by taking the
amount of fuel onboard and subtracting the fuel required to reach the end of the selected leg.
• Time of fuel endurance (TOTAL ENDUR) - This time is shown as hours:minutes. This value is obtained
by dividing the amount of fuel on board by the current fuel flow.
• Fuel endurance remaining at end of selected leg (REM ENDUR) - This value is calculated by taking the time
of fuel endurance and subtracting the estimated time enroute to the end of the selected leg.
EIS
• Fuel required for trip (FUEL REQ) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time to go by the fuel
flow.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Total range at entered fuel flow (TOTAL RANGE) - This value is calculated by multiplying the time of fuel
endurance by the ground speed.
OTHER STATISTICS
These statistics are calculated based on the system sensor inputs or the manual trip planning inputs.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Density altitude (DENSITY ALT)
• True airspeed (TRUE AIRSPEED)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot may select automatic (AUTO) or manual (MANUAL) page mode, and flight plan (FPL) or waypoint
(WPTS) mode. In automatic page mode, only the FPL, LEG, or waypoint IDs are editable (based on FPL/WPTS
selection).
Selected Flight Plan NN -
Selected Leg(s)
00 is Active FPL
01-99 are Stored FPLs
AFCS
Starting and Ending Waypoint of
Selected Flight Plan Segment
Stored Flight Plan
- CUM: Beginning to End of FPL
- NN: Beginning to End of Selected Leg
Active Flight Plan
- REM: Pres. Pos. to End of FPL
- NN: Pres. Pos. to End of Selected Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-107 Trip Planning Page - Flight Plan Mode
Selected Flight Plan
Selected Leg(s)
Not Available
Not Available
APPENDICES
Selected Starting and Ending Waypoints
Figure 5-108 Trip Planning Page - Waypoint Mode
Selecting automatic or manual page mode:
INDEX
Press the AUTO Softkey or the MANUAL Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Auto Mode’ or ‘Manual
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
280
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Selecting flight plan or waypoint mode:
Press the FPL Softkey or the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Flight Plan Mode’ or ‘Waypoints
Mode’, and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting a flight plan and leg for trip statistics:
1) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor in the flight plan number field.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired flight plan number.
EIS
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘CUM’ or ‘REM’. The statistics for each leg can be viewed by turning the
small FMS Knob to select the desired leg. The Inset Map also displays the selected data.
Selecting waypoints for waypoint mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Press the WPTS Softkey; or press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Waypoints Mode’, and press the ENT Key. The
cursor is positioned in the waypoint field directly below the FPL field.
2) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint (or select from the Page Menu ‘Set WPT to Present Position’
if that is what is desired), and press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to the second waypoint field.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Turn the FMS knobs to select the desired waypoint, and press the ENT Key. The statistics for the selected leg
are displayed.
In manual page mode, the other eight trip input data fields must be entered by the pilot, in addition to flight
plan and leg selection.
Entering manual data for trip statistics calculations:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MANUAL Softkey or select ‘Manual Mode’ from the Page Menu, and press the ENT Key. The cursor
may now be positioned in any field in the top right two boxes.
AFCS
2) Turn the FMS Knobs to move the cursor onto the DEP TIME field and enter the desired value. Press the ENT Key.
The statistics are calculated using the new value and the cursor moves to the next entry field. Repeat until all
desired values have been entered.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
281
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
5.10 RAIM PREDICTION
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
RAIM (Receiver Autonomous Integrity Monitoring) is a GPS receiver function that performs a consistency
check on all tracked satellites. RAIM ensures that the available satellite geometry allows the receiver to calculate
a position within a specified RAIM protection limit (2.0 nm for oceanic, 2.0 nm for enroute, 1.0 nm for terminal,
and 0.3 nm for non-precision approaches). During oceanic, enroute, and terminal phases of flight, RAIM is
available nearly 100% of the time. The RAIM prediction function also indicates whether RAIM is available at a
specified date and time. RAIM computations predict satellite coverage within ±15 min of the specified arrival
date and time. Because of the tighter protection limit on approaches, there may be times when RAIM is not
available. RAIM prediction must be initiated manually if there is concern over SBAS coverage at the destination
or some other reason that compromises navigation precision. If RAIM is not predicted to be available for the
final approach course, the approach does not become active. If RAIM is not available when crossing the FAF, the
missed approach procedure must be flown.
RAIM PREDICTION Box
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
- Prediction Waypoint
- Arrival Time
- Arrival Date
- RAIM Status
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-109 RAIM Prediction
Predicting RAIM availability at a selected waypoint:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. (Turning it clockwise displays a blank
Waypoint Information Window, turning it counter-clockwise displays the Waypoint Information Window
with a waypoint selection submenu allowing selection of active flight plan, nearest, recent, user, or airway
waypoints).
INDEX
4) Enter the identifier, facility, or city name of the departure waypoint; or select a waypoint from the submenu of
waypoints and press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
282
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Predicting RAIM availability at the aircraft present position:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob. The RAIM Prediction ‘WAYPOINT’ field is highlighted.
3) Press the MENU Key, highlight ‘Set WPT to Present Position’, and press the ENT Key.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to accept the waypoint entry.
5) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival time and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the FMS Knobs to enter an arrival date and press the ENT Key.
7) Press the ENT Key with ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ highlighted to begin the computation.
Status of the RAIM computation for the selected waypoint, time, and date is displayed at the bottom of the
RAIM PREDICTION Box as follows:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• ‘COMPUTE RAIM?’ - RAIM has not been computed.
• ‘COMPUTING AVAILABILITY’ - RAIM calculation is in progress.
• ‘RAIM AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be available.
• ‘RAIM NOT AVAILABLE’ - RAIM is predicted to be unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) provides increased navigation accuracy when available. SBAS
can be enabled or disabled manually on the GPS Status Page.
AFCS
SBAS Status
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SBAS SELECTION Box
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
APPENDICES
RAIM Softkey
INDEX
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
Figure 5-110 SBAS Display - Active
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
283
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Enabling/Disabling SBAS:
1) Select the AUX-GPS Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the SBAS Softkey.
3) Press the FMS Knob, and turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘EGNOS’, ‘MSAS’ or ‘WAAS’.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to disable SBAS. Press the ENT Key again to enable SBAS.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SBAS Status
SBAS SELECTION Box
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
- EGNOS Enable/Disable
- MSAS Enable/Disable
- WAAS Enable/Disable
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
RAIM Softkey
SBAS Softkey
(displays SBAS Selection)
(displays RAIM
PREDICTION)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 5-111 SBAS Display - Disabled
284
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.11 NAVIGATING A FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following discussion is an example of navigating a flight plan with the SBAS capable GPS system while
Perspective provides vertical guidance through descents. A lateral flight plan (LNAV) would be navigated in much
the same way, but would not include vertical guidance when the final approach course is active.
NOTE: The following example flight plan is for instructional purposes only. All database information depicted
should be considered not current.
EIS
The example is a flight plan from KMKC to KCOS filed using the TIFTO2 departure, various Victor Airways,
and the DBRY1 arrival with the transition at TBE. The flight plan includes an enroute altitude of 12,000 feet, an
RNAV LPV (WAAS) approach selected for runway 35R, and a missed approach executed at the Missed Approach
Point (MAP). A few enroute changes are demonstrated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Prior to departure, the TIFTO2 departure, the airways, and the DBRY1 arrival at KCOS are loaded. See the
Procedures section for loading departures and arrivals. Note the magenta arrow in Figure 5-112 indicating the
active departure leg.
After takeoff, ATC assigns a heading of 240º.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Figure 5-112 shows the aircraft on the assigned heading of 240º. ‘TERM’ (Terminal) is the current CDI flight
phase displayed on the HSI indicating 1.0 nm CDI scaling.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-112 Assigned Heading of 240º
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
285
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) ATC now assigns routing to join V4. A heading of 290º is assigned to intercept V4. The aircraft turns to heading
290° as seen in Figure 5-113.
Figure 5-113 Assigned Heading of 290º
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Enter V4 into the flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
286
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) The desired entry point for V4 (TOP) must be entered. Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired flight
plan insertion point (SLN) as shown in Figure 5-114. When the V4 entry point (TOP) is inserted, it is placed
immediately above the highlighted waypoint (SLN).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-114 Begin Adding V4 to the Flight Plan
c) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Waypoint Information Window. Enter the desired entry point for V4,
Topeka VOR (TOP), as shown in Figure 5-115.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-115 Entering V4 Entry Point
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
287
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Press the ENT Key. TOP is inserted into the flight plan as in Figure 5-116.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-116 TOP Inserted into the Flight Plan
e) With SLN still highlighted as in Figure 5-110, turn the small FMS Knob clockwise. The Waypoint Information
Page is displayed and the LD AIRWY Softkey is now available.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
f) Press the LD AIRWY Softkey to display the list of available airways for TOP as seen in Figure 5-117.
APPENDICES
Figure 5-117 List of Available Airways for TOP
INDEX
g) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight V4 in the list as seen in Figure 5-117.
288
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
h) Press the ENT Key. The list of available exits for V4 is now displayed as in Figure 5-118.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-118 List of Available Exits for V4
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) If necessary, turn either FMS Knob to select the desired exit. In this case Salina VOR (SLN) is selected as in
Figure 5-118.
j) Press the ENT Key. The selected airway and exit are displayed, and the prompt “LOAD?” highlighted as in
Figure 5-119.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-119 Ready to Load V4
k) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
289
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
l) V4 is now loaded into the flight plan as shown in Figure 5-120.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-120 V4 is Loaded in the Flight Plan
5) Making V4 the active leg of the flight plan.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ULNAZ. The TO waypoint of the leg is selected in order to activate the leg.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
c) Press the ACT LEG Softkey. The confirmation window is now displayed as in Figure 5-121. Note the TOP to
ULNAZ leg is actually part of V4.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-121 Comfirm Active Leg
290
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
d) Verify the displayed leg is the desired leg and press the ENT Key. Note in Figure 5-122, the magenta arrow in
the flight plan window and magenta line on the map indicating V4 is now the active flight plan leg. Note the
phase of flight remained in Terminal (TERM) mode up to this point because a departure leg was active. Since a
leg after the departure is now active, the current CDI flight phase is ENR (Enroute) and CDI scaling has changed
to 2.0 nm.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-122 V4 Now Active Leg
6) The aircraft continues on heading 290º. When crosstrack distance is less than 2.0 nm, the XTK disappears from
the HSI and the CDI is positioned on the last dot indicating a 2.0 nm distance from the centerline of the next
course.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
291
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) As the CDI approaches center, the aircraft turns onto the active leg as seen in Figure 5-123.
Figure 5-123 Turn on to Active Leg
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) At SLN, Victor Airway 244 (V244) is intercepted. Turn prompts are displayed in the PFD Navigation Status Box
as seen in Figure 5-124.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 5-124 Turn to Intercept V244
292
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
9) As seen in Figure 5-125, V244 is now the active flight plan leg.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-125 V244 Now Active Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
293
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
10) At Lamar VOR (LAA) V263 is intercepted. See Figure 5-126.
Figure 5-126 HYS to LAA Leg Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
11) ATC grants clearance to proceed direct to the OPSHN intersection to begin the arrival procedure. ATC advises
to expect an altitude of 10,000 feet at OPSHN.
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to select OPSHN in the flight plan list.
) Key. The Direct-to Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 5-127.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
c) Press the Direct-to (
Figure 5-127 Direct To OPSHN
294
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
d) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the VNV altitude field as shown in Figure 5-128.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-128 Enter VNV Altitude
e) An altitude of 10,000 feet is entered as requested by ATC.
f) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the VNV offset field as shown in Figure 5-129.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-129 Enter VNV Offset Distance
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
g) Enter the offset, or distance from the waypoint at which to reach the selected altitude. In this case, three
miles prior to OPSHN is entered. In other words, the system gives vertical guidance so the aircraft arrives at an
altitude of 10,000 feet three miles prior to OPSHN.
295
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
h) Press the ENT Key twice to activate the direct-to. Note, in Figure 5-130, the magenta arrow indicating the
direct-to OPSHN after the offset waypoint for OPSHN. The preceding offset waypoint indicates the offset
distance and altitude that were previously entered. The remaining waypoints in the loaded arrival procedure
have no database specified altitudes, therefore, dashes are displayed. Keep the CDI centered and maintain a
track along the magenta line to OPSHN.
Note the Direct-to waypoint is within the loaded arrival procedure, therefore, phase of flight scaling for the CDI
changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
NOTE: If the loaded arrival procedure has waypoints with altitude constraints retrieved from the database
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
to be used as is, the altitude must be manually accepted by placing the cursor over the desired altitude, then
pressing the ENT Key. The altitude is now displayed as cyan meaning it is used by the system to determine
vertical speed and deviation guidance.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-130 Direct-to Active
12) The aircraft is proceeding to OPSHN. The expected approach is the RNAV LPV approach to runway 35R, so it is
selected.
INDEX
APPENDICES
a) Press the PROC Key to display the Procedures Window.
296
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
b) ‘SELECT APPROACH’ should be highlighted as shown in Figure 5-131.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-131 Procedures Window
c) Press the ENT Key. A list of available approaches for the destination airport is displayed as in Figure 5-132.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-132 List of Available Approaches
d) Turn either FMS Knob to select the RNAV LPV approach for 35R as shown in Figure 5-132.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
297
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
e) Press the ENT Key. A list of available transitions for the selected approach is displayed as in Figure 5-133.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
f) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired transition. In this case, the Initial Approach Fix (IAF) at HABUK is
used.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-133 List of Available Transitions
To set ‘MINIMUMS’, turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘BARO’, and press the ENT Key. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the altitude, and press the ENT Key.
g) Press the ENT Key.
h) Barometric Minimums
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
To skip setting minimums, press the ENT Key.
298
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-134 Barometric Minimums Set
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
i) With ‘LOAD?’ highlighted, again press the ENT Key. The selected approach is added to the flight plan as seen
in Figure 5-135.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-135 Loaded Approach
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
299
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
13) Note the altitude constraints associated with each of the approach waypoints as seen in Figure 5-136. These
altitudes are loaded from the database and are displayed as cyan text, indicating these values are “designated”
for use in computing vertical deviation guidance.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Note: To no longer use the displayed altitude for calculating vertical deviation guidance, perform the
following:
a) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
b) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the desired altitude.
c) Press the CLR Key.
EIS
d) Press the FMS Knob to deactivate the cursor.
After making the altitude “non-designated”, it is displayed as white text.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Altitude constraint values associated with the Final Approach Fix (FAF) and waypoints beyond the FAF cannot be
designated for vertical guidance. These altitude values are always displayed as white text, as in Figure 5-136.
Vertical guidance from the FAF and on to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) is given using the WAAS GPS
altitude source, therefore, the displayed altitude values are for reference only.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-136 Vertical Guidance is Active to the FAF
300
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
14) As the aircraft approaches OPSHN, it may be desirable to adjust the speed, or steepness of the upcoming
descent. The default Flight Path Angle (FPA) is -3.0 degrees and a required vertical speed is computed to
maintain the -3.0 FPA. To change the vertical flight path, perform the following steps.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Press the VNV PROF Softkey to place the cursor in the target vertical speed field (VS TGT) as shown in Figure
5-137.
b) At this point, the descent vertical speed can be selected, or the FPA can be selected. Turn the large FMS Knob
to select the desired selection field, then turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired value.
EIS
Note the information now displayed in the ‘CURRENT VNV PROFILE’ box. Also, note the offset waypoint (orange
box) and gray circle are now displayed on the map. The gray circle marks the Top of Descent (TOD). In this
example, vertical guidance is provided at the TOD that results in a -3.0 degree FPA descent to an altitude of
10,000 feet upon reaching the offset waypoint.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 5-137 Adjusting the Descent
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
301
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
15) As seen in Figure 5-138, the aircraft is approaching TOD. Note the target vertical speed required to reach the
selected altitude. The Vertical Deviation Indicator (VDI) and the Required Vertical Speed Indicator (RVSI) are
now displayed on the PFD as shown in Figure 5-139. When the aircraft is within one minute of the TOD, it is
annunciated as shown in Figure 5-139, and an aural alert ‘Vertical track’ will be heard.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-138 Approaching Top of Descent (TOD)
AFCS
Target Altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
APPENDICES
Required Vertical
Speed Indicator
(RVSI)
INDEX
Figure 5-139 VDI & RVSI Upon Reaching Top of Descent (TOD)
302
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
16) Upon reaching TOD, a descent vertical speed is established by placing the VSI pointer in line with the RVSI as
shown in Figure 5-140.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Keep Vertical Deviation
Indicator Centered
Align Actual Vertical Speed
with
Required Vertical Speed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 5-140 VDI & RVSI Showing Correctly Established Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
17) When the aircraft is one minute from the bottom of descent (BOD) it is annunciated as shown in Figure 5-141.
Upon reaching the offset waypoint for OPSHN, the aircraft is at 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-141 Approaching Bottom of Descent (BOD) at OPSHN Offset Waypoint
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
303
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
18) The aircraft is approaching OPSHN. The upcoming turn and next heading are annunciated at the top left of the
PFD as seen in Figure 5-142. Initiate the turn and maneuver the aircraft on a track through the turn radius to
intercept the magenta line for the OPSHN to FSHER leg and center the CDI.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 5-142 Turn to intercept OPSHN to FSHER Leg
304
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
19) After passing OPSHN, the next leg of the arrival turns magenta as shown in Figure 5-143. The magenta arrow
in the flight plan list now indicates the OPSHN to FSHER leg of the arrival procedure is now active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-143 Tracking the OPSHN to FSHER Leg
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
20) The flight continues through the arrival procedure to PYNON (see Figure 5-144). At a point 31 nm from the
destination airport, the phase of flight scaling for the CDI changes to Terminal Mode and is annunciated by
displaying ‘TERM’ on the HSI.
A descent to HABUK is in the next leg. Note the TOD point on the map. Annunciations for the upcoming turn
and descent, as well as the VDI and RVSI, appear on the PFD as the flight progresses.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
305
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-144 Approaching PYNON
306
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
21) Upon passing PYNON the approach procedure automatically becomes active. The approach may be activated
at any point to proceed directly to the IAF. In this example, the aircraft has progressed through the final
waypoint of the arrival and the flight plan has automatically sequenced to the IAF as the active leg, activating
the approach procedure (see Figure 5-145).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-145 Approach is Now Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note: To manually activate the approach procedure, perform the following steps:
a) Press the PROC Key.
b) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘ACTIVATE APPROACH’ as shown in Figure 5-146.
AFCS
c) Press the ENT Key to activate the approach.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-146 Manually Activate Approach
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
307
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
22) The IAF is the next waypoint. At the TOD, establish a descent vertical speed as previously discussed in Step 16.
The aircraft altitude is 9,000 feet upon reaching HABUK.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 5-147 Descending Turn to the Initial Approach Fix (IAF)
308
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
23) After crossing FALUR the next waypoint is the FAF. The flight phase changes to LPV on the HSI indicating the
current phase of flight is in Approach Mode and the approach type is RNAV LPV. CDI scaling changes accordingly
and is used much like a localizer when flying an ILS approach. The RVSI is no longer displayed and the VDI
changes to the Glidepath Indicator (as shown in Figure 5-148) when the final approach course becomes active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 5-148 Descending to the FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The descent continues through the FAF (CEGIX) using the Glidepath Indicator, as one would use a glideslope
indicator, to obtain an altitude “AT” 7,800 feet at the FAF. Note the altitude restriction lines over and under (At)
the altitude in the ‘ALT’ field in Figure 5-148.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
309
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
24) After crossing CEGIX, the aircraft continues following the glidepath to maintain the descent to “AT or ABOVE”
6,370 feet at the Missed Approach Point (MAP) (RW35R) as seen in Figure 5-149.
Figure 5-149 Descending to the Missed Approach Point
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In this missed approach procedure, the altitude immediately following the MAP (in this case ‘6368ft’) is not part
of the published procedure. It is simply a Course to Altitude (CA) leg which guides the aircraft along the runway
centerline until the altitude required to safely make the first turn toward the MAHP is exceeded. This altitude
is provided by Jeppesen, and may be below, equal to, or above the published minimums for this approach. In
this case, if the aircraft altitude is below the specified altitude (6,368 feet) after crossing the MAP, a direct-to
is established to provide a course on runway heading until an altitude of 6,368 feet is reached. After reaching
6,368 feet, a direct-to is established to the published MAHP (in this case MOGAL). If the aircraft altitude is
above the specified altitude after crossing the MAP, a direct-to is established to the published fix (MOGAL) to
begin the missed approach procedure.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
In some missed approach procedures this Course to Altitude leg may be part of the published procedure. For
example, a procedure may dictate a climb to 5,500 feet, then turn left and proceed to the Missed Approach Hold
Point (MAHP). In this case, the altitude would appear in the list of waypoints as ‘5500ft’. Again, if the aircraft
altitude is lower than the prescribed altitude, a direct-to is established on a Course to Altitude leg when the
missed approach procedure is activated.
310
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
25) Upon reaching the MAP, it is decided to execute a missed approach. Automatic waypoint sequencing is
suspended past the MAP. Press the SUSP Softkey on the PFD to resume automatic waypoint sequencing
through the missed approach procedure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A direct-to is initiated to MOGAL, which is the Missed Approach Hold Point (MAHP) as seen in Figure 5-150.
The aircraft is climbing to 10,000 feet. The CDI flight phase now changes from LPV to MAPR as seen on the HSI.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 5-150 Missed Approach Active
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
311
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
26) The aircraft continues climbing to “AT or ABOVE” 10,000 feet at MOGAL. A holding pattern is established at
the MAHP (MOGAL) as shown in Figure 5-151.
Figure 5-151 Establishing the Holding Pattern
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
27) The aircraft maintains 10,000 feet while following the magenta line through the hold as in Figure 5-152.
INDEX
Figure 5-152 Hold Established
312
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
5.12 ABNORMAL OPERATION
This section discusses the Dead Reckoning mode of operation and the subsequent indications.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Dead Reckoning Mode only functions in Enroute (ENR) or Oceanic (OCN) phase of flight. In all other
phases, an invalid GPS solution produces a “NO GPS POSITION” annunciation on the map and Perspective
stops using GPS.
EIS
While in Enroute or Oceanic phase of flight, if the system detects an invalid GPS solution or is unable to
calculate a GPS position, the system automatically reverts to Dead Reckoning (DR) Mode. In DR Mode, the system
uses its last-known position combined with continuously updated airspeed and heading data (when available) to
calculate and display the aircraft’s current estimated position.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
It is important to note that estimated navigation data supplied by Perspective in DR Mode may become
increasingly unreliable and must not be used as a sole means of navigation. If while in DR Mode airspeed and/or
heading data is also lost or not available, the DR function may not be capable of accurately tracking estimated
position and, consequently, the system may display a path that is different than the actual movement of the
aircraft. Estimated position information displayed by Perspective through DR while there is no heading and/or
airspeed data available should not be used for navigation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
DR Mode is inherently less accurate than the standard GPS/SBAS Mode due to the lack of satellite measurements
needed to determine a position. Changes in wind speed and/or wind direction compounds the relative inaccuracy
of DR Mode. Because of this degraded accuracy, other navigation equipment must be relied upon for position
awareness until GPS-derived position data is restored.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
DR Mode is indicated on the system by the appearance of the letters ‘DR’ superimposed in yellow over the
‘own aircraft’ symbol as shown in Figure 5-153. In addition, ‘DR’ is prominently displayed in yellow on the HSI
slightly above and to the right of the aircraft symbol on the CDI as shown in Figure 5-153. The CDI deviation
bar remains, but is removed from the display after 20 minutes in DR Mode. The autopilot will remain coupled
in DR mode as long as the deviation info is available (20 min.) Lastly, but at the same time, a ‘GPS NAV LOST’
alert message appears on the PFD. Normal navigation using GPS/SBAS source data resumes automatically once
a valid GPS solution is restored.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
As a result of operating in DR Mode, all GPS-derived data is computed based upon an estimated position and
is displayed as yellow text on the display to denote degraded navigation source information as shown in Figure
5-153.
Also, while Perspective is in DR Mode, the autopilot does not couple to GPS, and TAWS, Terrain-SVS, and
Terrain Proximity are disabled. Additionally, the accuracy of all nearest information (airports, airspaces, and
waypoints) is questionable. Finally, airspace alerts continue to function, but with degraded accuracy.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
313
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT MANAGEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Distance &
Estimated
Time Enroute
EIS
Ground
Speed
Dead Reckoning
Annunciaion
Wind Data
GPS Navigation
Lost Message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Current
Track
Indicator
Course Deviation
Indicator
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bearing
Pointer/
Distance
Destination
Airport
Information
Nav Data Bar
Wind Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
All data except
Active Leg, TAS,
and DTK are in
yellow
AFCS
Dead Reckoning
Annunciation
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Subdued Aircraft
Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 5-153 Dead Reckoning Mode - GPS Derived Data Shown in Yellow
NOTE: The Inset Map is removed from the PFD any time aircraft pitch is greater than +30° or less than –20°,
INDEX
or when a 65° bank angle is reached.
314
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 6 HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Hazard avoidance features available for Perspective™ are designed to aid situational awareness and provide
advisory information with regard to potential hazards to flight safety associated with weather, terrain, and air
traffic.
Weather
• GDL 69/69A SiriusXM Weather (Optional)
• GSR 56 Garmin Connext Weather (Optional)
EIS
• On-Board Lightning Detection System (Optional)
Terrain Avoidance
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Terrain Proximity
• Terrain-SVS (Standard with SVT Option)
• Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B (TAWS-B) (Optional)
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Garmin GTS 800 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) (Optional)
®
• Avidyne TAS610 TAS (Optional)
®
• L-3 SKYWATCH (SKY497) TAS (Optional)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
315
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.1 SIRIUSXM WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The GDL 69/69A is a remote-mounted data link satellite receiver. Received graphical weather information and
associated text is displayed on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The GDL 69A can also receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services. Both weather data and audio
entertainment programming operate in the S-band frequency range to provide continuous reception capabilities
at any altitude throughout North America.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Services from SiriusXM are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit www.
siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SERVICES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Before SiriusXM Weather and SiriusXM Satellite Radio can be used, the service must be activated. Service is
activated by providing coded IDs unique to the installed GDL 69/69A. SiriusXM Satellite Radio (audio) and
SiriusXM Weather (data) services each have coded IDs. The Data and Audio Radio IDs must be provided to
activate the weather service and entertainment subscriptions, respectively. These IDs are located on:
• The XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 6-1)
• The XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit
AFCS
• The label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
Contact the installer if the Audio and Data Radio IDs cannot be located.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SiriusXM uses the coded IDs to send an activation signal that allows the system to provide weather data and/
or entertainment programming provided through the GDL 69/69A.
Activating the SiriusXM Weather service:
1) Once a SiriusXM Weather account has been established, select the XM Page in the Auxiliary Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
3) Observe the list of Weather Products. A white empty box appears next to an unavailable weather product; a
green filled box appears next to an available weather product. During activation, it may take several minutes
for the weather products in the selected subscription package to become available.
INDEX
4) When the available weather products displayed match the weather products offered in the selected SiriusXM
Weather product subscription package, press the LOCK Softkey.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘YES’.
6) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
316
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Data Radio ID
(for SiriusXM
Weather
Audio Radio ID
(for SiriusXM Satellite
Radio)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Weather Products
(Available Products for
Service Class Indicated
in Green)
EIS
Figure 6-1 XM Information Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select to Display XM
Information page
Select to Lock
Subscription
Information
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
USING SIRIUSXM WEATHER PRODUCTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The principal map for viewing SiriusXM Weather information is the Weather Data Link (XM) Page in the
Map Page Group. This is the only Perspective™ map display capable of showing information for all available
SiriusXM Weather products.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (XM or CNXT) Page.
AFCS
If the name of another weather service provider is listed in the page title (such as ‘CNXT’), proceed to the
following steps in order to change the weather data link source to display SiriusXM Weather.
Changing the data link weather source to SiriusXM:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) If necessary, follow the previous procedure to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Display XM Weather’ and press the ENT Key. The page title changes to
‘Weather Data Link (XM)’ to indicate SiriusXM Weather is the selected weather data link source.
APPENDICES
The available softkeys and displayed data link weather information on the navigation maps correspond to the
selected data link weather source.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
317
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD Weather
Product Display
Enabled
NEXRAD Weather
Product Ages (US
& Canada)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD
Weather Product
Selected for
Display
Figure 6-2 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
For each enabled SiriusXM Weather product, the system displays a weather product icon and product age.
The product age is the elapsed time (in minutes) since the weather data provider compiled the weather product.
The product age display does not indicate the age of the information contained within the weather product,
which can be significantly older than the displayed weather product age.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The SiriusXM Weather service broadcasts weather products at specific intervals (defined in the Broadcast
Rate column in Table 6-1). If for any reason, a product is not broadcast within the Expiration Time intervals
(see Table 6-1), the system removes the expired data from the display, and shows dashes instead of the product
age. This ensures the displayed information is consistent with what is currently being transmitted by the
SiriusXM Weather service. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age
changes to yellow. If data for a weather product is not available, the system displays ‘N/A’ next to the weather
product symbol instead of the product age.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 6-1 shows the weather product symbols, the expiration times and the broadcast rates. The broadcast
rate represents the interval at which the SiriusXM Weather service transmits new signals that may or may not
contain updated weather products. It does not represent the rate at which the weather information is updated
or when the Data Link Receiver receives new data. SiriusXM and its weather data suppliers define and control
the data update intervals, which are subject to change.
318
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Symbol
Echo Top
(ECHO TOP)
12
60
12
90
12
90
12
60
12
120
12
90
12
60
5
60
12
90
22
90
12
90
12
180
12
30
5
60
12
60
12
INDEX
30
APPENDICES
5
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
30
AFCS
7.5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
SiriusXM Lightning
(LTNG)
Cell Movement
(CELL MOV)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
City Forecast
(CITY)
Surface Analysis
(SFC)
Freezing Levels
(FRZ LVL)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
County Warnings
(COUNTY)
Cyclone Warnings
(CYCLONE)
Icing Potential (CIP and SLD)
(ICNG)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Air Report
(AIREPs)
Turbulence
(TURB)
Radar Coverage
no product image
(RADAR CVRG)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time Broadcast Rate
(Minutes)
(Minutes)
5 (U.S.)
30
10 (Canada)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
Cloud Top
(CLD TOP)
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SiriusXM Weather Product
Table 6-1 SiriusXM Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
319
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Cloud Top (CLD TOP)
+
Echo Top (ECHO TOP)
+
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Cell Movement (CELL MOV)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METARs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Winds Aloft (WIND)
AFCS
+
SiriusXM Lightning (XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
+
+
+
+
City Forecast (CITY)
+
Surface Analysis (SFC)
+
Freezing Levels (FRZ LVL)
+
+*
+
+
County Warnings (COUNTY)
+
Cyclone Warnings (CYCLONE)
+
Icing Potential (ICNG)
+
PIREPs
+
+
AIREPs
+
+
Turbulence (TURB)
+
No Radar Coverage
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(XM) Page
NEXRAD
Navigation Map Page
EIS
SiriusXM Weather Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-2 shows which SiriusXM Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on specific
maps.
TFRs
TAFs
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
INDEX
APPENDICES
* Winds Aloft Data displayed inside Profile View on the Navigation Map Page.
Table 6-2 SiriusXM Weather Product Display Maps
320
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-3)
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). When a weather product is selected
for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product is enabled.
CYCLONE SFC OFF
FRZ LVL
SIG/AIR
METAR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
WIND OFF ICNG OFF TURB OFF AIREPS
PIREPS
COUNTY
LTNG
CELL MOV
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NEXRAD ECHO TOP CLD TOP
ENGINE
BACK
SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
WIND/ICNG/TURB Softkey labels
change to reflect current selection.
CURRENT
12 HR
24 HR
36 HR
48 HR
LEGEND
BACK
EIS
OFF
Select the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
1000
3000
6000
9000
12000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
39000
42000
45000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
15000
36000
AFCS
SFC
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
OFF
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PREV
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft,
Icing, and Turbulence altitude selection softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-3 Weather Data Link (XM) Page Weather Product Softkeys
APPENDICES
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (XM) Page control the map range
settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the
weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The menus
also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
321
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (XM) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-4).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure
6-5).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
EIS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page with the changed settings.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-4 Weather Data Link (XM)
Page Menu
Figure 6-5 Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (XM) Page settings:
APPENDICES
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
322
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (XM) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map
Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-6).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-7).
EIS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-8).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-6 Navigation Map Page Menu
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-7 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-8 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
APPENDICES
When a SiriusXM Weather product is enabled for display on the PFD Inset Map, the weather product
information box (with the product icon and age) can be displayed inside the PFD Inset Map.
Displaying/removing the weather product information box on the PFD Inset Map:
1) On the PFD, press the INSET Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the WX LGND Softkey.
3) To remove the weather product information box, press the WX LGND Softkey again.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
323
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link (XM)
Page. A weather product legend can also be displayed on the Navigation Map Page for active SiriusXM Weather
products displayed on that page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page):
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products (on the Navigation Map Page):
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Press the MAP Softkey.
3) Press the LEGEND Softkey (available if one or more XM weather products are enabled for display).
4) To remove the Legend Window, press the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Echo Tops
• METARs
• Cloud Tops
• County Warnings
• Cell Movement
• TFRs
• SIGMETs
• AIREPs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
324
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Additional
Information
on Weather
Feature
Selected with
Map Pointer
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Severe
Thunderstorm
Warning Selected
with Map Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-9 Panning on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
NEXRAD
NOTE: The NEXRAD weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as terrain, echo tops, turbulence,
icing data is displayed.
AFCS
The National Weather Service (NWS) operates the WSR-88D, or NEXRAD (NEXt-generation RADar)
system, an extensive network of 156 high-resolution Doppler radar systems. The NEXRAD network provides
centralized meteorological information for the continental United States and selected overseas locations. The
maximum range of a single NEXRAD site is 250 nm. In addition to a wide array of services, the NEXRAD
network provides important information about severe weather and air traffic safety.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Individual NEXRAD sites supply the network with radar images, and the images from each radar site may
arrive at the network at different rates and times. Periodically, the weather data provider compiles the available
individual site images from the network to form a composite image, and assigns a single time to indicate when
it created the image. This image becomes the NEXRAD weather product. Individual images--gathered from
each NEXRAD site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed NEXRAD weather product age. The
data provider then sends the NEXRAD data to the SiriusXM Weather service, whose satellites transmit this
information during the next designated refresh time for the NEXRAD weather product.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the NEXRAD weather product, the displayed
weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current radar synopsis
and may not depict the current weather conditions. The NEXRAD weather product should never be used as a
basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the information it contains.
325
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-10 NEXRAD Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying NEXRAD weather information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Composite data from all the NEXRAD radar sites in the United States is shown. This data is composed of
the maximum reflectivity from the individual radar sweeps. The display of the information is color-coded
to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the Weather Data Link
(XM) Page. For the NEXRAD legend (Figure 6-11), press the LEGEND Softkey when NEXRAD is selected for
display.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-11 NEXRAD Data with Legend
326
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or ECHO TOPS is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in a gray shade of purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Reflectivity
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the NEXRAD
display are directly correlative to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous
weather can be very complex.
EIS
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The different NEXRAD echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). NEXRAD
measures the radar reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
NEXRAD Limitations
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NEXRAD radar images may have certain limitations:
• NEXRAD base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain. Undetermined precipitation types may be displayed as mixed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NEXRAD base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual NEXRAD
site cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over
the site.
AFCS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers. The intensity level reflected by each square represents the highest level of NEXRAD data
sampled within the area (Figure 6-12).
• Unknown precipitation below 52ºN is displayed as rain regardless of actual precipitation type.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
327
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Block Area is 4 km2
at 30 NM map
range
Figure 6-12 NEXRAD Weather Product with 30 NM Map Range
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed NEXRAD radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
AFCS
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
328
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NEXRAD Limitations (Canada)
• Radar coverage extends to 55ºN.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Any precipitation displayed between 52ºN and 55ºN is displayed as mixed regardless of actual precipitation
type.
EIS
No Coverage
Above 55°N
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precipitation
Above 52°N
Always Displays
as Mixed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-13 NEXRAD Weather Product - Canada
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
329
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ECHO TOPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
The Echo Tops weather product (Figure 6-14) shows the location, elevation, and direction of the highest
radar echo. The highest radar echo does not indicate the top of a storm or clouds; rather it indicates the
highest altitude at which precipitation is detected. Information is derived from NEXRAD data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
NOTE: Echo tops cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD or Cloud Tops are selected for display.
Figure 6-14 Echo Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Echo Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the ECHO TOP Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Echo Tops legend (Figure 6-15), press the LEGEND Softkey when Echo Tops is selected for
display. Since Echo Tops and Cloud Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Echo Tops is activated, NEXRAD and Cloud Tops data are
removed.
INDEX
No Radar Coverage
Figure 6-15 Echo Tops Legend
330
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display of No Radar Coverage is always active when either NEXRAD or Echo Tops is selected. Areas
where NEXRAD radar coverage and Echo Tops information is not currently available or is not being collected
are indicated in gray shade of-purple.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
CLOUD TOPS
NOTE: Cloud Tops and Echo Tops cannot be displayed at the same time.
The Cloud Tops weather product (Figure 6-16) depicts cloud top altitudes as determined from satellite
imagery.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-16 Cloud Tops Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the CLD TOP Softkey.
To display the Cloud Tops legend (Figure 6-17), press the LEGEND Softkey when Cloud Tops is selected for
display. Since Cloud Tops and Echo Tops use the same color scaling to represent altitude, display of these
weather products is mutually exclusive. When Cloud Tops is activated, Echo Tops data is removed.
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-17 Cloud Tops Legend
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
331
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIRIUSXM LIGHTNING
NOTE: The SiriusXM Lightning weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as another lightning
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
data link source (such as optional Stormscope) is selected for display.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The SiriusXM Lightning weather product (Figure 6-18) shows the approximate location of cloud-to-ground
lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a two-kilometer region. The exact
location of the lightning strike is not displayed.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning
Strikes
Figure 6-18 SiriusXM Lightning Weather Product
AFCS
Displaying XM Lightning information:
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the XM LTNG Softkey (LTNG Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page).
APPENDICES
To display the XM Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-19), press the LEGEND
Softkey when XM Lightning is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-19 XM Lightning Legend
332
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CELL MOVEMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cell Movement weather product (Figure 6-20) shows the location and movement of storm cells as
identified by the ground-based system. Cells are represented by yellow squares, with direction of movement
indicated with short, orange arrows.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Storm Cells
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-20 Cell Movement Data
On most applicable maps, the Cell Movement weather product is selected for display along with NEXRAD.
On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement can be selected independently.
Displaying Cell Movement information:
AFCS
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the NEXRAD Softkey (CEL MOV Softkey on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page). For Cell Movement to
be displayed on maps other than the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, Cell Movement must be turned on in the
Navigation Map Setup Menu (see “Setting Up SiriusXM Weather”).
To display the Cell Movement legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, (Figure 6-21), press the LEGEND
Softkey when Cell Movement is selected for display.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-21 Cell Movement Legend
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
333
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are broadcast for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather. A localized SIGMET is a significant weather condition occurring at a localized geographical position.
EIS
AIRMET
Mountain
Obscuration
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Convective
SIGMET
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-22 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the SIG/AIR Softkey.
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-23 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-24), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-23 Sample SIGMET Text
334
Figure 6-24 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: Atmospheric pressure as reported for METARs is given in hectopascals (hPa), except for in the United
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
States, where it is reported in inches of mercury (in Hg). Temperatures are reported in Celsius.
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
EIS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an airport or
observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and other critical
data. METARs reflect routine hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Instructions for
Viewing METAR
and TAF Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-25 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, but may span a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
APPENDICES
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, is displayed only in its original form.
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (XM) Page, select the METAR Softkey.
INDEX
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
335
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Press the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
Figure 6-26 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an
off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
336
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Figure 6-27 METAR Legend
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page (Figure 6-27), select the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
SURFACE ANALYSIS AND CITY FORECAST
service area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Surface Analysis and City Forecast information is available for current and forecast weather conditions.
Forecasts are available for intervals of 12, 24, 36, and 48 hours.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Surface Analysis and City Forecast data are displayed only within the installed Aviation Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Displaying Surface Analysis and City Forecast information:
APPENDICES
Figure 6-28 Current Surface Analysis Data
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
3) Select the SFC Softkey.
4) Select the desired forecast time: CURRENT, 12 HR, 24 HR, 36 HR, or 48 HR. The SFC Softkey label changes
to reflect the forecast time selected.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
337
INDEX
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Surface Analysis and City Forecast legend (Figure 6-29), select the LEGEND Softkey when
Surface Analysis and City Forecast are selected to be displayed.
EIS
Figure 6-29 Surface Analysis Legend
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FREEZING LEVELS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Freezing Level data shows the color-coded contour lines for the altitude and location at which the first
isotherm is found (Figure 6-30). When no data is displayed for a given altitude, the data for that altitude has
not been received, or is out of date and has been removed from the display. New data appears at the next
update.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-30 Freezing Level Data
Displaying Freezing Level information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
INDEX
3) Select the FRZ LVL Softkey.
To display the Freezing Level legend (Figure 6-31), press the LEGEND Softkey when Freezing Level data is
selected to be displayed.
338
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-31 Freezing Level Legend
WINDS ALOFT
EIS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-32) shows the predicted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments up to 42,000 feet MSL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Select the WIND Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-32 Winds Aloft Data at 12,000 Feet
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-33), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is selected
for display.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
339
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-33 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-34). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-34 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
INDEX
APPENDICES
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-3.
340
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Headwind
Symbol
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5 knots
10 knots
EIS
50 knots
Table 6-3 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select the PROFILE Softkey.
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
Winds Aloft information inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on
the Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-35).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-36).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-37).
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
341
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-35 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-37 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-36 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
342
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
COUNTY WARNINGS
The County weather product (Figure 6-38) provides specific public awareness and protection weather
warnings from the National Weather Service (NWS) for severe thunderstorms, tornadoes, and flood conditions.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information
on Flood
Warning
Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flood
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-38 County Flood Warning
Displaying County Warning information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the COUNTY Softkey.
To display the County Warnings legend (Figure 6-39), select the LEGEND Softkey when County Warnings
are selected to be displayed.
APPENDICES
Figure 6-39 County Warnings Legend
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
343
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CYCLONE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Cyclone weather product (Figure 6-40) shows the current location of cyclones (hurricanes) and tropical
storms using the symbol shown below (Figure 6-40). Storm tracks include the predicted date and time of
arrival inside orange boxes.
Cyclone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-40 Cyclone Data Selected for Display
Displaying cyclone (hurricane) track information:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Select the MORE WX Softkey.
AFCS
3) Select the CYCLONE Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Cyclone legend (Figure 6-41), select the LEGEND Softkey when the Cyclone weather product
is enabled.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-41 Cyclone Legend
344
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ICING (CIP & SLD)
NOTE: Icing data cannot be displayed at the same time as NEXRAD data is displayed.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Current Icing Product (CIP) data shows a graphical view of the current icing environment (Figure 6-42).
Icing severity is displayed in four categories: light, moderate, severe, and extreme (not specific to aircraft
type). The CIP product is not a forecast, but a presentation of the current conditions at the time of the
analysis.
EIS
Supercooled Large Droplet (SLD) icing conditions are characterized by the presence of relatively large,
super cooled water droplets indicative of freezing drizzle and freezing rain aloft. SLD threat areas are depicted
as magenta dots over the CIP colors.
Displaying Icing data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the ICNG Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 1,000 feet up to 30,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle through
the altitude softkeys. The ICNG Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-42 Icing Data at 18,000 Feet
To display the Icing Potential legend (Figure 6-43), press the LEGEND Softkey when Icing is selected for
display.
INDEX
Figure 6-43 Icing Potential Legend
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
™
345
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TURBULENCE
NOTE: The Turbulence weather product cannot be displayed at the same time as the NEXRAD weather
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
product is selected for display.
The Turbulence weather product identifies the potential for erratic movement of high-altitude air mass
associated winds. Turbulence is classified as light, moderate, severe or extreme, at altitudes between 21,000
and 45,000 feet. Turbulence information is intended to supplement AIRMETs and SIGMETs.
EIS
Displaying the Turbulence weather product:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the TURB Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Select the desired altitude level: 21,000 feet up to 45,000 feet. Press the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The TURB Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
Figure 6-44 Turbulence Data at 21,000 Feet
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the Turbulence legend (Figure 6-45), press the LEGEND Softkey when Turbulence is selected for
display.
Figure 6-45 Turbulence Legend
346
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PIREPS AND AIREPS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) are airborne weather reports collected from pilots. When significant
weather conditions are reported or forecast, Air Traffic Control (ATC) facilities are required to solicit PIREPs.
A PIREP may contain adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear,
and turbulence. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Another type of PIREP is an Air Report (AIREP). Commercial airlines typically generate AIREPs.
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
and AIREP Text
EIS
Urgent
PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Routine
PIREP
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIREP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-46 AIREPs and PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
Displaying PIREP and AIREP text:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the AIREPS or PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
APPENDICES
5) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with PIREP or AIREP text. The data is first displayed
in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information
not found in the decoded version.
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP or AIREP text.
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (XM) Page.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
347
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Decoded PIREP Text
Selected PIREP
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Raw PIREP Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-47 PIREP Text on the Weather Information Page
To display the PIREP or AIREP legend (Figure 6-48), press the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs or AIREPs are
selected for display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
AFCS
Figure 6-48 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TEMPORARY FLIGHT RESTRICTIONS (TFRS)
NOTE: Do not rely solely upon data link services to provide Temporary Flight Restriction (TFR) information.
Always confirm TFR information through official sources such as Flight Service Stations or Air Traffic Control.
APPENDICES
The Federal Aviation Administration (FAA) issues TFRs to designate areas where flight is restricted. TFRs
are issued to restrict flight for a variety of reasons including national security, law enforcement, firefighting
operations, airshows, and large sporting events. TFRs may be issued at any time, and TFR data displayed on
the system is only intended to supplement TFR information obtained from official sources including Flight
Service Stations (FSS), and air traffic control.
INDEX
The system does not display the age TFR product was assembled on the ground by the data provider is not
shown; however, if TFR product is not available or has expired, the system displays ‘TFR N/A’ in the upper-left
corner of maps on which the display of TFR information is enabled.
348
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TFR Summary
Information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TFR Selected
with Map
Pointer
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-49 TFR Data on the Weather Data Link (XM) Page
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Displaying TFR Data:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (XM) Page or Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Press the Joystick and pan the map pointer over a TFR to highlight it. The system displays TFR summary
information above the map.
3) Press the ENT Key. The system displays a pop-up menu.
4) If necessary, turn the FMS Knob to select ‘Review Airspaces’ and press the ENT Key. The system displays the
TFR Information window.
AFCS
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to remove the TFR Information window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-50 Full Text for Selected TFR
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page control the map range settings above which TFR data is
decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the TFR product map range setting is selected, the TFR
product data is removed from the map.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Maps other than the Navigation Map Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
349
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Setting up and customizing TFR data for maps on which TFR data can be displayed:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-51).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-52).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll to the TFR product range setting (Figure 6-53).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (Off, range settings).
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-51 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-53 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Aviation Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-52 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
350
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.2 GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
WARNING: Do not use data link weather information for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
weather. Information contained within data link weather products may not accurately depict current
weather conditions.
WARNING: Do not use the indicated data link weather product age to determine the age of the weather
EIS
information shown by the data link weather product. Due to time delays inherent in gathering and processing
weather data for data link transmission, the weather information shown by the data link weather product
may be significantly older than the indicated weather product age.
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
information, refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional GSR 56 Iridium satellite data link receiver provides extensive weather information to the system
through the Garmin Connext™ Weather service. The system displays graphical weather information and its
associated text on the Multi Function Display (MFD) and the Primary Flight Display (PFD) Inset Map.
The system provides weather information after the flight crew selects either a manual or automatic Connext
Data Request on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page on the MFD.
Garmin Connext Weather requires an active subscription to both the Iridium (satellite telephone) and Garmin
Connext Weather services.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ACCESSING GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
AFCS
The primary map for viewing Garmin Connext Weather information is the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
in the Map Page Group (Figure 6-57). This is the only map display capable of showing information for all
available Garmin Connext weather products. No weather data is displayed until an initial Connext Weather
Data Request has been completed.
Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. If the name of another weather data
service provider is listed in the page title (such as ‘XM’), proceed to the next step.
3) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Display Connext Weather’ and and press the ENT Key. The page title
changes to ‘Weather Data Link (CNXT)’ to indicate Garmin Connext is now the selected weather source.
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Before setting up an Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the
System ID by selecting the AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 6-54. Contact Garmin at 1-866739-5687 in the United States or 913-397-8200, ext. 1135 with this information. Note the access code Garmin
provides during this process.
351
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
Figure 6-54 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REGISTERING THE SYSTEM FOR GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER
After a subscriber account has been established, the system must be registered to receive Garmin Connext
Weather data. Registration is accomplished by entering the required access code provided by Garmin. This
process is only performed when initially setting up the system for Garmin Connext Weather.
AFCS
Registering the system to receive Garmin Connext Weather:
1) With the aircraft outside and having a clear view of the sky, turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the
MAP page group.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the MAP-WEATHER DATA LINK (CNXT or XM) Page. If ‘XM’ is displayed in
the page title, it will be necessary to change the data link weather source to Garmin Connext (CNXT) before
continuing. Refer to ‘Viewing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page’ procedure to change the data link weather
source to Garmin Connext prior to registration.
INDEX
APPENDICES
3) If the system displays the ‘CONNEXT REGISTRATION’ Window, proceed to step 7. Otherwise, press the MENU
Key. The Page Menu window is now displayed as seen in Figure 6-55.
352
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-55 Select ‘Register With Connext’
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Register With Connext’ in the menu list.
6) Press the ENT Key. The system displays the CONNEXT REGISTRATION Window as shown in Figure 6-56.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 6-56 Enter Access Code
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
353
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
7) Enter the access code provided by Garmin customer service in the ACCESS CODE field.
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘REGISTER’ will now be highlighted as in Figure 6-56.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
9) Press the ENT Key. The system contacts Garmin Connext services. System registration is complete when
‘REGISTERED’ is displayed in the STATUS field.
EIS
Weather
product age
information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Precip Weather
Product Display
Enabled icon
AFCS
Precip Weather
Product Selected
for Display
Figure 6-57 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
(After Connext Data Request)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a weather product is selected for display on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, a box containing a
symbol for the product and its age (in minutes) are shown in the upper right (Figure 6-57). If weather data has
not been requested yet or is not available, ‘N/A’ is shown next to the product symbol instead of age. The age of
the weather product is based on the time difference between when the data was assembled on the ground and
the current GPS time. Weather products are updated continuously or refreshed at specific intervals (defined in
the Refresh Rate column in Table 6-4).
APPENDICES
If for any reason, a weather product is not refreshed within the defined Expiration Time intervals (see Table
6-4), the data is considered expired and is removed from the display. The age of the expired product is replaced
by dashes. If more than half of the expiration time has elapsed, the color of the product age changes to yellow.
INDEX
Table 6-4 shows the Garmin Connext weather product symbols, the expiration time and the refresh rates.
The refresh rate represents the interval at which the Garmin Connext ground-based servers make available the
most current known weather data. It does not necessarily represent the rate at which new content is received
from weather sources.
354
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The availability of specific Garmin Connext Weather products varies by region. For product coverage
information, refer to fly.garmin.com/fly-garmin/gfds-weather.
Symbol
Radar Precipitation
(PRECIP)
30
Refresh Rate
(Minutes)
U.S.: 3*
Canada: 3*†
Europe: 15
Australia: 15ˆ
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
90
Continuous
60
Continuous
60
Continuous
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
30
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
60
EIS
Infrared Satellite
(IR SAT)
Data Link Lightning
(DL LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
Temporary Flight Restrictions
no product image
(TFRs)
Terminal Aerodrome Reports
no product image
(TAFs)
Expiration Time
(Minutes)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
AFCS
* The composite precipitation image is updated every 3 minutes, but individual radar sites may take
between 3 and 10 minutes to provide new data.
†
Canadian radar precipitation data provided by Environment Canada.
ˆ Australian radar precipitation data provided by the Australia Bureau of Meteorology
Table 6-4 Garmin Connext Weather Product Symbols and Data Timing
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
355
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Garmin Connext Lightning (DL LTNG)
+
+
+
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
+
+
+
+
+*
PIREPs
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Plan Pages
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Winds Aloft (WIND)
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
Radar Coverage
+
+
+
TFRs
+
+
+
+
+
+
TAFs
+
+
SIGMETs/AIRMETs (SIG/AIR)
METARs
Nearest Page Group
+
AUX - Video Page
+
AUX - Trip Planning
Page
+
Weather Information
Page
Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page
Precipitation (PRECIP)
Navigation Map Page
EIS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product
PFD Inset Map
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 6-5 shows which Garmin Connext Weather products can be displayed (indicated with a ‘+’ symbol) on
specific Perspective™ maps.
* Winds Aloft data available on Navigation Map Page inside Profile View window.
Table 6-5 Garmin Connext Weather Product Display Maps
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Softkeys control the display of weather information on most MFD pages and the PFD Inset Map (Figure 6-58
shows the weather product softkeys for the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page). When a weather product is
selected for display, the corresponding softkey label changes to gray to indicate the product display is enabled.
356
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
IR SAT
DL LTNG
SIG/AIR
LEGEND MORE WX CHKLIST
PIREPS
BACK
WIND Softkey label changes
to reflect current selection.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WIND OFF
METAR
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
PRECIP
ENGINE
Press the BACK Softkey
to move up one level.
OFF
SFC
3000
6000
9000
12000
15000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
33000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
PREV
OFF
36000
39000
42000
NEXT
LEGEND
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
PREV
EIS
PREV and NEXT Softkeys cycle through Winds Aloft
altitude selection softkeys.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-58 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Softkeys (MFD)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The setup menus for the Navigation Map Page and the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page control the map
range settings above which weather products data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the weather product map range setting is selected, the weather product data is removed from the map. The
menus also provide a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling display of weather products.
Setting up and customizing the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-59).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Product Group 1’ or ‘Product Group 2’, and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-60).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
357
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-59 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
Figure 6-60 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Setup Menu
Restoring default Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page settings:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) With ‘Weather Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
5) Highlight the desired default(s) to restore (all or for selection) and press ENT Key.
358
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If multiple data link weather services are installed, customizing the display settings for the corresponding
weather products shown in Table 6-6 will result in identical settings for a comparable weather product from
another service provider.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Garmin Connext Weather
Product (CNXT)
Precipitation
Next-generation Radar
(NEXRAD)
(PRECIP)
Cloud Top
Infrared Satellite
(CLD TOP)
(IR SAT)
SiriusXM Lightning
Garmin Connext Lightning
(DL LTNG)
(XM LTNG)
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
SIGMETs/AIRMETs
(SIG/AIR)
(SIG/AIR)
Meteorological Aerodrome Report Meteorological Aerodrome Report
(METARs)
(METARs)
Winds Aloft
Winds Aloft
(WIND)
(WIND)
Pilot Weather Report
Pilot Weather Report
(PIREPs)
(PIREPs)
SiriusXM Weather Product
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-6 Corresponding Weather Data Link Product Settings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation
Map Page.
Setting up and customizing weather data for the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-61).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Weather’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-62).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-63).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
APPENDICES
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
359
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-61 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-62 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-63 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Weather Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Each active weather product has an associated legend which can be displayed on the Weather Data Link
(CNXT) Page. If no weather product softkeys are selected, the LEGEND Softkey will be unavailable.
Viewing legends for displayed weather products
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the LEGEND Softkey to display the legends for the displayed weather products.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
b) Select ‘Weather Legend’ and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to scroll through the legends if more are available than fit in the window.
4) To remove the Legend Window, select the LEGEND Softkey, the ENT or the CLR Key, or press the FMS Knob.
APPENDICES
Additional information about the following can be displayed by panning over the display on the map:
• Infrared Satellite (IR SAT)
• METARs
• SIGMETs
• TFRs
• AIRMETs
• PIREPs
INDEX
The map panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the
Joystick. If the map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
360
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Airport
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-64 Panning on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
CONNEXT WEATHER DATA REQUESTS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Connext Data Request window provides the flight crew with the options to enable or disable the requested
weather coverage area(s), choose automatic weather update intervals (if desired), and the ability to send or cancel
weather data requests. The status of the Connext Data Request process is also displayed.
AFCS
Before a Connext Data Request can occur, a valid request coverage area must be defined from which all currently
available Garmin Connext weather products will be retrieved. At a minimum, either the aircraft’s present position
or a waypoint (as part of a flight plan or entered directly in the ‘WAYPOINT’ coverage field) must be part of the
request coverage area, otherwise the request status window will indicate ‘INVALID COVERAGE AREA’ and the
system will not allow a request to occur.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
It is not necessary for a destination (based on an active flight plan), a flight plan, or waypoint to be specified
prior to enabling these coverage areas; however no weather data will be retrieved for these option(s) until a flight
plan or waypoint is provided, respectively.
Requesting Garmin Connext weather data manually:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-65).
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired coverage option(s) and press the ENT Key to select or deselect
one of more of the following coverage selections (Figures 6-66, 6-67):
INDEX
• PRESENT POSITION – Requests data based on current location.
• DESTINATION – Requests data based on the active flight plan destination (Direct-To destinations excluded).
See the Flight Management section for more information about entering and activating flight plans.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
361
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• FPL – Requests data along an active flight plan, if one exists. Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired
flight plan look-ahead distance option (or choose ‘REMAINING FPL’ to request the remainder of the flight
plan), then press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) Turn the large FMS Knob until the ‘SEND REQ’ button is highlighted. Press the ENT Key to initiate the request
immediately or press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page without requesting
weather data.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Turn the large FMS Knob highlight to the ‘DIAMETER / RTE WIDTH’ (diameter/route width) distance field and
turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired diameter and route width of the request, then press the ENT Key.
EIS
• WAYPOINT – Requests data based on a waypoint (which may be off-route). Turn the large and small FMS
Knobs to enter a waypoint, then press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Figure 6-65 Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-66 Connext Data Request Window
362
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Destination Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
EIS
Present Position Selected,
200 nm Diameter
Requested
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Next 80 nm of Flight Plan
Selected, 200 nm Route
Width Requested
Off-Route Waypoint
Selected, 200 nm Diameter
Requested
AFCS
Figure 6-67 Connext Data Request Results with Precipitation and Infrared Satellite Displayed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
During a Connext Data Request, the Request Status box initially displays “Contacting Connext...”. Once a
connection is established, the Request Status Box displays “Receiving Wx Data... Time Remaining:” with an
estimated data transfer time (either minutes or seconds). If desired, the Connext Data Request window may be
closed while the data request is processing by pressing the FMS Knob; the data request will continue to process
in the background. Connext Data Requests typically take between 1 to 4 minutes to complete depending on
the size of the selected weather coverage area and Iridium signal strength.
INDEX
The system retrieves all available Garmin Connext Weather products within the selected coverage area during
an initial Connext Data Request, regardless of which products (if any) are currently enabled for display. On
subsequent requests, previously retrieved textual data (such as METARs and TAFS) is retained if it has not
expired, while new textual weather data matching the current coverage area and all graphical weather data is
downloaded during every data request.
At the completion of a successful weather data request, the request status window (if still open) will indicate
‘OK’.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
363
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Cancelling a Connext Weather Data Request in Progress:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘CANCEL REQ’ and press the ENT Key. The request status box indicates
‘Request Cancelled’.
5) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
EIS
The pilot can schedule Connext Data Requests to recur automatically. Auto requests remain enabled until the
pilot disables them, or the system power is cycled. The Request Status window will indicate a countdown timer
until the next automatic data request occurs.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: If automatic Connext Data Requests were enabled prior to the system entering Reversionary Mode,
the automatic weather data requests will continue in Reversionary Mode, however the Connext Data
Request window and its associated options will not be available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Enabling/disabling automatic Connext Data Requests:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Connext Data Request’ highlighted, press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Choose the desired weather coverage options.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘UPDATE RATE’ setting. Then turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the
desired automatic update frequency (Off, 5 Min, 10 Min, 15 Min, 20 Min, 30 Min, 45 Min, or 60 Min), then press
the ENT Key.
AFCS
6) The ‘SEND REQ” button is highlighted and a countdown timer is displayed in the ‘REQUEST STATUS’ based
on the currently selected update rate. Press the ENT Key to immediately send an immediate Connext Data
Request.
Or:
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press the FMS Knob to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
364
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER PRODUCTS
PRECIPITATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Precipitation weather product provides radar precipitation information in selected radar coverage areas.
This information comes from individual weather radar sites and weather data sources such as government
agencies. Each radar site or source may provide weather data at differing rates and times. Periodically, the
Garmin Connext Weather service compiles the available information to form a composite image, and assigns
a single time to indicate when it created the image. This image becomes the Precipitation weather product.
Individual images--gathered from each radar site--differ in age, and are always older than the displayed
Precipitation weather product age.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Because of the time required to detect, assemble, and distribute the Precipitation weather product, the
displayed weather information contained within the product may be significantly older than the current
radar synopsis and may not depict the current weather conditions. The Precipitation weather product should
never be used as a basis for maneuvering in, near, or around areas of hazardous weather regardless of the
information it contains.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Boundary of weather
data request (shown
when Precipitation is
enabled)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
No Radar Coverage
within request area
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-68 Precipitation Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Airport Information Page
• AUX - Video Page
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
• PFD Inset Map
APPENDICES
Precipitation data can be displayed on the following maps:
365
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying Precipitation weather information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
2) Press the PRECIP Softkey.
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Radar data shown represents lowest level, base reflectivity, of radar returns. The display of the information
is color-coded to indicate the weather severity level. All weather product legends can be viewed on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page. For the Precipitation legend (Figure 6-69), select the LEGEND Softkey when
Precipitation is selected for display.
No Radar Coverage
Boundary of Connext
weather data request
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-69 Precipitation Data Legend
The display of No Radar Coverage is enabled when Precipitation is selected for display. Areas where
precipitation radar coverage is not currently available or is not being collected are indicated in gray shade of
purple. A white boundary line with white tick marks depicts the selected coverage area of the Connext Data
Request. This boundary encloses the precipitation data when this weather product is displayed.
AFCS
Reflectivity
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Reflectivity is the amount of transmitted power returned to the radar receiver. Colors on the Precipitation
display directly correlate to the level of detected reflectivity. Reflectivity as it relates to hazardous weather
can be very complex.
APPENDICES
The role of radar is essentially to detect moisture in the atmosphere. Simply put, certain types of weather
reflect radar better than others. The intensity of a radar reflection is not necessarily an indication of the
weather hazard level. For instance, wet hail returns a strong radar reflection, while dry hail does not. Both
wet and dry hail can be extremely hazardous.
INDEX
The different radar echo intensities are measured in decibels (dB) relative to reflectivity (Z). Weather
radars measure the reflectivity ratio, or the energy reflected back to the radar receiver (designated by the
letter Z). The value of Z increases as the returned signal strength increases.
366
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Precipitation Limitations
Radar images may have certain limitations:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Radar base reflectivity does not provide sufficient information to determine cloud layers or precipitation
characteristics (wet hail vs. rain). For example, it is not possible to distinguish between wet snow, wet
hail, and rain.
• Radar base reflectivity is sampled at the minimum antenna elevation angle. An individual radar site
cannot depict high altitude storms at close ranges. It has no information about storms directly over the
site.
EIS
• When zoomed in to a range of 30 nm, each square block on the display represents an area of four square
kilometers.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Block represents
4 km2
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-70 Precipitation Weather Product - Zoomed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following may cause abnormalities in displayed radar images:
• Ground clutter
• Strobes and spurious radar data
• Sun strobes (when the radar antenna points directly at the sun)
APPENDICES
• Interference from buildings or mountains, which may cause shadows
• Metallic dust (chaff) from military aircraft, which can cause alterations in radar scans
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
367
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INFRARED SATELLITE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
When the Map Pointer is activated and panning over an area of displayed cloud tops, the system shows a
range of cloud top temperatures for the selected location.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The Infrared Satellite (IR SAT) weather product (Figure 6-71) depicts cloud top temperatures from satellite
imagery. Brighter cloud top colors indicate cooler temperatures occurring at higher altitudes.
Figure 6-71 Infrared Satellite Data on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
Displaying Cloud Tops information:
AFCS
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the IR SAT Softkey.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To display the Infrared Satellite legend (Figure 6-72), select the LEGEND Softkey when Infrared Satellite data
is selected for display.
INDEX
Figure 6-72 Infrared Satellite Legend
368
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT DATA LINK LIGHTNING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning (DL LTNG) weather product (Figure 6-73) shows the approximate
location of cloud-to-ground lightning strikes. A strike icon represents a strike that has occurred within a twokilometer region. Neither cloud-to-cloud nor the exact location of the lightning strike is displayed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lightning Strikes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-73 Garmin Connext Data Link Lightning
Displaying Data Link Lightning information:
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, select the INSET Softkey). This step is not necessary on the
Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
AFCS
2) Select the DL LTNG Softkey.
To display the Data Link Lightning legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-74), select the
LEGEND Softkey when Data Link Lightning is selected for display.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-74 Data Link Lightning Legend
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
369
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SIGMETS AND AIRMETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SIGMETs (SIGnificant METeorological Information) and AIRMETs (AIRmen’s METeorological Information)
are issued for potentially hazardous weather. A Convective SIGMET is issued for hazardous convective
weather such as severe or widespread thunderstorms. A localized SIGMET can be displayed when significant
weather conditions are not widespread.
The entire SIGMET or AIRMET is displayed as long as any portion of it is issued within the coverage area
of the Connext Data Request.
EIS
Instructions for Viewing
SIGMET/AIRMET Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SIGMET
Figure 6-75 SIGMET/AIRMET Data
AFCS
Displaying SIGMETs and AIRMETs:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Select the SIG/AIR Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) To view the text of the SIGMET or AIRMET, press the Joystick and move the Map Pointer over the icon.
4) Press the ENT key. Figure 6-75 shows sample SIGMET text.
INDEX
APPENDICES
To display the SIGMET and AIRMET legend (Figure 6-77), select the LEGEND Softkey when SIGMETs and
AIRMETs are selected for display.
Figure 6-76 Sample SIGMET Text
370
Figure 6-77 SIGMET/AIRMET Legend
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
METARS AND TAFS
NOTE: METAR information is only displayed within the installed navigation database service area.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
METARs (METeorological Aerodrome Reports) typically contain information about the temperature,
dewpoint, wind, precipitation, cloud cover, cloud base heights, visibility, and barometric pressure at an
airport or observation station. They can also contain information on precipitation amounts, lightning, and
other critical data. METARs reflect hourly observations; non-routine updates include the code “SPECI” in the
report. METARs are shown as colored flags at airports that provide them.
EIS
Instructions
for Viewing
METAR and
TAF Text
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Airport
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-78 METAR Flags on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAFs (Terminal Aerodrome Forecasts) are weather predictions for specific airports typically within a 24hour period, but may span a longer period. TAFs may include forecast wind, visibility, weather phenomena,
and sky conditions using METAR codes.
METAR and TAF text are displayed on the Weather Information Page. METAR data is displayed first in a
decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the original text may contain additional information not
found in the decoded version. TAF information, when available, is displayed only in its original form.
APPENDICES
Displaying METAR and TAF text:
1) On the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page, select the METAR Softkey.
2) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired airport.
3) Press the ENT Key. The Weather Information Page is shown with METAR and TAF text.
INDEX
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. METAR text must be completely
scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
5) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
371
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Select the Weather Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Waypoint Page Group.
b) Select the WX Softkey to select the Weather Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to display the cursor.
3) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired airport and press the ENT Key.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the METAR and TAF text. Note that the METAR text must
be completely scrolled through before scrolling through the TAF text.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
METAR Text for the
Selected Airport
METAR Symbol
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAF Text for the
Selected Airport
AFCS
Figure 6-79 METAR and TAF Text on the Weather Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Original METAR text is also accessible while panning the map cursor over a METAR flag on any map page
on which a METAR is displayed. The METAR text is shown in a box near the METAR flag.
APPENDICES
In addition, METAR flags and their associated text are displayed on the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
METAR flags appears next to waypoints in the flight plan with an associated METAR. A solid METAR flag
indicates the METAR observations are available for a specific waypoint; a hollow METAR flag indicates an
off-route METAR near the waypoint is available.
Displaying original METAR text on the Active Flight Plan Page:
1) Select the Active Flight Plan Page on the MFD.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
INDEX
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired waypoint. The METAR text will appear in the ‘SELECTED
WAYPOINT WEATHER’ window below.
4) When finished, press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor or press the FPL Key to exit the Active Flight Plan
Page.
372
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
To display the METAR legend on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page (Figure 6-80), select the LEGEND
Softkey when METARs are selected for display.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The METAR flag color is determined by the information in the METAR text. A gray METAR flag is displayed
when the METAR text does not contain adequate information to determine the METAR category.
EIS
Figure 6-80 METAR Legend
WINDS ALOFT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Winds Aloft data (Figure 6-81) shows the forecasted wind speed and direction at the surface and at selected
altitudes. Altitude can be displayed in 3,000-foot increments from the surface up to 42,000 feet MSL.
Displaying Winds Aloft data:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
3) Press the WIND Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
4) Select the desired altitude level: SFC (surface) up to 42,000 feet. Select the NEXT or PREV Softkey to cycle
through the altitude softkeys. The WIND Softkey label changes to reflect the altitude selected.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-81 Winds Aloft at 3,000 Feet
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
373
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To display the Winds Aloft legend (Figure 6-82), select the LEGEND Softkey when Winds Aloft is
selected for display.
Figure 6-82 Winds Aloft Data with Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Headwind and tailwind components aloft are available inside the Profile View on the Navigation Map Page
(Figure 6-83). The displayed components are relative to current aircraft altitude and track, but not to aircraft
speed.
Winds Aloft Data Age
Wind Component
Velocity and Direction
Arrows
AFCS
Altitude Scale
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-83 Navigation Map Page with Winds Aloft Data on
Profile View
374
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Arrows pointing to the left indicate headwind components; tailwind component arrows point to the right,
as shown in Table 6-7.
Tailwind
Symbol
Headwind/Tailwind
Component
None
None
Less than 5 knots
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Headwind
Symbol
5 knots
EIS
10 knots
50 knots
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Table 6-7 Profile View Headwind/Tailwind Component Symbols
Showing/Hiding Profile View (containing winds aloft data)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
3) Select the PROFILE Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Or:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current
state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Winds Aloft data inside the Profile View is enabled by default when the Profile View is displayed on the
Navigation Map Page. This behavior can be changed on the Navigation Map Page.
Enabling/disabling winds aloft data display in Profile View:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-84).
APPENDICES
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Profile Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-85).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘Profile Winds’ (Figure 6-86).
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘On’ or ‘Off’.
7) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
375
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-84 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-85 Navigation Map Page
Setup Menu
Figure 6-86 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Weather Group
PIREPS
AFCS
Pilot Weather Reports (PIREPs) describe in-flight weather encountered by pilots. A PIREP may contain
adverse weather conditions, such as low in-flight visibility, icing conditions, wind shear, turbulence, and type
of aircraft flown. PIREPs are issued as either Routine (UA) or Urgent (UUA).
Instructions for
Viewing PIREP
Text
PIREP
Selected
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Urgent
PIREP
Figure 6-87 PIREPs on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
376
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying PIREP text:
1) Select the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page.
2) Press the MORE WX Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the PIREPS Softkey.
4) Press the Joystick and pan to the desired weather report. A gray circle will appear around the weather report
when it is selected.
5) Press the ENT Key. The PIREP is first displayed in a decoded fashion, followed by the original text. Note the
original text may contain additional information not found in the decoded version.
EIS
6) Use the FMS Knob or the ENT Key to scroll through the PIREP text.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
7) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to close the PIREP text window and return to the Weather Data Link (CNXT)
Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Decoded PIREP Text
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Original PIREP
Text
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-88 PIREP Text on the Weather Data Link (CNXT) Page
APPENDICES
To display the PIREP legend (Figure 6-89), select the LEGEND Softkey when PIREPs are selected for display.
The PIREP color is determined by the type (routine or urgent).
Figure 6-89 AIREPs & PIREPs Legend
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
377
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ABNORMAL OPERATIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the system cannot complete a Connext Data Request, one or more messages will appear in the request status
window.
Weather Request
Status Message
EIS
Auto requests inhibited
Send manual request to
reset.
Auto update retry: ##
Seconds
Connext Comm Error [2]
Description
The system has disabled automatic weather data requests due to excessive errors. Automatic
weather data requests have stopped. Send a manual weather data request to resume automatic
updates.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The system will attempt another automatic weather data request after an error occurred during
the previous request. Timer counts down until the next automatic request occurs.
A communications error has occurred with the GIA or optional GDL 59. The system should be
serviced.
Connext Comm Error [4] This occurs if multiple automatic weather data requests have recently failed, or the GIA or optional
GDL 59 is off-line.
Connext Comm Error [5] The Iridium or Connext networks are not accessible, or the GDL 59 is off-line or not configured.
Check Iridium signal strength. If this error persists, the system should be serviced.
Connext Comm Error [6] A communications error has occurred. It this error persists, the system should be serviced.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Connext Comm Error [7] A weather data transfer has timed out. Check Iridium signal strength and re-send the data
request.
Connext Comm Error [8] A server error has occurred or invalid data received.
Connext Login Invalid
There is a problem with the Garmin Connext registration. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in
the United States or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
Connext Server
The Garmin Connext weather data server is temporarily out of service, but is expected to return to
Temporarily Inop
service in less than 30 minutes.
Connext Server Inop
The Garmin Connext weather data server will be out of service for at least 30 minutes.
Invalid Coverage Area
The weather data request coverage area does not contain at least one of the following: a
waypoint, a flight plan, or a flight plan destination. Verify at least one of the coverage options is
enabled (checked) and contains required criteria, then re-send the data request.
No Connext Subscription The system is not be currently subscribed to the Garmin Connext Weather service, or the access
code is incorrect. Verify the access code. Contact Garmin at 1-866-739-5687 in the United States
or 913-440-1135 for assistance.
Reduce Request Area
The Garmin Connext weather data request area exceeds size limits. Reduce weather coverage
area and re-send data request.
Request Cancelled
The user has cancelled a Garmin Connext weather data request.
The weather data request timed-out. Re-send data request.
Request Failed - Try
Again
Transfer Preempted
The optional GDL 59 is busy. Retry request later.
INDEX
Table 6-8 Abnormal Garmin Connext Weather Request Status Messages
378
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GARMIN CONNEXT WEATHER IN REVERSIONARY MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the system is operating in Reversionary Mode, only those weather products which can be displayed
on the PFD Inset Map will be available for display (see Table 6-5 for a list of weather products and their
associated map availability).
If manual weather data requests were enabled prior to entering Reversionary Mode, no new Garmin
Connext weather data can be retrieved while operating in Reversionary Mode. If automatic weather data
requests were enabled prior to Reversionary Mode operation, the system will continue the automatic data
requests in Reversionary Mode (provided automatic requests have not been inhibited due to a system error).
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
379
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.3 LIGHTNING DETECTION SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely on information from a lightning detection system display as the sole basis for
hazardous weather avoidance. Range limitations and interference may cause the system to display inaccurate
or incomplete information. Refer to documentation from the lightning detection system manufacturer for
detailed information about the system.
NOTE: Lightning information from data link services such as SiriusXM Weather or Garmin Connext cannot
EIS
be displayed at the same time as on-board lightning detection system data is selected for display.
The following pages can display on-board lightning detection system data:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Stormscope Page
• Navigation Map
• AUX - Video Page
• AUX - Trip Planning Page
• Nearest Pages
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
To display lightning data on the Navigation Map, AUX - Trip Planning Page, or any of the Nearest Pages, select
the MAP Softkey, then select the STRMSCP Softkey. These pages can also display cell or strike data using the
yellow lightning strike symbols shown in Table 6-9.
AFCS
Table 6-9 Lightning Age and Symbols
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SETTING UP LIGHTNING DETECTION ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
Setting up lightning detection options on the Navigation Map:
1) On the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected (Figure 6-90), press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the group selection window. Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Weather’
(Figure 6-90), and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight and move between the product selections.
5) When an item is highlighted, turn the small FMS Knob to select the option.
INDEX
6) Press the ENT Key.
7) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-92).
380
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following options are available (Figure 6-90):
• STRMSCP LTNG – Turns the display of lightning detection data on or off.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• STRMSCP MODE – Selects the CELL or STRIKE mode of lightning activity. Cell mode identifies clusters
or cells of electrical activity. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning strikes.
• STRMSCP SMBL – Selects the range at which Stormscope data displays. The system removes Stormscope
information when a map range greater than the STRMSCP SMBL value is selected.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-90 Navigation Map Page Menu
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-91 Map Setup Menu
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
381
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
CELL AND STRIKE MODE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
On the Navigation Map, cell mode identifies cells of lightning activity (Figure 6-92). The system identifies
clusters of electrical activity that indicate cells. Strike mode indicates the approximate location of lightning
strikes.
Selecting the ‘cell’ or ‘strike’ mode on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) With ‘Map Setup’ selected, press the ENT Key.
EIS
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key. The cursor flashes on ‘STRMSCP LTNG’.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP MODE’.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to change between ‘CELL’ and ‘STRIKE’ options. When an item is selected, press the
ENT Key.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
7) Press the FMS knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Stormscope
Display
Enabled Icon
APPENDICES
Figure 6-92 Navigation Map Page with Stormscope Lightning Data
INDEX
If heading input is lost, strikes and/or cells must be cleared manually after the execution of each turn. This
is to ensure that the strike and/or cell positions are depicted accurately in relation to the nose of the aircraft.
382
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Manually clearing lightning detection data on the Navigation Map:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Clear Stormscope® Lightning’ (Figure 6-93).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-93 Navigation Map Page Options Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
ZOOM RANGE ON THE NAVIGATION MAP
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Lightning detection information can be displayed up to 800 nm zoom range (in North up mode) on the
Navigation Map Page. However, in the track up mode at the 500 nm range, a portion of the lightning data
can be behind the aircraft and therefore not visible on the Navigation Map. Since the range for Stormscope
data is 400 nm diameter total (200 nm in front and 200 nm behind), the 500 nm range in North up mode
shows all the data.
At a map range of less than 25 nm, the system removes lightning detection information from the map,
although lightning may still be present.
Selecting a lightning detection range on the Navigation Map:
AFCS
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘MAP SETUP’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the ‘Weather’ group.
4) Press the ENT Key.
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select ‘STRMSCP SMBL’.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the maximum display range.
APPENDICES
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
To change the display range on the Navigation Map Page, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or
counter-clockwise to zoom in.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
383
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SELECTING THE STORMSCOPE PAGE
Lightning data can be displayed at the ranges of 25 nm, 50 nm, 100 nm, and 200 nm.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Adjusting the Stormscope Map Range:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Stormscope Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) To change the map range, turn the Joystick clockwise to zoom out or counter-clockwise to zoom in.
AFCS
Figure 6-94 Stormscope Page
Changing between ‘cell’ and ‘strike’ mode on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MODE Softkey. The CELL and STRIKE softkeys are displayed.
3) Press the CELL Softkey to display ‘CELL’ data or press the STRIKE Softkey to display ‘STRIKE’ data. ‘CELL’ or
‘STRIKE’ is displayed in the mode box in the upper left corner of the Stormscope Page.
APPENDICES
4) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope page.
Changing the viewing mode between 360˚ and 120˚ on the Stormscope Page:
1) Select the Stormscope Page.
INDEX
2) Press the VIEW Softkey. The 360 and ARC softkeys are displayed. Press the 360 Softkey to display a 360˚
viewing area or press the ARC Softkey to display a 120˚ viewing area.
3) Press the BACK Softkey to return to the main Stormscope Page.
384
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.4 TERRAIN PROXIMITY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain Proximity information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain Proximity is
intended only to enhance situational awareness.
EIS
Perspective™ Terrain Proximity is a terrain awareness system that does not comply with TSO-C151b certification
standards. It increases situational awareness and aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not
confuse Terrain Proximity with Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated
and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified. Terrain Proximity does not provide warning annunciations or voice
alerts. It only provides color indications on map displays when terrain and obstacles are within a certain altitude
threshold from the aircraft. Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more
sophisticated algorithms to assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain Proximity requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Proximity displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
AFCS
The Perspective™ GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height
above mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity.
GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature
that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine
MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain Proximity
feature portrays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN PROXIMITY DATA
APPENDICES
The symbols and colors in Figure 6-95 and Table 6-10 are used to represent obstacles and aircraft altitude
when the Terrain Proximity Page is selected for display. Terrain Proximity uses black, yellow, and red to
represent terrain information relative to aircraft altitude. The color of each obstacle is associated with the
altitude of the aircraft.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
385
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
100 ft Threshold
1000 ft
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
EIS
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Figure 6-95 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Terrain Proximity
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or
within 100’ below current aircraft
altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between
100’ and 1000’ below current aircraft
altitude
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-10 Terrain Proximity Terrain/Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Terrain and obstacle information can be displayed on the following pages:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• Terrain Proximity Page
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page):
1) Press the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Press the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
APPENDICES
When Terrain Proximity is selected on maps other than the Terrain Proximity Page, an icon to indicate the
feature is enabled for display and a legend for Terrain Proximity colors are shown (Figure 6-98).
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map.
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles recognized by
Terrain Proximity as yellow or red are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within
the setting limit.
386
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Maps besides the Terrain Proximity Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
The maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the
Navigation Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20
nm, the highest obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-96).
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-97).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-98).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-96 Navigation Map Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 6-97 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-98 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
387
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Additional information about obstacles can be displayed by panning over the display on the map. The map
panning feature is enabled by pressing the Joystick. The map range is adjusted by turning the Joystick. If the
map range is adjusted while panning is enabled, the map is re-centered on the Map Pointer.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Additional
Information on
Obstacle Selected
with Map Pointer
Red Terrain Area
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
Yellow Terrain Area
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below Aircraft
Altitude)
EIS
Red Lighted
Obstacles
(Above or Within
100’ Below
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Lighted Obstacle
Selected with Map
Pointer
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Display
Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-99 Terrain Information on the Navigation Map Page
TERRAIN PROXIMITY PAGE
AFCS
The Map - Terrain Proximity Page is the principal map page for showing terrain and obstacle data in relation
to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information (airports, VORs, and
other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
Displaying the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
APPENDICES
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain Proximity Page.
3) To change the view,
a) Press the VIEW Softkey.
b) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
INDEX
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
b) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view.
388
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain Proximity Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Map Orientation
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Current Aircraft GPSderived GSL Altitude
EIS
Black Terrain
(More than 1000’
Below the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Rings
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-100 Terrain Proximity Page (360 View)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Yellow Terrain
(Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Red Terrain
(Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-101 Terrain Proximity Page (ARC View)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
389
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.5 TERRAIN-SVS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use Terrain-SVS information for primary terrain avoidance. Terrain-SVS is intended only
to enhance situational awareness.
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is included with the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system option. If the TAWS-B
EIS
option is also installed, it will take precedence over Terrain-SVS.
NOTE: Terrain-SVS is information is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS is a terrain awareness system integrated with the optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT)
system. Terrain-SVS provides visual and auditory alerting to indicate the presence of threatening terrain or
obstacles relevant to the projected flight path. For detailed information regarding SVT, refer to the Additional
Features section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
coverage area.
Terrain-SVS does not comply with TSO-C151b certification standards. It increases situational awareness and
aids in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). Do not confuse Terrain-SVS with the optional Terrain
Awareness and Warning System (TAWS). TAWS is more sophisticated and robust, and it is TSO-C151b certified.
Although the terrain and obstacle color map displays are the same, TAWS uses more sophisticated algorithms to
assess aircraft distance from terrain and obstacles and provides additional alerting capabilities.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain-SVS does not provide the following:
• Premature Descent Alerting (PDA)
• Excessive Descent Rate (EDR)
• Negative Climb Rate (NCR)
AFCS
• Descent to 500 Feet Callout (DFC)
Terrain-SVS requires the following components to operate properly:
• Valid 3-D GPS position
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• Valid terrain/obstacle database
APPENDICES
Terrain-SVS displays altitudes of terrain and obstructions relative to the aircraft position and altitude with
reference to a database that may contain inaccuracies. Terrain and obstructions are shown only if they are in the
database. Terrain and obstacle information should be used as an aid to situational awareness. They should never
be used to navigate or maneuver around terrain.
Note that all obstructions may not be available in the terrain and obstacle database. No terrain and obstacle
information is shown without a valid 3-D GPS position.
INDEX
The Perspective™ GPS receiver provides the horizontal position and altitude. GPS altitude is derived from
satellite position. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea level (GSL), which is the height
above mean sea level calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to determine terrain and obstacle proximity.
GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations in pressure and temperature
390
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local altimeter settings to determine
MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain and obstacle databases are referenced to GSL. Using the GPS position and altitude, the Terrain-SVS
feature portrays a 3-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and altitude of the
aircraft. GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and predict the aircraft’s flight path in relation to
the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this way, the pilot can view predicted dangerous terrain and obstacle
conditions.
DISPLAYING TERRAIN-SVS DATA
EIS
Terrain-SVS uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as the
aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-102 and Table 6-11 and Table 6-12 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-102 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TERRAIN-SVS
Obstacle Location
AFCS
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Red obstacle is above or within 100’ below
current aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow obstacle is between 100’ and 1000’
below current aircraft altitude
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
APPENDICES
Table 6-11 Terrain-SVS Obstacle Colors and Symbology
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
391
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Warning
Caution
Table 6-12 Terrain-SVS Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Terrain-SVS information can be displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Pages
• Terrain-SVS Page
• AUX - Video Page
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
When Terrain-SVS is selected on maps other than the Terrain-SVS Page, an icon to indicate the feature is
enabled for display and a legend for Terrain-SVS terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-109).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkeys for enabling/disabling the
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
AFCS
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Maps besides the Terrain-SVS Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-103).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-104).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-105).
INDEX
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
392
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 6-103 Navigation Map Page Menu
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-104 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-105 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
TERRAIN-SVS PAGE
AFCS
The Map - Terrain-SVS Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact
point data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information
(airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight
path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the
Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
APPENDICES
Displaying the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Terrain-SVS Page.
Changing the Terrain-SVS Page view:
INDEX
1) Press the VIEW Softkey.
2) Press the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
393
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Showing/hiding aviation information on the Terrain-SVS Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
EIS
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Rings
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-106 Terrain-SVS Page
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
Terrain Legend
Annunciation Window
Figure 6-107 Terrain-SVS Page (ARC View)
394
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERRAIN-SVS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within Terrain-SVS software algorithms.
Terrain-SVS alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert
is issued, the system provides visual annunciations and voice alerts. Table 6-13 shows Terrain-SVS alert types
with corresponding annunciations and voice messages.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TerrainSVS Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the Terrain-SVS Page)
Alert Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pop-up
Alert
Figure 6-108 Terrain-SVS Alert Annunciations
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Figure 6-109 Navigation Map Page
(After Terrain-SVS Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
395
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alert Type
PFD/MFD*
Alert
Annunciation
MFD
Pop-Up Alert (except
Terrain-SVS Page)
Voice Alert
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Warning (RTC)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Warning (ITI)
“Warning; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Warning (ROC)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Warning (IOI)
“Warning; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance
Caution (RTC)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Imminent Terrain Impact Caution (ITI)
“Caution; Terrain, Terrain”
Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance
Caution (ROC)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
Imminent Obstacle Impact Caution (IOI)
“Caution; Obstacle, Obstacle”
* Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-13 Terrain-SVS Alerts Summary
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of Terrain-SVS compares the projected flight path
as derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The
system issues visual annunciations and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or
obstacles.
AFCS
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
396
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
600
500
400
300
EIS
Required
Terrain Clearance
(FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
(FT)
700
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-110 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The system automatically disables FLTA alerts when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination
runway elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The pilot manually inhibit FLTA alerts. Discretion should be used when inhibiting FLTA alerts. When
Terrain-SVS alerts are inhibited, the system displays the ‘TER INH’ annunciation on the PFD and in the MFD
terrain annunciation window.
Figure 6-111 Terrain-SVS Alerting Disabled
(Terrain-SVS Inhibited) Annunciation
AFCS
Inhibiting/enabling Terrain-SVS alerting:
1) Select the Terrain-SVS Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Select the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable Terrain-SVS (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
APPENDICES
b) Select ‘Inhibit Terrain’ or ‘Enable Terrain’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While Terrain-SVS alerting is manually inhibited (or the Terrain-SVS system is not available or has failed),
the system may display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
INDEX
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix.
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
397
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, the Terrain-SVS system conducts a test of its alerting capabilities. The system issues single
chime or a voice alert when the test has completed, depending on the test outcome.
System Status
PFD/MFD Alert
Annunciation
Audio/Voice Alert
None
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
“Terrain System Failure”
Terrain System Test Fail
EIS
Single Chime
Table 6-14 Terrain-SVS System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Terrain-SVS continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status,
and GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “Terrain System Failure” is
generated along with the ‘TER FAIL’ alert annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain-SVS requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should
the navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TER N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the Terrain-SVS Page. The voice alert “Terrain
System Not Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity returns and the and the aircraft is within
the database coverage area, the voice alert “Terrain System Available” is generated.
Alert Cause
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable
or invalid. Terrain-SVS
operating with PFD Terrain or
Obstacle databases
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid, invalid
software configuration, audio
fault
No GPS position
PFD/
MFD Alert
Annunciation
None
Terrain-SVS Page
Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
TERRAIN FAIL
“Terrain System Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when GPS
position is available
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when
sufficient GPS signal is received
“Terrain System Not Available”
“Terrain System Available” when aircraft
re-enters database coverage area.
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None
Out of database coverage
area
None
Table 6-15 Terrain-SVS Abnormal Annunciations
398
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.6 TAWS-B
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not use TAWS information for primary terrain avoidance. TAWS is intended only to enhance
situational awareness.
NOTE: The data contained in the TAWS databases comes from government agencies. Garmin accurately
processes and cross-validates the data but cannot guarantee the accuracy and completeness of the data.
EIS
NOTE: Terrain data is not displayed if the aircraft is outside of the installed terrain database coverage area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
TAWS-B (Terrain Awareness and Warning System - Class B) is an optional feature to increase situational
awareness and aid in reducing controlled flight into terrain (CFIT). TAWS-B provides visual annunciations and
voice alerts when terrain and obstacles are within the given altitude threshold from the aircraft. The displayed
alerts and warnings are advisory in nature only.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAWS-B satisfies TSO-C151b Class B requirements for certification. TAWS-B requires the following to operate
properly:
• A valid terrain/obstacle/airport terrain database
• A valid 3-D GPS position solution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TAWS-B uses terrain and obstacle information supplied by government sources. Terrain information is based
on terrain elevation information in a database that may contain inaccuracies. Individual obstructions may be
shown if available in the database. The data undergoes verification by Garmin to confirm accuracy of the content,
per TSO-C151b. However, the displayed information should never be understood as being all-inclusive and data
may be inaccurate.
AFCS
TAWS-B uses information provided from the GPS receiver to provide a horizontal position and altitude. GPS
altitude is derived from satellite measurements. GPS altitude is then converted to the height above geodetic sea
level (GSL), which is the height above mean sea level (MSL) calculated geometrically. GSL altitude is used to
determine TAWS-B alerts. GSL altitude accuracy is affected by satellite geometry, but is not subject to variations
in pressure and temperature that normally affect pressure altitude sensors. GSL altitude does not require local
altimeter settings to determine MSL altitude. It is a widely-used MSL altitude source. Therefore, GSL altitude
provides a highly accurate and reliable MSL altitude source to calculate terrain and obstacle alerts.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
The terrain and obstacle databases used by TAWS-B are referenced to MSL. Using the GPS position and GSL
altitude, TAWS-B displays a 2-D picture of the surrounding terrain and obstacles relative to the position and
altitude of the aircraft. Furthermore, the GPS position and GSL altitude are used to calculate and “predict” the
aircraft’s flight path in relation to the surrounding terrain and obstacles. In this manner, TAWS-B can provide
advanced alerts of predicted dangerous terrain conditions.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Baro-corrected altitude (or indicated altitude) is derived by adjusting the altimeter setting for local atmospheric
conditions. The most accurate baro-corrected altitude can be achieved by frequently updating the altimeter
setting to the nearest reporting station along the flight path. However, because actual atmospheric conditions
seldom match the standard conditions defined by the International Standard Atmosphere (ISA) model (where
pressure, temperature, and lapse rates have fixed values), it is common for the baro-corrected altitude (as read
from the altimeter) to differ from the GSL altitude. This variation results in the aircraft’s GSL altitude differing
from the baro-corrected altitude.
399
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TAWS-B DATA
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
TAWS-B uses yellow (caution) and red (warning) to depict terrain and obstacles (with heights greater than
200 feet above ground level, AGL) alerts relative to aircraft altitude. Colors are adjusted automatically as
the aircraft altitude changes. The colors and symbols in Figure 6-112 and Tables 6-16 and 6-17 are used to
represent terrain, obstacles, and potential impact points.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-112 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for TAWS-B
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
WARNING: Red obstacle is above or within
100’ below current aircraft altitude
CAUTION: Yellow obstacle is between 100’
and 1000’ below current aircraft altitude
AFCS
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft below
aircraft altitude
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-16 TAWS-B Obstacle Colors and Symbology
Potential Impact
Point Symbol
Alert Type
Example Annunciation
APPENDICES
Warning
Caution
INDEX
Table 6-17 TAWS-B Potential Impact Point Symbols with Alert Types
400
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B information can be displayed on the following maps:
• Trip Planning Page
• Navigation Map Page
• Flight Plan Page
• TAWS-B Page
• AUX - Video Page
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• PFD Inset Map
Displaying terrain and obstacle information (maps other than the TAWS-B Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey (for the PFD Inset Map, press the INSET Softkey).
2) Select the TERRAIN Softkey to display terrain and obstacle data.
EIS
When TAWS-B is selected on maps other than the TAWS-B Page, an icon to indicate the feature is enabled for
display and a legend for TAWS-B terrain colors are shown (Figure 6-119).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu provides a means in addition to the softkey for enabling/disabling
display of terrain and obstacles. The setup menu also controls the map range settings above which terrain and
obstacle data are decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than the map range setting is selected, the
data is removed from the map. For terrain data, the enable/disable function applies only to the MFD, while the
range setting also affects the PFD Inset Map.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain data can be selected for display independently of obstacle data; however, obstacles for which warnings
and cautions are issued are shown when terrain is selected for display and the map range is within the setting
limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Maps besides the TAWS-B Page use settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page. The
maximum display ranges for obstacles on each map are dependent on the range setting made for the Navigation
Map. If the maximum range for obstacle display on the Navigation Map is adjusted to below 20 nm, the highest
obstacle display range settings on the other applicable maps are also adjusted proportionally.
Customizing terrain and obstacle display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-113).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Map’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-114).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-115).
• TERRAIN DATA – Turns the display of terrain data on or off and sets maximum range at which terrain is shown
• OBSTACLE DATA – Turns the display of obstacle data on or off and sets maximum range at which obstacles are shown
APPENDICES
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options for each product (ON/OFF, range settings).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
401
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 6-113 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-115 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Map Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-114 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
402
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Map - TAWS-B Page is the principal map page for viewing terrain, obstacle, and potential impact point
data in relation to the aircraft’s current altitude, without clutter from the basemap. Aviation information
(airports, VORs, and other NAVAIDs) can be displayed for reference. If an obstacle and the projected flight
path of the aircraft intersect, the display automatically zooms in to the closest potential point of impact on the
TAWS-B Page.
Aircraft orientation on this map is always heading up unless there is no valid heading. Two views are available
relative to the position of the aircraft: the 360° default display and the radar-like ARC (120°) display. Map range
is adjustable with the Joystick from 1 to 200 nm, as indicated by the map range rings (or arcs).
EIS
Displaying the TAWS-B Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the TAWS-B Page.
Changing the TAWS-B Page view:
1) Select the VIEW Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Select the 360 or ARC Softkey to select the desired view.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘View Arc’ or ‘View 360º’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key to change the view
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Showing/hiding aviation information on the TAWS-B Page:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Select ‘Show Aviation Data’ or ‘Hide Aviation Data’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
403
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’ and
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map Range Rings
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain Legend
Figure 6-116 TAWS-B Page (360 View)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red Terrain
(Warning - Terrain
Above or Within
100’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
AFCS
Map Range Arc
Black Terrain
(Terrain More than
1000’ Below the
Aircraft Altitude)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yellow Terrain
(Caution - Terrain
Between 100’
and 1000’ Below
the Aircraft
Altitude)
APPENDICES
Terrain Legend
INDEX
Figure 6-117 TAWS-B Page (ARC View)
404
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAWS-B ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Alerts are issued when flight conditions meet parameters that are set within TAWS-B software algorithms.
TAWS-B alerts typically employ a CAUTION or a WARNING alert severity level, or both. When an alert is
issued, the system displays visual annunciations with voice alerts. Table 6-18 shows TAWS-B alert types with
corresponding annunciations and voice alerts.
When an alert is issued, annunciations appear on the PFD and MFD. The TAWS-B Alert Annunciation is
shown to the upper left of the Altimeter on the PFD and below the Terrain Legend on the MFD. If the TAWS-B
Page is not displayed at the time, a pop-up alert appears on the MFD. To acknowledge the pop-up alert:
EIS
• Press the CLR Key (returns to the currently viewed page), or
• Press the ENT Key (accesses the TAWS-B Page)
Alert Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 6-118 TAWS-B Alert Annunciations
Pop-up
Alert
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Terrain Display Enabled Icon
Terrain Legend
Alert Annunciation
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Figure 6-119 Navigation Map Page
(After TAWS-B Pop-up Alert Acknowledgment)
405
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
PFD/MFD**
Alert
Annunciation
Alert Type
MFD Pop-Up Alert
(except TAWS-B Page)
Voice Alert
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Excessive Descent Rate
Warning (EDR)
“Pull Up”
or
Imminent Terrain Impact
Warning (ITI)
or
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Warning (IOI)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Imminent Terrain Impact
Caution (ITI)
AFCS
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”*
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”
or
“Caution, Obstacle; Caution, Obstacle”
or
“Obstacle Ahead; Obstacle Ahead”*
*
Imminent Obstacle Impact
Caution (IOI)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
or
“Caution, Terrain; Caution, Terrain”*
or
“Terrain Ahead; Terrain Ahead”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Caution (ROC)
APPENDICES
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Caution (RTC)
Negative Climb Rate
Caution (NCR)
or
“Obstacle, Obstacle; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up; Obstacle Ahead, Pull Up”
*
Reduced Required Obstacle
Clearance Warning (ROC)
Premature Descent Alert
Caution (PDA)
Altitude Callout (VCO)
“500”
Excessive Descent Rate
Caution (EDR)
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”*
or
“Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”
“Terrain, Terrain; Pull Up, Pull Up”
or
* “Terrain Ahead, Pull Up; Terrain Ahead, Pull Up”*
*
Reduced Required Terrain
Clearance Warning (RTC)
*
“Too Low, Terrain”
None
None
“Five-Hundred”
“Sink Rate”
*
or
“Don’t Sink”*
or
“Too Low, Terrain”
INDEX
* Alerts with multiple messages are configurable at installation and are installation-dependent. Alerts for the default
configuration when more than one option is available are indicated with asterisks.
** Annunciation is displayed on the MFD when terrain display is enabled.
Table 6-18 TAWS-B Alerts Summary
406
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
EXCESSIVE DESCENT RATE ALERT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The purpose of the Excessive Descent Rate (EDR) alert is to provide notification when the aircraft is
determined to be closing (descending) upon terrain a rate that is calculated to be excessive relative to height
above terrain. Figure 6-120 shows the parameters for the alert as defined by TSO-C151b.
6000
5500
5000
4000
NK
: “SI
ion
Caut
3500
”
RATE
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
4500
3000
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2500
2000
Warning: “PULL UP”
1500
1000
12000
11000
10000
9000
8000
7000
6000
5000
4000
3000
2000
1000
Descent Rate (FPM)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
0
0
500
Figure 6-120 Excessive Descent Rate Alert Criteria
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FORWARD LOOKING TERRAIN AVOIDANCE
The Forward Looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA) feature of TAWS-B compares the projected flight path as
derived from GPS data with terrain features and obstacles from the terrain and obstacle databases. The system
issues visual and voice alerts when the projected flight path conflicts with terrain or obstacles.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The projected flight path is a calculated area ahead of, to the sides, and below the aircraft. The size of
the projected flight path varies based on factors including ground speed (the path ahead is larger when the
ground speed is higher), whether the aircraft is level, turning, or descending, and the proximity to the nearest
runway along the current track. As the aircraft approaches the runway, the projected flight path becomes
narrower until the system automatically disables FLTA alerts or the pilot manually inhibits them.
There are two types of FLTA alerts, Reduced Required Terrain/Obstacle Clearance (RTC or ROC respectively)
and Imminent Terrain/Obstacle Impact (ITI or IOI respectively).
APPENDICES
Reduced Required Terrain Clearance (RTC) and Reduced Required Obstacle Clearance (ROC)
alerts are issued when the aircraft flight path is above terrain, yet is projected to come within the minimum
clearance values in Figure 6-121. When an RTC alert is issued, a potential impact point is displayed on the
TAWS-B Page.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Imminent Terrain Impact (ITI) and Imminent Obstacle Impact (IOI) alerts are issued when the
aircraft is below the elevation of a terrain or obstacle in the aircraft’s projected path. ITI and IOI alerts are
accompanied by a potential impact point displayed on the TAWS-B Page. The alert is annunciated when the
projected vertical flight path is calculated to come within minimum clearance altitudes in Figure 6-121.
407
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Required Terrain Clearance
RTC Level (FT)
RTC Descending (FT)
800
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Required
Terrain
Clearance (FT) (FT)
Required
Terrain
Clearance
700
600
500
400
300
200
100
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
0
0
5
10
15
20
25
30
Distance From Runway (NM)
Distance From Runway (NM)
Figure 6-121 FLTA Alert Minimum Terrain and Obstacle Clearance Values
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FLTA alerts are automatically inhibited when the aircraft is less than 200 feet above the destination runway
elevation while within 0.5 nm of the approach runway or the aircraft is between runway ends.
PREMATURE DESCENT ALERTING
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
A Premature Descent Alert (PDA) is issued when the system detects that the aircraft is significantly
below the normal approach path to a runway (Figure 6-122).
PDA alerting begins when the aircraft is within 15 nm of the destination airport and ends when the aircraft
is either 0.5 nm from the runway threshold or is at an altitude of 125 feet AGL while within 1.0 nm of the
threshold.
AFCS
800
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Height Above Destination (Feet)
700
600
500
400
300
PDA ALERTING AREA
200
100
15
14
13
12
11
10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
Distance to Destination (NM)
INDEX
Figure 6-122 PDA Alerting Threshold
408
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The pilot can manually inhibit PDA and FLTA visual annunciations and voice alerts. Discretion should
be used when inhibiting TAWS-B alerts, and the system should be enabled when appropriate. When the
TAWS-B system is manually inhibited, the alert annunciation ‘TAWS INH’ is shown on the PFD and MFD
(Figure 6-123).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-123 TAWS-B Alerting Disabled
(TAWS-B Inhibited) Annunciation
EIS
Inhibiting/enabling TAWS-B alerting:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the INHIBIT Softkey to inhibit or enable TAWS-B (choice dependent on current state).
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Select ‘Inhibit TAWS’ or ‘Enable TAWS’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
While TAWS-B alerting is manually inhibited (or the TAWS-B system is not available or has failed), the
system may display a ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation if the following conditions are met:
• The aircraft is on a GBAS SBAS approach.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• The Final Approach Fix is the active waypoint.
• The aircraft is at least 164 feet below the prescribed altitude at the Final Approach Fix.
See the Flight Instruments Section for more details about the ‘LOW ALT’ annunciation.
FIVE-HUNDRED VOICE ALERT
AFCS
The purpose of the voice alert message “Five-hundred” is to provide an advisory alert of when the aircraft
descends to within 500 feet above the terrain or runway threshold. When the aircraft is within 5 nm of an
airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the nearest runway threshold elevation. When the aircraft
is more than 5 nm of the nearest airport, the “Five Hundred” voice alert is based on the height above terrain
as determined using the GSL altitude and terrain database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
NEGATIVE CLIMB RATE AFTER TAKEOFF ALERT (NCR)
APPENDICES
The Negative Climb Rate (NCR) After Takeoff alert (also referred to as “Altitude Loss After Takeoff”)
provides alerts when the system determines the aircraft is losing altitude (closing upon terrain) after takeoff.
The voice alert “Don’t Sink” is given for NCR alerts, accompanied by an annunciation and a pop-up terrain
alert on the display. NCR alerting is only active when departing from an airport and when the following
conditions are met:
• Height above the terrain is less than 700 feet
INDEX
• Distance from the departure airport is 5 nm or less
• Heading change from the departure heading is less than 110 degrees
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
409
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Figures 6-124 and 6-125 shows the NCR alerting parameters as defined by TSO-C151b based on Altitude
Loss and Sink Rate respectively.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1000
900
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
0
0
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Loss (Feet)
Figure 6-124 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Altitude Loss
1000
900
AFCS
Height Above Terrain (Feet)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
800
700
600
“DON’T SINK”
or
“TOO LOW, TERRAIN”
500
400
300
200
100
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
0
0
500
1000
1500
2000
2500
3000
3500
4000
4500
5000
5500
6000
6500
7000
Sink Rate (FPM)
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 6-125 Negative Climb Rate (NCR) Sink Rate
410
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
System Condition
PFD/MFD Alert TAWS-B Page
Annunciation Annunciation
System Test in Progress
System Test Pass
None
Voice Alert
TAWS TEST
None
None
Single Chime
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
EIS
TAWS System Test Fail
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During power-up, TAWS-B conducts a system test of its alerting capabilities. The system test can also be
manually initiated. A single chime is issued at test completion. TAWS-B system testing is disabled when
ground speed exceeds 30 knots.
Table 6-19 TAWS-B System Test Status Annunciations
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Manually testing the TAWS-B System:
1) Select the TAWS-B Page.
2) Press the MENU Key (Figure 6-126).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Select ‘Test TAWS System’ and press the ENT Key to confirm the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 6-126 TAWS-B Page Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAWS-B continually monitors several system-critical items such as database validity, hardware status, and
GPS status. If the terrain/obstacle database is not available, the voice alert “TAWS System Failure” is generated
along with the ‘TAWS FAIL’ alert annunciation.
TAWS-B requires a 3-D GPS navigation solution along with specific vertical accuracy minimums. Should the
navigation solution become degraded or if the aircraft is out of the database coverage area, the annunciation
‘TAWS N/A’ is generated in the annunciation window and on the TAWS-B Page. The voice alert “TAWS Not
Available” is generated. When the GPS signal integrity is restored and the aircraft is within the database
coverage area, the voice alert “TAWS Available” is generated.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
411
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Alert Cause
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
MFD Terrain or Obstacle
database unavailable or
invalid. TAWS operating
with PFD Terrain or Obstacle
databases
Terrain or Obstacle database
unavailable or invalid on all
displays, invalid software
configuration, TAWS audio
fault
No GPS position
PFD/MFD
Annunciation
None
TAWS-B Page Annunciation
Voice Alert
TERRAIN DATABASE FAILURE
None
TAWS FAIL
“TAWS System Failure”
NO GPS POSITION
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when GPS
position returns.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when sufficient
GPS signal is received.
“TAWS Not Available”
“TAWS Available” when aircraft
enters database coverage area.
Excessively degraded GPS
signal
None
Out of database coverage
area
None
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-20 TAWS-B Abnormal Conditions
412
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.7 PROFILE VIEW TERRAIN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective™ offers a Profile View of terrain and obstacles relative to the aircraft’s current flight path and
altitude on the Navigation Map Page of the MFD. Profile View does not provide terrain or obstacle caution or
warning annunciations or voice alerts, nor does it display potential impact points inside the Profile View. The
colors and symbols in Figure 6-127 and Table 6-21 are used to represent terrain and obstacles.
Terrain Above Aircraft Altitude
100 ft Threshold
EIS
Red terrain is above
or within 100 ft below
the aircraft altitude
Aircraft Altitude
1000 ft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Yellow terrain is between 100 ft and 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
Black terrain is more than 1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-127 Terrain Altitude/Color Correlation for Profile View
Unlighted Obstacle
Lighted Obstacle
< 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL < 1000’ AGL > 1000’ AGL
Obstacle Location
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Red obstacle is above or within 100 ft
below the aircraft altitude
Yellow obstacle is between 100 ft and
1000 ft below the aircraft altitude
AFCS
Gray obstacle is more than 1000 ft
below aircraft altitude
Table 6-21 Profile View Obstacle Colors and Symbology
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Enabling/Disabling Profile View:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
3) Select the PROFILE Softkey to enable or disable Profile View.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
2) Select ‘Show Profile View’ or ‘Hide Profile View’ (choice dependent on current state) and press the ENT Key.
413
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Terrain on the Profile View
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Select the MAP Softkey.
3) Select the TERRAIN Softkey.
PROFILE VIEW DISPLAY
EIS
When the Profile View is enabled, it is displayed in a window below the Navigation Map. Altitude is shown
along a vertical scale, with an aircraft icon positioned at the current altitude. Distance is represented horizontally
along the bottom of the Profile View, and increases from left (present position) to right.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the Navigation Map range is adjusted with the Joystick, the horizontal distance of the Profile View
is adjusted proportionately to be 1/2 of the Navigation Map range distance down to 1 nm, at which point
Profile View is no longer available (‘PROFILE NOT AVAILABLE’ is displayed). When Navigation Map range is
adjusted to remove altitude-correlated colored terrain data (as shown in the Terrain Legend) or obstacles from
the Navigation Map, these items are also removed from the Profile View; only an outline of the terrain will
be displayed in black in the Profile View window. Refer to the applicable Terrain Proximity, Terrain-SVS, or
TAWS-B discussions for more information about displaying terrain or obstacles on the Navigation Map Page.
Profile View
Path
Navigation Map Range
AFCS
Terrain Legend
Terrain Enabled Icons
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Altitude Scale
Profile View Total
Distance
Distance Scale
APPENDICES
Figure 6-128 Navigation Map Page with Profile View and Terrain Enabled
INDEX
Obstacles with heights greater than 200 feet AGL appear relative to aircraft altitude along the altitude scale.
The top of the obstacle symbol on the scale represents the obstacle’s height AGL. If the obstacle’s height AGL
is higher than can be represented by the obstacle symbol itself (e.g. for unusually tall obstacles), a vertical line
appears below the obstacle symbol in order to depict the top of the obstacle symbol at its height AGL, as shown
in Figure 6-129.
414
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Figure 6-129 Profile View with Tall Obstacles
EIS
Approach
0.6 nm
Departure
0.6 nm
Terminal
2.0 nm
Enroute
4.0 nm
Oceanic
4.0 nm
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Total Profile View Width
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Flight Phase
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Profile View is based on the current aircraft track (or heading if track is unavailable) and shows the highest
known terrain or obstacles within a predetermined width from the present aircraft position to the end of the
profile range. The width of the Profile View (Table 6-22) is determined by the phase of flight, as annunciated
on the HSI. Refer to the Flight Instruments section for more information about flight phases.
Table 6-22 Profile View Width Scale
AFCS
PROFILE PATH
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Profile Path displays the horizontal and lateral boundaries of the Profile View. The path is shown
as a white rectangle on the Navigation Map Page (Figure 6-128) and is only available when Profile View is
enabled. White range markers appearing on both edges of the Profile Path rectangle match the range markers
along the distance scale inside the Profile View display window whenever the profile range is at least 4 nm (or
7.5 km if configured for metric units).
The Profile Path rectangle may be configured on or off, and the Navigation Map range at which the Profile
Path is removed from map display can be changed.
APPENDICES
Customizing the Profile Path display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
INDEX
3) With ‘Map Setup’ highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-130).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the ‘Profile’ Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-131).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through product selections (Figure 6-132).
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
415
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
• PROFILE PATH – Turns the display of the Profile Path on or off and sets maximum map range at which the Profile
Path is shown
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page with the changed settings.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-130 Navigation Map Page Menu
Figure 6-132 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu,
Profile Group
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 6-131 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
416
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.8 GARMIN GTS 800 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
NOTE: Pilots should be aware of TAS system limitations. TAS systems require transponders of other aircraft
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
to respond to system interrogations. If the transponders do not respond to interrogations due to phenomena
such as antenna shading or marginal transponder performance, traffic may be displayed intermittently, or
not at all. Aircraft without altitude reporting capability are shown without altitude separation data or climb
descent indication. Pilots should remain vigilant for traffic at all times.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Garmin GTS 800 is a Traffic Advisory System (TAS). The system enhances flight crew situational
awareness by displaying traffic information for detected transponder-equipped aircraft. The system also provides
visual annunciations and voice traffic alerts to assist the pilot in visually acquiring traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The GTS 800 is capable of tracking a total of 45 intruding aircraft equipped with Mode A, C, or S transponders.
The Perspective™ can display a maximum of 30 aircraft with the highest threat potential simultaneously.
THEORY OF OPERATION
When the system is in Operating Mode, the TAS unit interrogates the transponders of intruding aircraft while
monitoring transponder replies. The system uses this information to derive the distance, relative bearing, and
if reported, the altitude and vertical trend for each aircraft within its surveillance range.
AFCS
The system then calculates a closure rate to each intruder based on the projected Closest Point of Approach
(CPA). If the closure rate meets the threat criteria for a Traffic Advisory (TA), visual and voice alerting is
provided.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TAS SURVEILLANCE VOLUME AND SYMBOLOGY
APPENDICES
The GTS 800 TAS monitors the airspace within ±10,000 feet of own altitude, and up to 22w nm in the
forward direction. TAS range is somewhat reduced to the sides and aft of own aircraft due to the directional
interrogation signal patterns. The system displays TAS-detected traffic using the symbology shown in Table
6-23.
In addition, if a 1090 MHz extended squitter transponder is installed, and the GTS 800 detects airborne
traffic providing 1090 MHz Automatic Dependent Surveillance - Broadcast (ADS-B) information, the system
will display the TAS traffic using the ADS-B symbology shown in Table 6-24.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
417
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
NOTE: Do not confuse this functionality with full ADS-B capability, which can provide traffic information
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
from ADS-B Ground-Based Transceivers (GBTs) and ADS-B traffic outside of the TAS surveillance volume.
This system is limited to displaying ADS-B information from suitably equipped airborne aircraft within the
TAS surveillance volume.
TAS Symbol
Description
EIS
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 6-23 TAS Symbol Description
Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
Proximity Advisory with ADS-B directional information. Points in
the direction of the aircraft track.
Non-threat traffic with ADS-B directional information. Points in the
direction of the intruder aircraft track.
AFCS
Traffic with ADS-B directional information, but positional accuracy
is degraded. Points in the direction of the aircraft track.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-24 TAS Traffic with ADS-B Symbology
APPENDICES
A Traffic Advisory (TA), displayed as a yellow circle or triangle, alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous
intruding aircraft, if the closing rate, distance, and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory
that is beyond the selected display range (off scale) is indicated by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen
at the relative bearing of the intruder.
A Proximity Advisory (PA), displayed as a solid white diamond or triangle, indicates the intruding aircraft
is within ±1200 feet and is within a 6 nm range, but is still not considered a TA threat.
INDEX
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond or triangle, is displayed for all other traffic
beyond 6 nm that is neither a TA or PA.
418
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Relative altitude, when available, is displayed above or below the corresponding intruder symbol in
hundreds of feet. When this altitude is above own aircraft, it is preceded by a ‘+’ symbol; a minus sign ‘-’
indicates traffic is below own aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
A vertical trend arrow to the right of the intruder symbol indicates traffic is climbing or descending at least
500 feet per minute with an upward or downward-pointing arrow respectively.
Relative Altitude
Vertical trend arrow
EIS
Figure 6-133 Intruder Altitude and Vertical Trend Arrow
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the intruding aircraft is providing ADS-B track information, this is displayed as a vector line extending
beyond the traffic symbol in the direction of the track.
Vector Line indicates
intruder aircraft track
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-134 Intruder Traffic with ADS-B Directional
Information and Track
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The traffic system automatically suppresses the display of on-ground aircraft equipped with Mode S
transponders.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
419
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TA ALERTING CONDITIONS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The traffic system automatically adjusts its TA sensitivity level to reduce the likelihood of nuisance TA
alerting during flight phases likely to be near airports. Level A (less) TA sensitivity is used when the aircraft’s
groundspeed is below 120 knots or when the flaps are down. In all other conditions while the traffic system
is providing surveillance, Level B (greater) TA sensitivity is used to assess TA threats.
A
Yes
A
No
B
Yes
B
No
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Sensitivity Intruder Altitude
Level
Available
TA Alerting Conditions
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 20 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 600 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.2 nm and vertical separation is within
600 feet.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 15 seconds of separation.
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of vertical and
horizontal separation.
Or:
Intruder closing rate provides less than 30 seconds of horizontal
separation and vertical separation is within 800 feet.
Or:
Intruder range is within 0.55 nm and vertical separation is within
800 feet.
Intruder range is less than 20 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Table 6-25 TA Sensitivity Level and TA Alerting Criteria
420
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Voice traffic alerts do not occur when the flaps are down. Only visual traffic annunciations are issued
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
under this condition.
When the traffic system detects a new TA, the following occur:
EIS
• A single “Traffic!” voice alert is generated, followed by additional voice information about the bearing, relative
altitude, and approximate distance from the intruder that triggered the TA (Table 6-26). The announcement
“Traffic! 12 o’clock, high, four miles,” would indicate the traffic is in front of own aircraft, above own
altitude, and approximately four nautical miles away.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for five seconds and
remains displayed until no TAs are detected in the area (Figure 6-135).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the bearing of TA traffic cannot be determined (Figures 6-137 and 6-140), a yellow text banner will be
displayed in the center of the Traffic Map Page and in the lower-left of the PFD inset map instead of a TA
symbol. The text will indicate “TA” followed by the distance, relative altitude, and vertical trend arrow for the
TA traffic, if known.
A TA will be displayed for at least eight seconds, even if the condition(s) that initially triggered the TA are no
longer present.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-135 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
Relative Altitude
Distance (nm)
“One o’clock” through
“Twelve o’clock”
or “No Bearing”
“High”, “Low”, “Same Altitude” (if
within 200 feet of own altitude), or
“Altitude not available”
“Less than one mile”,
“One Mile” through “Ten Miles”, or
“More than ten miles”
APPENDICES
Bearing
INDEX
Table 6-26 TA Descriptive Voice Announcements
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
421
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM TEST
NOTE: Traffic surveillance is not provided during the system test. Use caution when performing a system
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
test during flight.
EIS
The traffic system provides a system test mode to verify the TAS system is operating normally. The test takes
approximately ten seconds to complete. When the system test is initiated, a test pattern of traffic symbols is
displayed on the Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-136). If the system test passes, the system announces “TAS System
Test Passed”, otherwise the system announces “TAS System Test Failed.” When the system test is complete,
the unit enters Standby Mode.
Testing the Traffic System:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Turn the Joystick to set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full test pattern display as shown in the figure below.
4) Select the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Test Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Test Mode
Annunciation
AFCS
Operating
Mode
Non-Threat
Traffic at
11 o’clock,
Distance 3.6
nm, 1000’
Above, Level
Proximity
Traffic at
1 o’clock,
Distance
3.6 nm,
1000’ Below,
Descending
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA at 9 o’clock,
Distance 2.0
nm, 200’ Below,
Climbing
Figure 6-136 System Test in Progress with Test Pattern
422
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
NOTE: The traffic unit automatically transitions from STANDBY to OPERATE mode eight seconds after
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
takeoff. The unit also automatically transitions from OPERATE to STANDBY mode 24 seconds after
landing.
After power-up, the traffic system is in Standby Mode. The traffic unit must be in Operating Mode for traffic
to be displayed and for TAs to be issued.
EIS
Pressing the OPERATE Softkey allows the system to switch from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as
necessary. Pressing the STANDBY Softkey forces the unit into Standby Mode.
Switching from operating mode to standby mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
On the Traffic Page, press the STANDBY Softkey
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Standby Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
On the Traffic Page, press the OPERATE Softkey
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select ‘Operate Mode’.
2) Press the ENT Key. The traffic system switches from Standby Mode to Operating Mode as necessary.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
423
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Traffic Map Page (Figure 6-137) shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current
position and altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no
valid heading. Map range is adjustable with the Joystick up to 12 mn, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner of the page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Advisory
with ADS-B
Directional
Information,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Traffic Display
Range
Non-Threat
Traffic with
ADS-B
Directional
Information,
6000’ Above,
Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 0.9
nm, 500’ Above,
Climbing
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Proximity Traffic
with ADS-B
Directional
Information,
900’ Above,
Descending,
Flight ID
Displayed
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-137 Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
4) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
Mode field.
INDEX
APPENDICES
5) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
424
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Altitude Display
The pilot can select the volume of airspace in which non-threat and proximity traffic is displayed. If the
system issues a TA occurring outside of this airspace, it will always be shown.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the altitude range:
1) On the Traffic Map Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
EIS
• ABOVE: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 9000 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during climb phase of flight.
• NORMAL: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 2700 feet below
the aircraft. Typically used during enroute phase of flight.
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• BELOW: Displays non-threat and proximity traffic from 2700 feet above the aircraft to 9000 feet below the
aircraft. Typically used during descent phase of flight.
UNREST (unrestricted): All traffic is displayed from 9900 feet above and 9900 feet below the aircraft.
3) To return to the Traffic Map Page, press the BACK Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following (see Softkey description in previous step 2):
ABOVE
•
NORMAL
•
BELOW
•
UNRESTRICTED
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
•
3) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Flight ID Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Flight IDs of other aircraft (when available) can be enabled for display on the Traffic Map Page
(Figure 6-138). When a flight ID is received, it will appear above or below the corresponding traffic symbol
on the Traffic Map Page when this option is enabled.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
425
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Flight ID
Figure 6-138 Traffic Map Page with Flight IDs Enabled
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Enabling/Disabling Flight ID Display:
On the Traffic Map Page, select the FLT ID Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
AFCS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘Show Flight IDs’ or ‘Hide Flight IDs’ (choice dependent on current state)
(Figure 6-139).
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the ENT Key.
INDEX
Figure 6-139 Traffic Map Page Menu
426
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Traffic Map Page Display Range
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick, as indicated by the map range rings.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Map Page:
1) Turn the Joystick
2) The following range options are available:
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
EIS
•
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ADDITIONAL TRAFFIC DISPLAYS
The Traffic Map Page is the principal map page for viewing traffic information. Traffic information is also
available on the following other MFD maps and pages as an additional reference to the Traffic Map Page:
• Navigation Map Page
• Nearest Pages
• Active Flight Plan Page
• AUX - Video Page
• System Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Trip Planning Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic information (MFD maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
AFCS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate traffic
is enabled for display (Table 6-27).
Displaying traffic on the Navigation Map:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Ensure the TAS system is operating. With the Navigation Map displayed, select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map as shown in Figure 6-140.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
427
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
EIS
Non-Threat
Traffic
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Traffic
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-140 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-141).
AFCS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-142).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-143).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Advisories and Proximity Advisories
APPENDICES
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Advisories only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
INDEX
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
428
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 6-141 Navigation Map Page Menu
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 6-142 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-143 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
A traffic inset map may be displayed on the PFD. Traffic information can also be overlaid with navigation,
topographic and optional weather data on the PFD inset navigation map
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Select the INSET Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Select the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Select the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
429
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM STATUS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Mode
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
OPERATING
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
* See Table 6-28 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-27 TAS Modes
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the traffic unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map
Page. During a failure condition, the Operating Mode cannot be selected.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
AFCS
Table 6-28 TAS Failure Annunciations
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
APPENDICES
TA OFF SCALE
TA X.X ± XX ↕
INDEX
TRFC FAIL
NO TRFC DATA
Description
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*.
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range.
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**.
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude separation
in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow (climbing/
descending).
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-29 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
430
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
6.9 AVIDYNE TAS610 TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for a detailed discussion of the
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Avidyne TAS610.
The TAS610 Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft. TAS
uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data link.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is displayed according to TCAS symbology using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Table 6-30 TAS Symbol Description
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
APPENDICES
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
431
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic information is displayed on the following maps:
• PFD Inset Map
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
• Trip Planning Page
EIS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
Traffic Display
Range
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
AFCS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-144 Traffic Map Page
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
INDEX
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
432
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Non-Threat
Traffic
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic
Advisory
Proximity
Traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TA Off Scale
Banner
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-145 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
AFCS
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
433
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 24 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) The following range options are available:
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
•
12 and 24 nm
INDEX
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
434
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-146).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-147).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-148).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- TA Only - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-146 Navigation Map Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Figure 6-148 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
INDEX
Figure 6-147 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
435
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on alerts generated
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic” voice alert is generated followed by the clock position, relative altitude and range of the TA.
EIS
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-149 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
AFCS
TAS VOICE ALERTS
To listen to an update of Traffic Advisories select the MUTE Softkey twice.
Muting the TAS voice alert in progress:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Select the Traffic Map Page.
INDEX
APPENDICES
2) Select the MUTE Softkey while the voice alert is playing. Subsequent voice alerts will be heard.
436
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SYSTEM STATUS
NOTE: Refer to the Avidyne TAS600 Series Pilot’s Operating Handbook for information on the operating
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
mode.
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
Traffic Mode
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
EIS
OPERATING
TAS Operating
FAIL
TAS Failed*
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
* See Table 6-32 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-31 TAS Modes
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
Description
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FAILED
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Table 6-32 TAS Failure Annunciations
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
TRFC FAIL
INDEX
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display
range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within
the selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic
Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend
arrow (climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
APPENDICES
TA X.X ± XX ↕
Description
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TA OFF SCALE
AFCS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
Table 6-33 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
437
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
6.10 L-3 SKYWATCH TRAFFIC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information for collision avoidance maneuvering.
The traffic display does not provide collision avoidance resolution advisories and does not under any
circumstances or conditions relieve the pilot’s responsibility to see and avoid other aircraft.
WARNING: Do not rely solely upon the display of traffic information to accurately depict all of the traffic
EIS
within range of the aircraft. Due to lack of equipment, poor signal reception, and/or inaccurate information
from aircraft or ground stations, traffic may be present that is not represented on the display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: Refer to the SKYWATCH® (SKY497) Pilot’s Guide for a detailed discussion of the SKY497 TAS.
The SKYWATCH Traffic Advisory System (TAS) is designed to help in detection and avoidance of other aircraft.
TAS uses an on-board interrogator-processor and an altitude reporting transponder for the air-to-air traffic data
link.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TAS SYMBOLOGY
Traffic is displayed using four different symbols.
TAS Symbol
Description
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Non-Threat Traffic
Proximity Advisory (PA)
AFCS
Traffic Advisory (TA)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Traffic Advisory Off Scale
Table 6-34 TAS Symbol Description
A Non-threat Advisory, shown as an open white diamond, indicates that an intruding aircraft is at greater than
±1200 feet relative altitude or the distance is beyond 5 nm.
APPENDICES
A Proximity Advisory indicates that the intruding aircraft is within ±1200 feet and is within 5 nm range, but
is still not considered a threat.
INDEX
A Traffic Advisory (TA) alerts the crew to a potentially hazardous intruding aircraft. Closing rate, distance,
and vertical separation meet TA criteria. A Traffic Advisory that is beyond the selected display range is indicated
by a half TA symbol at the edge of the screen at the relative bearing of the intruder.
438
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OPERATION
The unit must be in operating mode for traffic to be displayed. The ability to switch from standby to operating
mode on the ground is especially useful for scanning the airspace around the airport before takeoff.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Switching from standby mode to operating mode:
1) On the Traffic Page, select the OPERATE Softkey or press the MENU Key and turn the small FMS knob to select
Operating Mode.
2) If using the FMS menu, press the ENT Key to place the SKY497 in the operating mode.
EIS
3) To switch to Standby Mode from the Traffic Page, select the STANDBY Softkey.
Testing the Traffic Advisory System:
1) Set the range to 2/6 nm to allow for full traffic test pattern display.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Select the STANDBY Softkey.
3) Select the TEST Softkey.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) System test takes approximately eight seconds to complete. When completed successfully, traffic symbols
display and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Passed” is heard. If the system test fails, the system
reverts to Standby Mode and a voice alert “Traffic Advisory System Test Failed” is heard.
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC INFORMATION
Traffic information can be displayed on the following maps when the SKY497 unit is operating:
• Nearest Pages
• Navigation Map Page
• Active Flight Plan Page
• Traffic Map Page
• AUX - Video Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• PFD Inset Map
• Trip Planning Page
AFCS
Traffic information can also be displayed on the PFD when the Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) system
option is installed and enabled. See the Additional Features Section for details.
Displaying traffic on the Traffic Map Page:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Map Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Map Page.
3) Select the OPERATE Softkey to begin displaying traffic. ‘OPERATING’ is displayed in the Traffic mode field.
APPENDICES
4) Select the ALT MODE Softkey to change the altitude volume.
5) Select the STANDBY Softkey to place the system in the Standby mode. ‘STANDBY’ is displayed in the Traffic
mode field.
6) Turn the Joystick clockwise to display a larger area or counter-clockwise to display a smaller area.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
439
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic
Mode
Altitude
Mode
Traffic Display
Range
Non-Threat
Traffic, 2500’
Above,
Descending
Traffic Advisory,
500’ Below,
Climbing
EIS
“No Bearing”
Traffic (Bearing
Undetermined),
Distance 4.0
nm, 500’ Above,
Descending
Traffic
Advisory OffScale, 400’
Below, Level
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity Traffic,
900’ Above,
Level
Non-Threat
Traffic,
Altitude Not
Reported
Figure 6-150 Traffic Map Page
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The Traffic Map Page shows surrounding TAS traffic data in relation to the aircraft’s current position and
altitude, without basemap clutter. Aircraft orientation is always heading up unless there is no valid heading.
Map range is adjustable with the Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
The traffic mode and altitude display mode are annunciated in the upper left corner.
Displaying traffic information (maps other than the Traffic Map Page):
AFCS
1) Select the MAP Softkey.
2) Select the TRAFFIC Softkey. Traffic is now displayed on the map.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When traffic is selected on maps other than the Traffic Map Page, a traffic icon is shown to indicate TAS is
enabled for display.
440
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Non-Threat
Traffic
EIS
Traffic
Advisory
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Proximity
Traffic
TA Off Scale
Banner
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Non-Bearing
Traffic
Advisory
Figure 6-151 TAS Traffic on Navigation Map
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Displaying traffic information (PFD Inset Map):
1) Press the INSET Softkey.
2) Press the TRAFFIC Softkey to display traffic data on the inset map (TRFC-1).
3) Press the softkey again to display the traffic-only inset (TRFC-2).
AFCS
4) Press the softkey again to remove traffic data.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Navigation Map Page Setup Menu also controls the display of traffic. The setup menu controls the map
range settings. Traffic data symbols and labels can be decluttered from the display. If a map range larger than
the map range setting is selected, the data is removed from the map. Maps besides the Traffic Map Page use
settings based on those selected for the Navigation Map Page.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
441
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
ALTITUDE DISPLAY
Changing the altitude display mode:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) On the Traffic Page, select the ALT MODE Softkey.
EIS
2) Select one of the following Softkeys:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
3) To return to the Traffic Page, select the BACK Softkey.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select one of the following:
•
BELOW
•
NORMAL
•
ABOVE
•
UNREST (unrestricted)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) Press the ENT Softkey.
TRAFFIC MAP PAGE DISPLAY RANGE
The display range on the Traffic Map Page can be changed at any time. Map range is adjustable with the
Joystick from 2 to 12 nm, as indicated by the map range rings.
AFCS
Changing the display range on the Traffic Page:
1) Turn the Joystick.
•
2 nm
•
2 and 6 nm
•
6 and 12 nm
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) The following range options are available:
442
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Customizing the traffic display on the Navigation Map Page:
1) Select the Navigation Map Page.
2) Press the MENU Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) With Map Setup highlighted, press the ENT Key (Figure 6-152).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the Traffic Group and press the ENT Key (Figure 6-153).
5) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key to scroll through the selections (Figure 6-154).
• TRAFFIC – Turns the display of traffic data on or off
EIS
• TRAFFIC MODE – Selects the traffic mode for display; select from:
- All Traffic - Displays all traffic
- TA/PA - Displays Traffic Alerts and Proximity Advisories
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
- TA ONLY - Displays Traffic Alerts only
• TRAFFIC SMBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic symbols are shown
• TRAFFIC LBL – Selects the maximum range at which traffic labels are shown with the option to turn off
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to scroll through options (ON/OFF, range settings, etc.).
7) Press the ENT Key to select an option.
8) Press the FMS Knob or the CLR Key to return to the Navigation Map Page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 6-152 Navigation Map
Page Menu
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
INDEX
Figure 6-153 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu
Figure 6-154 Navigation Map Page Setup Menu, Traffic Group
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
443
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
TAS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the SKY497 documentation for information on alerts generated by the TAS equipment.
When the number of TAs on the Traffic Map Page increases from one scan to the next, the following occur:
• A “Traffic, Traffic” voice alert is generated.
• A TRAFFIC Annunciation appears at the top right of the airspeed on the PFD, flashing for 5 seconds and
remaining displayed until no TAs are detected in the area.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
• The PFD Inset Map is automatically displayed with TA traffic
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Inset Map
Displays When
TA is Detected
Figure 6-155 Traffic Annunciation (PFD)
SYSTEM STATUS
AFCS
The traffic mode is annunciated in the upper left corner of the Traffic Map Page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Mode
Traffic Mode Annunciation
(Traffic Map Page)
TAS System Test
Initiated
TEST
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Operating
OPERATING
TAS Standby
STANDBY
(also shown in white in center of page)
TAS Failed*
FAIL
Traffic Display Status Icon
(Other Maps)
INDEX
* See Table 6-36 for additional failure annunciations
Table 6-35 TAS Modes
444
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
If the unit fails, an annunciation as to the cause of the failure is shown in the center of the Traffic Map Page.
DATA FAILED
FAILED
Description
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Traffic Map Page
Annunciation
NO DATA
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
Data is being received from the TAS unit, but the
unit is self-reporting a failure
Incorrect data format received from the TAS unit
Table 6-36 TAS Failure Annunciations
EIS
The annunciations to indicate the status of traffic information appear in a banner at the lower left corner of
maps on which traffic can be displayed.
TA X.X ± XX ↕
NO TRFC DATA
A Traffic Advisory is outside the selected display range*
Annunciation is removed when traffic comes within the
selected display range
System cannot determine bearing of Traffic Advisory**
Annunciation indicates distance in nm, altitude
separation in hundreds of feet, and altitude trend arrow
(climbing/descending)
TAS unit has failed (unit is self-reporting a failure or
sending incorrectly formatted data)
Data is not being received from the TAS unit
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
TRFC FAIL
Description
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
TA OFF SCALE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic Status Banner
Annunciation
*Shown as symbol on Traffic Map Page
**Shown in center of Traffic Map Page
AFCS
Table 6-37 TAS Traffic Status Annunciations
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
445
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
HAZARD AVOIDANCE
Blank Page
446
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 7 AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The approved Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) always supersedes this Pilot’s Guide.
7.1 GARMIN AFCS
• GSA 80 AFCS Yaw Servo (optional)
• GDU 1240A Multi-Function Display (MFD)
• GSA 81 AFCS Servos (2)
• GIA 63W Integrated Avionics Units (2 IAUs)
• GTA 82 Pitch Trim Adapter
• GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
• GSM 85 or GSM 86 Servo Gearboxes (3)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• GDU 1240A Primary Flight Display (PFD)
EIS
The digital Garmin Automatic Flight Control System (AFCS) is fully integrated within the Perspective™ System
avionics architecture. The System Overview section provides a block diagram to support this system description.
AFCS functionality is distributed across the following Line Replaceable Units (LRUs):
The AFCS can be divided into these main operating functions:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Flight Director (FD) — Flight director operation takes place within either GIA 63W. Flight director commands
are displayed on the PFD. The flight director provides:
– Command Bars showing pitch/roll guidance
– Vertical/lateral mode selection and processing
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
– Autopilot communication
• Autopilot (AP) — Autopilot operation occurs within the pitch, roll, yaw, and pitch trim servos. It also provides
servo monitoring and automatic flight control in response to flight director steering commands, Attitude and
Heading Reference System (AHRS) attitude and rate information, and airspeed.
AFCS
• Yaw Damper (YD) — The yaw servo (optional) is self-monitoring and provides Dutch roll damping and turn
coordination in response to yaw rate, roll angle, lateral acceleration, and airspeed.
• Manual Electric Trim (MET) — The pitch trim adapter provides manual electric pitch trim capability when
the autopilot is not engaged and provides directional trim during climbs and descents.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
447
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS CONTROLS
The AFCS Control Unit is positioned below the GCU 478, and has the following controls:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1
2
3
4
HDG Key
NAV Key
Selects/deselects Heading Select Mode
AP Key
LVL Key
Engages/disengages the autopilot
Engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within the
autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes
Adjusts the vertical mode reference in Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated
Airspeed, and Altitude Hold modes
Selects/deselects Indicated Airspeed Mode
Selects/deselects Altitude Hold Mode
Selects/deselects Vertical Path Tracking Mode for Vertical Navigation flight control
Selects/deselects Vertical Speed Mode
Engages/disengages the yaw damper
Activates/deactivates the flight director only
Pressing once turns on the director in the default vertical and lateral modes.
Pressing again deactivates the flight director and removes the Command Bars. If
the autopilot is engaged, the key is disabled.
Selects/deselects Approach Mode
NOSE UP/DN
Wheel
6 IAS Key
7 ALT Key
8 VNV Key
9 VS Key
10 YD Key
11 FD Key
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
5
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
12
APR Key
Selects/deselects Navigation Mode
2
3
4
12
11
10
5
6
7
9
8
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
1
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-1 GMC 705 AFCS Control Unit
448
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following AFCS controls are located separately from the AFCS Control Unit:
GA Button
(Go Around)
Disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and interrupts pitch trim operation
An AP DISC Button is located on the pilot’s control stick.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AP DISC Button
(Autopilot
Disconnect)
This button may be used to acknowledge an autopilot disconnect alert and mute the
associated aural tone.
Selects flight director Takeoff (on ground) or Go Around (in air) Mode
EIS
If an approach procedure is loaded, this switch also activates the missed approach
when the selected navigation source is GPS or when the navigation source is VOR/
LOC and a valid frequency has been tuned.
The GA Button is located on the power lever.
Used to command manual electric pitch trim
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
MET Switch
(Manual Electric An MET Switch is located on the pilot and copilot control stick.
Trim)
Press DN (forward) and UP (rearward) for manual electric trim.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
449
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT DIRECTOR OPERATION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The flight director function provides pitch and roll commands to the AFCS and displays them on the PFD.
With the flight director active, the aircraft can be hand-flown to follow the path shown by the Command Bars.
Maximum commanded pitch (-15°, +20°) and roll (25°) angles, vertical acceleration, and roll rate are limited
to values established during AFCS certification. The flight director also provides commands to the autopilot.
ACTIVATING THE FLIGHT DIRECTOR
EIS
An initial press of a key listed in Table 7-1 (when the flight director is not active) activates the flight director
in the listed modes. The flight director may be turned off and the Command Bars removed from the display
by pressing the FD Key again. The FD Key is disabled when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Control Pressed
ALT Key
VS Key
Lateral
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Roll Hold (default)
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
ROL
TO
GA
ROL
ROL
VNV Key
Roll Hold (default)
ROL
FD Key
AP Key
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GA Button
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Modes Selected
NAV Key
Navigation**
APR Key
Approach**
HDG Key
LVL Key
Heading Select
Level Hold
GPS
VOR
LOC
BC
GPS
VOR
LOC
HDG
LVL
Vertical
Pitch Hold (default)
Pitch Hold (default)
Takeoff (on ground)
Go Around (in air)
Altitude Hold
Vertical Speed
Vertical Path
Tracking*
PIT
PIT
TO
GA
ALT
VS
VPTH
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
PIT
Pitch Hold (default)
Level Hold
PIT
LVL
*Valid VNV flight plan must be entered before VNV Key press activates flight
director.
**The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS
course before NAV or APR Key press activates flight director.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-1 Flight Director Activation
450
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AFCS STATUS BOX
Lateral Modes
Active
Vertical Modes
Active
Mode
Reference
EIS
Armed
Autopilot Yaw Damper
Status
Status
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director mode annunciations are displayed on the PFD when the flight director is active. Flight
director selection and autopilot and yaw damper statuses are shown in the center of the AFCS Status Box.
Lateral flight director modes are displayed on the left and vertical on the right. Armed modes are displayed
in white and active in green.
Armed
AFCS Status Box
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AFCS Status
Annunciation
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command
Bars
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
Figure 7-2 PFD AFCS Display
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
451
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT DIRECTOR MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Flight director modes are normally selected independently for the pitch and roll axes. Unless otherwise
specified, all mode keys are alternate action (i.e., press on, press off). In the absence of specific mode
selection, the flight director reverts to the default pitch and/or roll modes.
Armed modes are annunciated in white and active in green in the AFCS Status Box. Under normal
operation, when the control for the active flight director mode is pressed, the flight director reverts to the
default mode(s) for the axis(es). Automatic transition from armed to active mode is indicated by the white
armed mode annunciation moving to the green active mode field and flashing for 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the information required to compute a flight director mode becomes invalid or unavailable, the flight
director automatically reverts to the default mode for that axis. A flashing yellow mode annunciation and
annunciator light indicate loss of sensor (ADC) or navigation data (VOR, LOC, GPS, VNV, SBAS) required to
compute commands. When such a loss occurs, the system automatically begins to roll the wings level (enters
Roll Hold Mode) or maintain the pitch angle (enters Pitch Hold Mode), depending on the affected axis. The
flashing annunciation stops when the affected mode key is pressed or another mode for the axis is selected.
If after 10 seconds no action is taken, the flashing annunciation stops.
Figure 7-3 Loss of VOR Signal
The flight director is automatically disabled if the attitude information required to compute the default
flight director modes becomes invalid or unavailable.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
COMMAND BARS
AFCS
Upon activation of the flight director, Command Bars are displayed in magenta on the PFD. If the aircraft
is being flown by hand, the command bars are displayed hollow (Figure 7-4). The Command Bars do not
override the Aircraft Symbol. The Command Bars move together vertically to indicate pitch commands and
bank left or right to indicate roll commands.
Command Bars (Autopilot Engaged)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars
Command Bars (Pilot Hand Flying Aircraft)
Aircraft Symbol
APPENDICES
Figure 7-4 Command Bars
INDEX
If the attitude information being sent to the flight director becomes invalid or unavailable, the Command
Bars are removed from the display.
452
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL MODES
Vertical Mode
Indicated Airspeed (IAS)
Captures and tracks descent legs of
an active vertical profile
VNV Target Altitude Capture
Glideslope
Go Around
10 ft
VS Key
VS
nnnn fpm
-3000 to
+1500 fpm
100 fpm
IAS Key IAS
nnn kt
80 to
185 kt
1 kt
VNV
Key
Captures the Vertical Navigation
**
(VNV) Target Altitude
Captures and tracks the SBAS
glidepath on approach
APR
Key
Captures and tracks the ILS glideslope
on approach
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level on ground in
GA
preparation for takeoff
Button
Commands a constant pitch angle
and wings level in the air
VPTH
ALTV
GP
GS
TO
7°
GA
7°
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Takeoff
± 150 ft
*
ALTS
ALT Key ALT nnnnn ft
AFCS
Glidepath
0.5°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Path Tracking
(If equipped)
-15° to
+20°
PIT
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical Speed
(default)
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected Altitude Capture
Altitude Hold
Holds the current aircraft pitch
attitude; may be used to climb/
descend to the Selected Altitude
Captures the Selected Altitude
Holds the current Altitude Reference
Maintains the current aircraft vertical
speed; may be used to climb/descend
to the Selected Altitude
Maintains the current aircraft
airspeed in IAS while the aircraft is
climbing/descending to the Selected
Altitude
Reference
Change
Increment
EIS
Pitch Hold
Description
Reference
Control Annunciation
Range
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Table 7-2 lists the vertical modes with their corresponding controls and annunciations. The mode reference
is displayed next to the active mode annunciation for Altitude Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed
modes. The NOSE UP/DN Wheel can be used to change the vertical mode reference while operating under
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, or Altitude Hold modes. Increments of change and acceptable
ranges of values for each of these references using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel are also listed in the table.
APPENDICES
* ALTS armed automatically when PIT, VS, IAS, or GA active, and under VPTH when Selected Altitude is to be captured instead
of VNV Target Altitude
** ALTV armed automatically under VPTH when VNV Target Altitude is to be captured instead of Selected Altitude
Table 7-2 Flight Director Vertical Modes
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
453
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
PITCH HOLD MODE (PIT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
When the flight director is activated (the FD Key is pressed), Pitch Hold Mode is selected by default. Pitch
Hold Mode is indicated as the active vertical mode by the green ‘PIT’ annunciation. This mode may be used
for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter), since Selected Altitude Capture
Mode is automatically armed when Pitch Hold Mode is activated.
In Pitch Hold Mode, the flight director maintains a constant pitch attitude. The pitch reference is set to the
aircraft pitch attitude at the moment of mode selection. If the aircraft pitch attitude exceeds the flight director
pitch command limitations, the flight director commands a pitch angle equal to the nose-up/down limit.
EIS
When operating in Pitch Hold Mode, the pitch reference can be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Roll Hold
Mode Active
Selected Altitude
Capture Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Command Bars Maintain
Desired Pitch Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-5 Pitch Hold Mode
454
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SELECTED ALTITUDE CAPTURE MODE (ALTS)
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed with activation of the following modes:
• Go Around
• Vertical Speed
• Vertical Path Tracking (if the Selected Altitude is to
be captured instead of the VNV Target Altitude)
• Indicated Airspeed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Pitch Hold
EIS
The white ‘ALTS’ annunciation indicates Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed (see Figure 7-5 for
example). The ALT SEL Knob is used to set the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter) until Selected
Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to Selected Altitude
Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed (Figure 7-6). This automatic transition is indicated by the
green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The Selected Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTS’ annunciation.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from Selected Altitude
Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and holds the reference altitude. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active, the
white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to indicate
the automatic transition.
Altitude Reference
(in this case, equal to
Selected Altitude)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
AFCS
Figure 7-6 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Use of the ALT SEL Knob to change the Selected Altitude while Selected Altitude Capture Mode is active
causes the flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode with Selected Altitude Capture Mode armed for the
new Selected Altitude.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
455
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
ALTITUDE HOLD MODE (ALT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Altitude Hold Mode can be activated by pressing the ALT Key; the flight director maintains the current
aircraft altitude (to the nearest 10 feet) as the Altitude Reference. The flight director’s Altitude Reference,
shown in the AFCS Status Box, is independent of the Selected Altitude, displayed above the Altimeter.
Altitude Hold Mode is indicated by a green ‘ALT’ annunciation in the AFCS Status Box.
EIS
Altitude Hold Mode is automatically armed when the flight director is in Selected Altitude Capture Mode
(see Figure 7-6). Selected Altitude Capture Mode automatically transitions to Altitude Hold Mode when the
altitude error is less than 50 feet. In this case, the Selected Altitude becomes the flight director’s Altitude
Reference.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When operating in Altitude Hold Mode, the reference altitude can be adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel. The reference altitude can only be moved a maximum of 150 ft from the current aircraft altitude; each
click changes the reference altitude by 10 ft.
NOTE: Turning the ALT SEL Knob while in Altitude Hold Mode changes the Selected Altitude, but not the
flight director’s Altitude Reference, and does not cancel the mode.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
Altitude
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Selected
Altitude
AFCS
Selected
Altitude
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
To Maintain Altitude Reference
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-7 Altitude Hold Mode
456
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL SPEED MODE (VS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In Vertical Speed Mode, the flight director acquires and maintains a Vertical Speed Reference. Current
aircraft vertical speed (to the nearest 100 fpm) becomes the Vertical Speed Reference at the moment of Vertical
Speed Mode activation. This mode may be used for climb or descent to the Selected Altitude (shown above
the Altimeter) since Selected Altitude Capture Mode is automatically armed when Vertical Speed Mode is
selected.
EIS
When Vertical Speed Mode is activated by pressing the VS Key, ‘VS’ is annunciated in green in the AFCS
Status Box along with the Vertical Speed Reference. The Vertical Speed Reference is also displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator. A Vertical Speed Reference Bug corresponding to the Vertical Speed Reference is
shown on the indicator.
The Vertical Speed Reference (shown both in the AFCS Status Box and above the Vertical Speed Indicator)
may be changed by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel.
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Selected
Altitude Capture
Mode Armed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Vertical Speed
Mode Active
Vertical
Speed
Reference
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical
Speed
Reference
Bug
AFCS
Command Bars Indicate Climb to
Attain Vertical Speed Reference
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-8 Vertical Speed Hold Mode
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
457
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INDICATED AIRSPEED MODE (IAS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Indicated Airspeed Mode is selected by pressing the IAS Key. This mode acquires and maintains the
Airspeed Reference (IAS) while climbing or descending to the Selected Altitude (shown above the Altimeter).
When Indicated Airspeed Mode is active, the flight director continuously monitors Selected Altitude, airspeed
and altitude.
NOTE: The Selected Altitude should be set before selecting Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS).
EIS
The Airspeed Reference is set to the current airspeed upon mode activation. Indicated Airspeed Mode is
indicated by a green ‘IAS’ annunciation beside the Airspeed Reference in the AFCS Status Box. The Airspeed
Reference is also displayed directly above the Airspeed Indicator, along with a bug corresponding to the
Airspeed Reference along the tape.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Engine power must be adjusted to allow the autopilot to fly the aircraft at a pitch attitude corresponding to
the desired flight profile (climb or descent) while maintaining the Airspeed Reference.
The Airspeed Reference (shown in both the AFCS Status Box and above the Airspeed Indicator) may be
adjusted by using the NOSE UP/DN Wheel.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Indicated
Airspeed
Mode Active
Selected
Airspeed Altitude Capture
Reference Mode Armed
Selected
Altitude
Airspeed
Reference
AFCS
Airspeed
Reference
Bug
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Command Bars Indicate Climb
To Attain Selected Altitude
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 7-9 Indicated Airspeed Mode (IAS)
458
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VERTICAL NAVIGATION MODES (VPTH, ALTV)
NOTE: VNV is disabled when parallel track or Dead Reckoning Mode is active.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Selected Altitude takes precedence over any other vertical constraints.
Vertical Navigation (VNV) flight control is available for enroute/terminal cruise and descent operations any
time that VNV flight planning is available. Refer to the Flight Management Section for more information on
VNV flight plans. Conditions for availability include, but are not limited to:
EIS
• The selected navigation source is GPS.
• A VNV flight plan (with at least one altitude-constrained waypoint) or vertical direct-to is active.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• VNV is enabled (VNV ENBL Softkey pressed on the MFD).
• Crosstrack error is valid and within certain limits.
• Desired/actual track are valid or track angle error is within certain limits.
• The VNV Target Altitude of the active waypoint is no more than 250 ft above the current aircraft altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The flight director may be armed for VNV at any time, but no target altitudes are captured during a climb.
The Command Bars provide vertical profile guidance based on specified altitudes (entered manually or loaded
from the database) at waypoints in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to. The appropriate VNV flight
control modes are sequenced by the flight director to follow the path defined by the vertical profile. Upon
reaching the last waypoint in the VNV flight plan, the flight director transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and
cancels any armed VNV modes.
Vertical Path Tracking Mode (VPTH)
AFCS
NOTE: If another vertical mode key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is selected, Vertical Path
Tracking Mode reverts to armed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When a vertical profile (VNV flight plan) is active and the VNV Key is pressed, Vertical Path Tracking
Mode is armed in preparation for descent path capture. ‘VPTH’ (or ‘/V’ when Glidepath or Glideslope
Mode is concurrently armed) is annunciated in white in addition to previously armed modes. If applicable,
the appropriate altitude capture mode is armed for capture of the next VNV Target Altitude (ALTV) or the
Selected Altitude (ALTS), whichever is greater.
APPENDICES
Figure 7-10 Vertical Path Tracking Armed Annunciations
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
459
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Prior to descent path interception, the Selected Altitude must be set below the current aircraft altitude
by at least 75 feet. In conjunction with the “TOD [top of descent] within 1 minute” annunciation in the
PFD Navigation Status Box and the “Vertical track” voice message, VNV indications (VNV Target Altitude,
vertical deviation, and vertical speed required) appear on the PFD in magenta (Figure 7-11).
Altitude Hold
Mode Active
EIS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Vertical
Deviation
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
VNV Target
Altitude
Required
Vertical
Speed Bug
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-11 Vertical Path Capture
460
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a descent leg is captured (i.e., vertical deviation becomes valid), Vertical Path Tracking becomes
active and tracks the descent profile (Figure 7-12). An altitude capture mode (‘ALTS’ or ‘ALTV’) is armed
as appropriate.
Selected Altitude
Capture Armed
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Vertical Path
Tracking Active
EIS
VNV Target
Altitude
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Required
Vertical
Speed
Indication
Terminal
Phase of
Flight
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent to
Maintain Required Vertical Speed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Vertical Deviation
Indicator (VDI)
Figure 7-12 Vertical Path Tracking Mode
AFCS
If the altimeter barometric setting is adjusted while Vertical Path Tracking is active, the flight director
increases/decreases the descent rate by up to 500 fpm to re-establish the aircraft on the descent path
(without commanding a climb). Adjusting the altimeter barometric setting creates discontinuities in VNV
vertical deviation, moving the descent path. For large adjustments, it may take several minutes for the
AFCS to re-establish on the descent path. If the change is made while nearing a waypoint with a VNV
Target Altitude, the aircraft may not re-establish on the descent path in time to meet the vertical constraint.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Automatic Reversion to Pitch Hold Mode
Several situations can occur while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is active which cause the flight director
to revert to Pitch Hold Mode:
APPENDICES
• Vertical deviation exceeds 200 feet during an overspeed condition.
• Vertical deviation experiences a discontinuity that both exceeds 200 feet in magnitude and results in
the vertical deviation exceeding 200 feet in magnitude. Such discontinuities are usually caused by
flight plan changes that affect the vertical profile.
• Vertical deviation becomes invalid (the Vertical Deviation Indicator is removed from the PFD).
INDEX
• A display enters Reversionary Mode (this does not apply to an active vertical direct-to).
Unless VNV is disabled, Vertical Path Tracking Mode and the appropriate altitude capture mode become
armed following the reversion to Pitch Hold Mode to allow for possible profile recapture.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
461
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-Path Descents
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, and Indicated Airspeed modes can also be used to fly non-path descents
while VNV flight control is selected. If the VS or IAS Key is pressed while Vertical Path Tracking Mode is
selected, Vertical Path Tracking Mode reverts to armed along with the appropriate altitude capture mode
to allow profile re-capture.
EIS
Figure 7-13 Indicated Airspeed Mode VNV Non-Path Descent
To prevent immediate profile re-capture, the following must be satisfied:
• At least 10 seconds have passed since the non-path transition was initiated
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Vertical deviation from the profile has exceeded 250 feet, but is now less than 200 feet
Pressing the VNV Key twice re-arms Vertical Path Tracking for immediate profile re-capture.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode (ALTV)
NOTE: Armed VNV Target Altitude and Selected Altitude capture modes are mutually exclusive. However,
Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed implicitly (not annunciated) whenever VNV Target Altitude Capture
Mode is armed.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VNV Target Altitude Capture is analogous to Selected Altitude Capture Mode and is armed automatically
after the VNV Key is pressed and the next VNV Target Altitude is to be intercepted before the Selected
Altitude. The annunciation ‘ALTV’ indicates that the VNV Target Altitude is to be captured. VNV Target
Altitudes are shown in the active flight plan or vertical direct-to, and can be entered manually or loaded
from a database (see the Flight Management Section for details). At the same time as “TOD within 1
minute” is annunciated in the Navigation Status Box, the active VNV Target Altitude is displayed above the
Vertical Speed Indicator (see Figure 7-11).
NOTE: When the Selected Altitude is set to the VNV Target Altitude, Selected Altitude Capture Mode (ALTS)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
will be armed even though the altitude value is part of the active VNAV flight plan.
INDEX
APPENDICES
As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions to VNV Target
Altitude Capture Mode with Altitude Hold Mode armed. This automatic transition is indicated by the green
‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds and the appearance of the white ‘ALT’ annunciation.
The VNV Target Altitude is shown as the Altitude Reference beside the ‘ALTV’ annunciation and remains
displayed above the Vertical Speed Indicator. The Required Vertical Speed Indication (RVSI) is removed
once VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode becomes active.
462
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
At 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director automatically transitions from VNV Target
Altitude Capture to Altitude Hold Mode and tracks the level leg. As Altitude Hold Mode becomes active,
the white ‘ALT’ annunciation moves to the active vertical mode field and flashes green for 10 seconds to
indicate the automatic transition. The flight director automatically arms Vertical Path Tracking, allowing
upcoming descent legs to be captured and subsequently tracked.
Altitude Reference (In This Case,
Equal To VNV Altitude Target)
Flash up to 10 sec, Indicating Automatic Transition
EIS
Figure 7-14 Automatic Mode Transitions During Altitude Capture
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Changing the current VNV Target Altitude while VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode is active causes the
flight director to revert to Pitch Hold Mode. Vertical Path Tracking and the appropriate altitude capture
mode are armed in preparation to capture the new VNV Target Altitude or the Selected Altitude, depending
on which altitude is to be intercepted first.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
VNV target altitudes can be changed while editing the active flight plan (see the Flight Management
Section for details).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
463
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDEPATH MODE (GP)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glidepath Mode is used to track the SBAS-based glidepath. When Glidepath Mode is armed, ‘GP’ is
annunciated in white in the AFCS Status Box.
Selecting Glidepath Mode:
1) Ensure a GPS approach with vertical guidance (LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LNAV +V, LP+V) is loaded into the active flight
plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan (cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
EIS
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
NOTE: Some RNAV (GPS) approaches provide a vertical descent angle as an aid in flying a stabilized
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
approach. These approaches are NOT considered Approaches with Vertical Guidance (APV). Approaches
that are annunciated on the HSI as LNAV or LNAV+V are considered Nonprecision Approaches (NPA) and
are flown to an MDA even though vertical glidepath (GP) information may be provided.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WARNING: When flying an LNAV approach (with vertical descent angle) with the autopilot coupled, the
aircraft will not level off at the MDA even if the MDA is set in the altitude preselect.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Upon reaching the glidepath, the flight director transitions to Glidepath Mode and begins to capture and
track the glidepath.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 7-15 Glidepath Mode Armed
464
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Once the following conditions have been met, the glidepath can be captured:
• The active waypoint is at or after the final approach fix (FAF).
• Vertical deviation is valid.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• The CDI is at less than full-scale deviation
• Automatic sequencing of waypoints has not been suspended (no ‘SUSP’ annunciation on the HSI)
Glidepath
Mode Active
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
LNAV/VNAV
Approach
Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Command Bars Indicate
Descent on Glidepath
Figure 7-16 Glidepath Mode
Glidepath
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
465
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GLIDESLOPE MODE (GS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Glideslope Mode is available for LOC/ILS approaches to capture and track the glideslope. When Glideslope
Mode is armed (annunciated as ‘GS’ in white), LOC Approach Mode is armed as the lateral flight director
mode.
Selecting Glideslope Mode:
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
EIS
3) Press the APR Key.
Or:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Press the APR Key.
Figure 7-17 Glideslope Mode Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Once LOC is the navigation source, the localizer and glideslope can be captured. Upon reaching the
glideslope, the flight director transitions to Glideslope Mode and begins to capture and track the glideslope.
Approach
Mode Active
Glideslope
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Active ILS
Frequency Tuned
NAV1 (localizer) is Selected
Navigation Source
Command Bars Indicate Descent
On Localizer/Glideslope Path
Glideslope
Indicator
INDEX
Figure 7-18 Glideslope Mode
466
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GO AROUND (GA) AND TAKEOFF (TO) MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Go Around and Takeoff modes are coupled pitch and roll modes and are annunciated as both the vertical
and lateral modes when active. In these modes, the flight director commands a constant set pitch attitude
and keeps the wings level. The GA Switch is used to activate both modes. The mode entered by the flight
director depends on whether the aircraft is on the ground or in the air.
Takeoff Mode provides an attitude reference during rotation and takeoff. This mode can be selected only
while on the ground by pushing the GA Switch. The flight director Command Bars assume a wings-level,
pitch-up attitude.
EIS
Pressing the GA Button while in the air activates the flight director in a wings-level, pitch-up attitude,
allowing the execution of a missed approach or a go around. Go Around Mode arms Selected Altitude
Capture Mode automatically, and attempts to modify the aircraft attitude (i.e., with the NOSE UP/DN Wheel)
result in reversion to Pitch and Roll Hold modes.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Go Around Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Command Bars Indicate Climb
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Takeoff Mode Active
APPENDICES
Figure 7-19 Go Around and Takeoff Modes
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
467
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
LATERAL MODES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following table relates each AFCS lateral mode to its respective control and annunciation. Refer to the
vertical modes section for information regarding Takeoff and Go Around Modes.
NOTE: The AFCS may generate a lower bank angle than the maximum roll command limit in degrees
indicated in Table 7-3 by the amount needed to produce a turn rate equal to or less than standard rate.
Lateral Mode
Control Annunciation
EIS
Holds the current aircraft roll
attitude or rolls the wings level,
(default)
depending on the commanded
bank angle
Captures and tracks the Selected HDG
Heading
Key
Roll Hold
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Description
Heading Select
Navigation, GPS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Navigation, VOR Enroute Capture/Track
Navigation, LOC Capture/Track
(No Glideslope)
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation, Backcourse Capture/Track
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR,
LOC)
Captures and tracks a
localizer signal for backcourse
approaches
AFCS
Approach, LOC Capture/Track
(Glideslope Mode automatically armed)
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
HDG
25°
GPS
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
LOC
GPS
Approach, VOR Capture/Track
Go Around
25°
BC
Approach, GPS
Takeoff
ROL
VOR
NAV
Key
Captures and tracks the selected
navigation source (GPS, VOR, APR Key
LOC)
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level on ground
in preparation for takeoff
Commands a constant pitch
angle and wings level in the air
GA
Button
Maximum Roll
Command Limit
VAPP
LOC
25° Capture
10° Track
25°
25° Capture
10° Track
25° Capture
10° Track
TO
Wings Level
GA
Wings Level
The AFCS limits turn rate to 3 degrees per second (standard rate turn).
INDEX
APPENDICES
Table 7-3 Flight Director Lateral Modes
468
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL HOLD MODE (ROL)
NOTE: If Roll Hold Mode is activated as a result of a mode reversion, the flight director rolls the wings
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
level.
When the flight director is activated or switched, Roll Hold Mode is selected by default. This mode is
annunciated as ‘ROL’ in the AFCS Status Box. The current aircraft bank angle is held, subject to the bank
angle condition.
EIS
Figure 7-20 Roll Hold Mode Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Flight Director Response
Rolls wings level
Maintains current aircraft roll attitude
Limits bank to 25°
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Bank Angle
< 6°
6 to 25°
>25°
Table 7-4 Roll Hold Mode Responses
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
469
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
HEADING SELECT MODE (HDG)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Heading Select Mode is activated by pressing the HDG Key. Heading Select Mode acquires and maintains
the Selected Heading. The Selected Heading is shown by a light blue bug on the HSI and in the box to the
upper left of the HSI.
NOTE: Pressing the HDG Knob synchronizes the Selected Heading to the current heading.
EIS
The Selected Heading is adjusted using the HDG Knob. Turns are commanded in the same direction as
Selected Heading Bug movement, even if the bug is turned more than 180° from the present heading (e.g.,
a 270° turn to the right). However, Selected Heading changes of more than 330° at a time result in turn
reversals.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Heading Select
Mode Active
AFCS
Selected
Heading
Selected
Heading
Bug
Command Bars Track
Selected Heading
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 7-21 Heading Select Mode
470
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NAVIGATION MODES (GPS, VOR, LOC, BC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Navigation Mode.
NOTE: When intercepting a flight plan leg, the flight director gives commands to capture the active leg at
approximately a 45° angle to the track between the waypoints defining the active leg. The flight director
does not give commands fly to the starting waypoint of the active leg.
EIS
NOTE: When making a backcourse approach, set the Selected Course to the localizer front course.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the NAV Key selects Navigation Mode. Navigation Mode acquires and tracks the selected navigation
source (GPS, VOR, LOC). The flight director follows GPS roll steering commands when GPS is the selected
navigation source. When the navigation source is VOR or LOC, the flight director creates roll steering
commands from the Selected Course and deviation. Navigation Mode can also be used to fly non-precision
GPS and LOC approaches where vertical guidance is not required.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Backcourse Navigation Mode is selected when the localizer front course is greater than 105° from the aircraft
heading. Backcourse Navigation Mode captures and tracks a localizer signal in the backcourse direction. The
annunciation ‘BC’ in the AFCS Status Box indicates Backcourse Navigation Mode (Figure 7-24).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
If the Course Deviation Indicator (CDI) shows greater than one dot when the NAV Key is pressed, the
selected mode is armed. If the CDI is less than one dot, Navigation Mode is automatically captured when the
NAV Key is pressed. The armed annunciation appears in white to the left of the active roll mode
Figure 7-22 GPS Navigation Mode Armed
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the CDI has automatically switched from GPS to LOC during a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation
Mode remains active, providing GPS steering guidance until the localizer signal is captured. LOC Navigation
Mode is armed when the automatic navigation source switch takes place. If the APR Key is pressed prior to
the automatic navigation source switch, LOC Navigation Mode is armed.
If Navigation Mode is active and either of the following occur, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode
(wings rolled level):
• Different VOR tuned while in VOR Navigation Mode (VOR Navigation Mode reverts to armed)
APPENDICES
• Navigation source manually switched (with the CDI Softkey)
• During a LOC/ILS approach, the FAF is crossed while in GPS Navigation Mode after the automatic navigation
source switch from GPS to LOC
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
471
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
GPS Navigation
Mode Active
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS is
Selected
Navigation
Source
Selected
Course
Command Bars Indicate Right Turn to Track
GPS Course and Climb to Intercept Selected Altitude
Figure 7-23 Navigation Mode
Pitch Hold
Mode Active
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Backcourse
Mode Active
LOC2 is Selected Navigation Source
Command Bars Hold Pitch Attitude
INDEX
Figure 7-24 Backcourse Mode
472
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPROACH MODES (GPS, VAPP, LOC)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The selected navigation receiver must have a valid VOR or LOC signal or active GPS course for the
flight director to enter Approach Mode.
Approach Mode is activated when the APR Key is pressed. Approach Mode acquires and tracks the
selected navigation source (GPS, VOR, or LOC), depending on loaded approach. This mode uses the selected
navigation receiver deviation and desired course inputs to fly the approach. Pressing the APR Key when the
CDI is greater than one dot arms the selected approach mode (annunciated in white to the left of the active
lateral mode). If the CDI is less the 1 dot, the LOC is automatically captured when the APR Key is pressed.
EIS
VOR Approach Mode (VAPP) provides greater sensitivity for signal tracking than VOR Navigation Mode.
Selecting VOR Approach Mode:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Ensure a valid VOR frequency is tuned
2) Ensure that VOR is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) Press the APR Key.
When GPS Approach Mode is armed, Glidepath Mode is also armed.
Selecting GPS Approach Mode:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Ensure a GPS approach is loaded into the active flight plan. The active waypoint must be part of the flight plan
(cannot be a direct-to a waypoint not in the flight plan).
2) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
AFCS
Figure 7-25 GPS Approach Mode Armed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
LOC Approach Mode allows the autopilot to fly a LOC/ILS approach with a glideslope. When LOC
Approach Mode is armed, Glideslope Mode is also armed automatically. LOC captures are inhibited if the
difference between aircraft heading and localizer course exceeds 105°.
Selecting LOC Approach Mode:
APPENDICES
1) Ensure a valid localizer frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure that LOC is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
3) Press the APR Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
INDEX
Or:
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
473
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Ensure that GPS is the selected navigation source (use the CDI Softkey to cycle through navigation sources if
necessary).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3) Ensure the corresponding LOC frequency is tuned.
2) Ensure a LOC/ILS approach is loaded into the active flight plan.
4) Press the APR Key.
If the following occurs, the flight director reverts to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level):
• Approach Mode is active and a Vectors-To-Final is activated
EIS
• Approach Mode is active and Navigation source is manually switched
• During a LOC/ILS approach, GPS Navigation Mode is active and the FAF is crossed after the automatic
navigation source switch from GPS to LOC
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
If the navigation source is VOR or localizer, or OBS Mode has been enabled when using GPS, the Selected
Course is controlled using the CRS Knob.
LEVEL MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Level Mode is coupled pitch and roll modes and is annunciated as both the vertical and lateral modes when
active. Pressing the LVL Key engages the autopilot (if the autopilot is disengaged and the aircraft is within
the autopilot engagement limitations) in level vertical and lateral modes. Level Mode does not track altitude
or heading. When the LVL Key is pressed all armed and active modes are cancelled and the autopilot and
flight director revert to LVL mode for pitch and roll (Figure 7-26). While in level mode, all other modes are
available by pressing the corresponding button.
Pitch
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Roll
Command Bars Indicate
Level with the Horizon
INDEX
Figure 7-26 Level Mode Annunciation
474
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
INTERCEPTING AND FLYING A DME ARC
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The AFCS will intercept and track a DME arc that is part of the active flight plan provided that GPS
Navigation Mode is engaged, GPS is the active navigation source on the CDI, and the DME arc segment is
the active flight plan leg. It is important to note that automatic navigation of DME arcs is based on GPS.
Thus, even if the APR key is pressed and LOC or VOR Approach Mode is armed prior to reaching the Initial
Approach Fix (IAF), Approach Mode will not activate until the arc segment is completed.
EIS
If the pilot decides to intercept the arc at a location other than the published IAF (i.e. ATC provides vectors
to intercept the arc) and subsequently selects Heading Mode or Roll Mode, the AFCS will not automatically
intercept or track the arc unless the pilot activates the arc leg of the flight plan and arms GPS Navigation
Mode. The AFCS will not intercept and fly a DME arc before reaching an IAF that defines the beginning of the
arc segment. Likewise, if at any point while established on the DME arc the pilot deselects GPS Navigation
Mode, the AFCS will no longer track the arc.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
AUTOPILOT AND YAW DAMPER OPERATION
NOTE: Refer to the POH for specific instructions regarding emergency procedures.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The autopilot and optional yaw damper (not available in the SR20) operate the flight control surface servos to
provide automatic flight control. The autopilot controls the aircraft pitch and roll attitudes following commands
received from the flight director. Pitch autotrim provides trim commands to the pitch trim servo to relieve any
sustained effort required by the pitch servo. Autopilot operation is independent of the yaw damper.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The yaw damper reduces Dutch roll tendencies, coordinates turns, and provides a steady force to maintain
directional trim. It can operate independently of the autopilot and may be used during normal hand-flight
maneuvers. Yaw rate commands are limited to 6 deg/sec by the yaw damper.
FLIGHT CONTROL
AFCS
Pitch and roll commands are provided to the servos based on the active flight director modes. Yaw commands
are provided by the yaw servo. Servo motor control limits the maximum servo speed and torque. The servo
mounts are equipped with slip-clutches set to certain values. This allows the servos to be overridden in case
of an emergency.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pitch Axis and Trim
APPENDICES
The autopilot pitch axis uses pitch rate to stabilize the aircraft pitch attitude during flight director
maneuvers. Flight director pitch commands are rate and attitude-limited, combined with pitch damper
control, and sent to the pitch servo motor. The pitch servo measures the output effort (torque) and provides
this signal to the pitch trim servo. The pitch trim servo commands the motor to reduce the average pitch
servo effort.
When the autopilot is not engaged, the pitch trim adapter may be used to provide manual electric trim
(MET). This allows the aircraft to be trimmed using a control stick switch. Manual trim commands are
generated only when the MET Switch are pressed. Trim speeds are scheduled with airspeed to provide
more consistent response.
INDEX
NOTE: When the autopilot is engaged, the MET Switch does not respond.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
475
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Roll Axis
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The autopilot roll axis uses roll rate to stabilize aircraft roll attitude during flight director maneuvers. The
flight director roll commands are rate- and attitude-limited, combined with roll damper control, and sent
to the roll servo motor.
Yaw Axis
EIS
The yaw damper uses yaw rate and roll attitude to dampen the aircraft’s natural Dutch roll response. It
also uses lateral acceleration to coordinate turns and reduce or eliminate the need for the pilot to use rudder
pedal force to maintain coordinated flight during climbs and descents.
ENGAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When the AP Key is pressed, the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director (if not already active) are
activated. The flight director engages in Pitch and Roll Hold Modes when initially activated. When the YD
Key is pressed, the system engages the yaw damper independently of the autopilot (if not already engaged).
Autopilot and yaw damper status are displayed in the center of the AFCS Status Box. Engagement is indicated
by green ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciations, respectively.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Autopilot
Engaged
Yaw Damper
Engaged
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-27 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Engaged
DISENGAGEMENT
NOTE: The autopilot does not disengage when the MET Switch is pressed.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pushing the AP Key on the AFCS Control Panel disengages the autopilot. Manual autopilot disengagement
is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘AP’ annunciation and a three-second autopilot disconnect aural
alert.
Figure 7-28 Manual Autopilot Disengagement
APPENDICES
Pushing the AP DISC button disengages the autopilot, yaw damper, and flight director. Pushing the YD
Key disengages the yaw damper and the autopilot. When the yaw damper and autopilot are manually
disengaged, both the ‘AP’ and ‘YD’ annunciation turn yellow and flash for 5 seconds and a three-second
autopilot disconnect aural alert is generated.
INDEX
Figure 7-29 Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
476
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
After manual disengagement, the autopilot disconnect aural alert and the flashing ‘AP’ annunciation may be
cancelled by pushing the AP DISC Button.
• System failure
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Automatic autopilot disengagement is indicated by a flashing red and white ‘AP’ annunciation and by
the autopilot disconnect aural alert, which continue until acknowledged by pushing the AP DISC Button.
Automatic autopilot disengagement occurs due to:
• Inability to compute default flight director modes
(FD also disengages automatically)
• Invalid sensor data
EIS
Yaw damper disengagement is indicated by a five-second flashing yellow ‘YD’ annunciation. Automatic
yaw damper disengagement occurs when autopilot disengagement is caused by failure in a parameter also
affecting the yaw damper. This means the yaw damper can remain operational in some cases where the
autopilot automatically disengages. A localized failure in the yaw damper system or invalid sensor data may
also cause yaw damper disengagement.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 7-30 Automatic Autopilot and Yaw Damper Disengagement
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
In the event of a PFD failure, the MFD goes into reversionary mode. The autopilot remains engaged but
reverts to pitch hold and roll hold modes; all other modes are available for selection. If the MFD fails, the
PFD goes into reversionary mode and the autopilot continues to function.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
477
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
EXAMPLE FLIGHT PLAN
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The following example flight plan and diagrams (not to be used for navigation) in this section are
for instructional purposes only and should be considered not current. Numbered portions of accompanying
diagrams correspond to numbered procedure steps.
EIS
This scenario-based set of procedures (based on the example flight plan found in the Flight Management
Section) shows various GFC 700 AFCS modes used during a flight. In this scenario, the aircraft departs Charles
B. Wheeler Downtown Airport (KMKC), enroute to Colorado Springs Airport (KCOS). After departure, the
aircraft climbs to 12,000 ft and airway V4 is intercepted, following ATC vectors.
0
33
27
27
30
24
24
21
27
24
27
15
12
21
18
15
18
9
24
21
12
6
Lamar
VOR
(LAA)
Topeka
VOR
(TOP)
12
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
9
V 244
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
9
3
V4
18
V 244
9
6
0
33
KMKC
30
30
6
KCOS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3
6
3
3
30
33
0
33
0
15
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airway V4 is flown to Salina VOR (SLN) using VOR navigation, then airway V244 is flown using GPS
Navigation. The ILS approach for runway 35L and LPV (WAAS) approach for runway 35R are shown and a
missed approach is executed.
12
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
21
15
18
Figure 7-31 Flight Plan Overview
AFCS
DEPARTURE
Climbing to the Selected Altitude and flying an assigned heading:
1) Before takeoff:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
a) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set the Selected Altitude to 12,000 feet.
APPENDICES
b) Push the GA Switch to activate Takeoff Mode. The flight director Command Bars establish a pitch up attitude to
follow.
INDEX
c) Press the AP Key to engage the autopilot in a climb, holding the pitch angle commanded in Takeoff Mode and
wings level.
478
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
2) In this example, Vertical Speed Mode is used to capture the Selected Altitude (Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, or
Indicated Airspeed Mode may be used).
a) Press the VS Key to activate Vertical Speed Mode.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Vertical Speed Reference may be adjusted after Vertical Speed Mode is selected using the NOSE UP/DN
Wheel.
3) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading, complying with ATC vectors to intercept Airway V4.
EIS
Press the HDG Key to activate Heading Select Mode while the autopilot is engaged in the climb. The autopilot
follows the Selected Heading Bug on the HSI and turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
At 50 feet from the Selected Altitude, the green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds; the autopilot
transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
HD
GM
od
AFCS
e
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
TO M
o
de
3
Selected Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
4
1
2
VS
APPENDICES
KMKC
e
Mod
ode
M
TO
Figure 7-32 Departure
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
479
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
INTERCEPTING A VOR RADIAL
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
During climb-out, the autopilot continues to fly the aircraft in Heading Select Mode. Airway V4 to Salina
VOR (SLN) should now be intercepted. Since the enroute flight plan waypoints correspond to VORs, flight
director Navigation Mode using either VOR or GPS as the navigation source may be used. In this scenario,
VOR Navigation Mode is used for navigation to the first VOR waypoint in the flight plan.
Intercepting a VOR radial:
1) Arm VOR Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Tune the VOR frequency.
b) Press the CDI Softkey to set the navigation source to VOR.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) Use the CRS Knob to set the Selected Course to the desired value, 255°. Note that at this point, the flight
director is still in Heading Select Mode and the autopilot continues to fly the Selected Heading, 290°.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) As the aircraft nears the Selected Course, the flight director transitions from Heading Select to VOR Navigation
Mode and the ‘VOR’ annunciation flashes green. The autopilot begins turning to intercept the Selected
Course.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
d) Press the NAV Key. This arms VOR Navigation Mode and the white ‘VOR’ annunciation appears to the left of
the active lateral mode.
3) The autopilot continues the turn until the aircraft is established on the Selected Course.
0
3
Hd
29 g
0o
30
AFCS
33
V4
6
o
255
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
24
VO
R
9
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
27
3
NA
V
Mo
de
2
HD
G
12
M
od
e,
VO
R
Ar
m
ed
15
21
18
APPENDICES
1
INDEX
Figure 7-33 Intercepting a VOR Radial
480
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLYING A FLIGHT PLAN/GPS COURSE
NOTE: Changing the navigation source cancels Navigation Mode and causes the flight director to revert
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
back to Roll Hold Mode (wings rolled level).
As the aircraft closes on Salina VOR, GPS is used to navigate the next leg, airway V244. The aircraft is
currently tracking inbound on Airway V4.
Flying a GPS flight plan:
1) Transition from VOR to GPS Navigation Mode:
EIS
a) Press the CDI Softkey until GPS is the selected navigation source.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Press the NAV Key to activate GPS Navigation Mode. The autopilot guides the aircraft along the active flight
plan leg.
0
33
30
3
V4
6
3
o
075
30
e
V Mod
PS NA
6
27
G
2
12
15
21
18
12
AFCS
24
9
Hays
VOR
(HYS)
Salina
VOR
(SLN)
V 244
1
24
27
076
e
9
o
260
o
d
AV Mo
VOR N
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
0
33
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Following the flight plan, the autopilot continues to steer the aircraft under GPS guidance. Note that in GPS
Navigation Mode, course changes defined by the flight plan are automatically made without pilot action
required.
15
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
21
18
Figure 7-34 Transition to GPS Flight Plan
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
481
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DESCENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
• Indicated Airspeed descent – Indicated Airspeed Mode can be used to descend to the Selected Altitude at a
constant airspeed. This descent method does not account for flight plan waypoint altitude constraints.
While flying the arrival procedure, the aircraft is cleared for descent in preparation for the approach to
KCOS. Three methods are presented for descent:
• Vertical Path Tracking descent – Vertical Path Tracking Mode is used to follow the vertical descent path
defined in the GPS flight plan. Altitude constraints correspond to waypoints in the flight plan. Before VNV
flight control can provide vertical profile guidance, a VNV flight plan must be entered and enabled.
EIS
• Non-path descent in a VNV scenario – A VNV flight plan is entered and enabled, however Pitch Hold,
Vertical Speed, or Indicated Airspeed Mode can be used to descend to the VNV Target Altitude prior to
reaching the planned TOD. Indicated Airspeed Mode is used in the example.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Indicated Airspeed descent:
1) Select Indicated Airspeed Mode:
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude to 10,000 feet.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
b) Press the IAS Key to activate Indicated Airspeed Mode. The annunciation ‘IAS’ appears next to the Airspeed
Reference, which defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Selected Altitude Capture Mode is armed
automatically.
2) Use the NOSE UP/DN Wheel to adjust the commanded airspeed while maintaining the same power, or reduce
power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode while the autopilot maintains the current airspeed.
AFCS
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
APPENDICES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
ALT Mode
2
IAS
Mod
e
3
Selected Altitude of 10,000 MSL
ALT Mode
INDEX
Figure 7-35 IAS Descent
482
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Vertical Path Tracking descent to VNV Target Altitude:
1) Select VNV flight control:
a) Press the VNV Key to arm Vertical Path Tracking Mode. The white annunciation ‘VPTH’ appears.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
b) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the flight plan’s VNV Target Altitude of 10,000 feet.
EIS
If the Selected Altitude is not at least 75 ft below the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director captures the
Selected Altitude rather than the VNV Target Altitude once Vertical Path Tracking Mode becomes active (ALTS is
armed rather than ALTV).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
c) If Vertical Path Tracking Mode is armed more than 5 minutes prior to descent path capture, acknowledgment is
required for the flight director to transition from Altitude Hold to Vertical Path Tracking Mode. To proceed with
descent path capture if the white ‘VPTH’ annunciation begins flashing, do one of the following:
• Press the VNV Key.
• Turn the ALT SEL Knob to adjust the Selected Altitude.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the descent is not confirmed by the time of interception, Vertical Path Tracking Mode remains armed and the
descent is not captured.
2) When the top of descent (TOD) is reached, the flight director transitions to Vertical Path Tracking Mode and
begins the descent to the VNV Target Altitude. Intention to capture the VNV Target Altitude is indicated by the
white ‘ALTV’ annunciation.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
3) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
AFCS
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
ALT Mode
TOD
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1
Cruise Altitude of 12,000 MSL
2
APPENDICES
VPT
HM
ode
3
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
BOD
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude (set below VNAV Target Altitude)
INDEX
Along-track Offset, 3 nm before OPSHN
3 nm
Figure 7-36 VPTH Descent
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
483
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
Non-path descent using Indicated Airspeed Mode:
1) Using Indicated Airspeed Mode, command a non-path descent to an intermediate altitude above the next VNV
flight plan altitude.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
a) Using the ALT SEL Knob, set the Selected Altitude below the current aircraft altitude to an altitude (in this case,
9,400 feet) at which to level off between VNV flight plan altitudes.
EIS
b) Press the IAS Key before the planned TOD during an altitude hold while VPTH is armed. The Airspeed Reference
defaults to the current aircraft airspeed. Vertical Path Tracking and Selected Altitude Capture Mode are armed
automatically.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Reduce power to allow descent in Indicated Airspeed Mode. The autopilot maintains the Airspeed Reference.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
3) As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft. After leveling off reset Selected Altitude at
or below 9,000 ft.
AFCS
4) When the next TOD is reached, Vertical Path Tracking becomes active (may require acknowledgment to allow
descent path capture).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) As the aircraft nears the VNV Target Altitude, the flight director transitions to VNV Target Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTV’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
INDEX
APPENDICES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the VNV Target Altitude;
the autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft at the vertical waypoint.
484
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
VP
TH
M
od
e
ALT Mode
1
IA
S
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Planned
TOD
2
BOD
VNAV Target Altitude of 10,000 MSL
Pla
nn
M
od
e
3
Selected Altitude of 9,400 MSL
ed
De
sce
nt
Pa
th
ALT Mode
TOD
4
VP
TH
de
5
BOD
EIS
VNAV Target Altitude of 9,000 MSL
Mo
ALT Mode
Selected Altitude
OPSHN
HABUK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3 nm
Figure 7-37 Non-path Descent
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
APPROACH
NOTE: If an approach contains a DME arc, the arc must be flown in Navigation Mode with the AFCS. When
receiving vectors from ATC, Navigation Mode must be selected prior to intercepting the ARC.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flying an ILS approach:
1) Transition from GPS Navigation Mode to Heading Select Mode.
a) Select the Runway 35L ILS approach for KCOS and select ‘VECTORS’ for the transition. Load and activate the
approach into the flight plan.
AFCS
b) Use the HDG Knob to set the Selected Heading after getting vectors from ATC.
c) Press the HDG Key. The autopilot turns the aircraft to the desired heading.
d) Use Heading Select Mode to comply with ATC vectors as requested.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Arm LOC Approach and Glideslope modes.
a) Ensure the appropriate localizer frequency is tuned.
APPENDICES
b) Press the APR Key when cleared for approach to arm Approach and Glideslope modes. ‘LOC’ and ‘GS’ appear
in white as armed mode annunciations.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
c) The navigation source automatically switches to LOC. After this switch occurs, the localizer signal can be captured
and the flight director determines when to begin the turn to intercept the final approach course. The flight
director now provides guidance to the missed approach point.
485
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
3) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the ILS approach:
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
KCOS
EIS
LOC APR/
GS Mode
3
PETEY
G
HD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
e
od
M
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PYNON
AFCS
Figure 7-38 ILS Approach to KCOS
Flying a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance (SBAS Only):
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Arm flight director modes for a RNAV GPS approach with vertical guidance:
a) Make sure the navigation source is set to GPS (use CDI Softkey to change navigation source).
b) Select the Runway 35R LPV approach for KCOS. Load and activate the approach into the flight plan.
APPENDICES
2) Press the APR Key once clearance for approach has been received. GPS Approach Mode is activated and
Glidepath Mode is armed.
INDEX
3) Once the glidepath is captured, Glidepath Mode becomes active. The flight director now provides guidance to
the missed approach point.
486
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) There are two options available at this point, as the autopilot flies the approach:
• Push the AP DISC Button at the decision height and land the aircraft.
• Use the GA Button to execute a missed approach.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
KCOS
4
EIS
3
GPS APR/
GP Mode
CEGIX
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2
FALUR
HABUK
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
PYNON
1
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GPS NAV Mode
AFCS
Figure 7-39 LPV Approach to KCOS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
487
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
GO AROUND/MISSED APPROACH
NOTE: As a result of calculations performed by the system while flying the holding pattern, the display may
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
re-size automatically and the aircraft may not precisely track the holding pattern as depicted on the PFD and
MFD.
Flying a missed approach:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
1) Push the GA Button at the Decision height and apply go-around power to execute a missed approach. The
flight director Command Bars establish a nose-up climb to follow. If flying an ILS or LOC approach the CDI also
switches to GPS as the navigation source.
2) Start the climb to the prescribed altitude in the published Missed Approach Procedure (in this case, 10,000 ft).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press the NAV Key to have the autopilot fly to the hold.
3) Use the ALT SEL Knob to set a Selected Altitude to hold.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
To hold the current airspeed during the climb, press the IAS Key.
AFCS
As the aircraft nears the Selected Altitude, the flight director transitions to Selected Altitude Capture Mode,
indicated by the green ‘ALTS’ annunciation flashing for up to 10 seconds.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The green ‘ALT’ annunciation flashes for up to 10 seconds upon reaching 50 feet from the Selected Altitude; the
autopilot transitions to Altitude Hold Mode and levels the aircraft.
INDEX
APPENDICES
4) The autopilot flies the holding pattern after the missed approach is activated. Annunciations are displayed in
the Navigation Status Box, above the AFCS Status Box.
488
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4
EIS
MOGAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
GPS NAV Mode
3
2
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
GA Mode
KCOS
1
AFCS
Figure 7-40 Go Around/Missed Approach
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
489
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
AFCS ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
AFCS STATUS ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The annunciations in Table 7-5 (listed in order of increasing priority) can appear on the PFD above the
Airspeed and Attitude indicators. Only one annunciation may occur at a time, and messages are prioritized
by criticality.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
AFCS Status Annunciation
Figure 7-41 AFCS Status Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Alert Condition
Rudder Mistrim Right
Rudder Mistrim Left
Aileron Mistrim Right
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aileron Mistrim Left
Elevator Mistrim Down
Elevator Mistrim Up
AFCS
Pitch Trim Failure
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Yaw Damper Failure
Description
Yaw servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Roll servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
Pitch servo providing sustained force in the indicated direction
If AP engaged, take control of the aircraft and disengage AP
If AP disengaged, move MET switch to unstick
YD control failure
Roll Failure
Roll axis control failure; AP inoperative
Pitch Failure
Pitch axis control failure
System Failure
APPENDICES
Annunciation
Preflight Test
AP and MET are unavailable; FD may still be available
Performing preflight system test.
Do not press the AP DISC Button during servo power-up and preflight system
tests as this may cause the preflight system test to fail or never to start (if servos
fail their power-up tests). Power must be cycled to the servos to remedy the
situation.
INDEX
Preflight system test failed; aural alert sounds at failure
Hypoxia Recognition
System is activated
Activated only by the Hypoxia Recognition System
Table 7-5 AFCS Status Alerts
490
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OVERSPEED PROTECTION
NOTE: Overspeed protection is not active in ALT, GS or GP Modes.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While Pitch Hold, Vertical Speed, Indicated Airspeed, Vertical Path Tracking, or an altitude capture mode is
active, airspeed is monitored by the flight director. Pitch commands are not changed until overspeed protection
becomes active. Overspeed protection is provided in situations where the flight director cannot acquire and
maintain the mode reference for the selected vertical mode without exceeding the certified maximum autopilot
airspeed.
EIS
When an autopilot overspeed condition occurs, the Airspeed Reference appears in a box above the Airspeed
Indicator, flashing a yellow ‘MAXSPD’ annunciation. The autopilot, if engaged, will follow the pitch up
command from the flight director. Engine power should be reduced and/or the pitch reference adjusted to slow
the aircraft. The annunciation disappears when the overspeed condition is resolved.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
NOTE: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
to normal limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airspeed
Indicator
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-42 Overspeed Annunciation
UNDERSPEED PROTECTION
AFCS
NOTE: While underspeed protection is active, the aircraft will deviate from the selected reference.
Underspeed Protection is designed to discourage aircraft operation below minimum established airspeeds and
is available when the autopilot is on.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
When the aircraft reaches a predetermined airspeed (Table 7-6), a yellow MINSPD annunciation (Figure 7-43)
will appear above the airspeed indicator. When the airspeed trend vector reaches a predetermined airspeed
(Table 7-6), a single aural “AIRSPEED” will sound, alerting the pilot to the impending underspeed condition.
TKS FIKI *
APPENDICES
Flaps MINSPD Annunciation Aural AIRSPEED Alert
0%
80 kt
85 kt
OFF
50%
76 kt
80 kt
100%
70 kt
80 kt
0%
85 kt
90 kt
ON
50%
81 kt
85 kt
* The optional TKS Flight Into Known Icing (FIKI) Anti-Ice System is only
available on SR22 Models
INDEX
Table 7-6 MINSPD Annunciation and AIRSPEED Alert
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
491
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Airspeed
Indicator
Figure 7-43 MINSPD Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
If the aircraft continues to decelerate, Underspeed Protection functionality depends on which vertical flight
director mode is selected. For the purpose of this discussion, the vertical flight director modes can be divided
into two categories: Those in which it is important to maintain altitude for as long as possible (altitude-critical
modes), and those in which maintaining altitude is less crucial (non-altitude critical modes).
ALTITUDE-CRITICAL MODES (ALT, GS, GP, TO, GA)
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If the aircraft decelerates to stall warning for at least one second, the lateral and vertical flight director
modes will change from active to armed (Figure 7-44). The autopilot will provide input causing the aircraft
to pitch down to maintain an airspeed no less than stall warning activation speed plus two knots, and the
wings to level.
Lateral and
Vertical FD
Modes Armed
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 7-44 Lateral and Vertical Flight Director Modes Armed
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
An aural “AIRSPEED” alert will sound every five seconds and a red “UNDERSPEED PROTECT ACTIVE”
annunciation (Figure 7-45) will appear in the CAS window.
Figure 7-45 Underspeed Protect Active Annunciation
INDEX
When airspeed increases (as a result of adding power/thrust) to above the IAS at which stall warning turns
off, plus two knots, the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch up until recapturing the vertical reference.
The vertical and lateral flight director modes will change from armed to active.
492
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NON-ALTITUDE CRITICAL MODES (VS, VNAV, LVL, PIT, IAS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the aircraft decelerates to an IAS below the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed, a red “UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE” annunciation (Figure 7-45) will appear in the CAS window. The vertical flight director
mode will change from active to armed (Figure 7-46), and the autopilot will cause the aircraft to pitch down
until reaching a pitch attitude at which IAS equals the minimum commandable autopilot airspeed.
Vertical FD
Mode Armed
EIS
Figure 7-46 Vertical Flight Director Mode Armed
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When sufficient power/thrust is available, the autopilot will recapture the previously selected vertical
reference and the flight director mode will change from armed to active.
NOTE: When the autopilot is outside normal operating limits, it uses more aggressive commands to return
to normal limits.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
493
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC FLIGHT CONTROL SYSTEM
7.2 S-TEC FIFTY FIVE X AUTOPILOT (OPTIONAL)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: This section covers only the additional ‘AP’ (autopilot engaged) status annunciation that may appear
in the Perspective™ AFCS Status Box. This status annunciation is not analogous to both the Perspective™
and the S-TEC Fifty Five X. Refer to the approved S-TEC Fifty Five X Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for
comprehensive list of annunciations and operating instructions.
EIS
In addition to the status and mode annunciations that are simultaneously displayed on both the Perspective™
(AFCS Status Box) and the S-TEC Fifty Five X (Autopilot Display and/or Remote Annunciator Display), the
Perspective™ displays an additional status annunciation of ‘AP’ when the autopilot is engaged.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Autopilot
Status
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 7-47 Autopilot Engaged (Perspective™ AFCS Status Box)
494
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SECTION 8 ADDITIONAL FEATURES
NOTE: With the availability of SafeTaxi®, ChartView, or FliteCharts®, it may be necessary to carry another
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
source of charts on-board the aircraft.
Additional features of the system include the following:
• Data Link (Wi-Fi)
• Scheduler
• Electronic Checklists
• Flight Data Logging
• Hypoxia Prevention System
• Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) System
• Position Reporting
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™)
• Enhanced Vision System (EVS)
• SafeTaxi® diagrams
• ChartView and FliteCharts® electronic charts
• AOPA or AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory
• SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment
• Satellite telephone and SMS messaging services
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
190-00820-10 Rev. A
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT™) provides a three-dimensional forward view of terrain features
on the PFD. SVT imagery shows the pilot’s view of relevant features in relation to the aircraft attitude, as well as
the flight path pertaining to the active flight plan.
The Perspective™ system provides a control and display interface to an Enhanced Vision System to aid situational
awareness.
SafeTaxi diagrams provide detailed taxiway, runway, and ramp information at more than 700 airports in the
United States. By decreasing range on an airport that has a SafeTaxi diagram available, a close up view of the
airport layout can be seen.
The optional ChartView and FliteCharts provide on-board electronic terminal procedures charts. Electronic
charts offer the convenience of rapid access to essential information. Either ChartView or FliteCharts may be
configured in the system, but not both.
The AOPA and AC-U-KWIK Airport Directories offer detailed information for a selected airport, such as available
services, hours of operation, and lodging options.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment audio feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver handles
more than 170 channels of music, news, and sports. SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers more entertainment choices
and longer range coverage than commercial broadcast stations.
Telephone and Data Link Services are optional subscription services offered through Garmin Flight Data Services
and Iridium Satellite LLC. Voice and SMS messaging communications are through the Iridium Satellite Network.
Data communications are through Iridium Data Services, or a wireless network (Wi-Fi) when the aircraft is on
the ground.
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display short term or long term reminder messages such as
Switch fuel tanks, Change oil, or Altimeter-Transponder Check in the Messages Window on the PFD.
Optional checklists help to quickly find the proper procedure on the ground or during flight.
The Flight Data Logging feature automatically stores critical flight and engine data on an SD data card.
Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each 1GB of available space on the card.
The optional Hypoxia Prevention System provides protection to aircraft occupants from succumbing to the
debilitating affects of hypoxia.
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system discourages aircraft operation outside
the normal flight envelope.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
495
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.1 SYNTHETIC VISION TECHNOLOGY (SVT)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
WARNING: Use appropriate primary systems for navigation, and for terrain, obstacle, and traffic avoidance.
SVT is intended as an aid to situational awareness only and may not provide either the accuracy or reliability
upon which to solely base decisions and/or plan maneuvers to avoid terrain, obstacles, or traffic.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The optional Synthetic Vision Technology (SVT) is a visual enhancement to the Perspective™ Integrated Avionics
System. SVT depicts a forward-looking attitude display of the topography immediately in front of the aircraft.
The field of view is 30 degrees to the left and 35 degrees to the right. SVT information is shown on the Primary
Flight Display (PFD), or on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode (Figure 8‑127). The depicted
imagery is derived from the aircraft attitude, heading, GPS three-dimensional position, and a nine arc-second
database of terrain, obstacles, and other relevant features. The terrain data resolution of nine arc-seconds, meaning
the terrain elevation contours are stored in squares measuring nine arc-seconds on each side, is required for the
operation of SVT. Loss of any of the required data, including temporary loss of the GPS signal, will cause SVT to
be disabled until the required data is restored.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The SVT terrain display shows land contours (colors are consistent with those of the topographical map display),
large water features, towers, and other obstacles over 200’ AGL that are included in the obstacle database. Cultural
features on the ground such as roads, highways, railroad tracks, cities, and state boundaries are not displayed even
if those features are found on the MFD map. The terrain display also includes a north–south east–west grid with
lines oriented with true north and spaced at one arc-minute intervals to assist in orientation relative to the terrain.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The optional Terrain Awareness and Warning System (TAWS-B) or standard Terrain-SVT is integrated within
SVT to provide visual and auditory alerts to indicate the presence of terrain and obstacle threats relevant to the
projected flight path. Terrain alerts are displayed in red and yellow shading on the PFD.
AFCS
The terrain display is intended for situational awareness only. It may not provide the accuracy or fidelity on
which to base decisions and plan maneuvers to avoid terrain or obstacles. Navigation must not be predicated
solely upon the use of the Terrain–SVT or TAWS-B terrain or obstacle data displayed by the SVT.
• Pathways
• Airport Signs
• Flight Path Marker
• Runway Display
• Horizon Heading Marks
• Terrain Alerting
• Traffic Display
• Obstacle Alerting
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The following SVT enhancements appear on the PFD:
496
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-1 Synthetic Vision Imagery
SVT OPERATION
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT is activated from the PFD using the softkeys located along the bottom edge of the display. Pressing the
softkeys turns the related function on or off. When SVT is enabled, the pitch scale increments are reduced to
10 degrees up and 7.5 degrees down.
AFCS
SVT functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. The PFD Softkey leads into the PFD function
Softkeys, including synthetic vision. Pressing the SYN VIS Softkey displays the SVT feature softkeys. The
softkeys are labeled PATHWAY, SYN TERR, and APTSIGNS. The HRZN HDG displays the Horizin Heading
indications and is available independent of the other SVT functions. When Horizon Heading is enabled, the
Flight Path Marker may also be enabled independent of SVT by means of the FPM Softkey. The BACK Softkey
returns to the previous level of softkeys.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY Softkeys are only available when the SYN TERR Softkey is enabled (gray with
black characters). After enabling the SYN TERR Softkey, the APTSIGNS, and PATHWAY softkeys may be
enabled in any combination to display desired features. When system power is cycled, the last selected state
(on or off) of the SYN TERR, HRZN HDG, APTSIGNS, PATHWAY, and FPM softkeys is remembered by the
system.
• PATHWAY Softkey enables display of rectangular boxes that represent course guidance.
• SYN TERR Softkey enables synthetic terrain depiction.
• HRZN HDG Softkey enables horizon heading marks and digits on the Zero Pitch Line.
INDEX
• APTSIGNS Softkey enables airport signposts.
• FPM Softkey enables the Flight Path Marker when SVT is not enabled (HRZN HDG must be enabled).
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
497
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
PFD
BACK
SYN VIS
Pressing the BACK Softkey
returns to the top-level softkeys.
BACK
SYN TERR HRZN HDG APTSIGNS
EIS
PATHWAY
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns to the previous level of softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FPM
Figure 8-2 SVT Softkeys
Enabling/disabling SVT:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the SYN TERR Softkey. The SVT display will cycle on or off with the SYN TERR Softkey.
Enabling/disabling Pathways:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
3) Press the PATHWAY Softkey. The Pathway feature will cycle on or off with the PATHWAY Softkey.
Enabling/disabling Horizon Heading:
AFCS
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
3) Press the HRZN HDG Softkey. The horizon heading display will cycle on or off with the HRZN HDG Softkey.
Enabling/disabling Airport Signs:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
APPENDICES
3) Press the APTSIGNS Softkey. Display of airport signs will cycle on or off with the APTSIGNS Softkey.
Enabling/disabling the Flight Path Marker:
1) Press the PFD Softkey.
2) Press the SYN VIS Softkey.
INDEX
3) With the SYN TERR Softkey disabled, press the HRZN HDG Softkey.
2) Press the FPM Softkey.
498
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
SVT FEATURES
Flight
Path
Marker
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
Pathways
Color
Matches CDI
Indicating
NAV Source
Airport
Runway
EIS
Zero
Pitch Line
(ZPL) with
Compass
Heading
Marks
Airplane
Symbol
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Synthetic
Terrain
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT
Softkeys
Figure 8-3 SVT on the Primary Flight Display
NOTE: Pathways and terrain features are not a substitute for standard course and altitude deviation
information provided by the altimeter, CDI, and VDI.
AFCS
PATHWAYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pathways provide a three-dimensional perspective view of the selected route of flight shown as colored rectangular
boxes representing the horizontal and vertical flight path of the active flight plan. The box size represents 700 feet
wide by 200 feet tall during enroute, oceanic, and terminal flight phases. During an approach, the box width is
700 feet or one half full scale deviation on the HSI, whichever is less. The height is 200 feet or one half full scale
deviation on the VDI, whichever is less. The altitude at which the pathway boxes are displayed is determined by
the selected altitude during climb, cruise, and when the active leg is the final approach course prior to intercepting
the glidepath/glideslope. During a descent (except while on the approach glidepath/glideslope), the pathway boxes
are displayed at the selected altitude, or the VNAV altitude programmed for the active leg in the flight plan, or the
published altitude constraint, whichever is higher (Figure 8-4). Just prior to intercepting the glidepath/glideslope,
the pathway boxes are displayed on the glidepath/glideslope, or the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The color of the rectangular boxes may be magenta, green, or white depending on the route of flight and
navigation source selected. The active GPS or GPS overlay flight plan leg is represented by magenta boxes that
correspond to the Magenta CDI. A localizer course is represented by green boxes that correspond to a green CDI.
An inactive leg of an active flight plan is represented by white boxes corresponding to a white line drawn on the
Inset map or MFD map indicating an inactive leg.
499
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selected
Altitude
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Programmed
Altitudes
Figure 8-4 Programmed and Selected Altitude
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pathways provide supplemental glidepath/glideslope information on an active ILS, LPV, LNAV/VNAV, LP,
and some LNAV approaches. Pathways are intended as an aid to situational awareness and should not be
used independent of the CDI, VDI, glide path indicator, and glide slope indicator. They are removed from
the display when the selected navigation information is not available. Pathways are not displayed beyond the
active leg when leg sequencing is suspended and are not displayed on any portion of the flight plan leg that
would lead to intercepting a leg in the wrong direction.
Departure and Enroute
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Prior to intercepting an active flight plan leg, pathways are displayed as a series of boxes with pointers at
each corner that point in the direction of the active waypoint. Pathways are not displayed for the first leg
of the flight plan if that segment is a Heading-to-Altitude leg. The first segment displaying pathways is the
first active GPS leg or active leg with a GPS overlay. If this leg of the flight plan route is outside the SVT
field of view, pathways will not be visible until the aircraft has turned toward this leg. While approaching
the center of the active leg and prescribed altitude, the number of pathway boxes decreases to a minimum
of four.
INDEX
Climb profiles cannot be displayed due to the variables associated with aircraft performance. Flight
plan legs requiring a climb are indicated by pathways displayed at a level above the aircraft at the altitude
selected or programmed.
500
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Descent and Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pathways are shown descending only for a programmed descent (Figures 8-5, 8-6). When the flight
plan includes programmed descent segments, pathways are displayed along the descent path provided the
selected altitude is lower than the programmed altitude.
When an approach providing vertical guidance is activated, Pathways are shown level at the selected
altitude up to the point along the final approach course where the altitude intercepts the extended vertical
descent path, glidepath, or glideslope. From the vertical path descent, glidepath, or glideslope intercept
point, the pathways are shown inbound to the Missed Approach Point (MAP) along the published lateral
and vertical descent path, or at the selected altitude, whichever is lower.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
During an ILS approach, the initial approach segment is displayed in magenta at the segment altitudes
if GPS is selected as the navigation source on the CDI. When switching to localizer inbound with LOC
selected as the navigation source on the CDI, pathways are displayed in green along the localizer and glide
slope.
VOR, LOC BC, and ADF approach segments that are approved to be flown using GPS are displayed in
magenta boxes. Segments that are flown using other than GPS or ILS, such as heading legs or VOR final
approach courses are not displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Selected Altitude
set for Enroute
Selected Altitude
set for Departure
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Climbs NOT
displayed
by pathway
Non-programmed descents NOT displayed by pathway
TOD
AFCS
Selected Altitude
for Step Down
Programmed descent
displayed by pathway
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Selected Altitude or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
APPENDICES
Figure 8-5 SVT Pathways, Enroute and Descent
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
501
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Missed Approach
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Upon activating the missed approach, pathways lead to the Missed Approach Holding Point (MAHP) and
are displayed as a level path at the published altitude for the MAHP, or the selected altitude, whichever is
the highest. If the initial missed approach leg is a Course-to-Altitude (CA) leg, the pathways boxes will
be displayed level at the altitude published for the MAHP. If the initial missed approach leg is defined by
a course using other than GPS, pathways are not displayed for that segment. In this case, the pathways
displayed for the next leg may be outside the field of view and will be visible when the aircraft has turned
in the direction of that leg.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pathways are displayed along each segment including the path required to track course reversals that are
part of a procedure, such as holding patterns. Pathways boxes will not indicate a turn to a MAHP unless a
defined geographical waypoint exists between the MAP and MAHP.
FAF
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Descent displayed
by pathway
Selected Altitude
or Programmed Altitude
(whichever is higher)
MAP Climbs NOT displayed
by pathway
Turn Segment
NOT displayed
by pathway
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
MAHP
INDEX
Figure 8-6 SVT Pathways, Approach, Missed Approach, and Holding
502
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT PATH MARKER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Flight Path Marker (FPM), also known as a Velocity Vector, is displayed on the PFD at groundspeeds
above 30 knots. The FPM depicts the approximate projected path of the aircraft accounting for wind speed
and direction relative to the three-dimensional terrain display and/or horizon and heading.
The FPM is always available when the Synthetic Terrain feature is in operation, however, it may also be
enabled independent of the Synthetic Terrain display. The FPM represents the direction of the flight path as
it relates to the terrain and obstacles on the display, while the airplane symbol represents the aircraft heading.
When SVT is disabled, the FPM represents the flight path in relation to the Zero Pitch Line and heading.
EIS
The FPM works in conjunction with the Pathways feature to assist the pilot in maintaining desired altitudes
and direction when navigating a flight plan. When on course and altitude the FPM is aligned inside the
pathway boxes as shown (Figure 8-7).
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
When SVT is enabled, the FPM may also be used to identify a possible conflict with the aircraft flight path
and distant terrain or obstacles. Displayed terrain or obstacles in the aircraft’s flight path extending above the
FPM could indicate a potential conflict, even before an alert is issued by TAWS-B or Terrain-SVT. However,
decisions regarding terrain and/or obstacle avoidance should not be made using only the FPM.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Flight Path
Marker
(FPM)
AFCS
Wind
Vector
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-7 Flight Path Marker and Pathways
ZERO PITCH LINE
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
The Zero Pitch Line is drawn completely across the display and represents the horizon when the terrain
horizon is difficult to distinguish from other terrain being displayed. It may not align with the terrain
horizon, particularly when the terrain is mountainous or when the aircraft is flown at high altitudes.
503
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HORIZON HEADING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Horizon Heading is synchronized with the HSI and shows approximately 60 degrees of compass
heading in 30‑degree increments on the Zero Pitch Line. Horizon Heading tick marks and digits appearing
on the Zero Pitch Line are not visible behind either the airspeed or altitude display. Horizon Heading is used
for general heading awareness, and is activated and deactivated by pressing the HRZN HDG Softkey.
TRAFFIC
WARNING: Intruder aircraft at or below 500 ft. AGL may not appear on the SVT display or may appear as a
EIS
partial symbol.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Traffic symbols are displayed in their approximate locations as determined by the related traffic systems.
Traffic symbols are displayed in three dimensions, appearing larger as they are getting closer, and smaller
when they are further away. Traffic within 250 feet laterally of the aircraft will not be displayed on the SVT
display. Traffic symbols and coloring are consistent with that used for traffic displayed in the Inset map or
MFD traffic page. If the traffic altitude is unknown, the traffic will not be displayed on the SVT display. For
more details refer to the traffic system discussion in the Hazard Avoidance section.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AIRPORT SIGNS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Airport Signs provide a visual representation of airport location and identification on the synthetic terrain
display. When activated, the signs appear on the display when the aircraft is approximately 15 nm from
an airport and disappear at approximately 4.5 nm. Airport signs are shown without the identifier until
the aircraft is approximately eight nautical miles from the airport. Airport signs are not shown behind the
airspeed or altitude display. Airport signs are activated and deactivated by pressing the APTSIGNS Softkey.
AFCS
Traffic
Airport
Sign
without
Identifier
(Between
8 nm and
15 nm)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport
Sign with
Identifier
(Between
4.5 nm and
8 nm)
Figure 8-8 Airport Signs
504
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
RUNWAYS
WARNING: Do not use SVT runway depiction as the sole means for determining the proximity of the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
to the runway or for maintaining the proper approach path angle during landing.
NOTE: Not all airports have runways with endpoint data in the database, therefore, these runways are not
displayed.
EIS
Runway data provides improved awareness of runway location with respect to the surrounding terrain. All
runway thresholds are depicted at their respective elevations as defined in the database. In some situations,
where threshold elevations differ significantly, crossing runways may appear to be layered. As runways are
displayed, those within 45 degrees of the aircraft heading are displayed in white. Other runways will be gray
in color. When an approach for a specific runway is active, that runway will appear brighter and be outlined
with a white box, regardless of the runway orientation as related to aircraft heading. As the aircraft gets closer
to the runway, more detail such as runway numbers and centerlines will be displayed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Runway
Selected for
Approach
Other
Runway
on Airport
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-9 Airport Runways
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
505
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERRAIN - SVT AND TAWS-B ALERTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Terrain alerting on the synthetic terrain display is triggered by Forward-looking Terrain Avoidance (FLTA)
alerts, and corresponds to the red and yellow X symbols on the Inset Map and MFD map displays. For more
detailed information regarding Terrain-SVT and TAWS-B, refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section.
In some instances, a terrain or obstacle alert may be issued with no conflict shading displayed on the
synthetic terrain. In these cases, the conflict is outside the SVT field of view to the left or right of the aircraft.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Terrain
Caution
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Potential
Impact
Point
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-10 Terrain Alert
506
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Obstacles are represented on the synthetic terrain display by standard two-dimensional tower symbols found
on the Inset map and MFD maps and charts. Obstacle symbols appear in the perspective view with relative
height above terrain and distance from the aircraft. Unlike the Inset map and MFD moving map display,
obstacles on the synthetic terrain display do not change colors to warn of potential conflict with the aircraft’s
flight path until the obstacle is associated with an actual FLTA alert. Obstacles greater than 1000 feet below the
aircraft altitude are not shown. Obstacles are shown behind the airspeed and altitude displays.
EIS
TERRAIN
Annunciation
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Obstacle
Warning
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Potential
Impact
Point
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-11 Obstacle
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
507
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FIELD OF VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The PFD field of view can be represented on the MFD Navigation Map Page. Two dashed lines forming a
V‑shape in front of the aircraft symbol on the map, represent the forward viewing area shown on the PFD.
Configuring field of view:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight Map Setup and press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Field of
View
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Map Setup Menu, Map Group, Field of View Option
AFCS
Figure 8-12 Option Menus
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Map Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to FIELD OF VIEW.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to select On or Off.
INDEX
APPENDICES
6) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
508
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The following figure compares the PFD forward looking depiction with the MFD plan view and FIELD OF
VIEW turned on.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Lines
Depict
PFD Field
of View
EIS
Field of View on the MFD
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SVT View on the PFD
Figure 8-13 MFD and PFD Field of View Comparison
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
509
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.2 ENHANCED VISION SYSTEM (EVS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective™ system provides a control and display interface to an optional Enhanced Vision System. EVS
is designed to provide an aid to situational awareness while operating in low visibility environments. The EVS
camera view is displayed on the AUX - VIDEO page.
IMAGE QUALITY AND INTERPRETATION
EIS
Image quality may vary according to target size, target temperature, background temperature, and attenuation
from airborne particles or moisture within view of the sensor. If the video signal is ever completely interrupted,
the display may appear as a solid field of gray, white, or blue, and the message No Video or NO DATA AVAILABLE
may appear.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The EVS periodically calibrates itself to optimize the image. The calibration process can be observed on the
display as a one second image interruption, which happens every five minutes or when calibration is manually
activated.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Upon power-up the EVS requires approximately 30 seconds to produce a usable image. The image generated
is monochrome (black and white). Normally the hotter an object is the whiter it appears on the display.
EVS Data Unavailable
EVS Calibration
AFCS
Figure 8-14 EVS Messages
EVS SOFTKEYS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
While on the AUX - VIDEO Page, pressing the VID ZM + or VID ZM - Softkeys increases or decreases EVS
display magnification between 1x and 2x.
APPENDICES
Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey removes the map and displays EVS on the full screen. The softkey label
changes to grey with black characters. Pressing the HIDE MAP Softkey again restores the map view and the
small EVS image. The softkey label returns to white characters on a black background.
Pressing the SETUP Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: CNTRST -, CNTRST +, BRIGHT -,
BRIGHT +, SAT -, SAT +, RESET, and BACK.
INDEX
Pressing the CNTRST - and CNTRST + Softkeys adjust display contrast in five percent increments from 0 to
100%. Pressing the BRIGHT - and BRIGHT + Softkeys adjust display brightness in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%. Pressing the SAT - and SAT + Softkeys adjust display saturation in five percent increments
from 0 to 100%.
510
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the RESET Softkey returns all video adjustments options to the default settings.
While viewing the SETUP Softkeys, pressing the BACK Softkey or after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the
system reverts to the AUX - VIDEO Page softkeys.
ENGINE
CNTRST +
SETUP
BRIGHT -
BRIGHT +
ZOOM IN ZOOM OUT
SAT -
SAT +
HIDE MAP
RESET
EIS
CNTRST -
MAP
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The EVS softkeys shown below appear on the AUX - VIDEO Page.
BACK
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Previous Level Softkeys.
Figure 8-15 EVS Softkeys
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The video adjustment options can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting video adjustment options:
1) While viewing the AUX - VIDEO Page press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the desired video adjustment option and press the ENT Key.
Once the ENT key is pressed on any option, the page menu closes and returns to the AUX - VIDEO Page.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-16 AUX - VIDEO Page Menu
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
511
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EVS
Camera
View
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Map
View
EVS
Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-17 EVS and Map on the AUX - Video Page
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
EVS View
with Map
Hidden
Figure 8-18 Full Screen EVS Image
512
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.3 SAFETAXI
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi is an enhanced feature that gives greater map detail when viewing airports at close range. The
maximum map ranges for enhanced detail are pilot configurable. When viewing at ranges close enough to
show the airport detail, the map reveals taxiways with identifying letters/numbers, airport Hot Spots, and airport
landmarks including ramps, buildings, control towers, and other prominent features. Resolution is greater at
lower map ranges. When the MFD display is within the SafeTaxi ranges, the airplane symbol on the airport
provides enhanced position awareness.
EIS
Designated Hot Spots are recognized at airports with many intersecting taxiways and runways, and/or complex
ramp areas. Airport Hot Spots are outlined to caution pilots of areas on an airport surface where positional
awareness confusion or runway incursions happen most often. Hot Spots are defined with a magenta circle or
outline around the region of possible confusion.
• VOR Information Page
• Inset Map (PFD)
• User Waypoint Information Page
• Weather Datalink Page
• Trip Planning Page
• Airport Information Page
• Nearest Pages
• Intersection Information Page
• Active and Stored Flight Plan Pages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Navigation Map Page
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Any map page that displays the navigation view can also show the SafeTaxi airport layout within the maximum
configured range. The following is a list of pages where the SafeTaxi feature can be seen:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• NDB Information Page
During ground operations the aircraft’s position is displayed in reference to taxiways, runways, and airport
features. In the example shown, the aircraft is on taxiway Bravo inside the High Alert Intersection boundary
on KSFO airport. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta. When panning over the airport, features such as
runway holding lines and taxiways are shown at the cursor.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
513
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Taxiway
Identification
EIS
Aircraft
Position
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Airport Hot
Spot Outline
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Features
Figure 8-19 SafeTaxi Depiction on the Navigation Map Page
DCLTR Softkey
Removes Taxiway
Markings
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DCLTR Softkey (declutter) label advances to DCLTR-1, DCLTR -2, and DCLTR-3 each time the softkey is
pressed for easy recognition of decluttering level. Pressing the DCLTR Softkey removes the taxiway markings
and airport feature labels. Pressing the DCLTR-1 Softkey removes VOR and station ID, the VOR symbol, and
intersection names if within the airport plan view. Pressing the DCLTR-2 Softkey removes the airport diagram
and runway layout, unless the airport in view is part of an active route structure. Pressing the DCLTR-3 Softkey
cycles back to the original map detail. Refer to Map Declutter Levels in the Flight Management Section.
514
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Configuring SafeTaxi range:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Map Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-20 Navigation Map PAGE MENU, Map Setup Option
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the Aviation Group and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the Aviation Group options to SAFETAXI.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Turn the small FMS Knob to display the range of distances.
6) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired distance for maximum SafeTaxi display range.
7) Press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Press the FMS Knob to return to the Navigation Map Page.
AFCS
SAFETAXI
Option
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi
Range
Options
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-21 MAP SETUP Menu, Aviation Group, SAFETAXI Range Options
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
515
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SAFETAXI CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SafeTaxi database is revised every 56 days. SafeTaxi is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SafeTaxi Database
Figure 8-22 Power-up Page, SafeTaxi Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. SafeTaxi database is valid and within current cycle.
SafeTaxi database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no SafeTaxi data.
Table 8-1 SafeTaxi Annunciation Definitions
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The SafeTaxi Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be found
on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-23.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is
shown.
516
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The SafeTaxi database cycle number shown in the figure, 13S1, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
S – Indicates the data is for SafeTaxi
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1 – Indicates the first issue of the SafeTaxi database for the year
The SafeTaxi EFFECTIVE date 13–JAN–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. SafeTaxi
EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SafeTaxi Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-23 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
SafeTaxi information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data is
current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue
when data is current and in yellow when expired (Figures 8‑23 and 8-24). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue
in the REGION field if SafeTaxi data is not available on the database card (Figure 8‑24). An expired SafeTaxi
database is not disabled and will continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey a second time. The softkey label will change to PFD1 DB. The DATABASE
window will now be displaying database information for the PFD. As before, scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the SafeTaxi database information is shown.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for instructions on revising the SafeTaxi database.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
517
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EFFECTIVE date is the
beginning date for this database cycle. If the present date is before the effective date, the EFFECTIVE date
appears in yellow and the EXPIRES date appears in blue. The EXPIRES date is the revision date for the next
database cycle. NOT AVAILABLE indicates that SafeTaxi is not available on the database card or no database
card is inserted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is before Effective Date
SafeTaxi Database has Expired
SafeTaxi Database Not Installed
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-24 AUX – System Status Page, SafeTaxi Database Status
518
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.4 CHARTVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional ChartView charts resemble the paper version of Jeppesen terminal procedures charts. The charts
are displayed in full color with high-resolution. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the moving
map in the planview of approach charts and on airport diagrams. Airport Hot Spots are outlined in magenta.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. Inset boxes (Figure 8-25) are not considered within the chart
boundaries. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol reaches a chart boundary line, or inset box, the aircraft symbol
is removed from the display.
EIS
Figure 8-25 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, the grey shading is for
illustrative purposes only and will not appear on the published chart or MFD display. These off-scale areas
appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the depicted geographical position of this
information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic position. Therefore, when the aircraft
symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is relative to the chart planview, not to
the off-scale area.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Inset Box
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Area
Off-Scale
Areas
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-25 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
APPENDICES
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
The ChartView database subscription is available from Jeppesen, Inc. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Airport Diagrams
• Bottlang VFR Charts (additional subscription)
• Approaches
• NOTAMs
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
• Departure Procedures (DP)
519
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
CHARTVIEW SOFTKEYS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, NOTAM,
and GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys shown below appear on the Airport Information Page.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey advances to the next level of softkeys: ALL, HEADER, PLAN, PROFILE,
MINIMUMS, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
EIS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
SHW CHRT
CHRT
INFO
DP
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
CHRT OPT
STAR
APR
WX
NOTAM
GO BACK
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ALL
HEADER
PLAN
PROFILE
MINIMUMS FIT WDTH FULL SCN
BACK
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-26 ChartView SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
520
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-27 Option Menus
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available for the nearest airport or the selected airport, the banner
CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen. The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to
the Jeppesen subscription, but rather the availability of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a
selected airport.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-28 Chart Not Available Banner
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
INDEX
Figure 8-29 Unable To Display Chart Banner
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
521
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
EIS
The chart shown is the one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport
runway diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are
available, that page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport
is shown.
Selecting a chart:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Chart Scale
Select Desired
Approach Chart
From Menu
INDEX
APPENDICES
Scroll Through
Chart With
the Joystick
Figure 8-30 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
522
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart page can be scrolled using the Joystick. Pressing
the Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is shown on the chart only if the chart is to scale and the aircraft position is within
the boundaries of the chart. The aircraft symbol is not displayed when the Aircraft Not Shown Icon appears
(Figure 8‑34). If the Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, the aircraft symbol is not shown. The
Aircraft Not Shown Icon may appear at certain times, even if the chart is displayed to scale.
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey switches between the ChartView diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Colorado Springs, CO (KCOS)
Airport Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
ChartView and WPT Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-31 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
523
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft position is shown in magenta on the ChartView diagrams when the location of the aircraft is within
the chart boundaries. In the example shown, the aircraft is turning onto Taxiway Romeo on the Charlotte, NC
(KCLT) airport.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart for certain airports.
This information source is not related to the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected
using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. The Charlotte, NC airport has five additional charts offering
information; the Airport Diagram, Take-off Minimums, Class B Airspace, Airline Parking Gate Coordinates,
and Airline Parking Gate Location. The numbers in parentheses after the chart name are Jeppesen designators.
When a European airport is displayed on the WPT- Airport Information Page, the INFO Box will also list
appropriate VFR charts, provided the Bottlang Chart subscription has been added to the ChartView database.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Aircraft
Current
Position
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-32 Airport Information Page, INFO View, Full Screen Width
524
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
In the example shown in Figure 8-32, the Class B Chart is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Charlotte Class B Airspace Chart (Figure 8-33).
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-33 Airport Information Page, Class B Chart Selected from INFO View
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-34 Departure Information Page
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
525
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Chart Not
To Scale
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Change Range
and Scroll
Through the
Chart With the
Joystick
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
Figure 8-35 Arrival Information Page
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
INDEX
Figure 8-36 Approach Information Page
526
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, and includes weather data such as
METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver, when available. Weather information is available only when
an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
WX Info
When
Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
WX Softkey
Selected
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-37 Weather Information Page
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
AFCS
Recent NOTAMS applicable to the current ChartView cycle are included in the ChartView database. Pressing
the NOTAM Softkey shows the local NOTAM information for selected airports, when available. When NOTAMS
are not available, the NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled as shown in Figure 8-37. The
NOTAM Softkey may appear on the Airport Information Page and all of the chart page selections.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
527
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
NOTAM
Softkey
Appears for
Selected
Airports
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-38 NOTAM Softkey Highlighted
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Local
NOTAM on
This Airport
NOTAM
Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Figure 8-39 Airport Information Page, Local NOTAMs
Pressing the NOTAM Softkey again removes the NOTAMS information.
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page, Nearest Pages, or Flight
Plan Page).
528
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-26).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete approach chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-40 Approach Information Page, ALL View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
529
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the HEADER Softkey shows the header view (approach chart briefing strip) on the screen.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Approach
Chart
Briefing Strip
Figure 8-41 Approach Information Page, Header View
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the PLAN Softkey shows the approach chart two dimensional plan view.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Approach
Chart Plan
View
Figure 8-42 Approach Information Page, Plan View
530
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the PROFILE Softkey displays the approach chart descent profile strip.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Approach
Chart Descent
Profile Strip
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-43 Approach Information Page, Profile View, Full Screen Width
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Pressing the MINIMUMS Softkey displays the minimum descent altitude/visibility strip at the bottom of the
approach chart.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Minimum
Descent
Altitude/
Visibility Strip
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-44 Approach Information Page, Minimums View, Full Screen Width
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
531
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If the chart scale has been adjusted to view a small area of the chart, pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey
changes the chart size to fit the available screen width.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-45 Airport Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
532
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
Selecting Additional Information:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the FULL SCN Softkey to display the information windows
(AIRPORT, INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the AIRPORT, INFO, RUNWAYS, or FREQUENCIES Box (INFO Box shown).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired
choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT Key to complete the selection.
EIS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Available
Information
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Full
Screen and Chart
With Info Window
APPENDICES
Figure 8-46 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
INDEX
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
533
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
Selecting full screen On or Off:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-47 Page Menus
534
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-48 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑49).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
AFCS
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
535
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-49 Arrival Information Page, Day View
INDEX
Figure 8-50 Arrival Information Page, Night View
536
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHARTVIEW CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
ChartView database is revised every 14 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the
cycle expiration date to the disables date. ChartView is disabled 70 days after the expiration date and is no
longer available for viewing. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays the current status of the
ChartView database. See the table below for the various ChartView Power-up Page displays and the definition
of each.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView Database
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-51 Power-up Page, ChartView Database
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for ChartView. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for ChartView but no chart database is installed.
Contact Jeppesen for a ChartView database.
Normal operation. ChartView database is valid and within current
cycle.
ChartView database is within 1 week after expiration date. A new cycle
is available for update.
ChartView database is beyond 1 week after expiration date, but still
within the 70 day viewing period.
ChartView database has timed out. Database is beyond 70 days after
expiration date. ChartView database is no longer available for viewing.
System time is not available. GPS satellite data is unknown or the
system has not yet locked onto satellites. Check database cycle number
for effectivity.
System is verifying chart database when new cycle is installed for the
first time.
After verifying, chart database is found to be corrupt. ChartView is not
available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Table 8-2 ChartView Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
537
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The ChartView time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The database
CYCLE number, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the ChartView subscription appear in either blue or yellow
text. When the ChartView EXPIRES date is reached, ChartView becomes inoperative 70 days later. This is
shown as the DISABLES date. When the DISABLES date is reached, charts are no longer available for viewing.
The SHW CHRT Softkey label then appears subdued and is disabled until a revised issue of ChartView is
installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the ChartView database information is
shown.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The ChartView database cycle number shown in the figure, 1303, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
03 – Indicates the third issue of the ChartView database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The EXPIRES date 17–FEB–13 is the date that this database should be replaced with the next issue.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The DISABLES date 28–APR–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
APPENDICES
ChartView
Data
Figure 8-52 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Current and Available
INDEX
The ChartView database is provided directly from Jeppesen. Refer to Updating Jeppesen Databases in
Appendix B for instructions on revising the ChartView database.
538
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Other possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown in Figure 8-53. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database
cycle is no longer viewable. CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicates no ChartView data is available on the
database card or no database card is inserted.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
ChartView Database is Disabled
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
ChartView has Expired, but is not Disabled
ChartView Database is Not Available
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-53 AUX – System Status Page, ChartView Database Status
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
539
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.5 FLITECHARTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts resemble the paper version of AeroNav Services terminal procedures charts. The charts are displayed
with high-resolution and in color for applicable charts. The MFD depiction shows the aircraft position on the
moving map in the planview of approach charts.
The geo-referenced aircraft position is indicated by an aircraft symbol displayed on the chart when the current
position is within the boundaries of the chart. An aircraft symbol may be displayed within an off-scale area
depicted on some charts.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Figure 8-54 shows examples of off-scale areas, indicated by the grey shading. Note, these areas are not shaded on
the published chart. These off-scale areas appear on the chart to convey supplemental information. However, the
depicted geographical position of this information, as it relates to the chart planview, is not the actual geographic
position. Therefore, when the aircraft symbol appears within one of these areas, the aircraft position indicated is
relative to the chart planview, not to the off-scale area.
The FliteCharts database subscription is available from Garmin. Available data includes:
• Arrivals (STAR)
• Approaches
• Airport Diagrams
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Departure Procedures (DP)
Off-Scale
Area
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Off-Scale
Areas
Off-Scale
Areas
INDEX
Off-Scale
Area
Figure 8-54 Sample Chart Indicating Off-Scale Areas
540
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: Do not maneuver the aircraft based solely upon the geo-referenced aircraft symbol.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FLITECHARTS SOFTKEYS
FliteCharts functions are displayed on three levels of softkeys. While on the Navigation Map Page, Nearest
Airports Page, or Flight Plan Page, pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and
advances to the chart selection level of softkeys: CHRT OPT, CHRT, INFO, DP, STAR, APR, WX, and
GO BACK. The chart selection softkeys appear on the Airport Information Page.
EIS
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the top level softkeys and previous page.
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the available terminal chart and advances to the next level of
softkeys: ALL, FIT WDTH, FULL SCN, and BACK.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
While viewing the CHRT OPT Softkeys, after 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, the system reverts to the chart
selection softkeys.
NOTAMs are not available with FliteCharts. The NOTAM Softkey label appears subdued and is disabled.
CHRT OPT
CHRT
INFO
DP
STAR
APR
WX
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
SHW CHRT
GO BACK
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Presssing the GO BACK Softkey returns
to the top-level softkeys and previous page.
ALL
FIT WDTH
FULL SCN
BACK
AFCS
Pressing the BACK Softkey returns
to the Chart Selection Softkeys.
Figure 8-55 FliteCharts SHW CHRT, Chart Selection, and Chart Option Softkeys
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
541
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TERMINAL PROCEDURES CHARTS
Selecting Terminal Procedures Charts:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Nearest Airport Page, or Flight Plan Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the PAGE MENU.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the OPTIONS Menu to Show Chart.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key to display the chart.
Navigation Map Page OPTIONS Menu
Waypoint Airport Information Page OPTIONS Menu
Figure 8-56 Option Menus
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
When no terminal procedure chart is available, the banner CHART NOT AVAILABLE appears on the screen.
The CHART NOT AVAILABLE banner does not refer to the FliteCharts subscription, but rather the availability
of a particular airport chart selection or procedure for a selected airport.
Figure 8-57 Chart Not Available Banner
INDEX
APPENDICES
If there is a problem in rendering the data (such as a data error or a failure of an individual chart), the banner
UNABLE TO DISPLAY CHART is then displayed.
Figure 8-58 Unable To Display Chart Banner
542
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When a chart is not available by pressing the SHW CHRT Softkey or selecting a Page Menu Option, charts
may be obtained for other airports from the WPT Pages or Flight Plan Pages.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
If a chart is available for the destination airport, or the airport selected in the active flight plan, the chart
appears on the screen. When no flight plan is active, or when not flying to a direct-to destination, pressing the
SHW CHRT Softkey displays the chart for the nearest airport, if available.
The chart shown is one associated with the WPT – Airport Information page. Usually this is the airport runway
diagram. Where no runway diagram exists, but Take Off Minimums or Alternate Minimums are available, that
page appears. If Airport Information pages are unavailable, the Approach Chart for the airport is shown.
EIS
Selecting a chart:
1) While viewing the Navigation Map Page, Flight Plan Page, or Nearest Airports Page, press the SHW CHRT
Softkey. The airport diagram or approach chart is displayed on the Airport Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to select either the Airport Identifier Box or the Approach Box. (Press the APR Softkey
if the Approach Box is not currently shown).
4) Turn the small and large FMS Knob to enter the desired airport identifier.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
5) Press the ENT Key to complete the airport selection.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the Approach Box.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to show the approach chart selection choices.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
8) Turn either FMS Knob to scroll through the available charts.
9) Press the ENT Key to complete the chart selection.
Chart Not
To Scale
AFCS
Select Desired
Approach Chart
from Menu
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pan Chart
With the
Joystick
APPENDICES
Aircraft Not
Shown Icon
INDEX
Figure 8-59 Approach Information Page, Chart Selection
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
543
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
While the APPROACH Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank. Once the desired
chart is selected, the chart scale can be changed and the chart can be panned using the Joystick. Pressing the
Joystick centers the chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The aircraft symbol is not shown on FliteCharts. The Chart Scale Box displays a banner NOT TO SCALE, and
the Aircraft Not Shown Icon is displayed in the lower right corner of the screen.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
Pressing the CHRT Softkey alternates between the FliteCharts diagram and the associated map in the WPT
page group. In the example shown, the CHRT Softkey switches between the Charlotte, NC (KCLT) Airport
Diagram and the navigation map on the WPT – Airport Information page.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Press CHRT Softkey
to Switch Between
FliteCharts and
Navigation Map Page
INDEX
Figure 8-60 CHRT Softkey, Airport Information Page
544
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey returns to the airport diagram chart when the view is on a terminal
procedure chart. If the displayed chart is the airport diagram chart, pressing the INFO-1 or INFO-2 Softkey
returns to the Airport Information Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Another source for additional airport information is from the INFO Box above the chart (Figure 8-65) or to
the right of the chart (Figure 8-61) for certain airports. This information source is not related to the INFO‑1
or INFO-2 Softkey. When the INFO Box is selected using the FMS Knob, the MFD softkeys are blank.
The Charlotte, NC airport has three additional charts offering information; the Airport Diagram, Alternate
Minimums, and Take-off Minimums.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Info Box
Selected
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-61 Airport Information Page, INFO View with Airport Information
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
545
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
In the example shown in Figure 8-61, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS is selected. Pressing the ENT Key displays the
Take-off Minimums and Departure Procedures Chart (Figure 8-62).
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-62 Airport Information Page, TAKE OFF MINIMUMS Selected from INFO View
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Pressing the DP Softkey displays the Departure Procedure Chart if available.
Figure 8-63 Departure Information Page
546
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the STAR Softkey displays the Standard Terminal Arrival Chart if available.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-64 Arrival Information Page
Pressing the APR Softkey displays the approach chart for the airport if available.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Figure 8-65 Approach Information Page
547
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Pressing the WX Softkey shows the airport weather frequency information, when available, and includes
weather data such as METAR and TAF from the XM Data Link Receiver. Weather information is available only
when an XM Data Link Receiver is installed and the SiriusXM Weather subscription is current.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Selecting Additional Information:
1) While viewing the Airport Taxi Diagram, press the WX Softkey to display the information windows (AIRPORT,
INFO).
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the INFO Box.
EIS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the INFO Box choices. When the INFO Box is selected the MFD softkeys are
blank. If multiple choices are available, scroll to the desired choice with the large FMS Knob and press the ENT
Key to complete the selection.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the FMS Knob again to deactivate the cursor.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Info Available
on This Airport
AFCS
WX Info
When
Available
Chart Not
To Scale
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Softkeys are
Blank during
Info Box
Selection
APPENDICES
Figure 8-66 Weather Information Page, WX Softkey Selected
WX Softkey
Selected
INDEX
Pressing the GO BACK Softkey reverts to the previous page (Navigation Map Page or Flight Plan Page).
548
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
CHART OPTIONS
Pressing the CHRT OPT Softkey displays the next level of softkeys, the chart options level (Figure 8-55).
Pressing the ALL Softkey shows the complete chart on the screen.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Complete
Chart
Shown
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-67 Airport Information Page, ALL View Selected
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
549
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Pressing the FIT WIDTH Softkey fits the width of the chart in the display viewing area. In the example
shown, the chart at close range is replaced with the full width chart.
Press FIT WDTH
Softkey to Show
Full Chart Width
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-68 Approach Information Page, FIT WDTH Softkey Selected
550
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Pressing the FULL SCN Softkey alternates between removing and replacing the data window to the right.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Press FULL SCN
Softkey to Switch
Between Chart on
Full Screen and Chart
with Info Window
AFCS
Figure 8-69 Airport Information Page, Full Screen and Info Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or waiting for 45 seconds reverts to the chart selection softkeys.
The full screen view can also be selected by using the page menu option.
APPENDICES
Selecting full screen On or Off:
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move between the FULL SCREEN and COLOR SCHEME Options.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between the On and Off Full Screen Options.
551
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Chart Setup Option
Full Screen On/Off Selection
Figure 8-70 Page Menus
DAY/NIGHT VIEW
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts can be displayed on a white or black background for day or night viewing. The Day View offers
a better presentation in a bright environment. The Night View gives a better presentation for viewing in a dark
environment. When the CHART SETUP Box is selected the MFD softkeys are blank.
Selecting Day, Night, or Automatic View:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing a terminal chart press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu OPTIONS.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the Chart Setup Menu Option and press the ENT Key.
Figure 8-71 Waypoint Information Page, OPTIONS Menu
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to move to the COLOR SCHEME Option (Figure 8‑72).
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to choose between Day, Auto, and Night Options.
INDEX
5) If Auto Mode is selected, turn the large FMS Knob to select the percentage field. Use the small FMS Knob to
change the percentage value. The percentage value is the day/night crossover point based on the percentage of
backlighting intensity. For example, if the value is set to 15%, the day/night display changes when the display
backlight reaches 15% of full brightness.
552
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The display must be changed in order for the new setting to become active. This may be accomplished by
selecting another page or changing the display range.
6) Press the FMS Knob when finished to remove the Chart Setup Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-72 Approach Information Page, Day View
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-73 Approach Information Page, Night View
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
553
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLITECHARTS CYCLE NUMBER AND EXPIRATION DATE
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts data is revised every 28 days. Charts are still viewable during a period that extends from the cycle
expiration date to the disables date. FliteCharts is disabled 180 days after the expiration date and are no longer
available for viewing upon reaching the disables date. When turning on the system, the Power-up Page displays
the current status of the FliteCharts database. See the table below for the various FliteCharts Power-up Page
displays and the definition of each.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
FliteCharts Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-74 Power-up Page, FliteCharts Database
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Blank Line. system is not configured for FliteCharts. Contact a Garminauthorized service center for configuration.
System is configured for FliteCharts but no chart database is installed.
Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for the FliteCharts
database
Normal operation. FliteCharts database is valid and within current
cycle.
FliteCharts database is beyond the expiration date, but still within the
180 day viewing period.
FliteCharts database has timed out. Database is beyond 180 days
after expiration date. FliteCharts database is no longer available for
viewing.
APPENDICES
Table 8-3 FliteCharts Power-up Page Annunciations and Definitions
INDEX
When the 180 day grace period has expired, ‘Chart data is disabled.’ in yellow indicates the FliteCharts
database has expired and is no longer viewable. ‘Chart Data: N/A’ appears in white if no FliteCharts data is
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
554
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FliteCharts time critical information can also be found on the AUX - System Status page. The FliteCharts
database REGION, CYCLE number, EFFECTIVE, EXPIRES, and DISABLES dates of the subscription appear in
either blue or yellow text. Dates shown in blue are current data. Dates shown in yellow indicate the data is not
within the current subscription period.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
FliteCharts becomes inoperative 180 days after the FliteCharts EXPIRES date is reached, and is no longer
available for viewing. This date is shown as the DISABLES date. After the disable date the SHW CHRT Softkey
label appears subdued and is unavailable until a revised issue of FliteCharts is installed.
NOTE: A subdued softkey label indicates the function is disabled.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed
information by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the FliteCharts database information is
shown.
The FliteCharts database cycle number shown in the figure, 1302, is deciphered as follows:
13 – Indicates the year 2013
02 – Indicates the second issue of the FliteCharts database for the year
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The FliteCharts EFFECTIVE date 10–FEB–13 is the first date that this database is current.
The FliteCharts EXPIRES date 10–MAR–13 is the last date that this database is current.
The DISABLES date 06–SEP–13 is the date that this database becomes inoperative.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts
Data
APPENDICES
Figure 8-75 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Current and Available
INDEX
The FliteCharts database is provided from Garmin. Refer to Updating Garmin Databases in Appendix B for
instructions on revising the FliteCharts database.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
555
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The other three possible AUX - System Status page conditions are shown here. The EXPIRES date, in yellow,
is the revision date for the next database cycle. The DISABLES date, in yellow, is the date that this database cycle
is no longer viewable. REGION and CYCLE NOT AVAILABLE in blue, indicate that FliteCharts database is not
available on the database card or no database card is inserted.
FliteCharts Expired, but is not Disabled
FliteCharts Database is Disabled
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Current Date is Before Effective Date
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
FliteCharts Database is Not Available
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-76 AUX – System Status Page, FliteCharts Datbase Status
556
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.6 AIRPORT DIRECTORY
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Aircraft Owners and Pilots Association (AOPA) and optional AC-U-KWIK Airport Directory databases
offer detailed information regarding services, hours of operation, lodging options, and more. This information
is viewed on the Airport Information Page by selecting the INFO Softkey until INFO-2 is displayed as shown in
Figure 8-77.
Both Airport Directories are available for downloading at flygarmin.com. However, copy only one of the
databases to the Supplemental Data Card. The system cannot recognize both databases simultaneously.
EIS
Selecting the Airport Directory Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘WPT’ page group.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AIRPORT INFORMATION Page. Initially, information for the airport closest
to the aircraft’s present position is displayed.
3) If necessary, select the INFO softkey until INFO-2 is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-77 AOPA Information on the Airport Information Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
557
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AIRPORT DIRECTORY DATABASE CYCLE NUMBER AND REVISION
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Airport Directory databases are revised every 56 days and offered on a subscription basis. Check fly.
garmin.com for the current database. The Airport Directory is always available for use after the expiration date.
When turning on the system, the Power-up Page indicates whether the databases are current, out of date, or
not available.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport Directory Database
Figure 8-78 Power-up Page, Airport Directory Database
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Power-up Page Display
Definition
Normal operation. Airport Directory database is valid and within
current cycle.
Airport Directory database has expired.
AFCS
Database card contains no Airport Directory data.
Table 8-4 Airport Directory Annunciation Definitions
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Airport Directory Region, Version, Cycle, Effective date and Expires date of the database cycle can also be
found on the AUX - System Status page, as seen in Figure 8-79.
558
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Select the MFD1 DB Softkey to place the cursor in the DATABASE window. Scroll through the listed information
by turning the FMS Knob or pressing the ENT Key until the Airport Directory database information is shown.
The Airport Directory database cycle number shown in the figure, 13D1, is deciphered as follows:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
13 – Indicates the year 2013
D – Indicates the data is for Airport Directory
1 – Indicates the first issue of the Airport Directory database for the year
The Airport Directory EFFECTIVE date 17–FEB–13 is the beginning date for the current database cycle. The
Airport Directory EXPIRES date 28–APR–13 is the revision date for the next database cycle.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Airport
Directory
Data
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
Figure 8-79 AUX – System Status Page, Airport Directory Current Information
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Airport Directory information appears in blue and yellow text. The EFFECTIVE date appears in blue when data
is current and in yellow when the current date is before the effective date. The EXPIRES date appears in blue when
data is current and in yellow when expired (Table 8-4). NOT AVAILABLE appears in blue in the REGION field if
Airport Directory data is not available on the database card. An expired Airport Directory database is not disabled
and will continue to function indefinitely.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
559
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.7 SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO ENTERTAINMENT
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: Refer to the Hazard Avoidance Section for information about SiriusXM Weather products.
The optional SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment feature of the GDL 69A Data Link Receiver is available for
the pilot’s and passengers’ enjoyment. The GDL 69A can receive SiriusXM Satellite Radio entertainment services
at any altitude throughout the Continental U.S. Entertainment audio is available only on the GDL 69A Data Link
Receiver, not the GDL 69.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
SiriusXM Satellite Radio offers a variety of radio programming over long distances without having to constantly
search for new stations. Based on signals from satellites, coverage far exceeds land-based transmissions.
SiriusXM Satellite Radio services are subscription-based. For more information on specific service packages, visit
www.siriusxm.com.
ACTIVATING SIRIUSXM SATELLITE RADIO SERVICES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The service is activated by providing SiriusXM Satellite Radio with either one or two coded IDs, depending on
the equipment. Either the Audio Radio ID or the Data Radio ID, or both, must be provided to SiriusXM Satellite
Radio to activate the entertainment subscription.
It is not required to activate both the entertainment and weather service subscriptions with the GDL 69A.
Either or both services can be activated. SiriusXM Satellite Radio uses one or both of the coded IDs to send an
activation signal that, when received by the GDL 69A, allows it to play entertainment programming.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
These IDs are located:
• On the label on the back of the Data Link Receiver
• On the XM Information Page on the MFD (Figure 8-80)
• On the XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions included with the unit (available at www.garmin.com, P/N
190-00355-04)
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Contact the installer if the Data Radio ID and the Audio Radio ID cannot be located.
560
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
NOTE: The LOCK Softkey on the XM Information Page (AUX Page Group) is used to save GDL 69A activation
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
data when the SiriusXM services are initially set up. It is not used during normal SiriusXM Satellite Radio
operation, but there should be no adverse effects if inadvertently pressed during flight. Refer to the
GDL 69/69A XM Satellite Radio Activation Instructions (190-00355-04, Rev H or later) for further information.
Activating the SiriusXM Satellite Radio services:
1) Contact Sirius XM Radio Inc. Follow the instructions provided by SiriusXM Satellite Radio services.
2) Select the AUX Page Group.
EIS
3) Select the next to last page in the AUX Page Group.
4) Press the INFO Softkey to display the XM Information Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Verify the desired services are activated.
6) Press the LOCK Softkey.
7) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight YES.
8) To complete activation, press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Data
Radio ID
Audio
Radio ID
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
LOCK Softkey
is Used to Save
Activation Data
During Initial
Setup
APPENDICES
Figure 8-80 XM Information Page
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
RADIO
and INFO
Softkeys
AFCS
Weather
Products
Window
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
If SiriusXM Weather services have not been activated, all the weather product boxes are blank on the XM
Information Page and a yellow Activation Required message is displayed in the center of the Weather Data
Link Page (Map Page Group). The Service Class refers to the groupings of weather products available for
subscription.
561
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
USING SIRIUSXM RADIO
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The XM Radio Page provides information and control of the audio entertainment features of the SiriusXM
Satellite Radio.
Selecting the XM Radio Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the displayed AUX - XM Information Page.
EIS
3) Press the RADIO Softkey to show the XM Radio Page where audio entertainment is controlled.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Active
Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Channel
List
Volume
Field
Categories
Field
AFCS
Figure 8-81 XM Radio Page
ACTIVE CHANNEL AND CHANNEL LIST
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
The Active Channel Box on the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected channel the SiriusXM Satellite
Radio is using.
APPENDICES
The Channels List Box of the XM Radio Page shows a list of the available channels for the selected category.
Channels can be stepped through one at a time or may be selected directly by channel number.
Selecting a channel from the channel list:
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the CH + Softkey to go up through the list in the Channel Box, or move down the list with the
CH – Softkey.
INDEX
Or:
562
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
1) Press the FMS Knob to highlight the channel list and turn the large FMS Knob to scroll through the channels.
2) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
Selecting a channel directly:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) While on the XM Radio Page, press the CHNL Softkey.
2) Press the DIR CH Softkey. The channel number in the Active Channel Box is highlighted.
3) Press the numbered softkeys located on the bottom of the display to directly select the desired channel
number.
EIS
4) Press the ENT Key to activate the selected channel.
CATEGORY
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Category Box of the XM Radio Page displays the currently selected category of audio. Categories of
channels such as jazz, rock, or news can be selected to list the available channels for a type of music or other
contents. One of the optional categories is PRESETS to view channels that have been programmed.
Selecting a category:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) Press the CATGRY Softkey on the XM Radio Page.
2) Press the CAT + and CAT - Softkeys to cycle through the categories.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Turn the small FMS Knob to display the Categories list. Highlight the desired category with the small FMS Knob
and press the ENT Key. Selecting All Categories places all channels in the list.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-82 Categories List
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
563
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
PRESETS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Up to 15 channels from any category can be assigned a preset number. The preset channels are selected by
pressing the PRESETS and MORE Softkeys. Then the preset channel can be selected directly and added to
the channel list for the Presets category.
Setting a preset channel number:
1) On the XM Radio Page, while listening to an Active Channel that is wanted for a preset, press the PRESETS
Softkey to access the first five preset channels (PS1 - PS5).
EIS
2) Press the MORE Softkey to access the next five channels (PS6 – PS10), and again to access the last five
channels (PS11 – PS15). Pressing the MORE Softkey repeatedly cycles through the preset channels.
3) Press any one of the (PS1 - PS15) softkeys to assign a number to the active channel.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
4) Press the SET Softkey on the desired channel number to save the channel as a preset.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Press PRESETS to
Access the Preset
Channels Softkeys
Press MORE to Cycle
Through the Preset
Channels
Press SET to
Save Each
Preset Channel
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-83 Accessing and Selecting XM Preset Channels
Pressing the BACK Softkey, or 45 seconds of softkey inactivity, returns the system to the top level softkeys.
VOLUME
AFCS
Radio volume is shown as a percentage of full volume. Volume level is controlled by pressing the VOL
Softkey, which brings up the volume increase and decrease softkeys.
Adjusting the volume:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) With the XM Radio Page displayed, press the VOL Softkey.
APPENDICES
2) Press the VOL – Softkey to reduce volume or press the VOL + Softkey to increase volume. (Once the VOL
Softkey is pressed, the volume can also be adjusted using the small FMS Knob.)
Figure 8-84 Volume Control
INDEX
Mute SiriusXM audio:
1) Select the XM Radio Page or XM Information Page.
2) Press the MUTE Softkey to mute the audio. Press the MUTE Softkey again to unmute the audio.
564
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.8 SATELLITE TELEPHONE & SMS MESSAGING SERVICE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional GSR 56 Iridium Transceiver provides global airborne Iridium Satellite Telephone and SMS messaging
service. The telephone audio is provided through the audio panel and headset. Operation is accomplished through
the AUX-AUXILIARY COMMUNICATIONS Pages.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for communication problems when using Iridium satellite services. Services
may be affected by poor signal strength, satellite health, and the availability of responding agencies when
emergency services are required.
EIS
NOTE: Use of emergency telephone services through Iridium Communictions, Inc. is not a substitute for
following proper aviation emergency procedures and communications.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Emergency communications are provided by Iridium Communications Inc. when the aircraft is operating within
the United States, Puerto Rico, and the U.S. Virgin Islands. Making a telephone call by dialing "911" will contact a
third party Emergency Call Relay Center (ECRC).
REGISTERING THE IRIDIUM SATELLITE SYSTEM
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
A subscriber account must be established prior to using the Iridium Satellite System. Before setting up an
Iridium account, obtain the serial number of the Iridium Transceiver (GSR1) and the System ID by selecting the
AUX- SYSTEM STATUS Page as shown in Figure 8-85. Contact Garmin Flight Data Services on-line at https://fly.
garmin.com/fly-garmin/support/applications/satelliteservices/, or by telephone at 1-866-739-5687 in the United
States or 913-440-1135.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Iridium Transceiver Serial Number
System ID Number
INDEX
Figure 8-85 Identification Needed for Iridium Registration
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
565
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TELEPHONE COMMUNICATION
The pilot or copilot can place and answer calls on the Iridium satellite network. Control and monitoring of
telephone functions are accomplished through the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
To view the Telephone Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX-TELEPHONE Page.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The PHONE STATUS display, as shown in Figure 8-86, gives a graphical representation of the current disposition
of the connection with the Iridium network. Table 8-5 describes symbology used on PHONE STATUS display.
Satellite
Signal
Strength
Internal
Phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
External
Phone
Figure 8-86 Phone Status Display
ENABLE/DISABLE THE IRIDIUM TELEPHONE SYSTEM
AFCS
The Iridium Satellite Telephone System may be turned on or off by using the page menu.
To enable the Iridium telephone system:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Enable Iridium Transmission’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
To disable the Iridium telephone system:
APPENDICES
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, select the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Iridium Transmission’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key.
566
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
Figure 8-87 Enable Iridium Telephone System
External
Phone
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Internal
Phone
Description
Phone is Idle
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Phone is ringing
Phone has a dial tone (off hook) or connected to another phone
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Phone dialed is busy
Phone is dialing another phone
AFCS
Phone has failed
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Phone status not known
Phone is disabled
APPENDICES
Phone is reserved for data transmission
Calling other phone or incoming call from other phone
INDEX
Other phone is on hold
Phones are connected
Table 8-5 Telephone Symbols
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
567
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
INCOMING CALLS
NOTE: Outside callers should dial 00 + 8816 or 8817 + aircraft phone number when calling the aircraft
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Iridium Telephone System.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
When a phone call is received while viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TELEPHONE Page, a popup alert similar to Figure 8-88 is displayed and an aural alert “Incoming Call” is heard. The pop-up alert
may be inhibited at times, such as during takeoff. In addition to the pop-up alert, a ringing phone symbol is
displayed to the right of the MFD page title as shown in Figure 8-88. Also, the voice alert “Incoming Call” is
heard on the selected cockpit audio.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Incoming Call Pop-up
Incoming Call Symbol on MFD Page
Figure 8-88 Incoming Call
Answering an incoming call:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Press the
Key (GMA 350) or TEL Key (GMA 347) on the audio panel.
2) Select the ANSWER Softkey on the MFD.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
AFCS
selecting the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
1) Press the
Key (GMA 350) or TEL Key (GMA 347) on the audio panel.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Answer Incoming Call’.
4) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window and leave the current call unanswered.
Selecting the IGNRE ALL Softkey will extinguish the pop-up window for the current and all future incoming
calls and leave the current call unanswered. Selecting the TEL Softkey will display the AUX-TELEPHONE
Page allowing additional call information to be viewed before answering.
INDEX
Disabling incoming call alerts:
1) With the AUX-TELEPHONE Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable Incoming Call Alerts’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The voice and pop-up alert will not be displayed now when an incoming call is received.
568
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
OUTGOING CALLS
Voice calls can be made from the cockpit to an external phone through the Iridium Satellite Network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The Push-to-Talk switch is not utilized for telephone communication. The microphone is active after
selecting the ANSWER Softkey, and stays active until the call is terminated.
To make a call:
1) Press the
Key (GMA 350) or TEL Key (GMA 347) on the audio panel.
EIS
2) Select the DIAL Softkey on the MFD. A display similar to Figure 8-89 will be shown.
Or:
While viewing the AUX-TELEPHONE Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
a) Press the
Key (GMA 350) or TEL Key (GMA 347) on the audio panel.
b) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
c) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Dial a Phone Call’.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
d) Press the ENT Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-89 Initiating a Call
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
3) Enter the desired number string (typically, country code + area code + phone number) by selecting the number
softkeys on the MFD, pressing the numeric keys on the PFD/MFD Controller, or turning the FMS Knobs. The
system may be configured by an authorized repair facility to automatically enter a default country code when
the dialing window is displayed. To replace the default country code, move the cursor to the first (furthest left)
number in the dialing window and enter the desired country code.
569
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ is highlighted as in Figure 8-90.
Figure 8-90 Make the Call
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
5) Press the ENT Key. The system will begin calling the number, as in Figure 8-91.
INDEX
Figure 8-91 System is Making the Connection
570
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
When the phone is answered, the connection is established as shown in Figure 8-92. To exit the call, select
the HANGUP Softkey.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-92 Phone is Answered, Connection Complete
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
571
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGING (SMS)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The pilot or copilot can send and receive text messages on the Iridium satellite network. Messages may be
sent to an email address or text message capable cellular telephone. Message length is limited to 160 characters,
including the email address.
Senders should address text messages to the aircraft by entering [aircraft Iridium phone number]@msg.
iridium.com.
The text messaging user interface is mainly through the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Viewing the Text Messaging Page:
EIS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the SATELLITE PHONE.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) If necessary, select the SMS Softkey to display the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page as shown in Figure 8-93.
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-93 Text Messaging Page
572
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Message Symbol
Description
Received text message that has not been opened
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text message that has been opened
Saved text message, draft not sent
EIS
System is sending text message
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Text message has been sent
System failed to send text message
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Predefined text message
Table 8-6 Text Message Symbols
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
VIEWING A TEXT MESSAGE WHEN RECEIVED
When viewing MFD pages other than the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, a pop-up alert similar to Figure
8-94 will be displayed when a new text message is received.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
New Text Message Pop-up
New Text Message Symbol on MFD Page
APPENDICES
Figure 8-94 New Text Message Received
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
573
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Select the VIEW Softkey to view the message (Figure 8-95). Selecting the IGNORE Softkey will extinguish
the pop-up window and leave the text message unopened. Selecting the IGNR ALL Softkey will extinguish
the pop-window and ignore all future incoming text messages. Selecting the SMS Softkey will display the
AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Figure 8-95 Text Message Displayed from Pop-Up Alert
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
The pop-up alerts may be enabled or disabled through the Page Menu.
574
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Enabling/disabling incoming text message pop-up alerts:
1) With the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page displayed, press the MENU Key on the MFD to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disable New Message Popups’ or ‘Enable New Message Popups’.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the ENT Key. The pop-up alert will not be displayed when an incoming text message is received.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-96 Disabling New Text Message Pop-Ups
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
REPLY TO A TEXT MESSAGE
After reading a text message, a reply may be sent.
Replying to a text message:
AFCS
While viewing the text message, select the REPLY Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Reply To Message’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
SENDING A TEXT MESSAGE
APPENDICES
Text messages may be sent from the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page.
Sending a new text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the NEW Softkey.
Or:
INDEX
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
575
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter 00 + country
code + area code + phone number when sending to a text capable telephone. An email address may also be
entered. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of
the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers,
or numbers can be entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey
to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS
Softkey. See Figure 8-97.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
AFCS
Figure 8-97 Composing a New Text Message
4) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 2.
5) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
6) Select the SEND Softkey to send the message immediately, or select the SAVE Softkey to save the message in
Outbox for sending at a later time. Select the CANCEL Softkey to delete the message.
PREDEFINED TEXT MESSAGES
INDEX
APPENDICES
Time and effort can be saved in typing text messages that are used repeatedly by saving these messages as
a predefined message.
576
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Creating a predefined text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-98 Creating/Editing Predefined Messages
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select ‘Edit Predefined Messages’ as shown in Figure 8-98.
3) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED MESSAGES view is now displayed.
4) Select the NEW Softkey.
Or:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Draft New Predefined Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key. The PREDEFINED SMS TEXT MESSAGE Window is now displayed as shown in Figure 8-99.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-99 Composing a Predefined Message
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
577
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
5) The cursor is displayed in the ‘TITLE’ field. Enter the desired message title. Entry can be accomplished through
the alphanumeric keys on the MFD Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys
on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD
by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha
characters. Special characters can be accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey.
6) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field.
7) Enter the desired message using any combination of entry methods as described in step 5.
8) Press the ENT Key.
EIS
9) Select the SAVE Softkey. The new predefined message is now shown in the displayed list. Selecting the
CANCEL Softkey will delete the message without saving.
10) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
11) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Stop Editing Predefined Message’.
12) Press the ENT Key.
Sending a predefined text message:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the NEW Softkey.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
2) The TEXT MESSAGE DRAFT Window is now displayed with the cursor in the ‘TO’ field. Enter the desired
telephone number or email address. Entry can be accomplished through the alphanumeric keys on the MFD
Controller, or combination of the FMS Knob on the controller and softkeys on the MFD. The FMS Knob is used
to enter letters and numbers, or numbers can be entered from the MFD by selecting the NUMBERS Softkey.
Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to create upper and lower case alpha characters. Special characters can be
accessed by selecting the SYMBOLS Softkey.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
3) Press the ENT Key. The cursor is now displayed in the ‘MESSAGE’ field (Figure 8-100).
Figure 8-100 Sending a Predefined Text Message
578
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Select the PREDEFD Softkey. The PREDEFINED MESSAGE MENU Window is displayed as seen in Figure 8-101.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-101 Predefined Message List
5) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired predefined message.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
6) Press the ENT Key. The predefined message text is inserted into the message field. If desired, the message can
be edited by using the FMS Knobs.
7) Press the ENT Key.
8) Select the SEND Softkey to transmit the message.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
579
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
TEXT MESSAGE BOXES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Received text messages reside in the Inbox as ‘Read’ or ‘Unread’ messages. The Outbox contains ‘Sent” and
‘Unsent’ text messages. Saved messages that are meant to be sent later are stored as Drafts. Each text message
box may be viewed separately, or together in any combination.
Show Inbox messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the INBOX Softkey
(Figure 8-102).
EIS
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Inbox Messages’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
Figure 8-102 Text Message Inbox
Show Outbox messages:
APPENDICES
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the OUTBOX Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Outbox Messages’.
INDEX
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
580
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Show Draft messages:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the DRAFTS Softkey.
Or:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Show Draft Messages’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The message box selected for viewing is indicated at the bottom left of the list window.
EIS
MANAGING TEXT MESSAGES
The viewed messages may be listed according to the date/time the message was sent or received, the type of
message (read, unread, sent, unsent, etc.), or by message address.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Viewing messages sorted by message date/time:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the TIME Softkey
(Figure 8-102).
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Date/Time’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Viewing messages sorted by message type:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the TYPE Softkey.
Or:
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AFCS
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Type’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Viewing messages sorted by address:
While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the ARRANGE Softkey, then select the ADDRESS
Softkey.
Or:
APPENDICES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Sort By Address’.
3) Press the ENT Key. The sorting selection is indicated at the bottom center of the list window.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
581
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Viewing the content of a text message:
1) While viewing the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, select the desired message box.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
2) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
3) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
4) Select the VIEW Softkey.
Or:
Press the ENT Key.
EIS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘View Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Message content is displayed as shown in Figure 8-103.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-103 Viewing Message Content
5) To close the text message, select the CLOSE Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
INDEX
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Close Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
582
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Marking selected message as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Select the MRK READ Softkey.
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark Selected Message As Read’.
EIS
c) Press the ENT Key.
The message symbol now indicates the message has been opened.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Marking all messages as read:
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Mark All New Messages As Read’.
3) Press the ENT Key. A confirmation window is displayed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
4) With cursor highlighting ‘YES’, press the ENT Key. The message symbols now indicate all the message have
been opened.
Delete a message:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) While viewing the Inbox on the AUX-TEXT MESSAGING Page, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired message.
3) Select the DELETE Softkey.
Or:
AFCS
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Delete Selected Message’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
583
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.9 WI-FI CONNECTIONS
The optional GDL 59 Data Link provides a Wi-Fi data link between the aircraft and a ground computer network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Wi-Fi connections are used for transferring maintenance log data to the aircraft manufacturer. The system can
connect to a IEEE 802.11g compatible network provided the aircraft is on the ground and located within range
of a network. The system is capable of WEP64, WEP128,WPA-PSK, and WPA2-PSK encryption formats. WPAEnterprise and WPA2-Enterprise are not supported. Connections that require web proxies, captive portals, or
other elements that require user credentials, including a username and password or a redemption or access code;
or require action such as accepting a user agreement, are not supported.
EIS
Control and monitoring of Wi-Fi functions are accomplished through the AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page.
Viewing the Wi-Fi Setup Page:
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select DATA LINK. The AUX-WI-FI SETUP Page is displayed as shown in Figure
8-104.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Setting up a new Wi-Fi connection:
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AVAIL Softkey on the MFD. A list of available networks will be displayed in the AVAILABLE NETWORKS
window as shown in Figure 8-104. Signal strength is shown for each network, as well as security methods and
whether the network has been saved in the system’s memory.
Figure 8-104 Available Wi-Fi Networks
INDEX
2) If necessary, select the RESCAN Softkey to have the system scan again for available networks.
Or:
584
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Rescan Available Networks’.
c) Press the ENT Key.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
3) Press the FMS Knob to place the cursor in the list of networks.
4) Turn either FMS Knob to select the desired network. See Figure 8-105.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-105 Desired Network Selected
5) Select the CONNECT Softkey.
AFCS
Or:
a) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
b) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Connect To Selected Network’.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
c) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
585
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
6) If the network is secured, a window similar to Figure 8-106 will be displayed in order to enter the necessary
passcode. Use the FMS Knobs to enter the desired alpha numeric characters. Select the CAP LOCK Softkey to
enter upper case letters. If there is no security associated with the network, proceed to step 9.
Figure 8-106 Enter Security Code
7) Press the ENT Key. ‘OK’ will be highlighted.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
8) Press the ENT Key again.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
9) The SAVE SETTINGS window is now displayed with the cursor highlighting ‘SAVE CONNECTION’.
Figure 8-107 Save Option
10) The selected network can be saved to system memory to make re-connection easier at a later time.
APPENDICES
Connecting the selected network without saving:
a) Turn the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to highlight ‘CONNECT’.
b) Press the ENT Key.
Saving and connecting the selected network:
INDEX
a) Press the ENT Key. A checkmark is placed in the checkbox and the cursor moves to the airport field as shown
in Figure 8-108.
b) Using the FMS Knobs, enter an airport identifier to be associated with the saved network. This aids in identifying
the network later in the event of duplicate network names.
586
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
c) Press the ENT Key. The cursor moves to ‘CONNECT’.
d) Press the ENT Key again to connect to the selected network.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Figure 8-108 Save Connection
Editing a saved network:
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
1) While viewing list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor as seen in Figure 8-109.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be edited.
3) Pressing the ENT Key at this point will check or uncheck the AUTO CONNECT checkbox. When a checkmark is
present, the system will automatically connect to the network when within range.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-109 Select Network to be Edited
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
587
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Select the EDIT Softkey. The cursor now appears in the CONNECTION SETTINGS window as shown in Figure 8-110.
Figure 8-110 Select Attributes to Edit
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the network attribute to be edited.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to begin editing the field.
7) When the entry is complete, press the ENT Key.
8) Turn the large FMS Knob or press the ENT Key until ‘SAVE’ is highlighted.
9) Press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Disconnecting a Wi-Fi network:
Select the DISCNCT Softkey.
Or:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
1) Press the MENU Key to display the Page Menu.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to place the cursor on ‘Disconnect From Network’.
3) Press the ENT Key.
APPENDICES
Deleting a saved Wi-Fi network:
1) While viewing the list of saved networks, press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
2) Turn either FMS Knob to highlight the network to be deleted.
INDEX
3) Select the DELETE Softkey. The selected network is removed from the list.
588
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.10 SCHEDULER
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Scheduler feature can be used to enter and display reminder messages (e.g., Change oil, Switch fuel tanks,
or Altimeter-Transponder Check) in the Messages Window on the PFD. Messages can be set to display based on
a specific date and time (event), once the message timer reaches zero (one-time; default setting), or recurrently
whenever the message timer reaches zero (periodic). Message timers set to periodic alerting automatically reset
to the original timer value once the message is displayed. When power is cycled, all messages are retained until
deleted, and message timer countdown is resumed.
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-111 Scheduler (Utility Page)
Entering a scheduler message:
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the first empty scheduler message naming field.
4) Use the FMS Knob to enter the message text to be displayed in the Messages Window and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
5) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the field next to Type.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the message alert type:
• Event—Message issued at the specified date/time
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
• One-time—Message issued when the message timer reaches zero (default setting)
• Periodic—Message issued each time the message timer reaches zero
7) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
APPENDICES
8) For periodic and one-time message, use the FMS Knob to enter the timer value (HH:MM:SS) from which to
countdown and press the ENT Key.
9) For event-based messages:
a) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired date (DD-MM-YY) and press the ENT Key.
INDEX
b) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to the next field.
c) Use the FMS Knob to enter the desired time (HH:MM) and press the ENT Key.
10) Press the ENT Key again or use the large FMS Knob to move the cursor to enter the next message.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
589
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
Deleting a scheduler message:
1) Select the AUX - Utility Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Press the CLR Key to clear the message text. If the CLR Key is pressed again, the message is restored.
EIS
2) Press the FMS Knob momentarily to activate the flashing cursor.
Scheduler messages appear in the Messages Window on the PFD. When a scheduler message is waiting, the
ALERTS Softkey label changes to ADVISORY. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey opens the Messages Window
and acknowledges the scheduler message. The softkey label reverts to ALERTS when pressed. Pressing the
ALERTS Softkey again removes the Messages Window from the display, and the scheduler message is deleted
from the message queue.
3) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the name field of the scheduler message to be deleted.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Press the ENT Key while the message line is cleared to clear the message time.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Figure 8-112 PFD Messages Window
590
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.11 ELECTRONIC CHECKLISTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE: The optional checklists presented here are for example only and may differ from checklists available
for the SR20/SR22. The information described in this section is not intended to replace the checklist
information described in the AFM or the Pilot Safety and Warning Supplements document.
NOTE: Garmin is not responsible for the content of checklists. Checklists are created by the aircraft
EIS
manufacturer. Modifications or updates to the checklists are coordinated through the aircraft manufacturer.
The user cannot edit these checklists.
The optional checklist functions are displayed on two levels of softkeys that are available on any MFD page.
MAP
DCLTR
SYSTEM
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
(Optional)
SYSTEM
SHW CHRT CHKLIST
CHECK
EXIT
EMERGCY
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The CHECK Softkey label changes to UNCHECK
when the checklist item is already checked.
Figure 8-113 Checklist Softkeys
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
The MFD is able to display optional electronic checklists which allow a pilot to quickly find the proper
procedure on the ground and during each phase of flight. The system accesses the checklists from an SD card
inserted into the bezel slot. If the SD card contains an invalid checklist file or no checklist, the Power-up Page
messages display ‘Checklist File: Invalid’ or ‘Checklist File: N/A’ (not available) and the CHKLIST Softkey is
not available.
AFCS
Accessing and navigating checklists:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
2) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘GROUP’ field.
3) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the desired procedure and press the ENT Key.
4) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the ‘CHECKLIST’ field.
APPENDICES
5) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired checklist and press the ENT Key. The selected checklist item is
indicated with white text surrounded by a white box.
6) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected checklist item. The line item turns green and a
checkmark is placed in the associated box. The next line item is automatically selected for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
INDEX
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
591
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
7) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
8) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
9) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
10) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
APPENDICES
Figure 8-114 Sample Checklist
Accessing emergency procedures:
1) From any page on the MFD (except the EIS Pages), press the CHKLIST Softkey or turn the large FMS Knob to
select the Checklist Page.
INDEX
2) Press the EMERGCY Softkey.
3) Turn the FMS Knob to select the desired emergency checklist and press the ENT Key.
592
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
4) Press the ENT Key or CHECK Softkey to check the selected emergency checklist item. The line item turns green
and a checkmark is placed in the box next to it. The next line item is automatically highlighted for checking.
Either FMS Knob can be used to scroll through the checklist and select the desired checklist item.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Press the CLR Key or UNCHECK Softkey to remove a check mark from an item.
5) When all checklist items have been checked, ‘*Checklist Finished*’ is displayed in green text at the bottom left
of the checklist window. If all items in the checklist have not be checked, ‘*CHECKLIST NOT FINISHED*’ will be
displayed in yellow text.
6) Press the ENT Key. ‘GO TO NEXT CHECKLIST?’ will be highlighted by the cursor.
EIS
7) Press the ENT Key to advance to the next checklist.
8) Press the RETURN Softkey to return to the previous checklist.
9) Press the EXIT Softkey to exit the Checklist Page and return to the page last viewed.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-115 Emergency Checklist Page Example
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
593
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.12 FLIGHT DATA LOGGING
NOTE: Some aircraft installations may not provide all aircraft/engine data capable of being logged by the
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
system.
The Flight Data Logging feature will automatically store critical flight and engine data on an SD data card (up
to 16GB) inserted into the top card slot of the MFD. Approximately 1,000 flight hours can be recorded for each
1GB of available space on the card.
EIS
Data is written to the SD card once each second while the MFD is powered on. All flight data logged on a
specific date is stored in a file named in a format which includes the date, time, and nearest airport identifier. The
file is created automatically each time the system is powered on, provided an SD card has been inserted.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The status of the Flight Data Logging feature can be viewed on the AUX-UTILITY Page. If no SD card has been
inserted, “NO CARD” is displayed. When data is being written to the SD card, “LOGGING DATA” is displayed.
The .csv file may be viewed with Microsoft Excel® or other spreadsheet applications.
The following is a list of data parameters the Perspective™ system is capable of logging for the SR20 and SR22.
• GPS fix
• Time
• Longitude (degrees; geodetic;
+East)
• GPS altitude (MSL)
• Magnetic Heading (degrees)
• GPS vertical alert limit
• GPS altitude (WGS84 datum)
• HSI source
• Baro-Corrected altitude (feet)
• Selected course
• SBAS GPS horizontal protection
level
• Baro Correction (in/Hg)
• Com1/Com2 frequency
• Indicated airspeed (kts)
• Nav1/Nav2 frequency
• SBAS GPS vertical protection
level
• Vertical speed (fpm)
• CDI deflection
• Fuel Qty (right & left)(gals)
• GPS vertical speed (fpm)
• VDI/GP/GS deflection
• Fuel Flow (gph)
• OAT (degrees C)
• Wind Direction (degrees)
• Fuel Pressure (psi)
• True airspeed (knots)
• Wind Speed (knots)
• Voltage 1 and/or 2
• Pitch Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Active Waypoint Identifier
• Amps 1 and/or 2
• Roll Attitude Angle (degrees)
• Distance to next waypoint (nm)
• Engine RPM
• Lateral and Vertical G Force (g)
• Bearing to next waypoint
(degrees)
• Oil Pressure (psi)
• Magnetic variation (degrees)
• TIT (deg. F)
• Autopilot On/Off
• Manifold Pressure (in. Hg)
• AFCS roll/pitch modes
• CHT
• AFCS roll/pitch commands
• EGT
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Date
APPENDICES
• Ground Speed (kts)
• Ground Track (degrees
magnetic)
• Oil Temperature (deg. F)
INDEX
• Latitude (degrees; geodetic;
+North)
• GPS horizontal alert limit
594
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
The file containing the recorded data will appear in the format shown in Figure 8-116. This file can be imported
into most computer spreadsheet applications.
Local 24hr Time
HHMMSS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Local Date
YYMMDD
Nearest Airport
(A blank will be
inserted if no
airport is found)
log_110210_104506_KIXD.csv
EIS
Figure 8-116 Log File Format
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Data logging status can be monitored on the AUX-UTILITY Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
595
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.13 HYPOXIA RECOGNITION WITH AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Hypoxia Recognition detects pilot incapacitation due to the affects of hypoxia or other physical
condition. This is accomplished by monitoring pilot interaction with the Perspective™ system. If the system
determines the pilot is not responding, Automatic Descent Mode is activated placing the aircraft in a descent to a
lower altitude to provide the pilot and passengers an opportunity to recover from the effects of hypoxia.”
EIS
The system is operative when the aircraft altitude is above 14,900 feet (pressure altitude) and the Garmin
AFCS autopilot is engaged. Pilot interaction with the Perspective™ system is monitored by detecting key presses
and turns of the knobs (Audio Panel and push-to-talk switch excluded). If a period of inactivity (time dependent on
altitude, see Figure 8-117) is detected, Hypoxia Recognition initiates and automatic descent.
Upon activation, there are three sequential phases employed by the system; determining pilot alertness, descent
to 14,000 feet MSL, and descent to 12,500 feet MSL.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
DETERMINING PILOT ALERTNESS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
When the system detects a sufficient period of inactivity (Figure 8-117) the Advisory Annunciation ‘ARE
YOU ALERT?’ is displayed. Selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Caution Annunciation ‘HYPOXIA
ALERT’ is displayed. Again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and reset the system.
Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
When no pilot interaction is detected for an additional 60 seconds, the Warning Annunciation ‘AUTO
DESCENT’ is displayed in the Annunciation Window and ‘Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds’ is
displayed in the Alerts Window. Once again, selecting the ALERT Softkey will acknowledge the message and
reset the system. Pressing any other softkey, or turning a knob will also reset the system.
When no interaction is detected for another 60 seconds, the system will automatically proceed with the
descent.
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Period
Inactivity (Minutes)
Time
eofofDetected
Useful Conciousness
(min)
AFCS
35
30
25
20
15
10
5
INDEX
0
15000
18000
21000
24000
27000
30000
Aircraft
Altitude
(Feet)
Aircraft
Altitude
(ft)
Figure 8-117 Hypoxia Recognition Activation Times
596
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
AUTOMATIC DESCENT MODE
NOTE: Automatic Descent Mode does not account for terrain elevation.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
As the system prepares for descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 14,000 and the AFCS enters Indicated
Airspeed (IAS) mode with the airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed setting for the specific
aircraft model. Refer to the Flight Director Vertical Modes in the AFCS section. AFCS lateral mode settings
are not affected.
EIS
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 14,000FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an
AFCS Status Annunciation indicating the system has entered Automatic Descent Mode. ‘EDM’ (Emergency
Descent Mode) is the AFCS mode that is activated when Hypoxia Recognition initiates an automatic descent.
A continuous repeating chime will be heard as long as Automatic Descent Mode is active. After the descent
begins, Automatic Descent Mode can only be canceled by disconnecting the autopilot.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
As the aircraft reaches 14,000 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation.
The system again begins monitoring for pilot interaction.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
If no pilot interaction is detected for four minutes, the system initiates the second descent. As the system
prepares for this descent, the Selected Altitude is set to 12,500 and the AFCS again enters IAS mode with the
airspeed reference set to the maximum allowable airspeed for the specific aircraft model.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
As the descent begins, an ‘AUTO DESCENT’ warning is displayed in the Annunciation Window. ‘AUTO
DESCENT - Aircraft Descending to 12,500FT’ is displayed in the Alerts Window. ‘EDM’ is shown as an AFCS
Status Annunciation. Also, the continuous repeating chime is heard.
As the aircraft reaches 12,500 feet the system sets the AFCS to Altitude Hold mode. The AFCS will also remain
in Automatic Descent Mode as indicated by ‘EDM’ continuing to be displayed as an AFCS Status Annunciation
as well as the continuing presence of the repeating chime. At this point, the AFCS must be disconnected to
cancel Automatic Descent Mode.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
597
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.14 ELECTRONIC STABILITY AND PROTECTION (ESP™)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The optional Garmin Electronic Stability and Protection (ESP™) system is available only when the Garmin AFCS
is installed. This system is designed to provide automatic control inputs to discourage aircraft operation outside
the normal flight envelope. Garmin ESP™ works to maintain the desired pitch, roll, and airspeed operating
envelope by automatically engaging one or more servos when the aircraft is near a defined pitch, roll, and/or
airspeed operating limit. While ESP™ utilizes the same sensors, processors, and actuators as the Garmin AFCS
autopilot, it is a separate function. When the Garmin AFCS autopilot is engaged and/or the aircraft is at or below
200 feet AGL, the ESP™ system will not operate.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ESP™ engages when the aircraft exceeds one or more conditions (pitch, roll, and airspeed) beyond the normal
flight parameters. Enhanced stability for each condition is provided by applying a force to the appropriate control
surface to return the aircraft to the normal flight envelope. This is perceived by the pilot as resistance to control
movement in the undesired direction when the aircraft approaches a steep attitude or high airspeed.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
As the aircraft deviates further from the normal attitude and/or airspeed range, the force increases (up to an
established maximum) to encourage control movement in the direction necessary to return to the normal attitude
and/or airspeed range. Except in the case of high airspeed, when maximum force is reached, force remains constant
up to the maximum engagement limit. Above the maximum engagement limit, forces are no longer applied. There
is no maximum engagement related to a high airspeed condition.
The pilot can interrupt ESP™ by pressing and holding the Autopilot Disconnect (AP DISC) switch. Upon releasing
the AP DISC switch, ESP™ force will again be applied, provided aircraft roll attitude is within engagement limits.
ESP™ can also be overridden by overpowering the servo’s mechanical torque limit.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP™ can be enabled or disabled on the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page on the MFD.
To enable or disable ESP™:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the System Setup Page.
AFCS
3) If necessary, select the SETUP 2 Softkey to display the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2 Page. If the AUX-SYSTEM SETUP 2
is already displayed, proceed to step 4.
4) Press the FMS Knob to activate the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
5) Turn the large FMS Knob to place the cursor in the STABILITY & PROTECTION field.
6) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘ENABLE’ or ‘DISABLE’.
7) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
INDEX
APPENDICES
ESP™ is automatically enabled on system power up.
598
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ROLL ENGAGEMENT
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Roll Limit Indicators are displayed on the roll scale at 45° right and left, indicating where ESP™ will engage
(see Figure 8-118). As roll attitude exceeds 45°, ESP™ will engage and the on-side Roll Limit Indicator will
move to 30°, as shown in Figure 8-119. The Roll Limit Indicator is now showing where ESP™ will disengage
as roll attitude decreases.
Roll Limit Indicator
ESP Engage (45°)
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-118 ESP Roll Engagement Indication (ESP NOT Engaged)
ESP Engage (45°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 44°
ESP Disengage (30°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 46°
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Before ESP Engage
After ESP Engage
APPENDICES
Figure 8-119 Roll Increasing to ESP Engagement
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
599
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Once engaged, ESP™ force will be applied between 30° and 75°, as illustrated in Figure 8-120. The force
increases as roll attitude increases and decreases as roll attitude decreases. The applied force is intended to
encourage pilot input that returns the airplane to a more normal roll attitude. As roll attitude decreases, ESP™
will disengage at 30°.
º
30
20º
10º
0º
10º
20º
º
90º
90º
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
75º
75º
º
60
60
º
EIS
º
º
45
45
30
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-120 ESP Roll Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Roll Increases & Decreases as Roll Decreases)
ESP™ is automatically disengaged if the aircraft reaches the autopilot roll engagement attitude limit of 75°
(Figure 8-121).
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
ESP Upper Disengage Limit (75°)
Aircraft Roll Attitude = 74°
APPENDICES
Figure 8-121 Roll Attitude Autopilot Engagement Limit (ESP Engaged)
PITCH ENGAGEMENT
INDEX
ESP™ engages at 17.5° nose-up and 15.5° nose-down. Once ESP™ is engaged, it will apply opposing force
between 17.5° and 50° nose-up and between 15.5° and 50° nose-down, as indicated in Figure 8-122. Maximum
opposing force is applied between 22.5° and 50° nose-up and between 20.5° and 50° nose-down.
600
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
With ESP™ engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-up condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 17.5°
nose-up to 12.5° nose-up as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP™ disengages at 12.5° nose-up. With
ESP™ engaged, and the aircraft in a nose-down condition, opposing force steadily decreases from 15.5° nosedown to 10.5° nose-down as aircraft pitch moves toward zero degrees. ESP™ disengages at 10.5° nose-down.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The opposing force increases or decreases depending on the pitch angle and the direction of pitch travel. This
force is intended to encourage movement in the pitch axis in the direction of the normal pitch attitude range
for the aircraft.
There are no indications marking the pitch ESP™ engage and disengage limits in these nose-up/nose-down
conditions.
45˚
40˚
40˚
35˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
45˚
15˚
10˚
10˚
5˚
5˚
0˚
0˚
5˚
5˚
10˚
10˚
15˚
15˚
20˚
20˚
25˚
25˚
30˚
35˚
30˚
ESP
15˚
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
20˚
AFCS
20˚
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
25˚
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
25˚
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
50˚
EIS
50˚
35˚
40˚
45˚
45˚
50˚
50˚
APPENDICES
40˚
Figure 8-122 ESP Pitch Operating Range When Engaged
(Force Increases as Pitch Increases & Decreases as Pitch Decreases)
HIGH AIRSPEED PROTECTION
INDEX
Exceeding Vne will result in ESP™ applying force to raise the nose of the aircraft. When the high airspeed
condition is remedied, ESP™ force is no longer applied.
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
601
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
8.15 POSITION REPORTING
NOTE: An account must be established with Garmin Connext™ to make full use of the Position Reporting
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
feature.
The Position Reporting feature allows the system to send position reporting information to a provider, such as
FlightAware.com.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
The position reports can be activated or deactivated by the pilot. While active, the position reports are
transmitted over the Iridium Short Burst Datalink periodically at a pilot specified interval or by pressing the SEND
RPT Softkey. The minimum automatic transmission period between reports is two minutes with more frequent
transmissions possible via manually sending reports with the SEND RPT Softkey. During voice communications
and data transfers the Iridium datalink is occupied and position reports will not be sent. During this period the
reports will buffer and be sent as a package as soon as the link is available. The position reports are received by
Garmin Connext and forwarded to select flight tracking provider(s).
To reduce excess usage, position reports are only transmitted while the aircraft is in the air.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
The following are position reports contents:
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• Tail Number
• Time
• Latitude/Longitude
• Ground Speed
• Ground Track
• Heading
• Barometric Altitude
• True Airspeed
• Outside Air Temperature
• Destination
• Estimated Time Enroute (ETE)
• Airborne Status
The Airborne Status field is the indication that the aircraft is on the ground or in the air at the time the position
report was generated. The avionics generate a position report when the Airborne Status field changes state.
• Passenger Onboard
INDEX
APPENDICES
Passenger Onboard indicates passengers are on the aircraft at the time the position report was generated. A
position report is generated when the Passenger Onboard field changes state.
602
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
Viewing the Connext Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-CONNEXT Page as seen in Figure 8-123.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
EIS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Figure 8-123 AUX-CONNEXT Page
Setting up Position Reporting:
1) With the AUX-CONNEXT Page displayed, press the FMS Knob to display the cursor in the TRANSMISSION
PERIOD field as in Figure 8-124.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
Figure 8-124 Set Transmission Period
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select ‘AUTO’ for automatic transmission of position reports or ‘OFF’ to disable
transmission of position reports.
3) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the TRANSMISSION RATE field.
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
603
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
4) Turn the small FMS Knob to highlight the first digit, as shown in Figure 8-125.
Figure 8-125 Set Transmission Rate
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
5) Again, turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
6) Turn the large FMS Knob to highlight the second digit.
7) Turn the small FMS Knob to enter the desired number.
8) Press the ENT Key. The selection is entered and the cursor is placed in the PASSENGERS ON BOARD field.
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
9) Turn the small FMS Knob left or right to select ‘YES’ or ‘NO’, as shown in Figure 8-126.
Figure 8-126 Set Transmission Rate
10) Press the FMS Knob to remove the cursor.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
To send a position report manually:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob on the MFD to select the AUX page group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select AUX-CONNEXT Page.
APPENDICES
3) If necessary, set the TRANSMISSION PERIOD to 'AUTO'.
INDEX
4) Press the SEND RPT Softkey, as seen in Figure 8-123.
604
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
8.16 ABNORMAL OPERATION
SVT TROUBLESHOOTING
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
SVT is intended to be used with traditional attitude, heading, obstacle, terrain, and traffic inputs. SVT is
disabled when valid attitude or heading data is not available for the display. In case of invalid SVT data, the
PFD display reverts to the standard blue-over-brown attitude display.
SVT becomes disabled without the following data resources:
• Attitude data
EIS
• Heading data
• GPS position data
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• 9 Arc-second Terrain data
• Obstacle data
• TAWS-B function is not available, in test mode, or failed
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• The position of the aircraft exceeds the range of the terrain database.
REVERSIONARY MODE
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
SVT can be displayed on the Multifunction Display (MFD) in Reversionary Mode. If it is enabled when switching
to Reversionary Mode, SVT will take up to 30 seconds to be displayed. The standard, non-SVT PFD display will
be shown in the interim.
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
APPENDICES
INDEX
Figure 8-127 SVT Reversionary Mode
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
605
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
UNUSUAL ATTITUDES
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Unusual attitudes are displayed with red chevrons overlaid on the display indicating the direction to fly to
correct the unusual attitude condition. The display shows either a brown or blue colored bar at the top or
bottom of the screen to represent earth or sky. This is intended to prevent losing sight of the horizon during
extreme pitch attitudes.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Figure 8-128 Unusual Attitude Display
The blue colored bar is also displayed when terrain gradient is great enough to completely fill the display.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
Blue Band
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
Terrain
Completely
Fills Display
INDEX
APPENDICES
Figure 8-129 Blue Sky Bar with Full Display Terrain
606
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
GDL 69/69A DATA LINK RECEIVER TROUBLESHOOTING
Some quick troubleshooting steps listed below can be performed to find the possible cause of a failure.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Ensure the owner/operator of the aircraft in which the Data Link Receiver is installed has subscribed to Sirius
XM Radio Inc.
• Ensure the SiriusXM subscription has been activated
• Perform a quick check of the circuit breakers to ensure that power is applied to the Data Link Receiver
• Ensure that nothing is plugged into the Aux Audio In jack because this would prevent SiriusXM radio from
being heard
EIS
For troubleshooting purposes, check the LRU Information Box on the AUX - System Status Page for Data Link
Receiver (GDL 69/69A) status, serial number, and software version number. If a failure has been detected in the
GDL 69/69A the status is marked with a red X.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
Selecting the AUX - System Status Page:
1) Turn the large FMS Knob to select the AUX Page Group.
2) Turn the small FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
AFCS
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure 8-130 LRU Information Window on System Status Page
APPENDICES
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
607
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ADDITIONAL FEATURES
If a failure still exists, the following messages may provide insight as to the possible problem:
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Message
CHECK ANTENNA
UPDATING
NO SIGNAL
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
LOADING
OFF AIR
--WEATHER DATA LINK
FAILED
ACTIVATION REQUIRED
Message Location
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
XM Radio Page - active channel field
Weather Datalink Page - center of page
Description
Data Link Receiver antenna error; service required
Data Link Receiver updating encryption code
Loss of signal; signal strength too low for receiver
Acquiring channel audio or information
Channel not in service
Missing channel information
No communication from Data Link Receiver
within last 5 minutes
Weather Datalink Page - center of page SiriusXM subscription is not activated
INDEX
APPENDICES
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
Table 8-7 GDL 69/69A Data Link Receiver Error Messages
608
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
ANNUNCIATIONS AND ALERTS
NOTE: The Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) supersedes information found in this document.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The Perspective™ Alerting System conveys alerts using the following:
EIS
• Annunciation Window: The Annunciation Window displays abbreviated annunciation text. Text color is
based on alert levels described in the following section. The Annunciation Window is located to the right
of the Altimeter and Vertical Speed Indicator. All aircraft annunciations can be displayed simultaneously
in the Annunciation Window. A white horizontal line separates annunciations that are acknowledged from
annunciations that are not yet acknowledged. Higher priority annunciations are displayed towards the top of
the window.
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
• Alerts Window: The Alerts Window displays text messages for up to 64 prioritized alert messages. Pressing
the ALERTS Softkey displays the Alerts Window. Pressing the ALERTS Softkey a second time removes the
Alerts Window from the display. When the Alerts Window is displayed, the FMS Knob can be used to scroll
through the alert message list.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• Softkey Annunciation: During certain alerts, the ALERTS Softkey may appear as a flashing annunciation
to accompany an alert. The ALERTS Softkey assumes a new label consistent with the alert level (WARNING,
CAUTION, or ADVISORY). By selecting the softkey when flashing an annunciation, the alert is acknowledged.
The softkey label then returns to ALERTS. If alerts are still present, the ALERTS label is displayed in white
with black text. Selecting the ALERTS Softkey a second time views the alert text messages.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• System Annunciations: Typically, a large red ‘X’ appears over instruments whose information is supplied by a
failed Line Replaceable Unit (LRU). See the Perspective™ System Annunciations Section for more information.
Comparator
Window
AFCS
Reversionary
Sensor
Window
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Annunciation
Window
APPENDICES
Alerts
Window
INDEX
Softkey
Annunciation
Figure A-1 Alerting System
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
609
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
• Audio Alerting System: The system issues audio alert tones when specific system conditions are met. See
the Alert Level Definitions Section for more information. The annunciation tone may be tested from the AUX
- System Status Page.
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
Testing the system annunciation tone:
1) Use the FMS Knob to select the AUX - System Status Page.
2) Select the ANN TEST Softkey.
Or:
EIS
a) Press the MENU Key.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
b) Highlight ‘Enable Annunciator Test Mode’ and press the ENT Key.
AFCS
Press to Test Annunciation Tone
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Figure A-2 Annunciation Tone Testing
(AUX-System Status Page)
INDEX
APPENDICES
• Comparator Window (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only): Critical
values generated by redundant sensors are monitored by comparators. If differences in the sensors exceed a
specified amount, the Comparator Window appears in the upper right corner of the PFD and the discrepancy
is annunciated in the Comparator Window as a ‘MISCOMP’ (miscompare). If one or both of the sensed values
are unavailable, it will be annunciated as a ‘NO COMP’ (no compare).
Figure A-3 Comparator Window
610
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
190-00820-10 Rev. A
APPENDIX A
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
• Reversionary Sensor Window (Dual AHRS and/or Dual Air Data Computer installations only):
Reversionary sensor selection is annunciated in a window on the right side of the PFD. These annunciations
reflect reversionary sensors selected on the PFD. Pressing the SENSOR Softkey accesses the ADC1, ADC2,
AHRS1, and AHRS2 softkeys. These softkeys allow switching of the sensors being viewed on the PFD. The
GPS sensor cannot be switched manually.
Figure A-4 Reversionary Sensor Window
EIS
ALERT LEVEL DEFINITIONS
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
The Perspective™ Alerting System uses three alert levels.
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
• WARNING: This level of alert requires immediate attention. Warning alert text is shown in red in the
Annunciation Window and a flashing ‘WARNING’ Softkey annunciation. A repeating double chime accompanies
select warning conditions. Pressing the WARNING Softkey acknowledges the presence of the warning alert
and stops the chime (if present). Refer to Table A-1 for warning conditions and alerting behaviors.
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
• CAUTION: This level of alert indicates the existence of abnormal conditions on the aircraft that may require
intervention. Caution alert text is shown in yellow in the Annunciation Window and is accompanied by a
flashing ‘CAUTION’ Softkey annunciation. A double chime lasting for one second occurs with select caution
alerts. Pressing the CAUTION Softkey acknowledges the presence of the caution alert. Refer to Table A-2 for
caution conditions and alerting behaviors.
AFCS
• ANNUNCIATION OR MESSAGE ADVISORY: This level of alert provides general information. Annunciation
alert text is shown in white in the Annunciation Window; no aural tone is generated with the exception of
the 'OXYGEN LEFT ON' advisory alert, which produces a one second double chime. An annunciation
alert is accompanied by a flashing ADVISORY Softkey annunciation. Pressing the ADVISORY Softkey
acknowledges the presence of the annunciation alert. Refer to Table A-3 for annunciation alert conditions and
behaviors.
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
Message advisory alerts do not issue annunciations in the Annunciation Window. Instead, message advisory
alerts only issue a flashing ‘ADVISORY’ Softkey annunciation. Selecting the ADVISORY Softkey acknowledges
the presence of the message advisory alert and displays the alert text message in the Alerts Window.
APPENDICES
Figure A-5 Softkey Annunciation (ALERTS Softkey Labels)
INDEX
190-00820-10 Rev. A
Cirrus Perspective™ by Garmin – Pilot’s Guide for the SR20/SR22/SR22T
611
SYSTEM
OVERVIEW
APPENDIX A
AIRCRAFT ALERTS
FLIGHT
INSTRUMENTS
The following alerts are configured specifically for the Cirrus SR20 and SR22 models. Red annunciation window
text signifies warnings and yellow, cautions. See the Pilot’s Operating Handbook (POH) for recommended pilot
actions.
NOTE: The ice protection system (optional) must be operated in accordance with the approved flight manual
limitations. This option is only available on the SR22 models.
Annunciation Window Text
FLIGHT
MANAGEMENT
AUDIO PANEL
& CNS
EIS
ANTI ICE CTL
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE FLOW
Flow rate is low (TKS).
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Left and right fluid quantities are unknown (TKS)
Repeating Double Chime
ANTI ICE QTY
Fluid quantity is low (TKS).
Repeating Double Chime
AOA OVERHEAT
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
AUTO DESCENT†
AOA probe is overheated.
Repeating Double Chime
Automatic descent to 14,000FT in 60 seconds.
Aircraft descending to 14,000FT.
Aircraft descending to 12,500FT.
Aircraft descended due to pilot incapacitation.
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
ADDITIONAL
FEATURES
AFCS
HAZARD
AVOIDANCE
CHT
CO LVL HIGH
DUCT OVERHEAT^
ESS BUS
FUEL FLOW*
FUEL IMBALANCE
FUEL QTY
M BUS 1
M BUS 2
MAN PRESSURE*
OIL PRESSURE
OIL TEMP
OXYGEN FAULT
OXYGEN QTY
RPM
SPIN SPIN SPIN
STALL
START ENGAGED
TIT*
UNDERSPEED
PROTECT ACTIVE†
APPENDICES
Audio Alert
Tank valves cannot be controlled (closed) (TKS).
BRAKE TEMP
INDEX
Alerts Window Text
Brake temperature is high.
Cylinder head temperature is high.
Carbon monoxide level is too high.
Cabin heat duct temperature is high.
Check essential power bus voltage.
Check fuel flow.
Fuel quantity imbalance has been detected.
Check fuel tank levels.
Check main power bus 1 voltage.
Check main power bus 2 voltage.
Check manifold pressure.
Oil pressure is out of range.
Oil temperature is high.
Oxygen system fault.
Oxygen quantity is low.
Check engine RPM.
Spin entry detected.
Stall warning.
Starter is engaged.
TIT temperature is high.
None
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime1
None
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime (after 30 seconds)
Repeating Double Chime1
Repeating Double Chime
Repeating Double Chime